mm-
tw * * * * <w<
>
NOTICE OF INCORPORATION
United States Legal Document
$3T All citizens and residents are hereby advised that
this is a legally binding document duly incorporated by
reference and that failure to comply with such
requirements as hereby detailed within may subject you
to criminal or civil penalties under the law. Ignorance of
the law shall not excuse noncompliance and it is the
responsibility of the citizens to inform themselves as to
the laws that are enacted in the United States of America
and in the states and cities contained therein. ~^k
* *
ASME A17.2, Guide for Inspection of Elevators,
Escalators, and Moving Walks, 2010 Edition, as
required by States and Municipalities, including
Oregon in the Administrative Rules, Chapter 918,
Division 400, Safety Code for Elevators, Section
918-400-0455.
T.sswa&.'v
^*"*1
a
s£
m^mmk:* * * * mm^mmmxm
Guide for Inspection of
Elevators, Escalators,
and Moving Walks
Includes Inspection Procedures for
Electric Traction and Winding Drum
Elevators, Hydraulic Elevators,
Inclined Elevators, and Escalators
and Moving Walks
AN AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. Ax
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ^
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME Al 7.2-2010
(Revision of ASME A17.2-2007)
Guide for Inspection of
Elevators, Escalators,
and Moving Walks
Includes Inspection Procedures for
Electric Traction and Winding Drum
Elevators, Hydraulic Elevators,
Inclined Elevators, and Escalators
and Moving Walks
AN AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD
Three Park Avenue • New York, NY • 10016 USA
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ^f
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME, ^
Date of Issuance: December 9, 2010
The next edition of this Guide is scheduled for publication in 2013. There will no addenda issued
to this edition.
ASME issues written replies to inquiries concerning interpretations of technical aspects of this Guide.
Interpretations are also published on the ASME Web site under the Committee Pages at
http://cstools.asme.org as they are issued.
ASME is the registered trademark of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
This Guide was developed under procedures accredited as meeting the criteria for American National Standards. The
Standards Committee that approved the Guide was balanced to assure that individuals from competent and concerned
interests have had an opportunity to participate. The proposed Guide was made available for public review and comment
that provides an opportunity for additional public input from industry, academia, regulatory agencies, and the public-
at-large.
ASME does not "approve," "rate," or "endorse" any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity.
ASME does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any
items mentioned in this document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard against liability for
infringement of any applicable letters patent, nor assume any such liability. Users are expressly advised that determination
of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, is entirely their own responsibility.
Participation by federal agency representative(s) or person(s) affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as
government or industry endorsement of this Guide.
ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the established
ASME procedures and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form,
in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of the publisher.
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016
Copyright © 2010 by
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
CONTENTS
Foreword x
Committee Roster xiii
Preface xviii
Summary of Changes xxi
Introduction 1
1 Scope 1
2 Application 1
3 Qualifications of Inspectors 2
4 Personal Safety 2
5 Duties of Inspectors 2
6 Arrangement for Inspection 2
7 Recommended Equipment 2
8 Reference Documents 3
Part 1 Elevator — Inside of Car 4
1.1 Door Reopening Device 4
1.2 Stop Switches 4
1.3 Operating Control Devices 5
1.4 Sills and Car Floor 5
1.5 Car Lighting and Receptacles 6
1.6 Car Emergency Signal 7
1.7 Car Door or Gate 7
1.8 Door Closing Force 8
1.9 Power Closing of Doors or Gates 8
1.10 Power Opening of Doors or Gates 8
1.11 Car Vision Panels and Glass Car Doors 9
1.12 Car Enclosure 11
1.13 Emergency Exit 12
1.14 Ventilation 12
1.15 Signs and Operating Device Symbols 12
1.16 Rated Load, Platform Area, and Data Plate 13
1.17 Standby Power Operation 13
1.18 Restricted Opening of Car or Hoistway Doors 14
1.19 Car Ride 15
1.20 Earthquake Inspection and Tests (Seismic Risk Zone 2 or Greater) 15
Part 2 Elevator — Machine Room 16
2.1 Access to Machine Space 16
2.2 Headroom 16
2.3 Lighting and Receptacles 16
2.4 Machine Space 17
2.5 Housekeeping 17
2.6 Ventilation 17
2.7 Fire Extinguisher 18
2.8 Pipes, Wiring, and Ducts 18
2.9 Guarding of Exposed Auxiliary Equipment 18
2.10 Numbering of Elevators, Machines, Controllers, and Disconnect
Switches 18
2.11 Disconnecting Means and Control 19
2.12 Controller Wiring, Fuses, Grounding, etc 20
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
2.13 Governor, Overspeed Switch, and Seal 21
2.14 Code Data Plate 25
2.15 Static Control 25
2.16 Overhead Beam and Fastenings 26
2.17 Drive Machine Brake 26
2.18 Traction Drive Machines 27
2.19 Gears, Bearings, and Flexible Couplings 28
2.20 Winding Drum Machine and Slack Rope Device, Stop Motion Switch, and
Rope Fastening 28
2.21 Belt- or Chain-Drive Machine 29
2.22 Motor Generator 30
2.23 Absorption of Regenerated Power 30
2.24 AC Drives From a DC Source 30
2.25 Traction Sheaves 31
2.26 Secondary and Deflector Sheaves 31
2.27 Rope Fastenings 31
2.28 Terminal Stopping Devices 32
2.29 Car and Counterweight Safeties 33
2.30 Hydraulic Power Unit 38
2.31 Relief Valves 38
2.32 Control Valve 39
2.33 Tanks 39
2.34 Flexible Hydraulic Hose and Fitting Assemblies 40
2.35 Supply Line and Shutoff Valve 40
2.36 Hydraulic Cylinders 41
2.37 Pressure Switch 41
2.38 Roped Water Hydraulic Elevators 42
2.39 Low Oil Protection 42
2.40 Maintenance Records 42
2.41 Static Control 42
2.42 Earthquake Inspection and Tests (Seismic Risk Zone 2 or Greater) 42
Part 3 Elevator - Top of Car. 44
3.1 Top-of-Car Stop Switch 44
3.2 Car Top Light and Outlet 44
3.3 Top-of-Car Operating Device 44
3.4 Top-of-Car Clearance, Refuge Space, and Standard Railing 45
3.5 Normal Terminal Stopping Devices 46
3.6 Final and Emergency Terminal Stopping Devices 47
3.7 Car Leveling and Anticreep Devices 48
3.8 Top Emergency Exit 49
3.9 Floor and Emergency Identification Numbering 49
3.10 Hoistway Construction 49
3.11 Hoistway Smoke Control 50
3.12 Pipes, Wiring, and Ducts 50
3.13 Windows, Projections, Recesses, and Setbacks 50
3.14 Hoistway Clearances 51
3.15 Multiple Hoistways 51
3.16 Traveling Cables and Junction Boxes 52
3.17 Door and Gate Equipment 53
3.18 Car Frame and Stiles 55
3.19 Guide Rails Fastening and Equipment 55
3.20 Governor Rope 56
3.21 Governor Releasing Carrier 56
3.22 Wire Rope Fastening and Hitch Plate 56
3.23 Suspension Rope 58
3.24 Top Counterweight Clearance 61
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
3.25 Car, Overhead, and Deflector Sheaves 61
3.26 Broken Rope, Chain, or Tape Switch 61
3.27 Crosshead Data Plate and Rope Data Tags 61
3.28 Counterweight and Counterweight Buffer 62
3.29 Counterweight Safeties 62
3.30 Speed Test 63
3.31 Slack Rope Device — Roped-Hydraulic Elevators Installed Under
A17.1b-1989 and Later Editions 63
3.32 Traveling Sheave — Roped-Hydraulic Elevators Installed Under
A17.1b-1989 and Later Editions 64
3.33 Compensating Ropes and Chains 64
3.34 Earthquake Inspection and Tests (Seismic Risk Zone 2 or Greater) 64
Part 4 Elevator — Outside Hoistway. 66
4.1 Car Platform Guard 66
4.2 Hoistway Doors 66
4.3 Vision Panels 67
4.4 Hoistway Door Locking Devices 67
4.5 Access to Hoistway 68
4.6 Power Closing of Hoistway Doors 68
4.7 Sequence Operation 69
4.8 Hoistway Enclosure 69
4.9 Elevator Parking Devices 69
4.10 Emergency Doors in Blind Hoistways 69
4.11 Separate Counterweight Hoistway 70
4.12 Standby Power Selection Switch 70
Part 5 Elevator - Pit 71
5.1 Pit Access, Lighting, Stop Switch, and Condition 71
5.2 Bottom Clearance, Runby, and Minimum Refuge Space 72
5.3 Final and Emergency Terminal Stopping Devices 73
5.4 Normal Terminal Stopping Devices 74
5.5 Traveling Cables 74
5.6 Governor-Rope Tension Devices 74
57 Car Frame and Platform 75
5.8 Car and Counterweight Safeties and Guiding Members — Including
Roped-Hydraulic Elevators Installed Under A17.1b-1989 and Later
Editions 75
5.9 Buffer and Emergency Terminal Speed Limiting Devices 76
5.10 Compensating Chains, Ropes, and Sheaves 78
5.11 Plunger and Cylinder 78
5.12 Car Buffer 78
5.13 Guiding Members 79
5.14 Supply Piping 79
5.15 Overspeed Valve 79
5.16 Earthquake Inspection and Tests (Seismic Risk Zone 2 or Greater) 80
Part 6 Elevator - Firefighters' Service 81
6.1 Operation of Elevators Under Fire and Other Emergency Conditions
(A17.1b-1973 Through A17.1b-1980) 81
6.2 Operation of Elevators Under Fire and Other Emergency Conditions
(A17.1-1981 Through A17.1b-1983) 83
6.3 Firefighters' Service (A17.1-1984 Through A17.1a-1988 and A17.3) 85
6.4 Firefighters' Service (A17.1b-1989 Through A17.1d-2000) 87
6.5 Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters' Service (ASME A17.1-2000 and
CSA B44-00); Automatic Elevators 91
Part 7 Escalator — External 94
7.1 General Fire Protection 94
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
7.2 Geometry 94
7.3 Handrails 95
7.4 Entrance and Egress Ends 96
75 Lighting 98
7.6 Caution Signs 98
7.7 Combplate and Comb Step Impact Device 98
7.8 Deck Barricades and Antislide Devices 100
7.9 Steps and Upthrust Device 102
7.10 Operating and Safety Devices 102
7.11 Skirt Obstruction Device 106
7.12 (Reserved) 106
7.13 Egress Restriction (Rolling Shutter) Device 106
7.14 Speed 106
7.15 Balustrades 107
7.16 Ceiling Intersection Guards 108
7.17 Step /Skirt Clearances, Panels, and Performance Index 108
7.18 Outdoor Protection Ill
7.19 Maintenance Records Ill
7.20 Earthquake Inspection and Tests (Seismic Risk Zone 2 or Greater) Ill
Part 8 Escalator - Internal 113
8.1 Machinery Space Access, Lighting, Receptacle, and Condition 113
8.2 Machinery Space Stop Switches and Inspection Control 113
8.3 Controller and Wiring 114
8.4 Drive Machine and Brake 114
85 Speed Governor 115
8.6 Broken Drive Chain and Disconnected Motor Safety Device 116
8.7 Reversal Stop Switch 116
8.8 Broken Step Chain Device 117
8.9 Step Upthrust Device 117
8.10 Missing Step Device 117
8.11 Step Level Device 117
8.12 Steps, Step Chains, and Trusses 118
8.13 Handrail Systems and Safety Devices 119
8.14 Code Data Plate 120
8.15 Response to Smoke Detectors 120
8.16 Step Lateral Displacement Device 120
8.17 Inspection Control 120
8.18 Earthquake Inspection and Tests (Seismic Risk Zone 2 or Greater) 121
Part 9 Moving Walk - External 122
9.1 General Fire Protection 122
9.2 Geometry 122
9.3 Handrails 122
9.4 Entrance and Egress Ends 125
9.5 Lighting 125
9.6 Caution Signs 126
9.7 Combplate and Comb Step Impact Device 126
9.8 Deck Barricades 127
9.9 Treadways 127
9.10 Operating and Safety Devices 128
9.11 (Reserved) 129
9.12 (Reserved) 129
9.13 Egress Restriction (Rolling Shutter) Device 129
9.14 Speed 129
9.15 Balustrades 130
9.16 Ceiling Intersection Guards 130
9.17 Skirt Panels 131
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
9.18 Outdoor Protection 131
9.19 Maintenance Records 132
9.20 Earthquake Inspection and Tests (Seismic Risk Zone 2 or Greater) 132
Part 10 Moving Walk - Internal 133
10.1 Machinery Space Access, Lighting, Receptacle, and Condition 133
10.2 Stop Switch and Inspection Control 133
10.3 Controller and Wiring 134
10.4 Drive Machine and Brake 134
10.5 Speed Governor 135
10.6 Broken Drive Chain and Disconnected Motor Safety Device 136
10.7 Reversal Stop Switch 136
10.8 Broken Treadway Device 136
10.9 (Reserved) 137
10.10 Missing Pallet Device 137
10.11 Pallet Level Device 137
10.12 Pallets, Pallet Chains, and Trusses 137
10.13 Handrail Systems and Safety Devices 138
10.14 Code Data Plate 139
10.15 Response to Smoke Detectors 139
10.16 Inspection Control 139
10.17 Earthquake Inspection and Tests (Seismic Risk Zone 2 or Greater) 139
Part 11 Elevator — Machine-Room-Less (MRL) 140
11.1 Access to Machine Room /Machinery Space /Control Room /Control
Space 140
11.2 Access Door and Openings 140
11.3 Enclosure of Rooms and Spaces 140
11.4 Maintenance Path and Clearance 141
11.5 Machine /Control Rooms Containing Overhead Drive Machines 141
11.6 Temperature /Humidity 141
11.7 Disconnecting Means 141
11.8 Remote Machine Rooms and Control Rooms 141
11.9 Inspection and Test Panels 142
11.10 Governor, Overspeed Switch 142
11.11 Emergency Brake 142
11.12 Traction Sheaves 143
11.13 Secondary and Deflector Sheaves 143
11.14 Terminal Stopping Devices 143
11.15 Working Areas Inside the Hoistway and in the Pit 143
11.16 Location of Machinery Spaces, Machine Rooms, Control Spaces,
Control Rooms, and Equipment 144
11.17 Hydraulic Elevators — Shutoff/ Manual Lowering Valves 144
11.18 Hydraulic Elevators — Pressure Gauge Fittings 144
11.19 Hydraulic Elevators — Atmosphere Storage and Discharge Tanks 144
11.20 Hydraulic Elevators — Pressure Piping 145
11.21 Explanatory Figures for Definitions of Elevator Machinery Space, Machine
Room, Control Space, Control Room, Remote Machine Room, or Remote
Control Room 145
11.22 Inspection Operation and Hoistway Access Switch Operation
Hierarchy 145
Figures
1.10.2 Door Operation Relative to Car Position 10
2.13.2.1 Dynamometer Connections for Testing the Pull-Through of
Governor Jaws 23
2.29.2(a) Safety Marks on Guide Rails, Poor Illumination 37
2.29.2(b) Safety Marks on Guide Rails, Good Illumination 37
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
I No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
3.4.1.2 Top Car Clearance and Runby (A17.1-1978 and Later Editions) 46
3.16.1 Self-Tightening Grips 53
3.22.1 Cross-Section Through Tapered Rope Socket Showing Maximum and
Minimum Projection of Loops Above Embedment Medium 57
3.23.1 Types of Lay 59
3.23.2 Cross Sections of Typical Wire Ropes 60
5.2.3 Bottom Car Clearance Hydraulic Elevators 73
6.4.2(b)(9) Visual Signal 88
6.4.2(g)(1) Phase I Instructions 89
6.4.2(g)(2) Phase II Instructions (A17.1b-1989 Through A17.1b~1995) 90
6.4.2(g)(3) Phase II Instructions (A17.1-1996 Through A17.1d-2000) 90
7.2.1(a) Dimensions for Existing Escalators (for Escalators Installed Under
A17.1-1955 and A17.1-1960 Editions) 95
7.2.1(b) Dimensions for Existing Escalators (for Escalators Installed Under
A17.1-1965 Through A17.1-1981) 96
7.2.1(c) Relationship of Escalator Parts (A17.1a-1982 and Later Editions) 97
7.2.3 Checking Incline 97
7.4.1 Safety Zone 98
7.7.1 Checking Step/Combplate Mesh 99
7.7.3 Test of Combplate/Landing Plate Assembly 100
7.8.1(a) Deck Barricade 101
7.8.1(b) High Deck Balustrade Antislide Devices 101
7.9.1(a) Smooth Riser 103
7.9.1(b) Cleated Riser 104
7.9.1(c) Escalator Step Riser 104
7.9.1(d) Escalator Step Tread [A17.1-1955 Through A17.1-1990, Rule 802.5
(Requirement 6.1.3.5)] 105
7.9.3 Example of Two Flat Steps 105
7.11.1 Typical Skirt Obstruction Device 107
7.16.1 Ceiling or Soffit Guard [Requirements 6.1.3.3.9 and 6.2.3.3.7
(Rules 802.3g and 902.3g)] 109
7.17.1 Measuring Gap Between Step and Skirt 109
7.17.2 Angle of Skirt Panel 110
7.18.3 Escalator Cover Overlap 112
8.9.2 Typical Step Upthrust Device 118
8.12.2 Positioning of Steps for Inspection of Truss 119
9.2.1(a) Moving Walk Geometry (for Moving Walks Installed Under
A17.1-1965 Through A17.1b-1980) 123
9.2.1(b) Moving Walk Geometry (for Moving Walks Installed Under
A17.1-1981 Through A17.1a-1991) 124
9.2.3 Maximum Treadway Angle 124
9.3.3 Moving Walk Handrail Extension (A17.1-1971 and Later Editions) 126
9.9.1 Moving Walk Treadway Slots 128
9.17.1 Treadway Clearances 131
11.21-1 Configuration A 145
11.21-2 Configuration B 145
11.21-3 Configuration C 145
11.21-4 Configuration D 146
11.21-5 Configuration E 146
11.21-6 Configuration F 147
Tables
1 Procurement Information 3
2.13.2.1 Governor Adjustment Settings 22
2.29.2(a) Maximum Safety Rope Pullout 33
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
2.29.2(b) Minimum and Maximum Stopping Distances for Type B Car Safeties
With Rated Load, and Type B Counterweight Safeties With No Load
in the Car 35
2.29.2(c) Gradual Wedge Clamp Safety 36
2.29.2(d) Flexible Guide Clamp Safety 36
2.29.2(e) Wedge Clamp Safety (Constant Retarding Force) 36
2.34.3 Minimum Bend Radius for SAE 100R2 Hose 40
3.14.3(a) Horizontal Clearances 51
3.14.3(b) Horizontal Distances 52
3.22.1 Projection of Rope Strands Above Embedment Medium for 6- and
8-Strand Ropes 57
9.2.3(a) Treadway Width (A17.1-1965 Through A17.1d-1970) 125
9.2.3(b) Treadway Width (A17.1-1971 and Later Editions) 125
9.2.3(c) Minimum Treadway Width 125
9.14.3(a) Treadway Speed (A17.1-1981 and Later Editions) 129
9.14.3(b) Treadway Speed (A17.1-1965 Through A17.1b-1980) 129
9.14.3(c) Treadway Speed 130
11.21 Definitions of Elevator Machinery Space, Machine Room, Control Space,
Control Room, Remote Machine Room, or Remote Control
Room 147
11.22 Inspection Operation and Hoistway Access Switch Operation
Hierarchy 148
Mandatory Appendix
I Guide for Inspection of Inclined Elevators 149
Nonmandatory Appendices
A Inspection Checklists 164
B Acceptance Checklist 189
C Guidelines for B44.1/ A 17.5-2004 208
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ^|
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ^@
(10)
FOREWORD
Following the publication of the 1925 edition of the
Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, and Escalators,
requests for a handbook, or manual, covering the inspec-
tion of elevators were received by the A17 Committee.
This Committee appointed a subcommittee to prepare
such a manual. Cities, states, insurance companies, ele-
vator manufacturers and maintenance companies, and
the federal government furnished the Committee with
material based on their field experiences. A final draft
was prepared and was unanimously approved by the
A 17 Committee, the Code Sponsors, and the American
National Association (presently known as the American
National Standards Institute, Inc.) and the first edition
of the Manual was published in 1937 simultaneously
with the fourth edition of the Code.
A second edition of the Manual was prepared by the
Committee to bring it in line with the fourth edition of
the Code, including the 1942 supplement. A new Part to
cover the inspection of escalators, and new Appendices
were added to cover descriptions of various types of
safeties, methods for determining stopping distances of
gradual-type safeties, guide rail data, types of speed
governors, and the handling and socketing of wire rope.
The second edition of the Manual was approved by
the American Standards Association and was published
in 1945.
The third edition of the Manual was published in 1960
and included revision to bring it in line with the 1960
edition of the Code.
The fourth edition of the Manual was published in
1973 to bring it in line with the 1971 editions including
the 1972 supplement to the Code, and to update the
inspection procedures. A new Part was also added to
cover the inspection of moving walks.
The Inspectors7 Manual Subcommittee was reacti-
vated in 1976 to review the Manual and coordinate it
with a proposed new edition of the Code. The Subcom-
mittee, during its review, felt that it was time for the
Manual to take on a new format. Thus, the fifth edition
of the Manual, published in 1979, was reorganized into
four major Parts: Electric Elevators, Hydraulic Elevators,
Escalators, and Moving Walks. Each Part was further
divided into three major Divisions: Routine Inspection,
Periodic Inspection and Test, and Acceptance Inspection
and Test. New Appendices were added to this edition,
containing sample inspection checklists for electric ele-
vators, hydraulic elevators, escalators and moving
walks. A considerable amount of new material was also
added to the Manual to bring it in line with the 1978
edition of the Code.
In order to keep the Manual as current as possible,
the Committee began the policy of publishing supple-
ments on a regular basis. Supplements were issued in
1980 and 1981 to update the 1979 edition.
The sixth edition of the Manual contained the revi-
sions included in the 1980 and 1981 supplements, as
well as many other revisions made to keep the Manual
abreast of new Code requirements and to add more
comprehensive inspection and testing procedures. The
title of this edition was also changed to
ANSI/ASME A17.2 Inspectors' Manual for Elevators
and Escalators. This change was made to reflect a reorga-
nization of the A17 Committee structure, and to shorten
the title for convenience.
The seventh edition of the Manual included the revi-
sions in the 1983 and 1984 supplements as well as other
new revisions. One of the major revisions was the
Inspection Checklists in Appendix E, which were
expanded to include routine and periodic inspections
and tests in addition to acceptance inspections and tests.
The eighth edition included revisions in the 1986 and
1987 supplements as well as other revisions listed in the
Summary of Changes section.
In 1989, the Inspectors' Manual Committee polled the
inspection community to determine what portions of
the Manual were most effective and the direction that
should be taken to meet the need of the inspector. In
response to requests for equipment, specific inspection
guidelines, techniques, and cautionary notes as well as
field convenience, the concept of individual equipment
inspection manuals was developed. The Committee
decided to concentrate initially on three major segments.
As a result, the Inspectors' Manual is to be published
in three volumes: A17.2.1, Electric Elevators; A17.2.2,
Hydraulic Elevators; and A17.2.3, Escalators and
Moving Walks. Each volume addresses inspection proce-
dures for assuring compliance with the A17.1 Code since
1955 and the A17.3 Code. It is the Committee's plan
to publish additional manuals to address inspection of
other equipments such as roped-hydraulic elevators,
dumbwaiters, sidewalk elevators, private residence ele-
vators, hand elevators, material lifts and dumbwaiters
with automatic transfer devices, special purpose person-
nel elevators, rack and pinion elevators, inclined eleva-
tors, screw-column elevators, elevators used for
construction, wheelchair and stairway chairlifts, ship-
board elevators, and rooftop elevators.
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
In 1993, the Inspectors' Manual Committee was
requested to review equipment installed prior to the
1955 edition of A17.1. ASME A17.2.3 includes inspection
and testing procedures for assuring compliance with
some requirements in pre-1955 editions of A17.1.
In 1999, based on feedback from the user community,
the A17 Main Committee approved the Inspectors'
Manual Committee's recommendation to consolidate
the three existing manuals: A17. 2. 1-1996, Inspectors'
Manual for Electric Elevators (including A17.2.1a-1997
and A17.2.1b-1998 Addenda); A17 2.2-1997, Inspectors'
Manual for Hydraulic Elevators (including
A17.2.2a-1998 Addenda); and A17.2.3-1998, Inspectors'
Manual for Escalators and Moving Walks (including
A17.2.3a-2000 Addenda). The resulting A17.2-2001,
Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving
Walks, represents an editorial consolidation of the three
manuals. The revised standard also includes technical
revisions, which have been approved by the
A17.1 Committee since the last publications.
The second edition of the Guide was published in
2004. Nonmandatory Appendix B appears for the first
time in this edition.
The third edition of the Guide includes revisions listed
in the Summary of Changes section.
The fourth edition of the Guide includes revisions
listed in the Summary of Changes section.
The following is a list of past editions and supple-
ments and the dates on which they received final
approval. The dates of issuance are also included for
documents published since 1979.
Editions and Supplements
First Edition ASA A17.2-1937
Second Edition ASA A17.2-1945
Third Edition
Addenda
Supplement
Fourth Edition
Fifth Edition
Supplement
Supplement
Sixth Edition
Supplement
Supplement
Seventh Edition
Supplement
Supplement
Eighth Edition
Addenda
Addenda
First Edition
Addenda
Addenda
Second Edition
Addenda
Addenda
First Edition
Addenda
Addenda
Second Edition
Addenda
First Edition
Addenda
ASA A17.2-1960
ASA A17.2a-1965
USAS A17.2b-1967
ANSI A17.2-1973
ANSI A17.2-1979
ANSI A17.2a-1980
ANSI A17.2b-1981
ANSI/ASME A17.2-1982
ANSI/ASME A17.2a-1983
ANSI/ASME A17.2b-1984
ANSI/ASME A17.2-1985
ANSI/ASME A17.2a-1986
ANSI/ASME A17.2b-1987
ANSI/ASME A17.2-1988
ANSI/ASME A17.2a-1989
ANSI/ASME A!7.2b-1990
ASME A17.2.1-1993
ASME A17.2.1a-1994
ASME A17.2.1b-1995
ASME A17.2.1-1996
ASME A17.2.1a~1997
ASME A17.2.1b-1998
ASME A17.2.2-1994
ASME A17.2.2a-1995
ASME A17.2.2b-1996
ASME A17.2.2-1997
ASME A17.2.2a-1998
ASME A17.2.3-1994
ASME A17.2.3a-1996
Approved
July 1937
October 22, 1945
August 10, 1960
July 29, 1965
July 7, 1967
May 29, 1973
February 18, 1979
August 11, 1980
November 23, 1981
September 22, 1982
September 23, 1983
August 16, 1984
July 23, 1985
September 8, 1986
September 11, 1987
August 25, 1988
November 10, 1989
October 8, 1990
January 22, 1993
August 18, 1994
August 10, 1995
September 6, 1996
December 16, 1997
November 13, 1998
April 14, 1994
August 10, 1995
September 6, 1996
November 18, 1997
November 13, 1998
August 19, 1994
September 6, 1996
Issued
May 15, 1979
September 15, 1980
January 15, 1982
November 30, 1982
December 20, 1983
September 16, 1984
October 31, 1985
October 31, 1986
October 30, 1987
October 31, 1988
December 31, 1989
January 21, 1991
May 31, 1993
December 31, 1994
January 29, 1996
January 31, 1997
January 30, 1998
February 19, 1999
May 31, 1994
January 10, 1996
December 31, 1996
December 31, 1997
February 5, 1999
October 21, 1994
November 22, 1996
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
Editions and Supplements
Addenda
Second Edition
Addenda
First Edition
Second Edition
Third Edition
Fourth Edition
ASME A17.2.3b-1997
ASME A17.2.3-1998
ASME A17.2.3a-2000
ASME A17.2-2001
ASME A17.2-2004
ASME A17.2-2007
ASME A17.2-2010
Approved
November 18, 1997
November 16, 1998
June 22, 2000
October 4, 2001
July 22, 2004
July 11, 2007
September 8, 2010
Issued
December 31, 1997
February 26, 1999
August 10, 2000
December 31, 2001
March 31, 2005
October 5, 2007
December 9, 2010
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17 ELEVATOR
AND ESCALATOR COMMITTEE
(10)
(March 2010)
STANDARDS COMMITTEE
J. W. Coaker, Chair
N. B. Martin, Vice Chair
H. E. Peelle III, Vice Chair
G. A. Burdeshaw, Secretary
E. V. Baker, IUEC
T. D. Barkand, U.S. Department of Labor
R, E. Baxter, Baxter Residential Elevators, LLC
K. S. Lloyd, Jr., Alternate, Abell Elevator International
L. Bialy, Otis Elevator Co.
N. E. March itto, Alternate, Otis Elevator Co.
B. D. Black, BDBlack Codes, Inc.
J. R. Brooks, Wagner Consulting
J. W. Adams, Alternate, North Carolina Department of Labor
G. A. Burdeshaw, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
J. W. Coaker, Coaker & Co., PC
J. Filippone, Port Authority of New York and New Jersey
J. H. Humphrey, Alternate, Port Authority of New York and New
Jersey
C. C. Fox, Rainbow Security Control Ltd.
G. W. Gibson, George W. Gibson and Associates, Inc.
R. A. Gregory, Vertex Corp.
R. F. Hadaller, Technical Standards and Safety Authority
M. Tevyaw, Alternate, Technical Standards and Safety Authority
P. Hampton, ThyssenKrupp Elevator
J. T. Herrity, U.S. Department of the Navy
A. P. Juhasz, Kone, Inc.
D. A. Kalgren, Kone, Inc.
D. S. Boucher, Alternate, Kone, Inc.
G. A. Kappenhagen, Schindler Elevator Corp.
J. W. Koshak, Elevator Safety Solutions, Inc.
H. Simpkins, Alternate, ThyssenKrupp Elevator
N. B. Martin, State of Ohio
Z. R. McCain, Jr., McCain Engineering Associates, Inc.
M. V. Farinola, Alternate, MV Farinola, inc.
D. McColl, Otis Canada, inc.
H. E. Peelle III, The Peelle Company
S. P. Reynolds, Alternate, The Peelle Company
A. Rehman, Schindler Elevator Corp.
V. P. Robibero, Schindler Elevator Corp.
C. W. Rogler, State of Michigan Elevator Safety Division
R. L Seymour, Robert L. Seymour and Associates, Inc.
R. S. Seymour, Alternate, Robert L Seymour and Associates, Inc.
J. H. Shull, J. H. Shull Engineering, LLC
D. M. Stanlaske, NAESA International
D. L Steel, David L. Steel Escalators
D. L. Turner, Davis L. Turner & Associates, LLC
R. S. Caporale, Alternate, Elevator World, Inc.
A. H. Verschell, Dwan Elevator
D. M. Winkle, Sr., Consultant
G. W. Kosinski, Alternate, EIWPF
D. A. Witham, GAL Manufacturing Corp.
Ex Officio Members
G.A. Burdeshaw, Secretary
R.E. Baxter
L.M. Capuano
G.W. Gibson
G.A. Kappenhagen
M. Martin
H.E. Peelle III
J.B. Peskuski
j.H. Shull
D.L. Steel
M. Tevyaw
M.R. Tilyou
A.H. Verschell
Honorary Members
G.A. Burdeshaw, Secretary C. L Kort
L. J. Blaiotta A. A. Mascone
E. A. Donoghue E. M. Philpot
H. E. Godwin, jr. R. L. Rogers
C. E. Hempel L E. White
Regulatory
N. B. Martin, Chair
J. R. Brooks, Vice Chair
G. A. Burdeshaw, Secretary
G. Antona
J. L Borwey
J. H. Burpee
A. L. Caine
J. R. Calpini
P. Caploon
j. Day
N. C. Dimitruck
M. Dorosk
L. A. Giovannetti
j. M. Gould
A. N. Griffin
R. F. Hadaller
S. J. Hickory
D. Holmes
I. D. Jay
L. C. Kanicki
Advisory Council
C. C. Mann
M. J. Mellon, Jr.
I. D. Mercer
S. Mercier
K. P. Morse
M. E. Pedersen
M. R. Poulin
J. P. Roche
C. W. Rogler
D. M. Stanlaske
M. K. Stewart
S. F. Stout
L M. Taylor
D. Tudor
L. E. Watson
W. C. Watson
W. J. Witt
D. Melvin, Alternate
C. D. Wagner, Alternate
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
NATIONAL INTEREST REVIEW COMMITTEE
G. A. Burdeshaw, Secretary
J. P. Andrew
D. M. Begue
R. j. Blatz
J. E. Brannon
M. T. Brierley
B. B. Calhoun
J. A. Caluori
C. S. Carr
M. A. Chavez
R. F. Dieter
B. Faerber
J. G. Gerk
L. A. Giovannetti
j. M. Gould
N. R. Herchell
J. E. Herwig
J. M. Imgarten
J. Inglis
T. Isaacs
F. A. Kilian
M. L. Lane
W. R. Larsen
B. H. Larson
M. A. Malek
J. J. Mancuso
C. C. Mann
N. E. Marchitto
D. Mason
J. L. Meyer
T. S. Mowrey
F. G. Newman
J. W. O'Boyle
j. J. O'Donoghue
B. Peyton
M. J. Pfeiffer
M. R. Poulin
P. M. Puno
L. S. Rigby
j. R. Runyan
R. D. Schloss
S. Shanes
J. L Stabler
D. M. Stanlaske
D. A. Swerrie
B44.1/A17.5 ELEVATOR AND ESCALATOR
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT COMMITTEE
J. H. Shult, Chair B. T. Irmacher
M. L Hite, Vice Chair J. Lee
G. A. Burdeshaw, Staff R. A. MacKenzie
Secretary P. F. McDermott
M. Dodd, Secretary M. Mihai
P. D. Barn hart V. M. Todt
J. W. Blain J. M. Weber
A, D, Brown D. A. Dormer, Alternate
J. Caldwell M. L. jaremko, Alternate
J. L. Delia Porta R. S. Williams, Alternate
CODE COORDINATION COMMITTEE
B. D. Black, Chair G. W Gibson
G. A. Burdeshaw, Secretary G. A. Kappenhagen
L. Bialy J. W. Koshak
R. Bukowski B. Tubbs
P. Caploon K. Paarlberg, Alternate
R. Cote
CSA B44
M. Dodd, Secretary
T. Baik
L Bialy
S. Bornstein
M. T. Brierley
A. D. Byram
R. Cavan
D. Eastman
A. N. Griffin
R. F. Hadaller
J. Halge
R. E. Haukeness
A. S. Hopkirk
U. Huskic
I. D. jay
K. Jenkins
G. A. Kappenhagen
F. Kassem
I. M. Kennedy
R. M. Kennedy
j. W. Koshak
j. Lee
E. MacArthur
A. J. Marchant
R. Marion
TECHNICAL COMMITTEE
R. Marsiglio
L. Martineau
T. McCann
D. McColl
B. Mclntyre
R. A. McKenzie
D. McLellan
S. Mercier
M. Mihai
T. Nguyen
M. Pedram
H. E. Peelle III
A. Rehman
S. P. Reynolds
T. W. Rieger
J. T. Rooney
R. C. Scharfe
j. H. Shull
F. K. Tawfik
M. Tevyaw
B. Virk
D. Warne
P. Yau
A. D. Brown, Alternate
I. D. Mercer, Alternate
DUMBWAITER AND ATD COMMITTEE
J. B. Peskuski, Chair B. P. McCune
R. Mohamed, Secretary J. W. Ninness
S. S. DuQuaine
R. A. Gregory
D. Witt
EARTHQUAKE SAFETY COMMITTEE
G. W. Gibson, Chair W. C. Ribeiro
M. J. Smith, Vice Chair J. K. Ruth
A. B. Byk, Secretary W. C. Schadrack III
L C. Barulich A. J. Schiff
B. Blackaby A. J. Shelton
R. Lorenzo D. A. Kalgren, Alternate
J. L. Meyer
EDITORIAL COMMITTEE
D. McColl, Chair B. D. Black
G. A. Burdeshaw, Secretary J. Filippone
ELECTRICAL COMMITTEE
A. P. Juhasz, Chair
B. Blackaby, Vice Chair
J. D. Busse, Vice Chair
D. R. Sharp, Secretary
T. D. Barkand
P. D. Barn hart
S. H. Benjamin
j. W. Blain
J. Caldwell
B. C. Castillo
J. P. Donnelly
R. Elias
S. E. Fisher
G. N. Henry
Y. C. Ho
N. E. Marchitto
P. F. McDermott
T. G. Moskal
A. L. Peck
D. K. Prince
P. M. Puno
V. P. Robibero
M. Stergulc
D. Alley Alternate
J. C. Carlson, Alternate
J. L. Delia Porte, Alternate
R. L. Frazier, Alternate
D. Henderson, Alternate
M. Mihai, Alternate
J. C. Ramos, Alternate
J. P. Rennekamp, Alternate
J. H. Shull, Alternate
J. M. Weber, Alternate
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ELEVATORS USED FOR CONSTRUCTION
COMMITTEE
EXISTING INSTALLATIONS COMMITTEE
N. B. Martin, Chair
G. A. Burdeshaw, Secretary
R. E. Baxter
C. C. Fox
R. A. Gregory
J. R. Quackenbush
C. W. Rogler
EMERGENCY OPERATIONS COMMITTEE
M. Martin, Chair
A. Rehman, Vice Chair
A. B. Byk, Secretary
M. Abbott
J. Beamish
D. R. Beste
B. D. Black
M. T. Brierley
M. W. Bunker, Jr.
P. Caploon
G. B. Cassini
D. Cook
R. B. Fraser
D. Henderson
D. Holmes
S. R. James
C. Koenig
J. Latham
D. McColl
C. H. Murphy
T. F. Norton
J. J. O'Donoghue
B. F. O'Neill
D. K. Prince
P. D. Rampf
L. F. Richardson
R. L Seymour
M. Tevyaw
D. Warne
D. J. Winslow
D. A. Witham
J. C. Carlson, Alternate
R. F. Hadaller, Alternate
J. K. O'Donnell, Alternate
G. G. Rees, Alternate
R. Reiswig, Alternate
R. J. Roux, Alternate
A. J. Shelton, Alternate
J. Varon, Alternate
ESCALATOR AND MOVING WALK COMMITTEE
D. L. Turner, Chair
T. R. Nurnberg, Vice Chair
R. Mohamed, Secretary
P. E. Burge
D. R. Evans
J. Filippone
J. G. Gerk
R. A. Glanzmann
P. L. Hackett
K. M. Harris
H. A. Hausmann
R. Herndobler
J. A. Kinahan
D. McLellan
T. G. Moskal
J. D. Shupe
K. J. Smith
J. L. Stabler
D. L. Steel
P. Velasquez, jr.
P. J. Welch
D. Winkelhake
C. Anayiotos, Alternate
C. S. Carr, Alternate
K. G. Hamby, Alternate
T. P. Kenny, Alternate
A. Rehman, Alternate
D. E. Rush, Alternate
EVACUATION GUIDE COMMITTEE
D. L. Turner, Chair
R. S. Seymour, Vice Chair
G. A. Burdeshaw, Secretary
J. R. Brooks
D. Cook
C. C Fox
J. L Meyer
J. J. O'Donoghue
C. W. Rogler
D. B. Labrecque, Chair
A. B. Byk, Secretary
R. E. Baxter
J. Bera
J. H. Butler
J. D. Carlisle, Jr.
G. B. Cassini
C. J. Duke
A. T. Gazzaniga
J. G. Gerk
R, A. Gregory
J. T. Herrity
J. A. Jaudes
R. Kremer
K. S. Lloyd, Jr.
G. M. Losey
Z. R. McCain, Jr.
D. McColl
P. McPartland
N. R. Mistry
R. C. Morrical
G. Nyborg III
S. A. Quinn
J. S. Rearick
A. J. Saxer
G. Stiffler
H. M. Vyas
T. Waardenburg
P. J. Welch
L E. White
C. Buckley, Alternate
V. P. Robibero, Alternate
M. Strachan, Alternate
S. Swett, Alternate
HAND AND SIDEWALK ELEVATOR COMMITTEE
R. S. Caporale, Chair
N. J. Montesano, Vice Chair
G. A. Burdeshaw, Secretary
V. G. Bahna
J. Doyle
J. Duffy
G. Green berg
H. J. Macuga
G. West
J. P. Merkel, Alternate
HOISTWAY COMMITTEE
L. M. Capuano, Chair
D. McColl, Vice Chair
A. B. Byk, Secretary
B. D. Black
L. J. Blaiotta
D. S. Boucher
F. R. Cooper
G. W. Gibson
H. J. Gruszynski
R. F. Hadaller
J. L. Harding
E. A. Heath III
D. Holmes
K. H. Lewis
G. L. Nuschler
H. E. Peelle III
R. L Phillips
F. Regalado
A. Rehman
S. P. Reynolds
H. Simpkins
D. Warne
D. A. Witham
W. Ziegert
L. Bialy, Alternate
A. S. Conkling, Alternate
D. P. Kraft, Alternate
R. K> Leckman, Alternate
W. M. Miller, Alternate
M. Tevyaw, Alternate
J. Varon, Alternate
HYDRAULIC COMMITTEE
G. A. Kappenhagen, Chair
M. G. Miller, Vice Chair
G. A. Burdeshaw, Secretary
L Bialy
P. E. Burge
C. C. Fox
H. A. Hammerstrom
C. B. Jackson
A. Jahn
T. S. Mowrey
M. J. Paschke
L S. Rigby
C. W. Rogler
J. N. Rouse III
W. M. Shrum, Jr.
H. Simpkins
B. Giddens, Alternate
K. A. Grunden, Alternate
J. W. Koshak, Alternate
A. M. McClement, Alternate
S. S. Pearson, Alternate
A. Rehman, Alternate
J. L. Shrum, Alternate
Copyright © 2010 by tile American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
INCLINED ELEVATOR COMMITTEE
A. H. Verschell, Chair J. T. Herrity
G. A. Burdeshaw, Secretary T. L. Pope
J. R. Carrick
INSPECTIONS COMMITTEE
MAINTENANCE, REPAIR, AND REPLACEMENT
COMMITTEE
M. Tevyaw, Chair
J. Filippone, Vice Chair
R. Mohamed, Secretary
G. Antona
C. Archer
R. E. Baxter
J. R. Brooks
C. Buckley
J. W. Coaker
M. V. Farinola
H. S. Frank
R. F. Hadaller
P. Hampton
J. T. Herrity
L. C. Kanicki
J. J. Knolmajer
G. W. Kosinski
K. S. Lloyd, Jr.
Z. R. McCain, Jr.
J. S. Rearick
C. W. Rogler
J. D. Rosen berger
J. R. Runyan
R. D. Schloss
R. S. Seymour
R. D. Shepherd
W. M. Snyder
D. M. Stanlaske
J. Strzelec
D. Warne
P. G. Bender, Alternate
M. Boutin, Alternate
D. McLellan, Alternate
S. Swett, Alternate
Z. R. McCain, Jr., Chair
R. A. Gregory, Vice Chair
A. B. Byk, Secretary
R. E. Baxter
G. B. Cassini
J. J. DeLorenzi
C. J. Duke
M. V. Farinola
J. Filippone
J. G. Gerk
S. P. Greene
R. F. Hadaller
R. E. Haukeness
J. T. Herrity
A. S. Hopkirk
J. A. Jaudes
J. J. Knolmajer
R. Kremer
D. B. Labrecque
P. W. Lackler
B. H. Larson
K. S. Lloyd, Jr.
G. M. Losey
D. McColl
P. J. McPartland
N. R. Mistry
R. C. Morrical
J. Murphy
W. B. Pletch
J. R. Quackenbush
J. S. Rearick
A. Rehman
V. P. Robibero
P. S. Rosenberg
A. Saxer
R. D. Schloss
R. D. Shepherd
J. Strzelec
H. M. Vyas
T. Waardenburg
C. Buckley, Alternate
D. Kelly, Alternate
J. L. Stabler, Alternate
INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE
G. W. Gibson, Chair
L. Bialy, Vice Chair
G. A. Burdeshaw, Secretary
B. D. Black
B. Blackaby
R. S. Caporale
J. W. Coaker
J. T. Herrity
A. P. Juhasz
G. A. Kappenhagen
J. W. Koshak
J. A. Pop
V. P. Robibero
D. M. Stanlaske
J. Strzelec
D. L. Turner
V. Q. Bates, Jr., Alternate
T. Derwinski, Alternate
D. R. Evans, Alternate
MARINE ELEVATOR COMMITTEE
LIMITED-USE/LIMITED-APPLICATION
ELEVATOR COMMITTEE
R. E. Baxter, Chair
D. C. Balmer, Vice Chair
M. L. Vazquez, Secretary
K. L. Brinkman
P. Chance
C. C. Fox
P. W. Lackler
M. L. McDonald
S. J. Mehalko
J. L. Mickel
C. H. Murphy
R. Murphy
J. P. Schumacher
A. H. Verschell
R. B. Weber
D. M. Winkle, Jr.
M. B. Hays, Alternate
M. R. Tilyou, Chair
G. A. Burdeshaw, Secretary
E. J. Crawford
W. D. George
T. J. Ingram
R. Wagner
MECHANICAL DESIGN COMMITTEE
G. W. Gibson, Chair
L. Bialy, Vice Chair
D. L. Turner, Vice Chair
A. B. Byk, Secretary
K. A. Apperson
E. V. Baker
R. J. Bolen
R. E. Creak
C. C. Fox
H. S. Frank
R. F. Hadaller
D. K. Kaczmarek
D. A. Kalgren
K. Konyar
J. W. Koshak
R. Kremer
M. P. Lamb
M. L. Lane
T. G. Moskal
A. Rehman
M. Rhiner
H. Simpkins
C. E. Vlahovic
R. J. Walker
S. P. Wurth
D. P. Kraft, Alternate
R. K. Leckman, Alternate
W. C. Ribeiro, Alternate
W. C. Schadrack III,
Alternate
P. Winey, Alternate
MINE ELEVATOR COMMITTEE
T. D. Barkand, Chair
A. B. Byk, Secretary
C. D. Barchet
R. M. Bates
W. M. Dietz
P. E. Fernatt
M. G. Kalich
J. B. Ketchem
A. L. Martin
N. B. Martin
G. L. Miller
H. E. Newcomb
A. J. Saxer
D. J. Shook
R. L. Sidwell
M. P. Snyder
J. K. Taylor
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
NEW TECHNOLOGY COMMITTEE
J. W. Coaker, Choir
G. A. Burdeshaw, Secretary
Art. H. Bayyari
L. Bialy
B. D. Black
A. D. Brown
A. D. Byram
R. S. Caporale
L. Art. Capuano
M. Dodd
G. W. Gibson
A. N. Griffin
I. D. Jay
A. P. Juhasz
L C. Kanicki
R. M. Kennedy
J. W. Koshak
G. W. Kosinski
R. H. Laney
K. S. Lloyd, Jr.
D. McColl
M. Mihai
Art. Pedram
V. P. Robibero
D. Art. Stanlaske
D. L. Turner
R. E. Baxter, Alternate
Art. Chan, Alternate
OUTSIDE EMERGENCY ELEVATOR COMMITTEE
G. L. Nuschler, Chair
W. C. Christensen
R. F. Fahy
J. K. O'Donnell
J. J. O'Donoghue
H. E. Peele III
J. Shimshoni
D. Art. Stanlaske
RACK AND PINION AND SPECIAL PURPOSE
PERSONNEL ELEVATOR COMMITTEE
A. J. Artarchant, Chair
K. Art. Harrison, Vice Chair
G. A. Burdeshaw, Secretary
J. L. Borwey
D. F. Grund
S. Harris
R. E. Haukeness
J. W. Koshak
R. C. Arteiresonne
B. L O'Neill
P. J. Welch
J. A. Harrison, Alternate
RESIDENCE ELEVATOR COMMITTEE
A. H. Verschell, Chair
K. L. Brinkman, Vice Chair
M. L. Vazquez, Secretary
D. C. Balmer
R. E. Baxter
R. G. Buonora
P. Chance
D. J. DeGere
P. Edwards
R. Elias
P. Giannis
F. Art. Hoch
Art. J. Holat
C. S. Jones
P. W. Lackler
K. H. Lewis
Art. Lewis
J. C. Lund
Art. L. McDonald
W. Art. ArtcKinley
S. J. AAehalko
J. L. Aflickel
W. Art. AAiddleton
R. J. Murphy
T. L. Pope
J. P. Schumacher
S. S. Duquaine, Alternate
Art. B. Hays, Alternate
J. B. Peskuski, Alternate
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
(10)
PREFACE
FORM AND ARRANGEMENT
This Guide addresses how-to inspection guidelines,
techniques, and cautionary notes in a logical sequence.
Subsections are arranged to focus on routine inspection
requirements, followed by periodic test (annual and five
year) and acceptance criteria. Appropriate references to
the latest edition of the Code, in effect at the time of
this Guide's publication, are listed at the end of each
subsection. The referenced numbers may not be the same
in earlier editions. This Guide is organized as follows:
Parts 1 through 6 apply to electric and hydraulic eleva-
tors, Parts 7 and 8 apply to escalators, Parts 9 and 10
apply to moving walks, and Part 11 applies to machine-
room-less (MRL) elevators. The Parts are arranged to
show the location of the inspection:
Part 1 Elevator — Inside of Car
Part 2 Elevator — Machine Room
Part 3 Elevator — Top of Car
Part 4 Elevator — Outside Hoistway
Part 5 Elevator — Pit
Part 6 Elevator — Firefighters' Service
Part 7 Escalator — External
Part 8 Escalator — Internal
Part 9 Moving Walk — External
Part 10 Moving Walk — Internal
Part 11 Elevator — Machine-Room-Less (MRL)
Each inspection location is further subdivided as
follows:
X Location of inspection
X.X Item to be inspected
X.X.I Periodic inspections (routine)
X.X. 1.1 Electric elevators (as applicable)
X.X. 1.2 Hydraulic elevators (as applicable)
X.X.2 Periodic test
X.X.2.1 Electric elevators (as applicable)
X.X.2.2 Hydraulic elevators (as applicable)
X.X.3 Acceptance inspection
X.X.3.1 Electric elevators (as applicable)
X.X.3.2 Hydraulic elevators (as applicable)
X.X.4 Code references
X.X.4.1 Electric elevators (as applicable)
X.X.4.2 Hydraulic elevators (as applicable)
When a requirement within A17.1 or A17.3 cross-
references another requirement, the cross-reference is
shown with the refering requirement in braces, { ). For
the Al 7. 1-2000 and later edition requirements, where
no direct cross-reference is found within the A 17. 1-2000
Cross-Reference Table, the prior code Rule (A17.1d-2000
and earlier editions) is shown in parentheses, ( ), with
a preceding "NR" designation.
Subsection numbering of items may not be sequential
when there are no inspection or test procedures indi-
cated within this Guide.
NOTE: This Guide addresses the requirements of A17.1-1955 and
later editions and latest edition of A17.3. Some requirements in
earlier editions of A17.1 are also addressed. The inspector is
referred to the particular edition of the A17.1 Code that applies
for requirements prior to 1955.
This Guide has included the pertinent requirement
from prior editions of A17.1, which differ from the
requirements in the latest edition. As the inspector
becomes familiar with the prescribed order of inspection
procedures, variations may be appropriate. The
Foreword, Preface, and Appendix that are included in
this document have been approved by the
A17 Committee, but are not part of this American
National Standard.
NOTE: See also para. 2, Application, under the Introduction of
this Guide.
REQUIREMENTS FOR EXISTING INSTALLATIONS
Elevators and escalators in jurisdictions that have
adopted the Safety Code for Existing Elevators and
Escalators, ASME A17.3, and installations that have been
altered in accordance with Part XII of the Safety Code
for Elevators and Escalators ANSI/ASME A17.1d-1986
and later editions must, as a minimum, conform to the
requirements identified in this Guide as "A17.3." If an
existing installation does not meet the requirements of
the A17.3 Code, it must be upgraded. If an existing
installation was required to meet more stringent require-
ments, it must continue to meet those requirements.
Alteration, if made, must conform to the requirements
of A17.1, Part XII and the entire installation must con-
form to the requirements of A17.3. The alteration
requirements in A 17.1, Part XII may be more stringent
than the requirements of A17.3. The equipment must
conform to the more stringent of the two.
METRIC (SI) UNITS
This edition of the Guide uses both imperial and met-
ric (SI) units. The units used in the Guide are the units
found in the referenced code [e.g., imperial (metric) or
metric (imperial)]. Information on the usage of SI units
and conversion to imperial units is contained in IEEE/
ASTM SI 10-1997, Standard for the Use of the International
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
System of Units (SI): The Modern Metric System; ASME
Guide SI-1, Orientation and Guide for Use of SI (Metric)
Units; or CAN/CSA-Z234-1, Canadian Metric Practice
Guide.
DEFINITIONS
For definitions, see Section 3 of the
ASME A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions (Section 1.3,
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions).
ASME ELEVATOR PUBLICATIONS
This Guide is one of the numerous codes and stan-
dards that have been or are being developed and pub-
lished by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
The following publications are of special interest to users
of this Guide. For prices and availability, contact:
ASME Order Department
22 Law Drive
Box 2900
Fairfield, NJ 07007-2900
Tel: 800-843-2763
Fax: 973-882-1717
E-Mail: infocentral@asme.org
ASME Website: www.asme.org/catalog
ASME A17.1/CSA B44 Safety Code for Elevators and
Escalators. This American National Standard Safety
Code covers the design construction, installation, oper-
ation, testing, maintenance, alteration, and repair of ele-
vators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, and
material lifts and dumbwaiters with automatic transfer
devices.
Inspection Checklists. The checklist forms shown in
Nonmandatory Appendices A and B of this book are
posted on the ASME Website: www.asme.org.
ASME A17.3 Safety Code for Existing Elevators and
Escalators. This Code covers retroactive requirements
for existing elevators and escalators. The purpose of this
Code is to establish minimum requirements that will
provide a reasonable degree of safety for the general
public. While many of these requirements will also
increase the degree of safety for the elevator mechanic
and inspector, this area has not been addressed at this
time.
ASME A17 CD-ROM for Elevators and Escalators. This
CD-ROM contains the ASME A17.1, A17.2, and A17.3
standards. In addition, it contains the published inter-
pretations applicable to these standards.
ASME A17.4 Guide for Emergency Personnel. This
Guide for emergency personnel (fire, police, etc.), build-
ing owners, lessees, and building operating managers
explains the proper procedures to be used for the safe
removal of passengers from stalled cars.
CSA B44.1/ASME A17.5 Elevator and Escalator
Electrical Equipment. This Code contains requirements
for obtaining, labeling, and listing electrical equipment
for elevators, escalators, moving walks, dumbwaiters,
material lifts, platform lifts, and stairway lifts.
ASME A17.7/CSA B44.7 Performance-Based Safety
Code for Elevators and Escalators. This American
National Standard performance-based safety code cov-
ers the design, construction, installation, operation, test-
ing, maintenance, alteration, and repair of elevators,
dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, and material
lifts.
Published Interpretations. Interpretations of the vari-
ous A17 standards are published periodically.
Interpretations of A17.1 and A17.2 approved by the
A17 Committee from June 14, 1972 through June 1979
were published in a separate book in 1980.
Starting with the 1981 edition of the Code, interpreta-
tions are published with each new edition and supple-
ment of the applicable standard. A compilation of
Interpretations Nos. 2-13 (June 1979-May 1989) has also
been published by ASME. A compilation of all interpre-
tations can also be obtained through the A17 CD-ROM.
Handbook on A17.1/B44 Safety Code. This Handbook
augments the A17.1/B44 Codes with commentary, dia-
grams, and illustrations that are intended to explain the
requirements of the A17.1/B44 Code.
The commentary contained in the Handbook is the
opinion of the author and has not been approved by the
A 17 Committee or the B44 Technical Committee.
QEI-1 Standard for the Qualification of Elevator Inspec-
tors. This Standard covers requirements for the qualifi-
cation and duties of inspectors and inspection
supervisors engaged in the inspection and testing of
equipment within the scope of the A17.1/B44 Code.
It also includes requirements for the accreditation of
organizations that certify inspectors and inspection
supervisors as meeting the QEI criteria.
ASME A18.1 Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and
Stairway Chairlifts. This safety Standard covers the
design, construction, installation, operation, inspection,
testing, maintenance, and repair of inclined stairway
chairlifts and inclined and vertical platform lifts
intended for transportation of a mobility impaired per-
son only.
CORRESPONDENCE WITH THE A17 COMMITTEE
ASME codes and standards are developed and main-
tained with the intent to represent the consensus of con-
cerned interests. As such, users of this and other ASME
A17 codes and standards may interact with the Commit-
tee by requesting interpretations, proposing revisions,
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
Abbreviations Used in This Code
Abbreviation
Unit
Abbreviation
Unit
A
ampere
lb
pound (mass)
°C
degree Celsius
tbf
pound (force)
deg
degree (angle)
Ix
lux
°F
degree Fahrenheit
m
meter
ft/min
foot per minute
m2
square meter
ft/s
foot per second
m3
cubic meter
ft
foot
mA
milliampere
fc
footcandle
m/s
meter per second
ft2
square foot
m/s2
meter per second per second
ft3
cubic foot
mm
millimeter
ft/s2
foot per second per second
mm2
square millimeter
h
hour
mm3
cubic millimeter
Hz
hertz
MPa
megapascal
in.
inch
N
newton
in.2
square inch
psi
pound per square inch
in.3
cubic inch
s
second
kg
kilogram
V
volt
kPa
kilopascal
and attending committee meetings. Correspondence
should be addressed to;
Secretary, A17 Standards Committee
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Three Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016-5990
E-mail: infocentral@asme.org
Proposing Revisions. Revisions are made periodically
to the Guide to incorporate changes that appear neces-
sary or desirable, as demonstrated by the experience
gained from the application of the procedures, and in
order to conform to developments in elevator technol-
ogy. Approved revisions will be published periodically.
The Committee welcomes proposals for revisions to
this Guide, Such proposals should be as specific as possi-
ble: citing the Item number(s), the proposed wording,
and a detailed description of the reasons for the proposal
including any pertinent documentation.
Requesting Interpretations. On request, the
A17 Committee will render an interpretation of any
requirement of the Guide. Interpretations can only be
rendered in response to a written request sent to the
Secretary of the Standards Committee.
The request for interpretation should be clear and
unambiguous. It is further recommended that the
inquirer submits his request using the following format:
Subject: Cite the applicable Item number(s) and a
concise description.
Edition: Cite the applicable edition and supplement
of the Guide for which the interpretation is
being requested.
Question: Phrase the question as a request for an inter-
pretation of a specific item suitable for gen-
eral understanding and use, not as a request
for an approval of a proprietary design or
situation. The inquirer may also include any
plans or drawings that are necessary to
explain the question; however, they should
not contain proprietary names or
information.
Requests that are not in this format will be written in
this format by the Committee prior to being answered,
which may inadvertently change the intent of the origi-
nal request.
ASME procedures provide for reconsideration of any
interpretation when or if additional information that
might affect an interpretation is available. Further, per-
sons aggrieved by an interpretation may appeal to the
cognizant ASME committee or subcommittee. ASME
does not "approve," "certify," "rate," or "endorse" any
item, construction, proprietary device, or activity
Attending Committee Meetings. The A17 Standards
Committee and the various Working Committees regu-
larly hold meetings, all of which are open to the public.
Persons wishing to attend any meeting should contact
the Secretary of the Standards Committee.
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
Following approval by the ASME A 17 Elevator and Escalator Committee and ASME, and after
public review, ASME A17.2-2010 was approved by the American National Standards Institute
on September 8, 2010.
The 2010 edition of ASME A17.2 includes revisions that are identified by a margin note, (10).
Changes made to correct errors, as well as other editorial changes, are identified by (ED). All
references to A17.1-2000 have been changed to A17.1-2000/B44-00. The following is a summary
of the latest revisions and changes:
Page
Location
Change
x-xii
Foreword
Updated
xiii-xvii
Committee Roster
Updated
xviii, xix
Preface
(1) Under Form and Arrangement, first
paragraph revised
(2) Under Definitions, reference correct*
1
1
(1) Last paragraph added
(2) Note revised
4
7
8,9
11
12
Table 1
1.2.1
1.6.1
1.8.2
1.8.4
1.10.2
1.10.4.1
1.12.1
1.13.1.1
Editorially revised to include Web site
URLs
Reference in subpara. (a) corrected
Reference in second paragraph corrected
Added
Revised
Reference in subpara. (a) corrected
Reference added
Reference in subpara. (h) corrected
References corrected
14
15
17
18
19-21
1.13.4.1
1.15.1
1.17.3.1
1.18.1
1.20
2.5.1
2.7.4
2.11.3
2.11.4
2.12.1.1
Revised
Reference corrected
Subparagraph (a) revised
References corrected
Added
Last sentence in second paragraph added
References added
Revised in its entirety
Revised
(1) Subparagraph (a) revised
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. j^L .
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ^
25
2.13.4
26
2.17.2.1
27
2.17.3
2.18.2.1
28,29
2.18.4.1
2.20
2.21.1.1
31
2.25.2.1
33-35
2.29.2
Page Location Change
(2) Subparagraphs (a)(5) and (a)(6) added
2.12.4 Revised
2.13.1.1 Subparagraph (g) added
2.13.2.1 (1) Second paragraph in subpara. (a)
added
(2) Subparagraph (b)(1) revised
24 2.13.2.2 (1) Last sentence in subparas. (a) and (b)
added
(2) Subparagraph (b)(1) revised
Revised
Last sentence in subpara. (a) added
Added
Added
Revised
Revised in its entirety
Reference in subpara. (b) corrected
Last paragraph added
(1) Fourth sentence in subpara. (c)(1)
added
(2) Subparagraphs (e)(2) and (e)(4)
revised
Last sentence in subpara. (a) added
Reference in third paragraph corrected
References added
Added
Reference in first sentence corrected
References in third and fourth
paragraphs corrected
Reference in subpara. (b) corrected
Reference in subpara. (a) corrected
Reference in first sentence corrected
Reference in subpara. (b)(2) corrected
Revised
Subparagraph (c)(1)(b) revised
Revised
Added
Paragraph split into subparas. (a) and (b)
Revised
Revised
Added
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
38
2.29.3
40,41
2.35.1
42,43
2.40.4
2.42
44
3.2.1
45
3.4.1.2
49
3.8.1
3.9.1
50
3.11.1
53,54
3.17.1
58,59
3.22.4
3.23.1
Fig. 3.23.1
60
Fig. 3.23.2
61
3.26.1
62
3.28.4
64,65
3.31.4.2
3.34
Page
Location
66
4.2.1
69
4.8.1
72
5.2.1.1
74
5.3.4.1
76,77
5.9.1.1
78-80
5.9.4.1
5.12.1.1
5.15.3.2
5.16
90
Fig. 6.4.2(g)(2)
97
Fig. 7.2.1(c)
98,99
7.5.1
7.7.1
100
7.7.4
102-106
7.9.2
107-110
111
113-115
7.10.1
Fig. 7.9.1(c)
7.10.4
7.11.1
7.15.1
7.16.1
7.17.1
7.19.4
7.20
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.2
8.3.2
8.3.3
Change
Reference in subpara. (b)(2) corrected
Subparagraph (b) revised
Reference in last paragraph corrected
Reference added
Reference in subpara. (b)(5) corrected
References added
Reference in subpara. (c) corrected
Revised
Added
Reference in caption corrected
References in callouts corrected
References in second paragraph corrected
Reference in second paragraph corrected
References added
References in first sentence and subpara.
(b) corrected
(1) References in subparas. (a) and (b)
corrected
(2) References in subparas. (b)(4) and
(b)(5) corrected
Revised
Reference added
(1) First paragraph revised
(2) Reference in second paragraph
corrected
Reference in last sentence corrected
Reference in first and second paragraphs
corrected
References in subparas. (b) and (c)
corrected
Reference added
Added
Reference in second paragraph corrected
Reference in second paragraph corrected
Reference added
Revised in its entirety
(1) First paragraph revised
(2) Reference in second paragraph
corrected
Last paragraph revised
C
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
Page
Location
8.3.4
8.4.2
117
8.9.2
8.10.2
119, 120
8.13.2
8.13.4
121
8.18
122, 123
9.3.1
Fig. 9.2.1(a)
124
Fig. 9.2.1(b)
Fig. 9.2.3
125
Table 9.2.3(a)
Table 9.2.3(c)
128
129
130
131
132
133-135
9.4.1
Change
Revised
Reference in fifth paragraph corrected
Reference corrected
Reference in first paragraph corrected
(1) Subparagraph (b) revised
(2) Reference in subpara. (c) corrected
References added
Added
Reference in subpara. (e) corrected
Reference in caption corrected
References in callouts corrected
Reference in callout corrected
Reference in title corrected
Reference in left column heading
corrected
References in subparas. (a) and (b)
corrected
137
9.4.4
Reference added
Fig. 9.9.1
References in callouts corrected
9.10.1
Reference in subpara. (b) corrected
9.10.3
Last sentence added
9.10.4
Reference added
Table 9.14.3(b)
Reference in title corrected
9.15
Revised in its entirety
Fig. 9.17.1
Reference in callout corrected
9.17.1
Reference in last sentence corrected
9.19.4
Reference added
9.20
Added
10.1.4
Reference added
10.2
Title revised
10.2.2
Last paragraph added
10.2.4
Reference added
10.3.2
(1) Revised
(2) Reference in last sentence correc
10.3.3
Revised
10.3.4
References added
10.4.2
Seventh paragraph revised
10.10.2
Reference in first paragraph correct
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
Page
Location
Change
138, 139
10.13.2
(1) References in subparas. (a) and (c)
corrected
(2) Subparagraph (b) revised
10.13.4
References added
10.17
Added
140-148
Part 11
Added
149-163
Mandatory Appendix I
Added
164-188
Nonmandatory
Appendix A
Revised in its entirety
189-207
Nonmandatory
(1) For A17.1-2000 and B44-00 table, 11
Appendix B
6.5.13(f) added
(2) A17.1-2002 and B44-02 table added
(3) A17.1-2004 and B44-04 table added
XXV
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
GUIDE FOR INSPECTION OF ELEVATORS, ESCALATORS,
AND MOVING WALKS
Introduction
(io) 1 SCOPE
This Guide covers recommended inspection and test-
ing procedures for electric and hydraulic elevators, esca-
lators, and moving walks required to conform to the
Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, A17.1-1955
and later editions and The Safety Code for Existing
Elevators and Escalators, A17.3. This Guide also
addresses some requirements from editions of A17.1
prior to 1955.
This guide also includes Canadian references and
applicable exceptions for CSA B44-00 and later editions.
Exceptions or deviations applicable in Canada are iden-
tified with the same ASME requirement number pref-
aced with a lowercase "c" for CSA B44-00 through
CSA B44-04 Update 1.
NOTE: This Guide may not reflect the latest requirements in the
current ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and ASME A17.3 Codes.
2 APPLICATION
This Guide is intended to assist qualified inspectors
performing routine inspections and witnessing periodic
and acceptance inspections and tests. It is not intended
to serve as a basis for government regulations. This
Guide does not contain information on handling dis-
crepancies noted during an inspection and test. The
authority having jurisdiction in their legislation adopt-
ing the Code is responsible for addressing this subject.
The acceptance inspection and testing procedures apply
only to the extent that they conform to the latest edition
of the A17.1/B44 Code. The routine and periodic inspec-
tion and testing procedures apply only to the extent that
they conform to the applicable Code requirements that
were in effect at the time of installation or alteration.
The inspection and testing procedures do not take into
account local regulations that may differ.
It is recognized that inspectors will not be able to
accomplish all the inspection procedures specified in
this Guide, during each inspection. Qualified inspectors
have the knowledge and experience to recognize poten-
tial deficiencies and to focus the inspection in those
areas.
This Guide uses the following format to describe the
appropriate inspection and test:
(a) For inspections and tests performed in compliance
with ASME A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions
(1) Routine. The examination and operation of
equipment at specified intervals by an inspector to check
for compliance with the applicable Code requirements.
(2) Periodic Tests. Routine inspection and tests plus
additional detailed examination and operation of equip-
ment at specified intervals witnessed by an inspector to
check for compliance with the applicable Code
requirements.
(3) Acceptance. The initial inspection and tests of
new or altered equipment to check for compliance with
the applicable Code requirements.
(b) For inspections and tests performed in compliance
with ASME A17.1-2000/CSA B44-00 and later editions:
(1) Periodic Inspection. The examination and opera-
tion of equipment at specified intervals by an inspector
to check for compliance with the applicable Code
requirements.
(2) Periodic Tests. The testing and detailed exami-
nation and operation of equipment at specified intervals
witnessed by an inspector to check for compliance with
the applicable Code requirements.
(3) Acceptance. The initial inspection and test of
new or altered equipment to check for compliance with
the applicable Code requirements.
The procedures in this Guide are recommendations
only and are intended to illustrate a method of comply-
ing with the requirements in ASME A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions and A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later edi-
tions, requirements 8.10 and 8.11. The person per-
forming the inspection and test may employ other
methods to demonstrate compliance with the applicable
code requirement. Qualified inspectors have the knowl-
edge and experience to recognize potential deficiencies
and to focus the inspection where necessary
1
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Where no inspection procedure is specified for routine
inspections, it indicates that the Code requirements need
no explanation. This does not indicate that no inspection
of the specified item is required. The item is to be
inspected for compliance with the applicable Code
requirements.
Where, as an example, the periodic inspection has no
specified inspections, the inspections specified under
routine are to be used for the periodic inspection. If, as
an example, the acceptance inspection has a test proce-
dure that differs from the test procedure specified under
periodic, the acceptance test procedure should be fol-
lowed for acceptance inspection and the periodic test
procedure should be followed for periodic inspections.
This Guide contains inspection procedures for compli-
ance with the applicable Code only. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions Rule 1000.2 and A17.1-2000/B44-00 and
later editions requirements 8.10.1.2 and 8.11.1.2, reads
in part "the inspection and test required by this Part
are to determine that the equipment conforms to the
applicable Code requirements at the time of installation
and any alteration." This Guide contains no recommen-
dations that exceed the requirements of A17.1d-2000
and earlier editions Rule 1000.2 and A17.1-2000/B44-00
and later editions requirements 8.10.1.2 and 8.11.1.2, and
A17.3.
To facilitate making inspections and tests, sample
checklists can be found in Nonmandatory Appendix A
of this Guide. The checklist Item numbers correspond
to the Item numbers in this Guide. The checklist also
contains appropriate A17.1 and A17.3 references for
each Item.
NOTE: See also Form and Arrangement under the Preface of
this Guide.
3 QUALIFICATIONS OF INSPECTORS
Inspectors and inspection supervisors are required by
ASME A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions and
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions, requirements
8.10.1.1(c) and 8.11.1.1 to be certified by an organization
accredited by The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers Qualifications for Elevator Inspectors
Committee in accordance with the requirements set forth
in the Standard for the Qualification of Elevator
Inspectors, ASME QEI-1 and be recognized by the
authority having jurisdiction.
4 PERSONAL SAFETY
Inspectors should have knowledge of the personal
safety practices including, but not limited to, the safety
practices contained in The Elevator Industry Field
Employees' Safety Handbook as required by ASME QEI-1.
NOTE: The Elevator Industry Field Employees' Safety Handbook is
available from Elevator World, Inc., P.O. Box 6507, Mobile, Alabama
36660 (http://www.elevator-world.com).
5 DUTIES OF INSPECTORS
The duties of inspectors are:
(a) when witnessing acceptance inspections and tests
of new or altered installations, to determine whether all
parts of the installation conform to the requirements
of the applicable code or regulations and whether the
required safety devices function as required.
(b) when making routine and /or periodic inspections
and tests, to determine that the equipment conforms
to the applicable Code edition (edition which it was
installed, A17.3 and local requirements) and that alter-
ations conform with Code requirements. Determine that
periodic tests performed by the owner or his agent are
conducted in accordance with Code requirements and
results of these tests demonstrate Code compliance.
(c) to report the results of inspections and tests in
accordance with applicable local regulations.
It is not the function or duty of inspectors to make
any repairs or adjustments to the equipment, nor to
recommend methods or procedures for correction of
deficiencies.
6 ARRANGEMENT FOR INSPECTION
The inspecting authority or the inspector should
request the owner or his agent to make the following
arrangements prior to an inspection or test:
(a) Provide qualified personnel for periodic and
acceptance inspections and tests to perform the tests
specified in the applicable code or regulations.
(b) Have a person familiar with the operation of the
elevator available to accompany and assist during the
inspections. The inspector should be accompanied by a
person familiar with the operation of the equipment to
assist him during his inspections.
7 RECOMMENDED EQUIPMENT
(a) It is recommended that the inspector have the fol-
lowing equipment:
(1) flashlight with a nonconductive case
(2) 6 ft (2 m) rule of nonconductive material
(3) set of thick gages
(4) small hammer, preferably a \ lb (0.2 kg) ball
peen
(5) chalk or crayon
(6) small metal mirror
(7) safety hat (nonconductive)
(8) copy of the latest applicable codes and stan-
dards (i.e., A17.1, A17.3, ANSI/NFPA 70, etc.)
(9) copy of the applicable local regulations
(10) copy of the latest edition of The Elevator
Industry Field Employees Safety Handbook
(11) copy of the checklists as contained in this
Guide
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(12) padlock, multiple lock device, and "Do Not
Start" tags
(13) caliper
(14) telescoping pointer with an alligator clip and
business cards or stiff paper
(15) other items such as an eraser, kitchen spatula,
etc. (for escalators and moving walks)
(16) stop watch or timer
(17) 50 ft (15 m) nonconductive tape and 25 ft
(75 m) tape
(18) tachometer, which reads directly in ft/min
(m/s)
(19) multimeter
(20) level, 30 deg/60 deg triangle, and protractor
or angle finder
(21) door test scale (gage) to check closing door
force
(22) a light meter that can accurately measure light
level from 0 fc to 19 fc (0 lx to 200 lx)
(23) marking chalk or crayon
(b) Periodic and Acceptance Inspection and Tests. In
addition to the equipment specified above, the following
should be provided by the owner or contractor:
(1) suitable test weights
(2) dynamometer
(3) copy of all pertinent drawings, specification,
data sheets, and required test procedures
(4) transceiver
(5) come-along and "Chicago" grip or mid-line
rope clamps
(6) "Out of Service" signs and/or barricades at
hoistway doors
(7) device for testing smoke detectors
(8) no. 16-gage copper wire or equivalent
(9) keys for access and operation of all elevator
equipment
(10) hydraulic jack and 4x4
(11) plumb line (for escalators)
(12) torque wrench (for escalators)
(13) skirt/ step performance index test apparatus
and accessory apparatus
NOTE: If iron counterweight sections are used as test weights
and scales are not available to accurately determine their weight
in pounds, their approximate weight can be determined by multi-
plying the product of the length, breadth, and thickness in inches
by 0.26. If weights are lead, multiply by 0.41. If weights are steel,
multiply by 0,28. Deduct for volume of any holes or slots.
Table 1 Procurement Information
(ED)
Organization
Address and Phone Number
ANSI American National Standards Institute, Inc.
25 West 43rd Street
New York, NY 10036
Telephone: (212) 642-4900
http://www.ansi.org
ASME The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Three Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016-5990
Telephone: (212) 591-8500
http://www.asme.org
ASME Order Department
22 Law Drive
Box 2900
Fairfield, NJ 07007-2900
Telephone: (201) 882-1167
(800) 843-2763
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
100 Barr Harbor Drive
West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
Telephone: (610) 832-9500
http://www.astm.org
CSA Canadian Standards Association
5060 Spectrum Way
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5N6, Canada
Telephone: (416) 747-4044
http://www.csa.ca
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers, Inc.
445 Hoes Lane
Piscataway, NJ 08854
Telephone: (800) 678-4333
http://www.ieee.org
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
1 Batterymarch Park
Quincy, MA 02169-7471
Telephone: (617) 770-3000
http://www.nfpa.org
8 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Table 1 lists the organizations from which documents
referenced in this book can be procured.
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Part 1
Elevator — Inside of Car
ITEM 1.1
DOOR REOPENING DEVICE
1.1.1 Periodic Inspections
For elevators installed under A17. 1-1955 through
A17.1d-1975, power opening of the car door was permit-
ted to take place anywhere in the hoistway. For elevators
installed under A17.1e-1975, power opening of the car
door was permitted to take place only within the land-
ing zone.
CAUTION: In any of the following tests where the inspector
uses an object to test the reopening device, the object must not
be inserted when the door is nearing its fully closed position.
(a) Mechanical Reopening Device (Safety Edge). Actuate
the device while the doors are being closed and note
whether car and hoistway doors stop and reopen. For
vertically sliding car doors or gates, a stop and reopen
is not required for obstructions within 5 in. (127 mm)
of the sides of the opening.
(b) Electronic Reopening Device. Place an object in front
of the leading edge of the car door at various positions
while it is being closed. The car and hoistway doors
should stop and reopen. For vertically sliding car doors
or gates, a stop and reopen is not required for obstruc-
tions within 5 in. (127 mm) of the sides of the opening.
(c) Photoelectric Reopening Device. To qualify as a
reopening device that complies with the Code, the
device must sense the presence of the obstruction any-
where within the opening along the leading edge of the
car door. Determine the location of the light beam or
beams with relation to the car floor. Where an invisible
beam is used, the position of the beam can be determined
by an examination of the equipment. While the car and
hoistway doors are being closed, obstruct the beam
which should cause the doors to stop and reopen. This
type of device is usually installed in addition to a
mechanical or electronic reopening device.
1.1.2 Periodic Test
1.1.3 Acceptance
1.1.4 References
1.1.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 112 and Rule 1001.2(a)(1).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13 and 8.11.2.1.1(a).
A17.3 — Section 2.8.
1.1.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 112 {Rule 300.13); and Rules
1001.2(a)(1) and 1004.2(a)(1).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13 {3.13}; and 8.11.2.1.1(a) and
8.11.3.1.1(a).
A17.3 — Section 2.8.
ITEM 1.2
STOP SWITCHES
1.2.1 Periodic Inspections
An emergency stop switch must be provided on
freight elevators and existing passenger elevators with
perforated enclosures. An emergency stop switch or
in-car switch must be provided on passenger elevators.
(a) Emergency Stop Switch. Operate the emergency
stop switch and note whether the car stops promptly. On
elevators installed under A17.1b-1980 and later editions,
the stop switch should also activate an audible signaling
device. On elevators installed under A17.1a-1982 and
later editions, an emergency stop switch is required to
be located in or adjacent to each car operating panel.
Passenger elevators with non-perforated car enclosures
may be equipped with an in-car stop switch in lieu of
the emergency stop switch.
(b) In-Car Stop Switch. Passenger elevators installed
under A17.1d-1986 and later editions do not require an
in-car emergency stop switch but do require an in-car
stop switch. The in-car stop switch must be key operated
or behind a locked panel. Check the operation of this
switch by placing it in the stop position and attempt to
operate the car by the normal means.
1.2.2 Periodic Test
1.2.3 Acceptance
1.2.4 References
1.2.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 210.2(e), 210.2(v), and 1001.2(a)(2).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.26.2.5, 2.26.2.21, and 8.11.2.1.1(b).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.10.4(t) and 3.10.4(u).
1.2.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 306.4(b)(1), 306.4(b)(6), and
1004.2(a)(2).
(10)
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.26.4.2(a), 3.26.4.2(f), and 8.11.3.1.1(b).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.10.4(t) and 3.10.4(u) {4.7.4}.
ITEM 1.3
OPERATING CONTROL DEVICES
1.3.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Continuous-Pressure Operation, Operate the car in
each direction by means of the operating buttons or
other devices in the car to verify that they do not stick
or bind, are properly marked, and that the car stops
when the operating device is released.
(b) Automatic Operation and Signal Operation. Operate
the car, making stops in both the up and down direction.
At each stop, open the car door or gate and note the
relation of the car platform sill to the landing sill. Note
operating push buttons work properly.
(c) Hand Rope, Lever, Wheel or Crank Operation. This
type of operation is prohibited for elevators installed
under A17.1-1955 and later editions and by A17.3.
(d) Dual and Attendant Operation. Where the elevator
can be operated at times only from the car and at times
as an automatic elevator (dual or attendant operation),
check the operation under both operating conditions.
(e) Emergency Release Switch in Car. Emergency release
switches that permit operation with the car door or
gate open and other permanent devices that render door
interlocks and door or gate electric contacts inoperative
are not permitted under A17. 1-1955 and later editions
or by A17.3.
1.3.1.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Car Leveling and Truck Zoning Device. When an
automatic leveling device is provided, the accuracy of
stopping in both directions of travel should be noted at
each landing. A leveling tolerance may be required by
an accessibility or handicapped code. Where inching
buttons are provided, test them to determine that they
will operate the car only within the zone allowed by the
Code. While the car is leveling, operate the emergency or
in-car stop switch as outlined in Item 1.2.1. This should
stop the car.
NOTE [Item 1.3.1.1(a)]: Leveling devices cannot be expected to
stop the car exactly level with the landing sill.
(b) Car-Switch Operation. Operate the car switch to
determine whether the operating handle returns to the
stop position and latches in this position when the hand
is removed. Note any evidence of excessive friction, or
weakened or broken centering springs.
1.3.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators
(a) Car Leveling and Truck Zoning Device. When an
automatic leveling device is provided, the accuracy of
stopping in both directions of travel should be noted at
each landing. A leveling tolerance may be required by
an accessibility or handicapped code. Where inching
buttons are provided, test them to verify that they will
operate the car only within the zone allowed by the
Code. While the car is leveling, operate the emergency
or in-car stop switch as outlined in Item 1.2.1.
NOTE [Item 1.3.1.2(a)]: Leveling devices cannot be expected to
stop the car exactly level with the landing sill.
1.3.2 Periodic Test
1.3.3 Acceptance
1.3.4 References
1.3.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 210.1a, 210.16, and 1001.2(a)(3).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.26.1.1, 2.26.1.6, and 8.11.2.1.1(c).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.10.1, 3.10.2, and 3.10.7.
1.3.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and later
editions — Rules 210.1a {306.1}, 306.3, and 1004.2(a)(3).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.26.1.1 {3.26.1}, 3.26.3, and 8.11.3.1.1(c).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.10.1 and 3.10.2 {Section 4.7},
and 3.10.9 {4.7.6}.
ITEM 1.4
SILLS AND CAR FLOOR
1.4.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Hinged Car Platform Sills
(1) Visually examine the sill plate for cracks, wear,
broken welds, or loose rivets. Check the area under the
sill for foreign material, which would prevent proper
operation at the landing.
(2) Check all bolts on the counterweight housing
and stop angles. Inspect the ropes or chains that connect
the sill to the counterweight. Check pivot points and
sheaves for wear and proper lubrication.
(3) Inspect the hand lever and linkage for excess
wear, and loose or missing cotter pins or bolts. Check the
operation of the hinged car-platform sill electric contact.
(b) Hinged Hoistway Landing Sills
(1) Visually examine the sill plate for cracks, wear,
broken welds, or loose rivets. Check the area under the
sill for foreign material, which would prevent proper
operation at the landing.
(2) Check all bolts on the counterweight housing
and stop angles. Inspect the ropes or chains that connect
the sill to the counterweight. Check pivot points and
sheaves for wear and proper lubrication. Check the oper-
ation of the hinged hoistway landing sill. It should be
possible to lower the hinged sill only when the hoistway
door is fully opened.
(c) Sills and Car Floor
(1) Determine the condition of the car floor and car
and landing sills. Look especially for damage to floors
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
and sills as well as loose sills. Verify the clearance
between the car and landing sills. See Table 3.14.3(a).
(2) A floating platform is not permitted by
A17.1a-1957 and later editions or by A17.3. A floating
platform is a car platform that permits operation of the
car with the car gate or door open.
(3) Elevator systems may, however, use isolated
platform construction that may have load weighing sig-
naling devices. Such use is not prohibited. Try operating
the car from the landing operating device with a load
of 30 lb (13.6 kg) on the platform with the car gate or
door in the open position. This test is to be repeated
with the test load placed in various locations. The car
should not operate under such conditions.
1.4.2 Periodic Test
1.4.3 Acceptance
Check that landing sills are substantially flush with
the floor surface of the landings and the sill does not
present a tripping hazard. Changes in level up to \ in.
(6 mm) may be vertical and without edge treatment.
Changes in level between \ in. (6 mm) and \ in. (13 mm)
must be beveled, and changes in level above V2 in.
(13 mm) must be ramped.
1.4.4 References
1.4.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 108.1, llO.lOd, 110.11a, 110.13a, 203.16,
210.12, and 1001.2(a)(4).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.5.1, 2.11.10.3, 2.11.11.1, 2.11.13.1, 2.15.16,
(NR 210.12), and 8.11.2.1.1(d).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.3.3 and 3.3.4.
ANSI A117.1.
1.4.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 108.1 (300.9), HO.lOd {300.11},
110.11a, 110.13a, 203.16 {301.6}, 210.12, and 1004.2(a)(4).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.5.1 {3.5}, 2.11.10.3 {3.11}, 2.11.11.1,
2.11.13.1, 2.15.16 {3.15}, (NR 210.12), and 8.11.3.1.1(d).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.3.3 and 3.3.4 {4.2.2}.
ANSI A117.1.
(b) Auxiliary Illumination. A17.1b-1968 and later edi-
tions, and A17.3, require auxiliary illumination of pas-
senger elevator cars in case of failure of the normal
car lighting power supply. When auxiliary lighting is
supplied, check its operation by disconnecting the nor-
mal lighting supply Where the auxiliary lighting is sup-
plied by batteries, check that such batteries are in good
condition and properly maintained, and that any
recharging equipment is operable. Check that the auxil-
iary power supply is located on each elevator.
1.5.2 Periodic Test: Yearly Test (for A17.1d-2000
and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions)
Car lamps and diffusers, if provided, should be in
place for all safety and buffer tests. They must remain
in place during the test. Where there is a question as to
the adequate capacity of the emergency power supply,
an endurance test should be made.
1.5.3 Acceptance
When the hoistway doors are closed, the Code
requires a minimum illumination at the landing edge
of the car door sill of 5 fc (54 lx) for passenger elevators,
2V2 fc (27 lx) for freight elevators, and 0.2 fc (2 lx) auxiliary
illumination in front of car operating panels that contain
the equipment specified in the Code. If there is any
question as to whether the normal or auxiliary illumina-
tion is adequate, require that light intensity readings be
taken.
Determine that light bulbs and tubes are guarded or
recessed to provide protection from accidental breakage.
Glass panels and their structure must be capable of with-
standing the required elevator tests without damage.
Check if glass exceeding 1 ft2 (0.093 m2) in area and
abutting panels whose total area is greater than 1 ft2
(0.093 m2) meet the requirements for laminated glass or,
in jurisdictions enforcing NBCC, safety glass or safety
plastic in compliance with the applicable standard.
Car lights may be turned off automatically.
A17.1b-1989 and later editions specify certain condi-
tions that must be met before lights can be automatically
turned off.
ITEM 1.5
CAR LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLES
1.5.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Normal Illumination. Examine lighting fixtures to
determine whether they are securely fastened. At least
two lamps must be provided. Examine the electric light-
ing fixtures to verify that bulbs or tubes are guarded to
prevent injury to persons in the event of breakage. For
elevators installed under A17.1d-2000 and earlier edi-
tions, verify means are provided to contain shattered
glass if the light diffuser is of the open "egg-crate" type.
1.5.4 References
1.5.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 204.7 and 1001.2(a)(5).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.14.7 and 8.11.2.1.1(e).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.4.5 and 3.4.6.
1.5.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 301.7 and 1004.2(a)(5).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.14 and 8.11.3.1.1(e).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.4.5 and 3.4.6 {4.2.3}.
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
ITEM 1.6
CAR EMERGENCY SIGNAL
(10) 1.6.1 Periodic Inspections
Elevators installed under A17. 1-1955 through
A17.1b-1980, which are operated without a designated
attendant, must be provided with an emergency signal
audible outside the hoistway, or with a telephone.
All elevators installed under A17.1b-1980 and later
editions and A17.3 are required to have emergency sig-
naling devices. A17.1a-1991 and later editions require
that the switch marked "ALARM" be illuminated when
activated and that elevators with a travel greater than
100 ft (30.4 m) be provided with a second audible signal-
ing device at the designated level. Operate the audible
signaling device (alarm) and the means of two-way con-
versation. Disconnect the normal power source to check
that the emergency power source will operate the light-
ing, alarm, and means of two-way conversation. In
buildings that do not have someone in continuous atten-
dance, check the outdoor signal or means of conversa-
tion with outside emergency service. Elevators installed
under A17.1-1955 through A17.1a~1979 are required to
have an emergency signaling device only if the car is
operated at any time without a designated operator in
the car.
A17.1b~1968 through A17.1-1971 require means of
two-way conversation on automatic elevators having a
travel of 65 ft (19.8 m) or more or a distance exceeding
15 ft (4.5 m) between landings. A17. 1-1978 and later
editions require means of two-way conversation on all
automatic elevators. They are also required to operate
in case of failure of the normal building power supply.
1.6.2 Periodic Test: Yearly Test (for A17.1d-2000
and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions)
When there is a question as to the adequate capacity
or condition of the emergency power supply, a test
should be made.
1.6.3 Acceptance
1.6.4 References
1.6.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 211.1 and 1001.2(a)(6).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.27.1 and 8.11.2.1.1(f).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.11.1.
1.6.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 211.1 {306.11} and 1004.2(a)(6).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.27.1 {3.27} and 8.11.3.1.1(f).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.11.1 {4.7.8}.
ITEM 1.7
CAR DOOR OR GATE
1.7.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Examination of Doors or Gates. Examine the car
door or gates and note any broken, bent, or sprung
members. Operate doors or gates to verify that they
operate freely and that bottom sill-guide tracks or bot-
tom guiding members are in place, securely fastened,
and are not worn enough to permit the doors or gates
to come out of their tracks at any position of their travel.
Verify that all depressions and moldings are not raised
or depressed from the exposed surface more than per-
mitted by the Code. A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions
allowed up to \ in. (6.3 mm). Collapsible- type gates are
not permitted on passenger elevators installed under
A17.1a-1988 and later editions. Check collapsible gates
for proper restraint of vertical members to restrict hori-
zontal deflection.
(b) Test for Closed Position. With the hoist way doors
or gates in the closed position, check the closed position
of the car doors or gates as outlined in Item 4.2.1(b)
for hoist way door or gate interlocks. A door or gate is
considered to be in the closed position when the clear
open space between the leading edge of the door or gate
and the nearest face of the jamb or sill does not exceed
2 in. (51 mm) or, in the case of biparting doors, when
the door panels are within 2 in. (51 mm) of contact with
each other.
(c) Location of Car Doors or Gates. A17.3 and
A17.1-1937 and later editions specify the maximum dis-
tance from the face of the car door or gate to the face
of the hoistway door. Where the distance is exceeded,
verify that space guards are provided on either car or
hoistway doors, and that sight guards are provided for
horizontally sliding hoistway doors. Take measurements
to confirm compliance with these requirements.
1.7.2 Periodic Test
1.7.3 Acceptance
Verify that the car door or gate electric contact or car
door interlock is inaccessible from inside the car. Verify
that the distance from the face of the car door or gate
to the face of the hoistway door does not exceed the
Code requirements or a car door interlock is provided
and the car door complies with the structural require-
ments in the Code. Verify openings in vertically sliding
gates do not exceed the Code requirements. Verify two
independent suspension means are provided for verti-
cally sliding car doors or gates and weights for balancing
or closing comply with the Code requirements. Verify
that when the car is stopped within the unlocking zone
and power is cut off to the door operator, the car door
and connected hoistway doors can be opened by hand.
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
1.7.4 References
1.7.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 112.2a, 204.4, 204.5, 204.6, 210.2(q)/ and
1001.2(a)(7).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.5.1.5.3, 2.13.2.1, 2.14.4, 2.14.5, 2.14.6,
2.26.2 (2.26.2.15), and 8.11.2.1.1(g).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.4.2 and 3.4.3; and Appendix A.
1.7.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions ~~ Rules 111.7(c) {300.12), 112.2a {300.13},
204.4 through 204.6 {301.7}, 210. 2(q) {306.4}, and
1004.2(a)(7).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2,5.1.5.3 {3.5}, 2.12.7.3 {3.12}, 2.13.2.1 {3.13},
2.14.4 through 2.14.6 {3.14}, 2.26.2 (2.26.2.15), {3.26.4},
and 8.11.3.1.1(g).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.4.2 and 3.4.3 {4.2.3}; and
Appendix A.
ITEM 1.8
DOOR CLOSING FORCE
1.8.1 Periodic Inspections
To test the door closing force, park the car at floor
level and start the doors in the closing direction. Allow
the doors to close between one-third and two-thirds of
their normal travel and stop them. Push a force measur-
ing device with a range appropriate to measure 30 lbf
(133 N) against the stopped door, removing the stop so
the door is held stationary by the force measuring
device. Slowly back off on the device until the point the
door just starts to move. At this point, the door and
measuring forces are in equilibrium and the force can
be read.
(io) 1.8.2 Periodic Test: Category 1 (Annual) Test
Check the closing speed of horizontal sliding door for
compliance with kinetic energy requirement. For eleva-
tors installed under A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later edi-
tions of the Code, and for elevators with this data on
the door operator data plate, verify that closing time in
the code zone is not less than the minimum closing time
shown on the door operator data plate.
1.8.3 Acceptance
(io) 1.8.4 References
1.8.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 112.4(b), 1001.2(a)(8), and 1002.2h.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 through 2007 editions —
Requirements 2.13.4.2.3, 8.11.2.1.1(h), 2.13.4.2.4, and
8.11.2.2.8.
A17.1a-2008/B44a-08 and later editions —
Requirement 8.6.4.19.8.
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.8.1.
1.8.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 112.4(b), 301.7, and 1004.2(a)(8).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 through 2007 editions —
Requirements 2.13.4.2.3, 3.14, 2.13.4.2.4, and
8.11.3.1.1(h).
A17.1a~2008/B44a-08 and later editions —
Requirement 8.6.5.14.3(g).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.8.1 {Section 4.1}.
ITEM 1.9
POWER CLOSING OF DOORS
OR GATES
1.9.1 Periodic Inspections
Where a door open button is provided, check that
when depressed and the door is closing it causes the
door to stop or to stop and reopen. Where sequence
closing is provided on a vertically sliding door, check
its operation.
1.9.2 Periodic Test
1.9.3 Acceptance
1.9.4 References
1.9.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 112.3 and 1001.2(a)(9).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13.3 and 8.11.2.1.1(1).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.8.2.
1.9.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 112.3 (300.13) and 1004.2(a)(9).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13.3 (3.13) and 8.11.3.1. l(i).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.8.2 (Section 4.1).
ITEM 1.10
POWER OPENING OF DOORS
OR GATES
1.10.1 Periodic Inspections
If collapsible gates are power operated, check that
power opening is limited. Check finger guards on col-
lapsible gates.
1.10.2 Periodic Test
(a) 5-Year Test, Advance Power Opening (for All \ld-2000
and earlier editions); Category 5 Test, Advance Power
Opening (for A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions). Verify
that power opening of the doors can occur only when
the car is within 18 in. (457 mm) of the landing. In the
case of static control, installed under A17.1a-1988 and
later editions, the person or firm performing the test
must demonstrate that power is not applied to open the
doors when the car is more than 12 in. (305 mm) from
the landing. Verify that the car is stopped or substantially
(io)
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
level with the landing before the hoistway door is fully
open. Also, see Fig. 1.10.2.
(b) 5-Year Test of Leveling Zone and Leveling Speed (for
A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 5 Test of
Leveling Zone (for A17 .1-2000 /B 44-00 and Later Editions).
Check that the zone in which the leveling device will
move the car toward the landing does not exceed 30 in.
(762 mm) for an automatic device or 10 in. (254 mm)
for a manual device. The leveling speed is not permitted
to exceed 150 ft/min (0.76 m/s).
For static control elevators, installed under
A17.1a-1988 and later editions, the person or firm
installing or maintaining the elevator must provide a
written checkout procedure, and demonstrate to the
authority having jurisdiction that the leveling speed
with the doors open is limited to a maximum of
150 ft/min (0.76 m/s) and that the limiting (or speed
monitor) means is independent of the operation of the
normal means to control this speed.
1.10.2.1 Electric Elevators. 5-Year Test of Inner
Landing Zone (for A17. ld-2000 and Earlier Editions);
Category 5 Test of Inner Landing Zone (for A17. 1-2000/
B44-00 and Later Editions). On static control elevators,
installed under A17.1a-1988 and later editions, the per-
son or firm installing or maintaining the equipment is
required to submit a written procedure and demonstrate
that the zone in which the car can move with the doors
open is no more than 3 in. (76 mm) above or below the
landing.
1.10.2.2 Hydraulic Elevators. For static control ele-
vators, installed under A17.1a-1988 and later editions,
the person or firm installing or maintaining the elevator
must provide a written checkout procedure, and demon-
strate to the authority having jurisdiction that the level-
ing speed with the doors open is limited to a maximum
of 150 ft/min (0.76 m/s) and that the limiting (or speed
monitor) means is independent of the operation of the
normal means to control this speed.
1.10.3 Acceptance
1.10.4 References
(10) 1.10.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 111.12, 210.1e, 210.9c, 1001.2(a)(10),
1002.3g, 1002.3h, and 1002.3L
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements (NR 111.12), 2.26.1.6, 2.26.9 (2.26.9.3),
8.11.2.1.1(3), 8.11.2.3.7, 8.11.2.3.8, c8. 11.2. 3. 8, and
8.11.2.3.9.
1.10.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A 1 7. ld-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 111.5 {300.12}, 210. le, 210.9(c),
306.3, and 1004.2(a)(10).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.12.5 {3.12}, 2.26.1.6, 2.26.9 (2.26.9.3),
3.26.3, and 8.11.3.1. l(j).
ITEM 1.11
CAR VISION PANELS AND GLASS
CAR DOORS
1.11.1 Periodic Inspections
If the glass in the door panel is less than 60%, or
80% for elevators installed under A17.1b-1989 through
A17.1a-1994, of the total surface area of the door, it is
a vision panel and must conform to those requirements.
Car vision panels are required to be of wire or laminated
glass and have a maximum area of 144 in.2 (0.093 m2) and
maximum panel width of 6 in. (152 mm). A17.1d-1970
through A 17. 1-2004, in addition to the above require-
ments, required glazing materials to conform to
ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR Part 1201. A17.1a-2005,
A17.1S-2005, and later editions required glazing materi-
als to conform to 16 CFR Part 1201. These Standards
require that the glazing material be marked as follows:
ANSI Z97. 1-1984 or 16 CFR Part 1201; Manufacturer's
mark or designation. A17.1a-1997 through A17.1d-2000
required vision panels to comply with 16 CFR Part 1201
or be made of wire glass. A17.1b-1989 and later editions
require glass doors to be provided with laminated glass
that complies with ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR Part 1201.
In addition, in Canada safety glass or safety plastic is
permitted in A17.1-2000. Check that the leading edge
of the panels is not made out of glass and that the glass
surface on the car side is substantially flush.
Verify that the glass is the right type (wired or lami-
nated), is not cracked or broken, and is marked with
glazing standard. Since ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR Part 1201
covers many types of glazing materials, the required
marking does not assure that the glazing is laminated
glass. If laminated glass is tapped lightly with the edge
of a coin, the sound will be dampened and different
from nonlaminated glass.
1.11.2 Periodic Test
1.11.3 Acceptance
When a glass door is provided, check the type of glass,
thickness, minimum surface area, and edging.
1.11.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. When 80% of the sur-
face area of the door is glass, it is classified as a glass door.
1.11.4 References
1.11.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 204.2e, 204.5i, and 1001.2(a)(ll).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.14.2.5, 2.14.5.8, and 8.11.2.1. l(k).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.4.2 and 3.4.3.
1.11.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A 17. ld-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 204. 2e and 204.5i (301.7), and
1004.2(a)(ll).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.14.2.5, 2.14.5.8 (3.14), and 8.11.3.1.1(k).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.4.2 and 3.4.3 {4.2.3}.
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 1.10.2 Door Operation Relative to Car Position
66 in.
Distance
car sill is
above landing
Landing
Distance
car sill is
below landing
Truck Zone
Car allowed to move with doors open
(Requirements 2.12 and 2.26.1.6)
30 in.
Landing Zone (Automatic Operation Elevators)
Horizontal slide or swing doors must be closed
mechanically when outside of this zone
(Requirements 1.3 and 2.11.3)
Unlocking Zone (Maximum)
Opening of car and/or hoistway doors permitted
(Requirements 2.11.6, 2.12, and 2.14.5.7)
18 in.
12 in.
10 in.
Inner Landing Zone (Static Controls)
Car may not move if stopped outside of this zone
unless doors are fully closed
(Requirement 2.26.1.6.7)
Unlocking Zone (Minimum)
Manual opening of car and hoistway doors required
(Requirements 2.12 and 2.14.5.7)
3 in.
1 in.
Landing
1 in.
3 in.
10 in.
12 in.
18 in.
30 in.
Anticreep Leveling Zone (Hydraulic Elevators)
Anticreep leveling device shall maintain car within
this zone
(Requirement 3.26.3)
Leveling Zone (Manual Leveling) Power opening of
doors permitted
(Requirements 2.12.3.1, 2.13.2.1, and 2.26.1.6)
Leveling Zone (Automatic Leveling With Static Controls)
Initiation of power opening of doors permitted
(Requirements 2.12.3.1, 2.13.2, and 2.26.1.6)
Leveling Zone (Automatic Leveling Without Static Controls)
Door opening cannot occur outside of unlocking zone.
Initiation of power opening of doors permitted
(Requirements 2.12.3.1, 2.13.2, and 2.26.1.6)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Refer to Requirement numbers for details.
(b) 1 in. = 25.4 mm
(c) Refer to applicable edition of the Code.
10
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
ITEM 1.12
CAR ENCLOSURE
(10) 1.12.1 Periodic Inspections
Verify that the car enclosure is structurally sound and
is securely fastened to the platform. Verify that capacity
plates and any required certificates are posted in the
car. Note any evidence of alterations or additions to the
car that have materially changed the car weight. Also,
note any alteration to car enclosure, including decorative
panels. (See Item 1.12.3.)
(a) Freight elevators installed under A17.1a-1982 and
later editions verify that signs specifying the class of
loading are in place and the loading imposed on the
elevator is as specified on the sign. Verify that signs
restricting passenger use are posted.
(b) Freight elevators installed under A17. 1-1955
through Al 7. 1-1 981 are required to have one of the fol-
lowing signs:
(1) "THIS ELEVATOR DESIGNED FOR GENERAL
FREIGHT LOADING/7
(2) "THIS ELEVATOR DESIGNED FOR MOTOR-
VEHICLE LOADING."
(3) "THIS ELEVATOR DESIGNED FOR LOADED
INDUSTRIAL TRUCK WEIGHING LB
MAXIMUM."
On elevators not permitted to carry passengers, the
following additional sign must be posted: "THIS IS NOT
A PASSENGER ELEVATOR, NO PERSONS OTHER
THAN THE OPERATOR AND FREIGHT HANDLERS
ARE PERMITTED TO RIDE ON THIS ELEVATOR."
The above sign regarding passengers is also
required by A17.3.
In elevators permitted to carry employees, the sign
should read: "NO PASSENGERS EXCEPT EMPLOYEES
PERMITTED."
(c) For freight elevators installed under A 17. 1-1984
and later editions, check the Code for required sign
wording.
(d) For passenger elevators and freight elevators
installed under A17.1-1987 and later editions that are
permitted to carry passengers, check to see that there
are no openings, other than those required for signal,
operating or communication equipment, entrances,
vision panels, emergency exits, or ventilation. In addi-
tion, A17.1-2000 and later editions permit access panels
for maintenance and cleaning of glass on observation
elevators.
(e) Napped, tufted, woven, looped, or similar materi-
als are allowed on car enclosure walls if they meet the
test requirements. Test reports should be available to
indicate compliance with acceptance criteria.
(f) Note any equipment inside cars other than that
used for the operation of the elevator. The Code permits
lighting, heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning
devices to be installed inside all cars, and permits con-
veyor tracks, lift hooks, and support beams mounted
in the ceiling of passenger elevators. Check structural
supports and clearances from floor.
(g) A17.1-1990 and later editions required the car to
have an identification number on the car control station
where more than one elevator's machinery is in a
hoistway or machine room.
(h) A17.1a-1991 and later editions required that pan-
els be attached to the enclosure with tamper-resistant
fasteners, or when the panels are removed any perfora-
tions greater than \ in. (13 mm) diameter be guarded.
(i) Perforations in car enclosures for freight elevators
installed under A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions should
reject a ball 1V2 in. (38 mm) in diameter.
(j) Check that a written procedure is available for
cleaning inside the hoistway for observation elevators.
Verify that the elevator will not operate unless all access
panels are in the closed and locked position.
1.12.2 Periodic Test
1.12.3 Acceptance
Check the headroom in the car. Check laminated glass
or, in jurisdictions enforcing NBCC, safety glass or safety
plastic for the required markings. Where glass is used
in wall panels, check that the opening is guarded. Check
access panels for cleaning transparent enclosures, when
provided.
NOTE: Bonded glass is considered equivalent to laminated glass
since it must meet testing requirements of ANSI Z97.1 or
16 CFR Part 1201; it will bond fragments and retain broken glass,
and it prohibits the use of film coatings (organic-coated glass) that
is easily damaged, which would render them ineffective.
Check that the car enclosure material (exposed to the
car interior or the hoistway) is metal, laminated glass,
or has been type-tested in its end-use configuration and
that the flame spread smoke contribution, vertical burn,
test and critical radiant flux of the enclosure material
conform to the Code requirements. Material V4 in.
(6.4 mm) or less in thickness can be installed over an
existing car enclosure, without type testing in the
end-use configuration. The flame spread rating for the
added material and adhesive is more severe than that
required for a new car enclosure tested in its end-use
configuration. If in doubt, request a copy of the test
report.
Verify that ventilation openings are properly located,
sized, and where required, guarded against through
openings. Check for the minimum clear headroom.
1.12.4 References
1.12.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules (NR 2.7.5.1.4), 204, 204.1b, 204.1h,
(NR 2.14.2.6), 207.2b, 207.4, 207.5, 211.9, 1104, 1206.9,
1202.5, and 1001.2(a)(12); and Sections 204.2b,
(NR 2.14.2.6), and (NR 8.1).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.7.5.1.4, 2.14, 2.14.1.2, 2.14.1.8, 2.14.2.6,
11
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
2.16.2.2, 2.16.4, 2.16.5, 2.29.1, 8.3.7, 8.6.10.3, 8.7.2.14, and
8.11.2.1.1(1); and requirements 2.14.2.2, 2.14.2.6, and 8.1.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.4.1 and 3.7.5.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
1.12.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Sections 204.1b, 204. lh {Rule 301.7}, and
1104; and Rules 204. 2d {301.7}, 211.9 {306.11},
1004.2(a)(12), 1202.5, and 1203.2e.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.14 (3.14) and 8.3.7; and requirements
2.29.1 {3.27}, 8.11.3.1.1(1), 8.7.2.14, and 8.7.3.13.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.4.1 {4.2.3} and 3.7.5 {4.2.4}.
ITEM 1.13
EMERGENCY EXIT
1.13.1 Periodic Inspections
(10) 1.13.1.1 Determine that top emergency exit panels
are in place and not obstructed (see Item 3.8); and deter-
mine whether on elevators installed under A17. 1-2000/
B44-00 and earlier editions, side emergency exit doors
are closed and locked. Check the electric contact on
the side emergency exit doors. Check that the key for
unlocking the side emergency exit is available to elevator
personnel only. Verify that any side emergency exit door
is so hinged as to swing in, that it can be opened from
the inside only by using a special-shaped removable key,
that it can be opened from the outside by means of a
nonremovable handle, and that it is provided with a
properly functioning contact to cause power to be
removed from the driving machine and brake when
opened. Side emergency exits were required on passen-
ger elevators installed to A17. 1-1955 through 1990, and
were permitted on passenger and freight elevators
installed or altered to A17.1a~1991 through A17. 1-2000/
B44-00; where there is an adjacent elevator within 30 in.
(762 mm) and no intervening obstructions. Side emer-
gency exits were required on hydraulic passenger eleva-
tors with safeties installed to A17.1-1955 through 1995,
and were permitted on passenger and freight elevators
installed to A17.1-1996 and later editions. A17.1a-2002
and later editions prohibit side emergency exits.
1.13.2 Periodic Test
1.13.3 Acceptance
1.13.4 References
(10) 1.13.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 204.1e, 204.1), 204.2d, and 1001.2(a)(13).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.14.1.5, 2.14.1.10, 2.14.2.4, 8.1.2, 8.6.10.2
(not applicable in jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC),
and 8.11.2.1.1(m).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.4.4.
1.13.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A 1 7. ld-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 204.1J {301.7} and 1004.2(a)(13).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.14.1.10, 3.14, 8.1.2, 8.6.10.2, and
8.11.3.1. l(m).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.4.4 {4.2.4}.
ITEM 1.14
VENTILATION
1.14.1 Periodic Inspections
If ventilating fans are installed inside the car, verify
that they are properly guarded, adequately supported,
and securely fastened in place and not obstructing the
emergency exit. Ventilating fan blowers, if provided, are
to be located above the car ceiling or outside the car
enclosure.
Check that observation elevators exposed to direct
sunlight, which are installed under A17.1a-1985 and
later editions, are provided with forced ventilation and
that an emergency power source is on each car that is
capable of operating the ventilation for 1 h. The mini-
mum capacity for this ventilation is one air change per
minute.
1.14.2 Periodic Test
1.14.3 Acceptance
1.14.4 References
1.14.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 204.1i, 204.2c, 204.3c, and 1001.2(a)(14).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.14.1.9.1(f), 2.14.2.3, 2.14.3.3, and
8.11.2.1.1(n).
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
1.14.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A 17. ld-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 204.1i, 204.2c, and 204.3c {301.7},
and 1004.2(a)(14).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.14.1.9.1(f), 2.14.2.3, and 2.143.3 {3.14},
and 8.11.3.1.1(n).
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
ITEM 1.15
SIGNS AND OPERATING DEVICE SYMBOLS
1.15.1 Periodic Inspections
Check that symbols are substituted for, or used in
conjunction with, the required wording for operating
devices on elevators installed under A17.1a~1979 and
later editions and that the main floor is identified by
a star.
1.15.2 Periodic Test
1.15.3 Acceptance
1.15.4 References
1.15.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 210.13 and 1001.2(a)(15).
(io)
12
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.26.12 and 8.11.2.1.1(o).
1.15.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 210.13 1306.12} and 1004.2(a)(15).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions - Requirements
2.26.12 (NR 306.12) and 8.11.3.1.1(o).
ITEM 1.16
RATED LOAD, PLATFORM AREA, AND DATA PLATE
1.16.1 Periodic Inspections
Check that the data (capacity) plate is installed inside
the car.
1.16.2 Periodic Test
1.16.3 Acceptance
Measure the inside dimensions of the car 36 in.
(914 mm) above the floor, inside of any panels or wall
surfaces, but exclusive of any handrails and space for
doors, and compute the inside net platform area. Com-
pare this area with the maximum area permitted for the
rated load. The Code includes limitations of inside net
platform area in relation to the rated load for freight
elevators for three classes of loading, including special
requirements where the loading is by industrial trucks.
Determine that signs, and capacity and data plates are
provided.
1.16.4 References
1.16.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 207 and Rule 1001.2(a)(16).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.16 and 8.11.2.1. l(p).
A17.3 — Section 3.7.
1.16.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 207 {Rule 301.10}, and Rule
1004.2(a)(16).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.16 {3.16) and 8.11.3.1. l(p).
A17.3 — Section 3.7 {para. 4.2.4}.
ITEM 1.17
STANDBY POWER OPERATION
1.17.1 Periodic Inspections
Visually inspect transfer switch and means of transfer
for evidence of damage or misuse. Verify that the key
used to operate the selection switch is adequately
controlled.
1.17.2 Periodic Test
1.17.2.1 Electric Elevators: Yearly Test (for
A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions). Have the ele-
vators) taken out of normal service and placed at the
floor where the ELEVATOR EMERGENCY POWER
selector switch is located, if provided. Otherwise, have
the elevator(s) taken out of normal service and placed
at the bottom terminal. Have the system transferred, by
the responsible party, to standby or emergency power.
Verify that the ELEVATOR EMERGENCY POWER selec-
tor switch (automatic sequence operation override
switch), if provided, functions as required to manually
select each elevator, one at a time, when on standby or
emergency power. Verify that the elevator selected can
be taken out of service with the ELEVATOR
EMERGENCY POWER selector switch only when the
elevator is stopped. Operate each elevator selected to
be operated on standby or emergency power, one at a
time, with no load in the car. Make several trips and
stops checking for proper operation. Verify that the ele-
vator is running at normal speed especially in the up
direction (speed must not attain the governor electrical
overspeed trip setting or 125% of rated speed in both
directions, whichever is the lesser). If a separate power
absorption means such as a resistor bank is used to
absorb regenerative power, verify that it is provided on
the load side of each elevator disconnect switch, or a
common resistor load bank is provided on the elevator
feeder. Have the system transferred, by the responsible
party, back to normal power and verify that the eleva-
tors) tested operate properly in normal service.
1.17.2.2 Hydraulic Elevators: Yearly Test (for
A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions). Have the ele-
vators) taken out of normal service and placed at the
floor where the ELEVATOR EMERGENCY POWER
selector switch is located, if provided. Otherwise, have
the elevator(s) taken out of normal service and placed
at the bottom terminal. Have the system transferred, by
the responsible party, to standby or emergency power.
Verify that the ELEVATOR EMERGENCY POWER selec-
tor switch (automatic sequence operation override
switch), if provided, functions as required to manually
select each elevator, one at a time, when on standby or
emergency power. Verify that the elevator can be taken
out of service with the ELEVATOR EMERGENCY
POWER selector switch only when that elevator is
stopped. Operate each elevator designated to be oper-
ated on the standby or emergency power, one at a time,
with no load in the car. Make several trips and stops
checking for proper operation. Have the system trans-
ferred, by the responsible party, back to normal power
and verify that the elevator(s) tested operate properly
in normal service.
1.17.3 Acceptance
In addition to the test outlined in Item 1.17.2.1, verify
that the ELEVATOR EMERGENCY POWER selector
13
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
switch (automatic sequence operation override switch),
if provided, is key operated or behind a locked cover.
Verify that the key is available to only emergency person-
nel and complies with Group 3 security level.
(10) 1.17.3.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Verify with the authorized personnel if there are
other building loads used to absorb elevator regenera-
tive power, and that they are automatically connected
to the standby or emergency power system when the
elevator is transferred to standby or emergency power.
If other building loads used to absorb elevator regenera-
tive power are not automatically connected, verify that
a separate regenerative power absorption means, such
as a resistor load bank, is provided on the load side of
each elevator disconnect switch, or a common resistor
load bank is provided on the elevator feeder.
(b) Have the elevator taken out of normal service and
placed at the top terminal with rated load in the car for
freight elevators or 125% of rated load for passenger
elevators and freight elevators that are permitted to carry
passengers in the car. Have the system transferred, by
the responsible party, to standby or emergency power
as in Item 1.17.2.1. For each elevator designated to be
operated on the standby or emergency power, run the
elevator down, one at a time, nonstop, to the bottom
terminal. The speed of each operating elevator must not
attain governor electrical over speed trip or 125% of rated
speed, whichever is the lesser. Then for passenger eleva-
tors and freight elevators that are permitted to carry
passengers in the car, reduce the load in the car to rated
load (full load) and run the elevator, one at a time,
up and down with several stops, checking for proper
operation. Have the system transferred, by the responsi-
ble party, back to normal power and verify that the
elevators tested operate properly in normal service.
1.17.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. The testing of hydrau-
lic elevators is as specified in Item 1.17.3.1(b) with the
exception that 100% of the load is used.
1.17.4 References
1.17.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 207.8, 210.10, 211.2, 1001.2(a)(17),
1002.2g, and 1002.3e.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.16.8, 2.26.10, 2.27.2, 8.11.2.1. l(q),
8.11.2.2.7, and 8.11.2.3.5.
1.17.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 211.2 {306.11}, 1002.2g {1005.2c(6)},
and 1004.2(a)(17).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.27.2 {3.27}, 8.11.2.2.7 {8.11.3.2.3(f)}, and
8.11.3.1.1(q).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.11.2 {4.7.8}.
ITEM 1.18
RESTRICTED OPENING OF CAR OR HOISTWAY
DOORS
1.18.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) All passenger elevators installed under
A17.1b-1980 and later editions must comply with
restricted opening of the hoistway or car doors. When
the car is outside a specified zone, this requires that
either the hoistway door or car door can be opened no
more than 4 in. (102 mm) from inside the car but the
car door can be opened from outside the car without
special tools. The specified zone in which restricted
opening applies depends on when an elevator was
installed as follows:
(1) On elevators installed under A17.1tM980
through A17.1a-1982, the specified zone is outside the
landing zone [18 in. (457 mm) above or below the
landing].
(2) On elevators installed under A17.1b-1983
through A17.1a-1988 and those that must comply with
A17.3, the specified zone is outside the unlocking zone.
The unlocking zone is a distance set by the manufacturer
between 0 in. and 18 in. (457 mm) above and below the
landing. (An unlocking zone is not required.)
(3) On elevators installed under A17.1b-1989 and
later editions, the doors must be able to be opened from
0 in. to 3 in. (76 mm) above and below the landing [an
unlocking zone is required and doors may be opened
up to 18 in. (457 mm) above and below the landing]. The
car or hoistway door must meet the restricted opening
requirements when the car is more than 18 in. (457 mm)
above and below the landing.
(b) Some manufacturers comply with this by locking
the car door rather than the hoistway door. Some manu-
facturers incorporate the locking into the door operator,
and some install vanes or other mechanisms on the doors
and hoistway to achieve compliance. Follow the proce-
dure below to verify compliance with this requirement.
(1) For elevators installed under A17.1b-1980 and
later editions and elevators required to comply with
A17.3, have the car stopped at a point beyond 18 in.
(457 mm) above and then below the landing. With the
power off, attempt to manually open the car door. If the
car door opens more than 4 in. (102 mm), the hoistway
door must not open more than 4 in. (102 mm) from
inside the car with the car in any position more than
18 in. (457 mm) above or below the landing.
(2) For elevators installed under A17.1b-1989 and
later editions, follow the previous procedure. If found
satisfactory, have the car stopped at the 3 in. (76 mm)
point and verify that the doors can be manually opened.
(3) Both of the previous checks will only be
required at one or two landings if the restricted opening
mechanism can be inspected from the car top.
(io)
14
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
1.18.2 Periodic Test
1.18.3 Acceptance
See Fig. 1.10.2.
1.18.4 References
1.18.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 111.12 and 1001.2(a)(18).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements (NR 111.12) and 8.11.2.1.1(r).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.7.4.
1.18.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 111.5 {300.12) and 1004.2(a)(18).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.12.5 (3.12} and 8.11.3.1.1(r).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.7.4 {Section 4.1}.
ITEM 1.19
CAR RIDE
1.19.1 Periodic Inspections
Operate the car at normal operation speed from one
terminal landing to the other, listen for unusual noise,
and observe whether there is excessive or irregular
motion of the car, which may indicate that the car or
counterweight guide rails are not properly aligned. If
such motion occurs, when on top of the car, check for
loose or worn guide shoes or rollers and proper align-
ment of the guide rails.
1.19.2 Periodic Test
1.19.3 Acceptance
1.19.4 References
1.19.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 200; and Rules 203.2 and
1001.2(a)(19).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.23, 2.15.2, and 8.11.2.1.1(s).
1.19.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 301.1a, 301.6, 1004.2(a)(19), and
1206.1a {1206.5a}.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.23.1, 3.15, 8.11.3.1.1(s), and 8.6.1.6.2
{8.6.5}.
ITEM 1.20
EARTHQUAKE INSPECTION AND TESTS
(SEISMIC RISK ZONE 2 OR GREATER)
1.20.1 Periodic Inspections
Verify that the top emergency exit is secured with a
spring return cylinder lock and can be opened with a
key from inside the car. Verify that the key is available
only to authorized personnel. Where hoistway access
key is used for this purpose, it shall be Group 1 Security.
NOTE: Hoistway access key is permitted to unlock the top emer-
gency exit.
1.20.2 Periodic Test
1.20.3 Acceptance
Verify proper operation when top exit is open in seis-
mic risk zone 2 or greater.
1.20.4 References
A17.1-1993 through A17.1d-2000 editions — Rule
2406.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 8.4.
(10)
15
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Part 2
Elevator — Machine Room
ITEM 2.1
ACCESS TO MACHINE SPACE
2.1.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Check that permanent, safe, and convenient means
of access to machine rooms and machinery spaces have
been provided and maintained. Check stairways and
ladders to see they are stable and secure.
(b) Check that the access door is maintained in the
closed and locked position. It must be self-closing and
openable from the inside without a key For elevators
installed under A17.1-1978 and later editions, also check
that the door is self-locking.
2.1.2 Periodic Test
2.1.3 Acceptance
2.1.3.1 Electric Elevators. Check that access to the
machine room meets the accessibility requirements of
the Code. For access doors required to have fire-
protection ratings, check for proper labeling. Access to
the machine room includes passage from the top build-
ing floor to the machine room.
2.1.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Check that access to
the machine room meets the accessibility requirements
of the Code. For access doors required to have fire-
protection ratings, check for proper labeling.
2.1.4 References
2.1.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 101.1a, 101.3a, 101.3b, 101.3c, 101.3d,
and 1001.2(b)(1).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.7.1.1, 2.7.3.1, 2.7.3.2, 2.7.3.3, 2.7.3.4, and
8.11.2.1.2(a).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.2.2.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
2.1.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 300.1, 300.2, and 1004.2(b)(1).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.1, 3.7, and 8.11.3.1.2(a).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.2.2 {Section 4.1}.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
ITEM 2.2
HEADROOM
2.2.1 Periodic Inspections
2.2.2 Periodic Test
2.2.3 Acceptance
Verify that machine and control rooms have the mini-
mum overhead clearances. Clear headroom measure-
ments are taken from the floor to the bottom of the
lowest obstruction below the ceiling (e.g., wiring race-
ways, conduit, beams).
2.2.4 References
2.2.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 101.4 and 1001.2(b)(2).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.7.4 and 8.11.2.1.2(b).
2.2.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 101.4 {300.2} and 1004.2(b)(2).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.4.7 {3.7} and 8.11.3.1.2(b).
ITEM 2.3
LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLES
2.3.1 Periodic Inspections
Check machine room for adequate lighting. For eleva-
tors installed under A17.1a-1988 and later editions,
check that a duplex receptacle has been provided in
the machine room and machinery spaces, and that it is
operable.
2.3.2 Periodic Test
2.3.3 Acceptance
2.3.4 References
2.3.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 101.5a, 101.5c, and 1001.2(b)(3).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.7.5.1, (NR 101.5c), and 8.11.2.1.2(c).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.2.3.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
2.3.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 101.5a and 101.5c {300.2}, and
1004.2(b)(3).
16
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.7.5.1 and (NR 101.5c) {3.7}, and
8.11.3.1.2(c).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.2.3 {Section 4.1}.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
ITEM 2.4
MACHINE SPACE
2.4.1 Periodic Inspections
Check the condition of the equipment in the machine
room, overhead machinery spaces, and machinery space
located in the hoist way by examining the following:
(a) Check that overhead gratings or platforms are
properly supported, and secure.
(b) Check the machine room and secondary machine
rooms for any leaks in the roof or windows. Machines,
control equipment, sheaves, and other machinery should
be protected from the elements.
2.4.1.1 Electric Elevators. For elevators installed
under A17. 1-1993 and later editions where remote
machine rooms or control rooms are provided, check the
access to ropes and sheaves. Check the communications
between the elevator car and machine room.
2.4.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Check that machinery
is separated from other parts of the building by required
enclosure. A17.1b-1989 and later editions prohibit loca-
tion of machine and control rooms in the hoistway.
2.4.2 Periodic Test
2.4.3 Acceptance
2.4.3.1 Electric Elevators. For elevators installed
under A17.1-1996 and earlier editions, check that a sign
stating the maximum allowable floor load has been
prominently displayed in all main and secondary
machine rooms. The sign is required to be metal with
black letters and figures at least 4 in. (102 mm) high on
a white background.
Bar- type overhead gratings and platform openings
and fabricated or expanded metal must comply with
Code size requirements. Measure and verify openings
for compliance.
2.4.4 References
2.4.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 100.3c, 100.3d, 100.5, 101.1a, 101.2,
101.8, and 1001.2(b)(4).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.1.3.3, 2.1.3.4, 2.1.5, 2.7.1.1, 2.7.2.1, 2.7.8,
and 8.11.2.1.2(d).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 2.2.1 and 2.2.6.
2.4.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 101.1a {300.2), 105.2 and 105.4
{300.6}, and 1004.2(b)(4).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.7.1.1 {3.7), 2.9.2 and 2.9.4 (3.9), and
8.11.3.1.2(d).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 2.2.2 and 2.2.6 {Section 4.1).
ITEM 2.5
HOUSEKEEPING
2.5.1 Periodic Inspections
Check that the machine room area is not used for the
storage of any flammable liquids with a flash point less
than 110°F (43°C), and for materials and articles not
necessary for the maintenance and operation of the ele-
vator. Check the floor area for cleanliness, noting any
accumulation of oil, grease, or dirt.
For observation elevators with glass car enclosures or
hoistway enclosures, check to see that a written proce-
dure for cleaning the glass exists. The written procedure
is not required to be kept in the machine room, but must
be kept on premises. In jurisdictions enforcing NBCC,
if access openings in the hoistway or car for cleaning
are not provided, cleaning must be performed under
the direct supervision of a maintenance mechanic.
Check that the tops of cars are kept clean, dry, and
are not being used for storage.
2.5.2 Periodic Test
2.5.3 Acceptance
2.5.4 References
2.5.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 1001.2(b)(5), 1206.2b, and 1206.9.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.11.2.1.2(e), 8.6.4.8, and 8.6.10.3.
2.5.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 1004.2(b)(5) and 1206.1, 1206.2b
{1206.5a), and 1206.9.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.11.3.1.2(e) and 8.6.1.2, 8.6.4.8 (8.6.5), and
8.6.10.3.
ITEM 2.6
VENTILATION
2.6.1 Periodic Inspections
Check that mechanical ventilation and air condition-
ing are in operating condition. Check that natural
machine room ventilation is open and functioning.
2.6.2 Periodic Test
2.6.3 Acceptance
Check that adequate ventilation is provided by natu-
ral or mechanical means to ensure safe and normal oper-
ation of the elevator.
(10)
17
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
2.6.4 References
2.6.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 101.5b, 102.4, and 1001.2(b)(6).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.7.5.2, 2.8.4, and 8.11.2.1.2(f).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.2.4.
2.6.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 101.5b {300.2}, 102.4, and
1004.2(b)(6).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.7.5.2 {3.7}, 2.8.4, and 8.11.3.1.2(f).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2,2.4 {Section 41}.
ITEM 2.7
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
2.7.1 Periodic Inspections
Check to see that a class "ABC7 fire extinguisher is
mounted convenient to the access door. The extinguisher
should be tagged to indicate monthly check and required
annual maintenance.
2.7.2 Periodic Test
2.7.3 Acceptance
(10) 2.7.4 References
2.7.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 1001.2(b)(7) and 1206.1h.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.11.2.1.2(g) or c8.11.2.1.2(g) and 8.6.1.6.5.
2.7.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 1004.2(b)(7), and 1206.2f {1206.5a}.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.11.3.1.2(g) or c8.11.3.1.2(g), and (NR
1206.2f) {8.6.5}.
ITEM 2.8
PIPES, WIRING, AND DUCTS
2.8.1 Periodic Inspections
Only such pipes, wiring, and ducts used in direct
connection with the elevator are permitted to be
installed in the machine room or machinery spaces.
Check permitted sprinkler piping for any leakage. For
elevators required to meet A17.3, pipes conveying gases,
vapors, or liquids not connected with the operation of
the elevator must be guarded so that any discharge will
not affect the operation of the elevator.
2.8.2 Periodic Test
2.8.3 Acceptance
Check that sprinkler risers and return piping have
been located outside the machine room and machinery
spaces. Check to see that an automatic, nonresetting
means independent of the elevator control is provided to
disconnect the main line power to the affected elevators
before the sprinkler water is discharged into the machine
room or machinery spaces. A shunt trip circuit breaker
activated by a heat detector is one method of meeting
these requirements. The Code prohibits sprinkler activa-
tion or disconnection of main line power by smoke
detectors.
2.8.4 References
2.8.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d~2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 102.1, 102.2, and 1001.2(b)(8).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.8.1, 2.8.2, and 8.11.2.1.2(h).
A17.1 — Inquiry 88-26.
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.2.5.
ANSI/NFPA 13.
2.8.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 102.1 and 102.2 {300.3}, and
1004.2(b)(8).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.8.1 and 2.8.2 {3.8}, and 8.11.3.1.2(h).
A17.1 — Inquiry 88-26.
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.2.5 {Section 4.1}.
ANSI/NFPA 13.
ITEM 2.9
GUARDING OF EXPOSED AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
2.9.1 Periodic Inspections
Check that guards of auxiliary equipment are in place
and secure.
2.9.2 Periodic Test
2.9.3 Acceptance
2.9.4 References
2.9.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d— 2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 104.1 and 1001.2(b)(9).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.10.1 and 8.11.2.1.2(i).
2.9.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 104.1 {300.5} and 1004.2(b)(9).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.10.1 {3.10} and 8.11.3.1.2(i).
ITEM 2.10
NUMBERING OF ELEVATORS, MACHINES,
CONTROLLERS, AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
2.10.1 Periodic Inspections
For elevators installed under Al 7.1-1960 through
A17.1b-1989, where the machinery of more than one
elevator is in a single machine room, check that the
number for each car has been painted, or securely
18
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
attached to the drive machine, controllers, and discon-
nect switch. A17.1-1990 through A17.1d-2000 numbers
to be at least lV2 in. (38 mm) in height.
2.10.2 Periodic Test
2.10.3 Acceptance
Where there is more than one elevator in the building,
verify that they are properly identified.
2.10.4 References
2.10.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 208.10, 210.4, 211.9, and 1001.2(b)(10).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements (NR 208.10), 2.26.4, 2.29.1, and
8.11.2.1.2(j).
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
2.10.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 210.4, 211.9 {306.11}, and 306.6.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.26.4, 2.29.1 {3.27), and 3.26.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
ITEM 2.11
DISCONNECTING MEANS AND
CONTROL
2.11.1 Periodic Inspections
Check that the main line disconnecting means is in
good working order and securely mounted.
2.11.1.1 Hydraulic Elevators. For elevators installed
under ASME A17.1a-1994 and later editions, verify that
the sign "KEEP SWITCH CLOSED EXCEPT DURING
MAINTENANCE, REPAIRS, AND INSPECTIONS" is
placed on the switch when the anticreep device is depen-
dent on availability of power.
2.11.2 Periodic Test
(10) 2.11.3 Acceptance
(a) Location. Check that the main line disconnecting
means has been located where it is readily accessible to
qualified persons. Also, see 2.11.3.1 for electric elevators
and 2.11.3.2 for hydraulic elevators.
Check that the disconnecting means for the car light-
ing, receptacles and ventilation; and the disconnecting
means for any car heating or air conditioning are located
in the machine room or control room. If there is no
machine room or control room, check that these discon-
necting means are in the same space as the main line
disconnecting means.
For elevators subject to NFPA 70 and CSA 22.1, where
power is supplied from more than one source and there
is not a single means for disconnecting all ungrounded
conductors within a single controller, check that the
warning sign mounted on or next to the disconnecting
means indicates that there are parts of the controller that
are not de-energized by this switch.
(b) Power — Prom More Than One Source. For elevators
with more than one power source, check to see that a
separate disconnecting means has been provided for
each source of electrical power, and that the main line
disconnecting means is within sight of the equipment
served. Check to see that warning signs for multiple
disconnecting means indicating parts of the control
panel are not de-energized by one switch are mounted
on or adjacent to the disconnecting means.
(c) Type. Verify that the main line disconnecting
means does not control the car lighting, receptacles, ven-
tilation, heating or air conditioning; or the pit lighting
or receptacles.
(d) Signage — Car Light Disconnecting Means. If the
disconnecting means for more than one elevator light
source are in the same machine room, the disconnecting
means must be numbered or identified to correspond
to the unique alphabetical or numerical identification
assigned to correspond to the elevator car whose light
source the disconnecting means controls.
Verify that a sign is provided for each disconnecting
means that indicates the location of the supply side
overcurrent protective device (fuse or circuit breaker).
Verify that arc flash warning signs, where required, are
in place and clearly visible.
Check that the disconnecting means for the cab light-
ing/ventilation circuit does not disconnect power to the
door operator or the means of two-way
communications.
2.11.3.1 Electric Elevators
(a) For elevators without generator field control, the
main line disconnecting means must be located within
sight of the motor controller. When the driving machine
or motion and operation controllers are not within sight
of the disconnecting means, an additional manually
operated switch is required to be installed adjacent to
the remote equipment connected in the control circuit
to prevent starting.
When the driving machine or motion controller and
operation controllers are not within sight of the discon-
necting means, an additional manually operated switch
is required to be installed adjacent to remote equipment
that is connected in the control circuit to prevent starting.
(b) For elevators with generator field control, the main
line disconnecting means must be located within sight
of the motor controller (motor starter) for the driving
motor of the motor-generator set. When driving
machines, motor-generator sets, or motion and opera-
tion controllers are not within sight of the disconnecting
means, an additional manually operated switch is
required to be installed adjacent to the remote equip-
ment connected in the control circuit to prevent starting.
19
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
When the driving machine or motion controller and
operation controllers are not within sight of the discon-
necting means, an additional manually operated switch
is required to be installed adjacent to remote equipment
that is connected in the control circuit to prevent starting.
2.11.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. The main line discon-
necting means is required to be installed, located within
sight of the motor starter, and required to remove power
from both the motor and control valve.
Where the driving machine of a hydraulic machine
of a hydraulic elevator is located in a remote machine
room or remote machinery space, verify that a single
means for disconnecting all ungrounded main power
supply conductors is provided and is capable of being
locked in the open position.
For hydraulic elevators equipped with auxiliary
power lowering, verify that with the main disconnect
in the open position, the additional power source is
disconnected from its load and the car does not lower.
(10) 2.11.4 References
2.11.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 210.4 and 1001.2(b)(ll).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.26.4 and 8.11.2.1.2(p).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.10.5.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
A17.5-1991 — Clause 20.7.
2.11.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A 1 7. ld-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 306.3a(5)(b), 306.4, 306.6, and
1004.2(b)(ll).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.26.3.1 [3.26.3.1.4(b)], 3.26.4, 3.26, and
8.11.3.1.2(p).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.10.5 {4.7.5}.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
ITEM 2.12
CONTROLLER WIRING, FUSES, GROUNDING, ETC
2.12.1 Periodic Inspections
(10) 2.12.1.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Inspection Made With Power Off. Examine all con-
troller and selector relays, switches, contactors, control
circuit rectifiers, transformers, capacitors, resistors, vac-
uum tubes, printed circuit boards, etc., and note
(1) any excessively worn or burned contacts, bro-
ken connectors, broken or cracked resistance grids or
resistance tubes.
(2) proper fuse type and rating. No fuses should
be jumped or shorted.
(3) check for
(a) jumper wires or temporary wiring changes
(b) whether the equipment is clean
(c) any accumulation of combustible materials,
especially on resistance grids or wires, or on control
circuit rectifiers
(d) whether contacts of reverse-phase relay,
where provided, are open
(e) excessively worn hinge pins and shunt wiring
on relays or contactors
(f) check mechanical interlock between relays
(g) visually check for blocked relays or circuits
defeated by any other means and ensure that there is no
evidence of a safety device being rendered inoperative
(4) verify that jumpers are not stored in the machine
space, truss, or pits.
(5) Check that signage is legible and maintained.
For elevators subject to NFPA 70 and CSA 22.1 where
power is supplied from more than one source, check for
warning signs.
(6) Check that all "no touch" shields (barriers) and
guards, where provided, are in place and not damaged.
(b) Inspection Made With Power On. Observe the oper-
ation of the control equipment when the elevator is run
in each direction. Note any arcing of contacts, excessive
heating of coils or resistance, and misalgnment of relays,
contactors, and switches.
2.12.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Hydraulic elevators
installed under A17.1c-1986 and later editions require
a reverse-phase relay or other means to prevent over-
heating in the event of a phase failure or reversal. If a
reverse-phase relay is not provided, a low oil timer,
line starters with phase protection, rotation sensors, and
thermistors in motor and oil, etc., may be used to meet
the requirement to prevent overheating in the event of
a phase reversal and /or failure. The condition of the
control provided should be checked.
2.12.2 Periodic Test
2.12.3 Acceptance
Check that sufficient clear working space has been
provided around control panels and disconnecting
means, to provide safe and convenient access to all live
parts of the equipment necessary for maintenance and
adjustment.
2.12.4 References
2.12.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 102.1, 210.4, 1001.2(b)(12), and 1206.1f.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.8.2, 2.26.4, 8.11.2. 1.2(q), 8.6.1.6.1,
C8.6.12.3.1.3, 8.6.1.6.3, and c8.6.12.2.6.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.10.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
2.12.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 102.1 (300.3), 306.5, 306.6,
1004.2(b)(12), 1206.lt and 1206.5a.
do)
20
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.8.2 {3.8}, 3.26.5, 3.26, 8.11.3.1.2(q),
8.6.1.6.3, c8.6.12.2.6, 8.6.1.6.1, c8.6.12.3.1.3, and 8.6.5.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
ITEM 2.13
GOVERNOR, OVERSPEED SWITCH,
AND SEAL
2.13.1 Periodic Inspections
(io) 2.13.1.1 Inspection Made With Power Off
(a) Examine governor fastening bolts to verify that
the governor is securely fastened in place and that the
governor rope is free of the governor jaws or other
obstructions.
(b) Examine all linkages, gears, pins, collars, bush-
ings, and latches that are used to connect the weights
and the rope gripping devices for evidence of excessive
wear and lost motion, and note whether all bearings
and rubbing surfaces are not restricted by paint or other
foreign substances.
(c) Manually lift the weights or flyballs and note
whether all moving parts, including the governor-rope
jaws, operate freely and that there is ample room for the
rotation of governor weight or flyballs in their extreme
extended position. Check all parts of the governor for
lubrication.
(d) Examine rope gripping surfaces.
(e) Where the governor is provided with a speed-
reducing switch and an overspeed (stopping) switch,
determine by manually operating the governor mecha-
nism, where practical, whether these switches operate.
(f) Verify that means of adjusting tripping speed and
pull-through force are sealed.
(g) Where special or unique methods are required
to test the governor, refer to the maintenance control
program for the appropriate procedure.
2.13.2 Periodic Test
(io) 2.13.2.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Yearly Test of Governor (for A17.1d-2000 and Earlier
Editions); Category 1 Test of Governor (for A17. 1-2000/
B44-00 and Later Editions). Make a general examination
of the governor-rope system, including the condition
of the governor, governor rope, governor-rope tension
sheave assembly, and releasing carrier. Check that the
proper type of rope, identified on the governor marking
plate, has been installed.
Where special or unique methods are required to test
the governor, refer to the maintenance control program
for the appropriate procedure.
(1) Inspection With Power Off. With the main line
switch in the open position, inspect governors by a man-
ual extension of the governor weights to make sure there
is no restriction of motion and verify that all parts,
including the rope gripping jaws, operate freely. Check
all bearings, pins, governor-rope grip jaws, and rubbing
surfaces to make sure they are not worn excessively and
are properly lubricated and free of paint.
(2) Inspection Made With Power On. Open the gover-
nor overspeed (stopping) switch, where provided, and
check to be sure that the elevator cannot be operated.
Reset the governor switch, and have the car operated
at normal speed in each direction and note
(a) any tendency of the governor rope to slide
on the sheave groove when the car is started or stopped
(b) any eccentric or lateral motion of the governor
sheave
(c) whether the rope runs free of the jaws at all
times
(3) Adjustment Means Seal. A test of the
governor-tripping speed is not required unless the seal
on the governor has been disturbed or the inspection
indicates that for other reasons a test is necessary. If a
test is made, the governor must be sealed and tagged
after the test.
(b) 5-Year Test (for A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions);
Category 5 Test (for A17 .1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions).
Where special or unique methods are required to test
the governor, refer to the maintenance control program
for the appropriate procedure.
After the car and counterweight guide shoes, safety
parts, and governors have been inspected, check as
follows:
(1) Determine the acceptable range of tripping
speed of the governor using Table 2.13.2.1 based on the
rated speed. Also, the tripping speed should be stamped
on the governor marking plate for elevators installed
under Al 7.1-1955 and later editions.
(2) Have governors calibrated to the setting as
shown in Table 2.13.2.1.
(3) The sheave must be free to rotate with no
obstruction by the governor rope. To accomplish this,
have the person performing the test park the elevator
car about 12 in. (305 mm) below the top opening and
open the main line disconnect switch.
(a) Lift the governor rope to ensure sufficient
slack to spin sheave. When installing a clamp on a gover-
nor rope, be careful not to damage the rope. [See
Item 2.13.2(b)(5).]
(b) With a rubber drive wheel held against the
governor sheave driven by a variable speed drill motor,
gradually build up the governor speed until it trips.
(c) To read the tripping speed, use a calibrated
tachometer reading in ft/min (m/s). Hold the wheel
inside the governor sheave groove at the centerline of
the rope. Take several readings and record the average.
(4) If any adjustments are made, be sure the lock-
nuts are tight and install a new seal. Use a No. 36
[0.106 in. (2.69 mm)] drill or smaller. Install the seal with
a sealing tool. Retest as outlined above, and record the
tripping speed. Check the tripping speed of the governor
21
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Table 2.13.2.1 Governor Adjustment Settings
Car Governor
Cwt.
Car Governor-Tripping
Cwt. Governor-Tripping
Car Governor Overspeed Switch
Overspeed
Governor
Speed
Speed [Note (1)]
Settings, Down Direction
Switch
Settings,
Up Direction
Overspeed
Rated
Rqmt.
Rqmt.
Rqmt.
Rqmt
Rqmts.
Switch
Settings
Car
2.18.2.1,
2.18.2.1,
2.18.2.2,
2.18.2.2,
2.18.4.2.1
Speed,
Minimum,
Maximum,
Minimum,
Maximum,
and
Rqmt.
Rqmt.
Rqmt.
Rqmt.
ft/min
ft/min
ft/min
ft/min
ft/min
2.18.4.2.2
2.18.4.2.3
2.18.4.2.5
2.18.4.2.4
2.18.4.1
Oto 125
144
175
145
192
Not
Not
Not
150
173
210
174
231
Required
Required
Required
175
202
250
203
275
200
230
280
231
308
Not more
225
259
308
260
338
than 90%
250
288
337
289
370
of car
Not more
Not more
Not more
Counter-
300
345
395
346
434
governor
than 90%
than 100%
than 100%
weight
350
403
452
404
497
down
of car
of car
of car
governor
400
460
510
461
561
tripping
governor
governor
governor
overspeed
450
518
568
519
624
setting
down
down
down
switch
500
575
625
575
687
tripping
setting
for
elevators
tripping
setting if a
speed
reducing
tripping
setting
required
600
700
690
805
740
855
691
806
814
940
for any
speed
800
920
970
921
1,067
with
switch is
900
1,035
1,085
1,036
1,193
Not more
static
provided
1,000
1,150
1,200
1,151
1,320
than 95%
controls
1,100
1,265
1,320
1,266
1,452
of car
1,200
1,380
1,440
1,381
1,584
governor
1,300
1,495
1,560
1,496
1,716
down
1,400
1,610
1,680
1,611
1,848
tripping
1,500
1,725
1,800
1,726
1,980
setting
1,600
1,840
1,920
1,841
2,112
1,700
1,955
2,040
1,956
2,244
1,800
2,070
2,160
2,071
2,376
1,900
2,185
2,280
2,186
2,508
2,000
2,300
2,400
2,301
2,640
NOTE:
(1) The counterweight governor-tripping speed must exceed the car governor-tripping speed.
switches using the same procedure. Place the rope on
the governor sheave.
Remove the clamp and inspect the governor rope for
any damage or kinks. Reinstall all sheave and switch
covers. Check the releasing carrier. On drum-operated
safeties, check for slack rope between the releasing car-
rier and drum.
NOTE: If an elevator, for any reason, is running below the rated
speed, the governor calibration must be based on the rated speed.
(5) For Class B-type safeties, check the force neces-
sary to pull the governor rope through the governor. In
no case may the pull-through force exceed one-fifth of
the rated ultimate strength of the governor rope. The
force required to pull the governor rope from the releas-
ing carrier is required to be no more than 60% of the
pull-through force.
One method of performing this test is as follows: The
best place to check this is from the top of the car since the
governor rope and release carrier are usually accessible
from there (see Fig. 2.13.2.1). Make this connection fairly
direct with minimum angle between the governor rope
and the sling. Take special care that the attachment does
not damage the governor rope. In most cases the attach-
ment can be made to a portion of the governor rope that
does not reach the governor when the car is at the upper
landing. When clamps (fist grip) are used for this pur-
pose, they should comply with non-babbitted rope fas-
tenings as outlined in Item 3.29, and the nuts tightened
with a torque wrench to the torque recommended by
the manufacturer. Typical torques are 45 ft-lb (61 N-m)
for % in. (9.5 mm) rope, 65 ft-lb (88 N-m) for 7/16 in.
(11 mm) and V2 in. (13 mm) rope, and 130 ft-lb (176 N-m)
for 9/16 in. (14 mm) and % in. (16 mm) rope; either over-
or under-tightening will likely damage the governor
rope and require its replacement. A so-called "Chicago"
grip that is used for pulling large diameter electrical
conductors is also recommended for this connection
since it would be less likely to damage the governor
22
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 2.13.2.1 Dynamometer Connections for Testing the Pull-Through of Governor Jaws
Governor
Come-along
Crosshead
Attachment
to governor rope
Dynamometer
Governor-rope
releasing carrier
rope. These grips can be ordered with jaws that are
machined to the diameter of the rope. Midline rope
clamps that grip with a wedge conforming to the rope
size may also be used. Regardless of the method used,
extra care must be taken to provide a secure connection
that will not damage the governor rope. Note the spring
tension of the safety releasing carrier so that it can be
restored to its original setting after completion of the
test.
Remove the spring tension from the releasing carrier
so that it will not restrain the rope. Trip the governor,
and pop up the governor-rope tension sheave to allow
approximately 1 ft (0.305 m) movement of the governor
rope without lifting the tension sheave. Operate the
come-along pulling at least 6 in. (152.4 mm) of the gover-
nor rope through the governor. Note the reading on
the dynamometer and compare it to the rated ultimate
strength of the rope. If a release carrier is used, it must
release at no more than 60% of the governor pull-through
force. This can be checked with the same equipment by
connecting the dynamometer and come-along between
the governor rope at the releasing carrier and the existing
connection and the governor rope.
After this test, perform the following three steps:
(a) Carefully inspect the governor rope at the
point of connection to assure that it has not been
damaged.
(b) Restore the governor release carrier.
(c) Reset and inspect the governor.
(6) Ensure the governor has been sealed and
tagged.
23
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(10) 2.13.2.2 Hydraulic Elevators
(a) Yearly Test (for A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions);
Category 1 Test (for A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions).
Make a general examination of the governor-rope sys-
tem, including the condition of the governor, governor
rope, governor-rope tension sheave assembly, and
releasing carrier. Check to verify that the type of rope,
identified on the governor marking plate, has been
installed. Where special or unique methods are required
to test the governor, refer to the maintenance control
program for the appropriate procedure.
(1) Inspection Made With Power Off. With the main
line switch in the open position, governors shall be
inspected by a manual extension of the governor weights
to make sure there is no restriction of motion and verify
that all parts, including the rope gripping jaws, operate
freely All bearings, pins, rope grip jaws, and rubbing
surfaces shall be checked to make sure they are not worn
excessively, are properly lubricated, and free of paint.
(2) Inspection Made With Power On. Open the gover-
nor overspeed (stopping) switch, where provided, and
check to be sure that the elevator cannot be operated in
either direction. Reset the governor switch, and have the
car operated at normal speed in each direction and note
(a) any tendency of the governor rope to slide
on the sheave groove when the car is started or stopped
(b) any eccentric or lateral motion of the governor
sheave
(h) 5-Year Test (for AU.ld-2000 and Earlier Editions);
Category 5 Test (for A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions).
Where special or unique methods are required to test
the governor, refer to the maintenance control program
for the appropriate procedure. After the car and counter-
weight guide shoes, safety parts, and governors have
been inspected, check as follows;
(1) The acceptable range of tripping speed for the
governor shall be determined using Table 2.13.2, except
that the tripping speed shall be based on the elevator
operating speed in the down direction. The governor
switch should operate before or at the application of the
safety. If a tripping speed is stamped on the governor
marking plate, it should be considered the maximum
for that governor.
(2) Governors shall be calibrated to the setting as
shown in Table 2.13.2 or manufacturer's marking plate,
whichever is less.
(3) The sheave must be free to rotate with no
obstruction by the governor rope. To accomplish this,
park the elevator car about 12 in. (305 mm) below the
top opening and open the main line disconnect switch.
(a) Lift the governor rope to ensure sufficient
slack to spin the sheave. When installing a clamp on a
governor rope, be careful not to damage the rope.
(b) With a rubber drive wheel held against the
governor sheave driven by a variable speed electric drill,
gradually build up the governor speed until it trips.
(c) To read the tripping speed, use a tachometer
reading in ft/min (m/s). Hold the tachometer wheel at
the pitch diameter of the governor sheave. Take several
readings and record the average.
(4) If any adjustments are made, be sure the lock-
nuts are tight and install a new seal. Use a No. 36
[0.106 in. (2.69 mm)] drill or smaller. Install the seal with
a sealing tool. Retest as outlined above and record the
tripping speed. Check the tripping speed of the governor
switches using the same procedure. Place the rope on
the governor sheave. Remove the clamp and inspect the
governor rope for any damage or kinks. Reinstall all
sheave and switch covers.
NOTE: If an elevator, for any reason, is running below the rated
speed, the governor calibration must be based on the rated speed.
(5) For Type B safeties, the force necessary to pull
the governor rope through the governor shall be
checked. In no case may the pull-through force exceed
one-fifth of the rated ultimate strength of the governor
rope. The force required to actuate the releasing carrier,
where provided, shall be no more than 60% of the pull-
through force. One method of performing this test is as
follows: the best place to check this is from the top of
the car since the governor rope and release carrier, where
provided, are usually accessible from there (see
Fig. 2.13.2). Make this connection fairly direct with mini-
mum angle between the governor rope and the sling.
Take special care that the attachment does not damage
the governor rope. In most cases the attachment can be
made to a portion of the governor rope that does not
reach the governor when the car is at the upper landing.
When clamps (fist grip) are used for this purpose, they
shall comply with non-babbitted rope fastenings, and
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the torque
recommended by the manufacturer. This is usually
45 ft-lb (61 N-m) for % in. (9.5 mm) rope, 65 ft-lb for
(88 N-m) for 7/16 in. (11 mm) and V2 in. (13 mm) rope,
and 130 ft-lb (176 N-m) for 9/16 in. (14 mm) and % in.
(16 mm) rope. Either over- or under-tightening will
likely damage the governor rope and require its replace-
ment. A so-called "Chicago" grip that is used for pulling
large diameter electrical conductors is also recom-
mended for this connection since it would be less likely
to damage the governor rope. These grips can be ordered
with jaws that are machined to the diameter of the rope.
Midline rope clamps that grip with a wedge conforming
to the rope size may also be used. Regardless of the
method used, extra care must be taken to provide a
secure connection that will not damage the governor
rope. Note the spring tension of the safety releasing
carrier so that it can be restored to its original setting
after completion of the test.
Remove the spring tension from the releasing carrier
so that it will not restrain the rope. The governor shall
be tripped, and the governor-rope tension sheave
24
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
propped up to allow approximately 1 ft (0.305 m) move-
ment of the governor rope without lifting the tension
sheave. Operate the come-along pulling at least 6 in.
(152 mm) of the governor rope through the governor.
Note the reading on the dynamometer and compare it
to the rated ultimate strength of the rope. If a release
carrier is used, it must release at no more than 60% of
the governor pull-through force. This can be checked
with the same equipment by connecting the dynamome-
ter and come-along between the governor rope at the
releasing carrier and the existing connection and the
governor rope.
After this test, perform the following three steps:
(a) Carefully inspect the governor rope at the
point of connection to assure that it has not been
damaged.
(b) Restore the governor release carrier.
(c) Reset and inspect the governor.
(6) The governor should be sealed and a metal test
tag installed by the person that performed the test.
2.13.3 Acceptance
2.13.3.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Governor Tests. Check the governor marking plate
to determine that it is marked with size, material, and
construction of the governor rope used and the
governor- tripping speed.
(b) Speed-Load Tests. The use of a tachometer in mak-
ing speed-load tests is required. The tachometer reading
must be taken after the car has reached its constant
speed. Take and record speed readings with no load in
the car and with rated load in the car in both the up
and down directions. Tachometer readings must be
taken from the side of the governor rope or hoisting
ropes. Speed readings from any other position on the
governor rope or hoisting ropes will be inaccurate.
Where the car is roped 2:1, the car speed is one-half the
hoist rope speed.
2.13.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators
(a) Governor Tests. Check the governor marking plate
to verify that it is marked with size, material, and con-
struction of the governor rope for which it was designed
and the governor- tripping speed.
(b) Speed-Load Tests. The tachometer reading must be
taken after the car has reached its constant speed. Speed
readings shall be taken and recorded with no load in
the car and with rated load in the car in both the up
and down direction. Tachometer readings must be taken
by holding the tachometer wheel at the pitch diameter
of the governor sheave.
NOTE: For consistency of measurement, the oil should be at
normal operating temperature when checking rate speed,
operating speed in the down direction, relief valve setting, etc.
2.13.4 References
2.13.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 206 and Rules 205.15, 210.2(j),
1001.2(b)(28), 1002.2c, 1002.3a, 1002.3b, 1003.2a, and
1206.1a.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.18, 2.17.15, 2.26.2 (2.26.2.10),
8.11.2.1.2(bb), 8.11.2.2.3, 8.11.2.3.1, 8.11.2.3.2,
c8.11.2.3.2(c), 8.10.2.2.2(cc)(l), and 8.6.1.6.2.
A17.1a-2008/B44a-08 — 8.11.2.2 was redesignated
8.6.4.19 [Category 1 tests], 8.11.2.3 was redesignated
8.6.4.20 [Category 5 tests].
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.6.1 and 3.10.4(g).
2.13.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Sections 205 and 206; and Rules 301.8,
1002.2(b), 1005.2c, 1005.4, 1202.7, and 1206.1.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.17 and 2.18, 3.17.1, 8.11.2.2.2, 8.11.3.2.3,
8.11.3.4, 8.7.2.19, and 8.6.1.2.
A17.1a-2008/B44a-08 — 8.11.3.2 was redesignated
8.6.5.14 [Category 1 tests], 8.11.3.3 was redesignated
8.6.5.15 [Category 3 tests], 8.11.3.4 was redesignated
8.6.5.16 [Category 5 tests].
A17.3 — Paragraph 4.9.7.
ITEM 2.14
CODE DATA PLATE
2.14.1 Periodic Inspections
Check that the Code Data Plate is installed. This is
the Code that is to be used for the inspection and test.
2.14.2 Periodic Test
2.14.3 Acceptance
2.14.4 References
2.14.4.1 Electric Elevators. Al 7. ld-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 215 and Rule 1200.6.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.9 and 8.7.1.8.
2.14.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 309 and Rule 1200.6.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.9 and 8.7.1.8.
NOTE: Items 2.15 through 2.29 apply to electric elevators only.
ITEM 2.15
STATIC CONTROL
2.15.1 Periodic Inspections
2.15.2 Periodic Test
2.15.2.1 Electric Elevators: Yearly Test (for
A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions). The person or
do)
25
C
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
firm installing or maintaining an elevator with a driving
motor employing static control without MG set should
demonstrate conformance with the Code as follows:
(a) Run the car and demonstrate that there are two
devices that each independently will remove power
from the driving-machine motor and cause the car to
stop. At least one of the devices is required to be an
electromechanical contactor, which also opens the
driving-machine brake circuit.
(b) Prevent the above electromechanical contactor
from being energized and register a call. Demonstrate,
with the doors closed, that the brake will not lift and
the car will not move.
(c) Demonstrate that either of two contactors in the
brake circuit will prevent the brake from lifting.
(d) Demonstrate that the operation of any of the elec-
trical protective devices will cause both devices specified
in Item 2.13.2(a) to remove power from the
driving-machine motor and brake.
2.15.3 Acceptance
2.15.4 References
2.15.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 210.2, 210.9(d), 1001.2(b)(13), and
1003.2h.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.26.2, 2.26.9.5, 8.11.2.1.2(m), and
8.10.2.2.2(m).
ITEM 2.16
OVERHEAD BEAM AND FASTENINGS
2.16.1 Periodic Inspections
2.16.1.1 Electric Elevators. Examine overhead
beams to determine whether they are securely fastened
to supports or firmly embedded in walls. Note any set-
tlement of supports. Examine all exposed bolt fastenings
of beams supporting machinery or sheaves.
2.16.2 Periodic Test
2.16.3 Acceptance
2.16.3.1 Electric Elevators. Examine overhead
machine and sheave beam supports. Record the dimen-
sions and span of beams and check them against layout
drawings.
2.16.4 References
2.16.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 105.1, 105.2, 105.3, and 1001.2(b)(14).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.9.1, 2.9.2, 2.9.3, and 8.11.2.1.2(n).
ITEM 2.17
DRIVE MACHINE BRAKE
2.17.1 Periodic Inspections
2.17.1.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Inspection Made With Power On. Run the car and
observe the operation of the brake. The brake should
not chatter. It may apply on or before the completion
of the slowdown and leveling operation. Check to see
that the brake is automatically applied on or after normal
stops. The clearance between the brake shoe and the
brake drum when the car is running should not be
greater than necessary to permit free running. Examine
the brake pins to determine whether they are properly
lubricated and not frozen, and that retainers are in place.
Note any harsh and abrupt brake action. Examine brake-
activated contacts (if provided) for proper operation.
(b) Inspection Made With Power Off
(1) Examine the brake and drum to determine that
the brake linings are free of oil and whether there is any
scoring of the drum.
(2) If the elevator has been running, the brake drum
may be warm but should not be uncomfortable to the
touch. A hot drum usually indicates a dragging brake
shoe.
NOTE: The design of the actuating linkage of some brakes is
such that a single unit or link is used both to govern the spring
pressure applying the brake shoes when the brake applies and the
amount of clearance between the brake shoes and the brake drum
when the brake is released. With this type of design, it is possible
to improperly adjust the releasing feature so that it will prevent
the brake shoes from gripping the brake drum when the brake
applies. The adjustment of this type of brake should be examined
to determine that the adjustment is such that the brake shoes are
not prevented from properly applying and that there is sufficient
margin in the adjustment for the brake lining wear (no part of the
brake should contact the machine for at least the thickness of the
lining).
2.17.2 Periodic Test
2.17.2.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Yearly Test (for A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions);
Category 1 Test (for A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions)
For elevators installed under Al 7. 1-2000 /B44-00 and
later editions, have the brake setting verified in accor-
dance with the data on the brake marking plate.
(b) 5-Year Test (for A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions);
Category 5 Test (for A17 .1-2000 /BU-OO and Later Editions).
At an upper landing from which the maximum attain-
able speed in the down direction can be attained with
125% load, place 125% load in the car for passenger
elevators and freight elevators permitted to carry pas-
sengers, and for freight elevators place the rated load
in the car.
(1) Run the car to the lowest landing by the normal
operating means. The driving machine must safely
lower, stop, and hold the car with this overload. The
do)
26
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
elevator is not required to attain rated load performance
under overload conditions, but should stop the car
within a reasonable distance (e.g., the distance between
the initial slowdown and the bottom terminal landing
sill). The driving machine is not required to raise this
load or stop level within normal limits, but the car
should not activate the final terminal stopping device.
After the elevator has stopped, have the main line dis-
connect means opened and verify that the brake will
hold the elevator.
(2) For elevators installed to A17.1-2000 and later
editions, in addition to the procedure performed above,
run the car down by the normal operating means and
have the safety circuit opened after the car has reached
constant speed. It is not recommended that the main
line disconnect switch be opened as the means to stop
the car due to the possibility of a flash over. The braking
system must safely stop and hold the load.
For freight elevators designed for Class C2 loading,
with the car parked at the landing, increase the load
inside the car up to the maximum load indicated on
the freight elevator loading sign. The driving-machine
motor, brake, and available traction must hold and level
this load.
2.17.2.2 Hydraulic Elevators. For freight elevators
designed for Class C2 loading, with the car parked at
the landing, increase the load inside the car up to the
maximum load indicated on the freight elevator loading
sign. The hydraulic system must hold and level this load.
(10) 2.17.3 Acceptance
Verify that the brake marking plate is permanently
attached to the driving machine.
2.17.4 References
2.17.4.1 Electric Elevators. Al 7. ld-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 207.2b, 207.8, (NR 2.24.8), 210.8,
1001.2(b)(15), [NR 8.11.2.3.10(a)], and 1002.3d.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.16.2.2, 2.16.8, 2.24.8, 2.26.8, 8.11.2.1.2(o),
8.11.2.3.10(a), and 8.11.2.3.4.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.8.4.
2.17.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rule 301.10.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 3.16.
A17.3 — Paragraph 4.2.4.
ITEM 2.18
TRACTION DRIVE MACHINES
2.18.1 Periodic Inspections
2.18.1.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Inspection Made With Power On
(1) Have the elevator operated in each direction,
making frequent stops, and observe the operation of the
motor. Observe commutators for excessive sparking or
brush chatter. Observe bearings for excessive noise
and wear.
(2) Inspect all motor fastening bolts for tightness.
(3) Inspect the brushes; note any sparking or
chattering.
(b) Inspection Made With Power Off Examine brush
holders, commutators or slip rings, and determine
(1) the condition of the brush holders and brushes.
(2) whether commutator or slip rings are burned,
pitted, grooved, or scored, and are clean and free from
oil; and also that the commutators are free from high
mica.
(3) any accumulation of carbon, copper dust, oil, or
other substances in the slot of an undercut commutator.
(4) that exposed armature and field terminal condi-
tions are tight. Give special attention to the shunt field
connections of DC motors.
(5) that the leads are not broken or their insulation
is not cracked or broken.
(6) that the motor windings are free of oil, dust, or
lint deposits.
2.18.2 Periodic Test
2.18.2.1 Electric Elevators — Category 5. Slipping (10)
traction or drive motor stalling test procedure is as
follows:
(a) Verify with the empty car moving in up direction
at inspection speed, car and hoistway doors in the closed
position, the top terminal stopping devices temporarily
rendered ineffective and the counterweight is stopped
by the buffer:
(1) the hoist ropes shall slip on the drive machine
sheave or
(2) the driving machine motor shall stall
(b) All the top terminal stopping devices shall be
restored to their normal operating condition in confor-
mity with the applicable requirements prior to returning
equipment to service.
(c) Verify with the empty car moving in down direc-
tion at inspection speed, car and hoistway doors in the
closed position, the bottom terminal stopping devices
temporarily rendered ineffective and the car is stopped
by the buffer:
(1) the hoist ropes shall slip on the drive machine
sheave or
(2) the driving machine motor shall stall
(d) All the bottom terminal stopping devices shall be
restored to their normal operating condition in confor-
mity with the applicable requirements prior to returning
equipment to service.
NOTE [2.18.2.1(a) and (c)]: Power may be removed by the control
from the driving machine motor and brake after loss of traction
or the drive machine motor has stalled.
27
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
2.18.3 Acceptance
2.18.4 References
(10) 2.18.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 208, Rule 1001.2(b)(16), 1003.2, and
[NR 8.11.2.3.10(b)].
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.24, 8.11.2.1.2(p), 8.10.2.2.2(v)(b)(3), and
8.11.2.3.10(b).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.8.1.
ITEM 2.19
GEARS, BEARINGS, AND FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
2.19.1 Periodic Inspections
2.19.1.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Inspection Made With Power On
(1) Have the elevator operated in each direction,
making frequent stops. Observe if there is any excessive
play or backlash in the bearings or gearing. Unusual
noise or play is usually an indication of gear or thrust
bearing trouble, or damage to bearing liners, rollers,
or balls. It may be constructive to run the elevator at
inspection speed as well as rated speed to fully observe
any deterioration.
(2) Observe through the access covers to determine
whether gears are carrying oil and that oil rings, chains,
or other methods of feeding lubricant, where used, oper-
ate freely.
(b) Inspection Made With Power Off. Examine the oil
in the gear case and bearing oil wells to determine that
it is free of damaging metallic particles or other foreign
substances. Check the oil level and note any leakage.
Visually check the gears and sleeve bearings, where fea-
sible, for excessive wear and scoring. Examine for any
oil leaks that may damage the flexible part of the cou-
pling and for any excessive wear.
Verify that when the flexible part of the coupling fails,
it will not completely disengage from each unit. Inspect
flexible couplings for wear and excess slack.
2.19.2 Periodic Test
2.19.2.1 Electric Elevators. If possible, visually
inspect flexible couplings to determine that failure of
the flexible element will not result in disengagement.
2.19.3 Acceptance
2.19.4 References
2.19.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 208 and Rules 1001.2(b)(17) and
1206.1a.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.24, 8.11.2.1.2(q), and 8.6.1.6.2.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.8.1.
ITEM 2.20
WINDING DRUM MACHINE AND SLACK ROPE
DEVICE, STOP MOTION SWITCH, AND ROPE
FASTENING
2.20.1 Periodic Inspections
2.20.1.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Winding Drum Machine. Winding drum machines
installed under A17.1 editions prior to A17.1-1937 hav-
ing winding-drum machines driven by two-phase or
three-phase alternating-current motors shall be
equipped with adjustable machine automatic terminal
stop mechanisms set to directly open the main line circuit
to the driving machine motor and brake before or coinci-
dent with the opening of the final terminal stopping
switch located in the hoistway.
(b) Winding Dram Machine. Winding drum machines
installed under A17. 1-1937 and later editions having
winding-drum machines driven by two-phase or three-
phase alternating-current motors require that the main-
line circuit to the motor and brake be directly opened
either by the contacts in the machine stop-motion switch
(machine final) or by hoistway final limit switches oper-
ated by a cam attached to the car. This requirement does
not apply to elevator machines with alternating-current
motors and direct-current brakes and direct-current
main-line or potential switches controlled by final termi-
nal stopping switches
(c) Winding Drum Machine. For elevators installed
under A17. 1-1955 and later editions, winding drum
machines may be used for freight elevator only and
require final terminal stopping devices located in the
hoistway operated by cams attached to the car as well
as terminal stopping devices machine final (stop motion
switch) located on and operated by the driving machine.
(d) Terminal Stopping Device. Chain, belt, or rope-
driven mechanisms shall not be used to operate the
terminal stopping device machine final (stop motion
switch).
(e) Inspection and Tests — Rope Fastening and Drum
(1) Open the main line switch and examine hoist
rope fastenings in the drum.
(2) Note that the required tag indicates that the
ropes have been refastened within 12 mo for machines
located over the hoistway and within 24 mo for machines
located at the bottom or at the side of the hoistway,
except where provided with an auxiliary rope fastening
device.
(3) Visually examine and hammer test the drum
for defects or cracks.
(4) Where ropes extend beyond their clamps or
sockets, check to see that means have been provided to
prevent the rope ends from coming out of the inside of
the drum and interfering with other parts of the
machine.
(10)
28
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(/) Slack Rope Device, Slack rope devices are required
on winding drum machines.
(1) Inspection Made With Power Off. Determine that
there is no interference with free and complete move-
ment of the slack rope device. Determine that it is located
as close as possible to the machine drum so that the
switch will open with a minimum of slack rope.
(2) Inspection Made With Power On. Manually trip
the slack rope device and attempt to run the car. The
enclosed contact must remain open until manually reset.
NOTE: The location of slack rope switches can be found in
(a) the basement machine, in the machine itself
(b) the overhead machine, on top of the crosshead or inside or
near the machine
(c) the pulley type, on overhead machine
(g) Final Terminal Stopping Switch. Inspect both the
final terminal stopping switches located on and oper-
ated by the driving machine (stop motion switch) and
the additional stopping switches located in the hoistway
and operated by cams attached to the car for condition
and operation.
(1) Verify that these final limits directly open all
contacts in the power circuit for machines equipped with
single- or two-speed AC motors and AC brake coils.
(2) For machines equipped with DC motors and DC
brakes, verify that each final limit operates independent
relays to remove power from the driving machine and
brake,
(3) Verify that the machine stopping switches are
not driven by chains, ropes, or belts.
2.20.2 Periodic Test
2.20.2.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Machine. With the car resting on its fully com-
pressed buffers, check that at least one turn of rope is
remaining on the drum.
(b) Slack Rope Device
(1) With the car running, trip the device manually
using a piece of wood or similar object. The enclosed
contact must remain open until manually reset. If there
is any question about the operation of the device, lower
the car onto suitable blocking in the pit and determine
that the resulting slack rope will actually trip the device
and stop the car.
(2) For double-belt drum machine, check that the
driving belt is shifted to the idler pulley
(c) Final Limits. Test operation of both final limits
(machine limit and limit located in the hoistway oper-
ated by cams on the car) by disabling the normal stop-
ping means and normal terminal stopping means. Then
run the car to each terminal and verify
(1) that the machine final located on the driving
machine operates before or coincident with the final
limit located in the hoistway
(2) that the final limit located in the hoistway oper-
ates before the car contacts the spring buffer
2.20.3 Acceptance
2.20.3.1 Electric Elevators. Check that the speed
and Code limits of travel are not exceeded and that no
counterweight is provided. Verify that the terminal lim-
its will continue to operate, at the bottom, until the car
rests on the fully compressed buffer and, at the top, until
the car has reached its maximum upward movement.
2.20.4 References
2.20.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 208.1, 209.3c(2), 209.3e, 210.2, 212.6,
212.7, 212.10, 1001.2(b)(18), 1002.2d, and 1206.3.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.24.1, 2.25.3.3.2, 2.25.3.5, 2.26.2, 2.20.2,
2.20.7, 2.20.10, 8.11.2.1.2(w), 8.6.4.19.4, 8.6.4.19.5, 8.6.4.10,
and C8.6.12.4.2.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.8.2, 3.10.4, 3.12.6, 3.12.7, and
3.12.9.
BELT-
ITEM 2.21
OR CHAIN-DRIVE MACHINE
2.21.1 Periodic Inspections
2.21.1.1 Electric Elevators
(a) The installation of belt-drive machines or chain-
drive machines was permitted for freight elevators in
Al 7. 1-1937 and previous editions when rated speeds
did not exceed 60 ft/min (0.30 m/s) subject to the
following:
(1) Single belt-drive machines and chain-drive
machines were permitted, if provided with electrically
released brakes applied directly to the driving machine
and with terminal stopping devices as required for elec-
tric elevators.
(2) Chains for chain-drive machines were required
to be of the multiple-link belt type.
(3) Double belt-drive machines were permitted
only when driven from a line shafting supplying power
for other purposes.
(b) Belt-drive and chain-drive machines were prohib-
ited in A17.1-1955 through A17.1b-1983. In A17.1b-1983
and later editions, belt-drive and chain-drive machines,
also known as indirect-drive machines, were permitted
subject to limitations.
Check for proper number of belts or chains. Examine
belts for splice condition, proper tension, wear, burns,
and for cuts and breaks in the surface. Check drive
chains for excessive wear. Belts and chains are required
to be replaced in matched sets. Check that all machine
belt guards and chain guards are in place and secure.
Check that the broken belt or broken chain device
interrupts power to the drive machine and applies the
brake if any belt of chain becomes slack. Examine belt-
shifting forks of double-belt machines to determine
whether they are worn excessively by the edge of the
do)
29
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
belts, and check their operation while the car is being
operated up and down the hoistway; note that the belts
shift to the proper pulley without excessive effort.
Check all machine fastening bolts, belt guards, and
chair guards. Also, check the fastenings of any platforms
under ceiling machinery. Verify that the brake is located
on the traction sheave or drum assembly side of the
drive machine.
2.21.2 Periodic Test
2.21.3 Acceptance
2.21.4 References
2.21.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 208.9 and 1001.2(b)(19).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.24.9 and 8.11.2.1.2(s).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.8.3.
ITEM 2.22
MOTOR GENERATOR
2.22.1 Periodic Inspections
2.22.1.1 Electric Elevators. Motor-generator sets
and exciters that are part of the elevator control system
should operate smoothly, without excessive noise or
vibration. Inspect brushes and commutators as indicated
in Item 2.18.1.
2.22.2 Periodic Test
2.223 Acceptance Test of Generator Suicide Circuit
2.22.3.1 Electric Elevators. Make a full speed run,
without releveling, with either an empty car to the bot-
tom landing or a fully loaded car to the top landing.
Observe the suicide circuit operation in the machine
room.
(a) If the loop circuit is of the type that is not opened
when the car stops, connect a voltmeter to brushes on
the adjacent brush stems of the motor. With the suicide
circuit temporarily defeated, observe whether the volt-
age steadily increases. If so, immediately reestablish the
suicide circuit and observe a decrease in voltage, which
verifies that the suicide circuit is operating.
(b) If the loop circuit is the type that is opened when
the car stops, connect a voltmeter to brushes on adjacent
brush stems of the motor generator and check for zero
voltage with the brake set.
(c) Make a full speed run, without releveling, either
with an empty car to the bottom landing or a fully
loaded car to the top landing, and allow the brake to
set. Observe that the machine does not pull through the
brake, thereby ensuring that the restored suicide circuit
is effective.
2.22.4 References
2.22.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 210.9f, 1001.2(b)(20), and 1003.2J.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.26.9.7, 8.11.2.1.2(t), and 8.10.2.2.2(t).
ITEM 2.23
ABSORPTION OF REGENERATED
POWER
2.23.1 Periodic Inspections
2.23.2 Periodic Test
2.23.3 Acceptance
2.23.3.1 Electric Elevators. If the normal power
source is incapable of absorbing the energy generated
by an overhauling load, a separate means such as a
resistor bank must be provided on the load side of each
elevator power supply line disconnecting means to
absorb the regenerated power.
2.23.4 References
2.23.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 210.10, 1001.2(b)(21), and 1003.2k.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.26.10, 8.11.2.1.2(u), and 8.10.2.2.2(u).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.10.10.
ITEM 2.24
AC DRIVES FROM A DC SOURCE
2.24.1 Periodic Inspections
2.24.2 Periodic Test
2.24.2.1 Electric Elevators: Yearly Test of AC Drives
From a DC Source (for A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions);
Category 1 Test of AC Drives From a DC Source (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions). The person or
firm installing or maintaining an AC drive from a DC
source should demonstrate that the elevator conforms
to Code requirements.
(a) Run the car and demonstrate that either of two
devices will prevent the flow of alternating current to
the AC motor and cause the car to stop. At least one of
the devices must be an electromechanical relay, which
in its de-energized position prevents alternating current
from flowing in the hoist motor.
(b) Prevent the above relay from being energized and
register a call. Demonstrate, with the doors closed, that
the brake will not lift and the car will not move.
(c) Demonstrate that either of two contactors in the
brake circuit will prevent the brake from lifting.
(d) Demonstrate that the operation of any of the elec-
trical protective devices will cause both devices specified
in Item 2.24.2.1(a) to prevent the flow of alternating
current to the hoist motor.
30
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(10)
2.24.3 Acceptance
Conduct the tests described in Item 2.24.2.
2.24.4 References
2.24.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 210.2, 210.9(e), 1001.2(b)(22), and
1003.2L
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.26.2, 2.26.9.6, 8.11.2.1.2(v), and
8.10.2.2.2(m)(3).
ITEM 2.25
TRACTION SHEAVES
2.25.1 Periodic Inspections
2.25.1.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Inspection Made With Power Off. Inspect fastenings
for tightness where demountable sheaves are attached
to the sheave spider. Note any evidence of lost motion or
misalignment of the traction sheaves with other sheaves.
Examine the traction sheaves for worn grooves and
determine that all ropes seat to the same depth in the
grooves. Particles of metal under rope sheaves are evi-
dence of groove or sheave wear. Carefully examine the
sheave for cracks or other deficiencies. See Item 2.24.1.
(b) Inspection Made With Power On. Excessive lubrica-
tion of the wire ropes or wear of the sheave grooves
may result in reduction of traction. Test traction by
operating the empty car in the up direction and stop it
by opening the emergency stop switch. Any material
reduction of traction may be noted by observing slip-
page between ropes and traction sheaves.
(c) Regrooving. Prior to regrooving any sheave or
drum, check that the minimum groove bottom diameter
will be maintained for structural integrity. For elevators
installed under A17.1d-1986 and later editions, the
sheave or drum must be marked to indicate the mini-
mum permissible groove bottom diameter.
(d) Rope Changes. Where the material, grade, number,
or diameter of ropes have changed and the existing
sheave has been retained, check for approval by a
licensed professional engineer or the original equipment
manufacturer.
2.25.2 Periodic Test
2.25.2.1 Electric Elevators: 5-Year Test (for
A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 5 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions). For passenger
elevators and freight elevators permitted to carry
employees, the driving machine must safely stop and
hold the car with 125% of the rated load. See Item 2.15.2.
See Items 2.18.2.1 and 2.29.2.1(e) for the test procedure
(when the car or counterweight bottoms on its buffer
and when the car or counterweight safeties are applied,
respectively) for checking that the ropes will either slip
in the traction sheave or that the machine stalls.
2.25.3 Acceptance
2.25.3.1 Electric Elevators. Check that the sheaves
and drums are permanently and legibly marked to state
the minimum groove bottom diameter permissible for
regrooving and required to maintain structural integrity.
2.25.4 References
2.25.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 207.8, 208.2, 208.3, 212, 1001.2(b)(23),
1202.14, 1206.1a, and 1206.1b.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.16.8, 2.24.2, 2.24.3, 2.20, 8.11.2.1.2(w),
8.7.2.21, 8.6.1.6.2, and 8.6.4.1.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.8.1.
ITEM 2.26
SECONDARY AND DEFLECTOR
SHEAVES
2.26.1 Periodic Inspections
2.26.1.1 Electric Elevators. Examine the overhead
secondary and deflector sheaves and test them with light
blows from a small hammer. If the sound resulting from
the blows is dull and flat, unlike the ring given by sound
metal, sheave parts should be examined carefully for
cracks.
Examine the sheaves for worn grooves and determine
whether all ropes seat to the same depth in the grooves.
Look for evidence of any misalignment of sheaves.
Determine whether bearing bolts are secure.
Inspect sheave shafts and bearings for wear and other
defects. Determine whether the shafts and bearings are
adequately lubricated.
2.26.2 Periodic Test
2.26.3 Acceptance
2.26.3.1 Electric Elevators. Record and check for
conformity to approved drawings and specifications;
the diameter of drums, overhead sheaves, and secondary
sheaves.
2.26.4 References
2.26.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 208 and Rules 1001.2(b)(24) and
1206.1a.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.24, 8.11.2.1.2(x), 8.6.1.6.2.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.8.1.
ITEM 2.27
ROPE FASTENINGS
2.27.1 Periodic Inspections
2.27.1.1 Electric Elevators. Examine that section of
rope between the top of the car and the point on the
31
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
counterweight side which could not be examined from
the top of the car or from openings in the counterweight
runway enclosure.
Where multiple roping is used, examine overhead
rope anchorages (dead-end hitches). Verify that the hitch
plate supporting the wire rope fastenings is mounted
on the top of supporting members. (See Item 3.22.)
Verify that all lock nuts and cotter pins are in place.
Verify the data shown on the rope data tag attached to
one of the wire rope fastenings.
2.27.2 Periodic Test
2.27.3 Acceptance
2.27.4 References
2.27.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 105.3c and 1001.2(b)(25) and Section
212.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.9.3.3 and 8.11.2.1.2(y)/ and 2.20.
A17.3 — Section 3.12.
ITEM 2.28
TERMINAL STOPPING DEVICES
2.28.1 Periodic Inspections
2.28.1.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Traction Machines. In some cases, the normal ter-
minal stopping switches are located in the machine room
and operated by a rope, tape, or chain attached to the
car. Examine these switches for alignment, fastening,
cleanliness, and general condition of operation
mechanisms.
(b) Winding Drum Machines. Examine the final termi-
nal stopping switch operated by the machine for align-
ment fastening, cleanliness, lubrication, and general
operating condition.
2.28.2 Periodic Test
2.28.2.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Yearly Test of Normal Terminal Stopping Devices (for
A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test of
Normal Stopping Devices (for A17.1-2000/B 44-00 and Later
Editions). Check normal terminal stopping devices as
follows:
(1 ) Render inoperative the normal elevator stop-
ping means.
(2) Render inoperative the emergency terminal
stopping device. Do not disable the emergency terminal
speed limiting device.
(3) Run the car at contract speed into the bottom
terminal and demonstrate that the car slows down and
stops in the vicinity of the bottom terminal.
(4) Repeat the above test at the top terminal.
(5) Restore the normal stopping means and emer-
gency terminal stopping device. Check normal elevator
operation.
(b) 5-Year Test of Emergency Terminal Stopping and
Emergency Speed Limiting Devices (for A17.1d-2000 and
Earlier Editions); Category 5 Test of Emergency Terminal
Stopping and Emergency Speed Limiting Devices (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions). For static control
elevators with rated speeds over 500 ft/min (2.54 m/s),
installed under A17.1b-1983 through A17.1a-1991, or
with rated speeds over 200 ft/min (1.02 m/s) installed
under A17.1b-1992 and later editions, use emergency
terminal stopping devices where required, except if an
emergency terminal speed limiting device is used (see
Item 3.5.2) or if the normal terminal stopping device
limits the generator shunt field directly. Check as
follows:
(1) Have the normal elevator stopping means
disabled.
(2) Have the normal terminal stopping device
disabled.
(3) Have the car run at rated speed into the bottom
terminal and verify that the car stops and power is
removed from the driving-machine motor and brake. It
is permissible for the car to restart automatically, pro-
vided that no other electrical protective device has
operated.
(4) Have the above test repeated at the top terminal.
(5) Restore the normal stopping means and normal
terminal stopping device. Check normal operation.
2.28.3 Acceptance
2.28.3.1 Electric Elevators. Perform the test in Item
2.28.2(a) for the bottom normal terminal stopping device
in the down direction with 125% of rated load for passen-
ger elevators and freight elevators permitted to carry
passengers. The bottom normal terminal stopping
devices of freight elevators not permitted to carry pas-
sengers are to be tested with rated load. The top normal
terminal stopping devices for all elevators must be tested
with no load. The car should stop at or near the terminal
landings with all loads, except where an automatic level-
ing device is provided, in which case the normal terminal
stopping device should stop the car within the range of
the leveling device.
2.28.4 References
2.28.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000/B44-00
and earlier editions — Section 209 and Rules
1001.2(b)(26) and 1002.3f.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.25, 8.11.2.1.2(z), and 8.11.2.3.6.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.8.2, 3.9.1, 3.9.2, and 3.10.4.
32
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Table 2.29.2(a) Maximum Safety Rope PulLout
For Car Safeties:
200 ft/min or less
201 to 375 ft/min
Over 375 ft/min
For Counterweight Safeties:
All speeds
42 in.
36 in.
30 in.
42 in.
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) 1 in. = 25.4 mm
(b) 1 ft/min = 5.08 E - 03 m/s
ITEM 2.29
CAR AND COUNTERWEIGHT SAFETIES
2.29.1 Periodic Inspections
See Item 5.8.1.1.
(io) 2.29.2 Periodic Test
(a) Yearly Inspection (Power Off) of Steel Guide Rail
Safeties (for A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 1
Test (Power Off) of Steel Guide Rail Safeties (for A17. 1-2000/
B44-00 and Later Editions)
(1) Examine the car and counterweight guide shoes
and their fastenings to determine that they are properly
secured, aligned, and adjusted. Check the gibs or rollers
for excessive wear.
(2) See Item 5.8.1 for the running clearances
between the guide rails and the gripping face of the
safeties.
(3) Determine that all moving parts of the safety
are clean, lubricated, not corroded, and free to operate.
(4) On drum-operated Type B safeties, inspect the
safety rope and its deflecting sheaves and their fasten-
ings to determine that they are not worn excessively or
corroded, and that the rope sheaves are securely fastened
and are in operating condition.
Safety drum rope must be of a corrosion-resistant
material and not be of tiller rope construction. Before
any test is made on drum safeties, ensure that the proper
safety wrench is available, then pull out the safety drum
rope until the safety jaws contact the rail and start to
exert pressure. The movement of the safety drum rope,
starting from a fully retracted position, must not exceed
the values based on rated speed shown in Table 2.29.2(a).
The number of turns of rope remaining on the safety
drum must be sufficient to allow for additional pullout
of the safety drum rope to ensure proper operation of
the safety when the governor is operated due to an
overspeed condition.
Reset the safety on completion of the above inspection.
Keep sufficient tension on the safety drum rope to pre-
vent kinking and to ensure that the rope will be evenly
and uniformly wound on the safety drum with no slack.
(5) On Type A and Type B safeties that are self-
releasing, it is not necessary to actuate the safety prior
to a test. Inspect the mechanism to see that it is clean
and lubricated and that there is no corrosion present.
(6) Before checking the adjustments of the trip (fin-
ger) rods and rollers, examine all crosshead pivot points
and linkage for lost motion, loose or missing set screws,
and excessive friction. Any lost motion in the actuation
lever should be removed. Lost motion and the inertia of
the governor-rope system may cause safety applications
under normal starting conditions.
(7) With the elevator car platform at a convenient
height, the safety can readily be checked from the pit
to determine that
(a) all rollers are properly in place.
(b) trip (finger) rods are in position to pick up
the rollers.
(c) when the governor rope is pulled to impart
motion to the trip (finger) rods, the roller must move
upward into the ultimate wedged positions in the safety
block without restriction. The operation shall be
repeated several times observing that the rollers fall
toward the rail. When the "finger" engages the roller, if
there is any tendency for the roller to fall away from
the rail, a jam between the roller and safety block can
result in a safety failure.
(d) normally, the rollers should be at the lowest
point of travel resting against the guard; have the trip
(finger) rods adjusted so that the rollers engage simulta-
neously when wedged between the roller pocket and
the guide rail.
(8) The Code requires a safety mechanism switch,
operated by the car safety, to be installed on all safeties.
While inspecting the safety, determine that the switch
contacts open before the safety jaws or rollers contact
the guide rails. Then open the switch manually and
determine that the car will not run when the switch
is open.
(b) Yearly Inspection (Power Off) of Wood Guide Rail
Safeties (for A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 1
Test (Power Off) of Wood Guide Rail Safeties (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions)
(1) The effectiveness of safeties of this type depends
on a substantial initial engagement of the toothed safety
jaw with the wood guide rail in a manner to produce
an increasing engagement with the rail until the car or
counterweight is brought to rest. Therefore, the condi-
tion of the guide rails is a prime consideration in making
an examination of the equipment.
(2) The guide rails must be of first quality selected
wood with the width sized to fill the car guide shoe
minus the normal running clearance. Guide rails that
are more than % in. (3.2 mm) undersize in width or
show evidence of "combing" by the safety jaws should
be replaced.
(3) From the top of the car, examine all safety
operating parts including levers and linkage to be sure
that all keys and set screws are in place and tight. There
33
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
^ No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
should not be an excessive amount of lost motion in the
transmittal of movement to the finger rods actuating the
safety jaws.
(4) From the pit, with the elevator car platform at
a convenient height, the safety jaws can be readily exam-
ined and applied against the guide rails by pulling the
governor rope. Bring the safety jaws in contact with both
guide rails in such a manner that any downward motion
of the car would cause the jaw teeth to dig into the rails.
(5) When a safety operating switch is provided, the
motion of bringing the safety jaws in contact with the
rails must be sufficient to operate the switch.
(6) See Item 5.8.1 for the running clearances
between the guide rails and the gripping face of the
safeties.
(c) Yearly Test of Safeties (for A17.1d-2000 and Earlier
Editions); Category 1 Test of Safeties (for All 1-2000/844-00
and Later Editions)
(1) After the safety has been inspected, position the
car or counterweight in the lower portion of the hoistway
so that it will be accessible after the test. Jump out the
switches on the governor and safety (or that part of the
safety circuit) that would prevent a full setting of the
safety Start the car or counterweight, whichever is being
tested, in the down direction at the slowest operating
speed and manually trip the governor. Type A safeties
without governors that are operated as a result of the
breaking or slackening of the hoisting ropes shall be
tested by obtaining the necessary slack rope to cause it
to function. On centrifugal governors that do not have
a dropping jaw, engage the flyweight into the actuating
device before starting the car down. Run the car down
until the machine stalls or drives through the hoisting
ropes. Next, open the main line disconnect switch,
remove any jumpers, and proceed to the safety being
tested.
NOTE: Examine all parts of the safety equipment to determine
if anything is broken or out of order. See that all ropes are properly
on the drum to fully apply the safety, be sure that not less than
three turns of rope remain on the drum. This is necessary to meet
the requirement of not less than three turns remaining on the drum
after a rated load, rated speed test- Flexible guide clamp safeties
that are drum-operated do not require any turns of rope to remain
on the drum after a test. Verify that there is no excess slack in the
suspension ropes that could result in the car falling should the
safety slip. Examine all parts of the safety equipment to determine
if anything is broken or out of order.
(2) Check the platform for level. All elevators
installed under A17. 1-1955 and later editions must not
be out of level more than % in. /ft (31 mm/m) in any
direction.
Elevators installed prior to A17.1-1955 must not be out
of level more than \ in. /ft (42 mm/m) in any direction.
Counterweight safeties may be set in the pit or just above
the car. In either case, be careful of the final location so
that it will be accessible after the test.
After the safety has been examined, restore power
and, if necessary, jump the slack rope switch. Then
release the safety. Restore and reset the governor to
operating position.
(3) Type A and self -releasing Type B safeties are
released by moving the car or counterweight in the up
direction. This should be accomplished with one short
move. After one move, be sure that the governor has
released the governor rope. If it is not released, move
the governor sheave or the jaw to gain this release.
(4) The drum-operated Type B safety is released
with a safety wrench from inside the car or at the coun-
terweight. This is a two-person operation. One person
must be stationed on top of the car, or in the pit, to hold
the governor rope so it does not overhaul while the
second person releases and resets the governor. The sec-
ond person should then proceed to the car or counter-
weight and release the safety while the first person is
holding back on the rope and reinsert into the releasing
carrier.
(5) Examine all of the safety parts to determine that
they have returned to the normal running positions, and
be sure that there is no slack in the safety rope.
(6) Inspect the guide rails for scoring and loose
hardware. Dress any scored rail surface.
(7) It is not necessary to record the stopping dis-
tance in this test.
(8) Determine that all jumpers have been removed.
(d) Yearly Test of Wood Guide Rail Safeties (for
A17.U-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test of Wood
Guide Rail Safeties (for A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later
Editions). With governor-operated safeties, set the gov-
ernor in the applied position and run the car in the
down direction from the controller to see that it will
operate the safety. Continue to operate until the ropes
slip on traction machines or slacken on drum machines.
For Type A safeties without governors, set blocking in
the pit securely and run the car down slowly to see that
the jaws come into proper position when a slack rope
is obtained.
(e) 5-Year Test of Steel Guide Rail Safeties (Rated Load,
Rated Speed) (for A17 Ad-2000 and Earlier Editions);
Category 5 Test of Steel Guide Rail Safeties (Rated Load,
Rated Speed) (for A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions)
(1) Place the rated load on the elevator car platform
using test weights, centered on each quarter symmetri-
cally with relation to the centerline. Test counterweight
safeties with no load in the car. Jump out any governor
switches, or any part of the safety circuit, that will pre-
vent a full setting of the safety. Shut down adjacent cars
during test. If you are testing a drum-type safety, you
must shut down any car adjacent to the releasing carrier,
and keep it shut down until all slack in the safety rope
is under control. If a safety wrench is to be used, put it
in the elevator car and remove the release hole cover on
34
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
the car floor. Do not insert the wrench into the release
hole until after the safety is applied.
(2) For Type B and C safeties, the safety mechanism
switch (plank switch) must not be jumped out. The
switch shall be tested for proper operation and, for the
duration of the test, temporarily adjusted to open as
close as possible to the position at which the car safety
mechanism is in the fully applied position. The opening
of this switch has an effect on the safety slide, which
must be taken into consideration.
(3) When testing safeties, the following steps must
be considered:
(a) Before setting the car safety, tie down any
counterweight safety lift lever with four wraps of No. 16
gage copper wire or equivalent. This will avoid an acci-
dental setting of the counterweight safety by inertia.
Do not block the counterweight safety; it must remain
workable. Reverse the procedure for testing counter-
weight safeties.
(b) Most compensating-rope sheaves have a
tie-down device. This device will probably lock when
a safety is set. To avoid the work required to release
the device, it is recommended that the device be made
inoperative or be removed and the compensating-rope
sheave be tied down with a line to keep it in place.
(c) Make sure that any adjustable stops on the
governor tension sheave are set very close to the mov-
able unit.
(d) Make sure that the buffers are fully extended
and filled to a normal level with oil.
(4) Add the dimension of the safety rope pullout
to the estimated stopping distance in order to determine
the distance the car will travel after the governor is
tripped. Spot the car or counterweight this distance
above the point where the stop is desired. Put a reference
mark on a suspension rope (chalk mark or tape). Move
the car or counterweight up a few floors, far enough to
reach your mark at full speed. Start the car or counter-
weight down and manually trip the governor when you
see the mark. Let the elevator run until either the suspen-
sion ropes slip in the traction sheave or the driving
machine stalls (on winding drum machines, stop at the
first indication of slack rope), then immediately remove
power from the hoisting machine. Type A safeties with-
out governors that are operated as a result of the break-
ing or slackening of the hoisting ropes shall be tested
by obtaining the necessary slack rope to cause it to func-
tion. If a normal safety setting occurs, put all the cars
back in service, except the one being worked on and
the one adjacent to the releasing carrier. On an elevator
with a winding drum machine, be sure to take up any
slack rope before the safety is released.
(5) Remove electrical jumpers and reset the gover-
nor, unless it is a drum-operated safety. If it is drum
operated, one person will go to the car top and hold
Table 2.29.2(b) Minimum and Maximum
Stopping Distances for Type B Car Safeties With
Rated Load, and Type B Counterweight Safeties
With No Load in the Car
Rated
Stopping Distances
Speed,
Minimum, Maximum,
ft/min
ft-in.
ft-in.
0 to 125
0-1
1-0
150
0-1
1-1
175
0-2
1-3
200
0-2
1-4
225
0-3
1-6
250
0-3
1-7
300
0-5
1-11
350
0-7
2-4
400
0-9
2-10
450
0-11
3-4
500
1-1
3-11
600
1-7
5-3
700
2-2
6-10
800
2-9
8-9
900
3-6
10-10
1,000
4-4
13-2
1,100
5-2
15-9
1,200
6-2
18-7
1,300
7-3
21-8
1,400
8-5
25-0
1,500
9-8
28-7
1,600
11-0
32-5
1,700
12-5
36-5
1,800
13-11
40-9
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) This table is for rated load, rated speed test only. Use
Table 2.17.3 in the Code for rated load, overspeed test only.
(b) Use Table 2.17.3 of the A17.1 Code when performing accept-
ance tests.
(c) 1 ft/min = 5.08 E - m/s
(d) 1 in. = 25.4 mm
the safety rope as the governor is reset. Inspect the gover-
nor for any damage.
(6) Proceed to the elevator car to release the safety.
Before the safety is released, check the platform for level.
On all elevators installed under A17.1-1955 and later
editions, it must not be out of level more than % in. /ft
(31 mm/m) in any direction. On elevators installed prior
to A17.1-1955, it must not be out of level more than
l/2 in. /ft (42 mm/m) in any direction. Elevators installed
prior to A17.1-1955 are allowed a greater flexibility of
stopping distance than shown in Table 2.29.2(b). For
gradual wedge clamp, flexible guide clamp, and wedge
clamp (constant retarding force) Type B safeties, see
Tables 2.29.2(c), 2.29.2(d), and 2.29.2(e).
(7) Generally it will not be possible to inspect the
safety due to the location of the car; therefore, the safety
must be released. To do this on other than drum-
operated Type B safeties, move the car or counterweight,
35
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Table 2.29.2(c) Gradual Wedge Clamp Safety
Table 2.29.2(e) Wedge Clamp Safety (Constant
Maximum
Stopping
Ketard
ing i-orcej
Maximum
Distance
Minimum Stopping Distance
Stopping
Distance
Minimum Stc
Governor-
Tripping
Car + Rated
Load or for
Car + Rated
Load or for
)pping Distance
Governor-
Car + Rated
Car + Rated
Speed,
Counterweight,
Car+ 150
Counterweight,
Tripping
Load or for
Load or for
ft/min
ft-in.
lb, ft-in.
ft-in.
Speed,
Counterweight,
Car + 150
Counterweight,
175
6-2
1-5
1-11
ft/min
ft-in.
lb, ft-in.
ft-in.
200
6-3
1-5
2-0
175
1-4
0-10
0-10
300
6-11
1-6
2-4
200
1-6
0-11
1-0
400
7-10
1-8
2-7
300
2-0
1-0
1-2
500
8-10
1-11
2-11
400
2-10
1-2
1-7
600
9-11
2-1
3-4
500
3-11
1-5
2-0
700
11-1
2-4
3-10
600
5-2
1-7
2-5
800
12-4
2-7
4-6
700
6-8
1-11
3-0
900
13-6
3-0
5-4
800
8-6
2-2
3-7
1,000
14-8
3-6
6-1
900
10-8
2-7
4-4
1,100
16-0
4-0
7-0
1,000
12-11
3-0
5-1
1,200
17-4
4-7
8-0
1,100
15-6
3-6
6-0
1,300
18-6
5-1
9-0
1,200
18-5
4-0
7-1
1,400
19-8
5-8
10-1
1,300
21-8
4-7
8-2
1,500
21-1
6-2
11-1
1,400
25-0
5-1
9-4
1,500
28-3
5-7
10-5
GENERAL NOitb:
(a) For elevators installed prior to A17. 1-1955.
GENERAL NOTES:
(b) 1 ft/min
- 5.08 E - 03 m/s
(a) For elevators installed prior
to A17.1-1955.
(c) 1 in. =
25.4 mm
(b) 1 ft/min
(c) 1 in. =
= 5.08 E - 03 m/
25.4 mm
5
Table 2.29.2(d) Flexible Guide Clamp Safety
Maximum
Stopping
Distance
Minimum
Stopping Distance
Governor-
Car + Rated
Car + Rated
Tripping
Load or for
Load or for
Speed,
Counterweight,
Car+ 150
Counterweight,
ft/min
ft-in.
lb, ft-in.
ft-in.
175
0-10
0-5
0-6
200
0-11
0-6
0-7
300
1-7
0-7
0-8
400
2-5
0-8
1-1
500
3-5
0-11
1-6
600
4-10
1-2
1-11
700
6-5
1-6
2-5
800
8-2
1-10
3-2
900
10-4
2-2
3-11
1,000
12-7
2-7
4-8
1,100
15-2
3-0
5-8
1,200
18-0
3-6
6-8
1,300
21-1
4-0
7-10
1,400
24-7
4-7
8-11
1,500
28-0
5-2
10-0
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) ft/min
= 5.08 E - 03 m/s
(b) 1 in. =
25.4 mm
whichever is being tested, in the up direction. On drum-
operated safeties, after checking for at least three turns
of rope remaining on the drum, wind in the safety drum
rope while a second person is standing on top of the
car holding back on the rope. To complete the winding,
he must insert the minie ball into the releasing carrier.
Move the car, or counterweight, and measure the safety
slide mark on the rails. The stopping distance is the
average length of the continuous marks on all four rail
faces after deducting the length of the safety jaw or
wedge. See Item 2.29.2.1(f) for a detailed description of
measuring safety slide marks.
(8) The stopping distance must be within the range
shown in Table 2.29.2(b). The stopping distance permit-
ted is determined by the tripping speed of the governor.
When performing a rated load, rated speed test, the
rated speed is the speed at which the governor is tripped
during this test.
(9) Check the rails and dress any scored surface.
Also, check for any loose rail or bracket fastenings.
(10) To inspect a car safety, move the car to a conve-
nient height above the pit floor. A counterweight safety
can be inspected from the car top. Examine all parts of
the equipment to determine if any are broken or out of
order. Be sure that the ropes are in their sheave grooves
and are properly wound on the drum. Be sure that the
safety has returned to the normal running position.
36
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 2.29.2(a) Safety Marks on Guide Rails, Poor
Illumination
Guide rail
CO o
to ^Z
o CD
2 =
CD
Fig. 2.29.2(b) Safety Marks on Guide Rails, Good
Illumination
Guide rail
CO
I
GENERAL NOTE: A = start of slide; B = end of slide.
GENERAL NOTE: A = start of slide; B = end of slide.
(11) After the safety tests are complete
(a) remove any jumpers from the safety switches
(b) remove any line from the compensating-rope
sheave
(c) replace the tie-down device or any of its parts
that were removed
(d) remove any tie down that was wrapped on
the car or counterweight safety lift lever
(e) readjust the safety-mechanism switch
(12) Ensure the required test tags are installed.
(f) Determination of Slide on the Guide Rails for
Type B Safeties
(1) General. Following a safety test, there is often
considerable difficulty in determining the actual slide
of the safety jaws on the guide rails. In the case of a
well-lubricated rail, the first action of the closing jaws
is to squeeze out the film of oil or grease. This area of
reduced lubrication is often mistaken for part of the
mark but should not be included in the measured sliding
distance. Start the measurement at the point where
actual contact is made by a jaw on the guide rail and is
generally indicated by a slight roughening along the
line of travel of the jaw. This has a somewhat different
color; the guide rail looks gray in contrast with the pol-
ished surface.
(2) Effect of Illumination. The angle of illumination
and the position of the observer have much to do with
the ease with which the marks may be identified. The
marks showing in Figs. 2.29.2(a) and 2.29.2(b) are the
same marks viewed from the same position with identi-
cal exposures but with the illumination changed from
60 deg with the light level with the end of the marks,
to 45 deg with the light considerably below the marks.
Often it is possible to pick up the marks with the light
source almost in line with the face of the guide rail.
(3) Marks on Dry Guide Rails. When the guide rail
is dry, as is the case with roller guides, the mark may
be very difficult to determine as there is no disturbed
film of lubricant to aid in its location. However, by care-
fully adjusting the position of the light source and chang-
ing the angle of vision, it is generally possible to
determine the point at which the mark starts.
(4) Determination of Final Position of Jaws. As the
jaws tend to bite more deeply into the guide rail after
full application, even with types where the pressure of
the jaws on the guide rail is designed to remain constant,
there is little difficulty, as a rule, in determining the final
position of the jaws. Where the guide rails are lubricated,
the terminal mark may generally be indicated by the
piling up of oil or grease below the safety shoe; fre-
quently the entire print of the shoe or gib may be seen
on the guide rail in the final stop position.
(5) Interrupted Marks. It occasionally happens that
the safety jaws will come in contact with the guide rail
and leave a mark for a certain distance, and then the
mark will be lost for a distance of a few inches or perhaps
a foot. This may be due to several causes, among them
slight deviations in the alignment of the guide rails,
variations in thickness, or the sudden engagement of
37
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
the governor rope by the governor, with a following
jump of the governor rope that will permit the jaws to
clear for a small fraction of a second. In no case should
these preliminary marks be considered in the measure-
ment of the slide. Measure the slide from the highest
point of the continuous marking only.
(6) Measurement of Stopping Distance. Determine
the stopping distance by measuring the length of the
marks made by the safety on both sides of each guide
rail, deducting the length of the safety jaw or wedge,
and taking the average of the four measurements.
(10) 2.29.3 Acceptance Test of Governor and Safeties
(a) Test Type A governor-operated safeties by
operating the car at its normal speed in the down direc-
tion by manually tripping the governor jaws. Also, test
the inertia application of safety. Type A safeties without
governors that are operated as a result of the breaking
or slackening of the hoisting ropes shall be tested by
obtaining the necessary slack rope to cause them to
function.
(b) Type B and Type C safeties on electric elevators
are tested as outlined in Item 2.29.2.1(e), and must be
subject to overspeed tests. The acceptance test for
hydraulic elevators is the same as the
Category 5/five-year test [see Item 2.29.2.1(e)]. Gradu-
ally increase the speed of the car until the governor
causes application of the safety. Determine that the stop-
ping distance is in compliance with the maximum and
minimum slide distances allowed. On elevators
equipped with AC driving machine motors, where the
car with its rated load does not cause sufficient
overspeed when the machine brake is released to trip
the governor jaws, the safeties must be tested by
operating the car at its normal speed in the down direc-
tion and manually tripping the governor jaw.
(c) Counterweight safeties, where provided, must be
tested with no load in the car.
2.29.4 References
2.29.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Sections 205 and 1306, Table 205.3, and Rules
1001.2(b)(29), 1002.2b, 1002.3a, 1003.2, and 1202.6.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.17 and 8.2.6, Table 2.17.3, and
Requirements 8.11.2.1.2(cc), 8.11.2.2.2, 8.11.2.3.1, 8.10.2.2,
and 8.7.2.18.
A17.3 — Sections 3.5 and 3.6 and para. 3.10.4(m).
NOTE: Items 2.30 through 2.37 apply to hydraulic elevators only.
ITEM 2.30
HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT
2.30.1 Periodic Inspections
2.30.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators
(a) Motor. Have the elevator operated in the up direc-
tion, making several starts, and observe the operation
of the motor, pump, and drive. Check for excessive noise,
misalignment, and loose mounting.
(b) Pump. The pump should be checked for leaks
around the shaft and for unusual noise that could be
caused by cavitation due to a partially plugged suction
line or strainer or low oil level.
2.30.3 Acceptance
2.30.4 References
2.30.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 304; and Rules 1004.2(b)(13) and
1206.5.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.24, 8.11.3.1.2(m), and 8.6.5.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
ITEM 2.31
RELIEF VALVES
2.31.1 Periodic Inspections
2.31.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators: Relief Valve. Examine
the relief valve and verify that it is sealed to prevent
tampering. If the means of sealing the valve is not intact,
test adjustment and sealing must be required.
2.31.2 Periodic Test
2.31.2.2 Hydraulic Elevators: Yearly Test (for
A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions). Have an
inspector's pressure gauge installed in the system. There
is usually a fitting provided for this in the machine room.
Test the relief valve by inching the car at slow speed
against the stop ring. Then cause the controls to attempt
to run the car at full speed and read the gauge. The full
output of the pump should bypass at a gauge reading
150% or less of the working pressure.
After the test, check the car for proper operation and
visually inspect the system for leaks. After this test, the
means of adjustment must be sealed. The annual test of
flexible hydraulic hose and fitting assembly (Item 2.17)
may be conducted concurrently with this relief valve test.
Al 7. 1-1971 and later editions require that the working
pressure be on a plate mounted on the power unit.
2.31.3 Acceptance
2.31.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Check the working
pressure given on the elevator layout with that on the
tank plate. If these agree, verify them by installing an
inspector's pressure gauge in the system, at or near the
cylinder; run the car up at rated speed with rated load.
The gauge should read the working pressure. For eleva-
tors with Class C2 loading, place the maximum static
load on the elevator then run it down about 2 in. (54 mm)
to 3 in. (76 mm) on inspection. Then turn it back on
automatic and read the pressure as the car levels up. If
38
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
the gauge is installed at the power unit, the pressure
will be slightly more than the pressure at the cylinder.
This difference is dependent on the length and configu-
ration of the supply piping and speed of the elevator.
In some cases this difference is very small and can be
ignored.
2.31.4 References
2.31.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Al 7. ld-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 308; Rules 303.1, 303.2, 303.4b,
1004.2(b)(13), 1005.2a, and 1006.2b; and Section 3
(Definitions).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.28, 3,19.1, 3.19.2, 3.19.4.2, 8.11.3.1.2(m),
8.11.3.2.1, and 8.10.3.2.2(m); and 1.3 (Definitions).
A17.3 — Paragraph 4.4.1.
ITEM 2.32
CONTROL VALVE
2.32.1 Periodic Inspections
2.32.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators
(a) Control Valve. The valves, fittings, and intercon-
necting piping should be checked for pressure rating,
leakage, and adequate support.
(b) Manual Lowering Valve and Anticreep Elevators.
Manual lowering valve and anticreep elevators installed
under the A17.1-1984 and later editions are required to
have a manual lowering valve identified and located on
or adjacent to the control valve.
Check the operation of the manual lowering valve
and the anticreep leveling device as follows:
(1) Position the car at a landing in response to oper-
ation by the normal landing device.
(2) Lower the car by opening the manual lowering
valve to initiate a downward movement. The pump
motor should start when or before the car exceeds 1 in.
(25 mm) from the floor.
(3) Close the manual lowering valve [the car should
be within 1 in. (25 mm) of the floor when the pump
motor stops].
See Item 3.7 for additional information and procedure
for testing the anticreep device when there is no manual
lowering valve.
2.32.2 Periodic Test
2.32.3 Acceptance
2.32.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Check the manual
lowering valve for identification function and location.
2.32.4 References
2.32.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17. ld-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 303 and Rule 1004.2(b)(15).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.19 and 8.11.3.1.2(o).
A17.3 — Section 4.4.
ITEM 2.33
TANKS
2.33.1 Periodic Inspections
2.33.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators
(a) Atmospheric Storage and Discharge Tanks. Visually
inspect the tank for defects such as leaks, corrosion,
damage, and cover to prevent entrance of foreign
materials.
(1) Have the car moved to the top landing and
check the hydraulic fluid level. While the car is moving
up, listen for sounds that may indicate cavitation or
obstructed strainers. The liquid should be above the
minimum level indicated. A17. 1-1955 through
Al 7. 1-1965 required that the minimum liquid level be
clearly indicated. A17. 1-1971 and later editions require
that the means of checking the liquid level be accessible
without removal of any cover or other parts.
(2) Observe drip pans for excess accumulation of
hydraulic fluid that leaked from the system.
(b) Pressure Tanks
(1) Determine whether the tank installed under
A17.1-1971 and later editions, or any replacement tank,
is marked to indicate that it was made and tested in
conformance with Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code. This may be stamped on the tank
or on a data plate attached in such a manner that removal
would result in its destruction. The following informa-
tion should be included:
(a) name of manufacturer
(b) maximum allowable working pressure at
temperature
(c) minimum design metal temperature
id) manufacturer's serial number
(e) the year built
(2) Examine for corrosion, leaks, badly corroded
surfaces, or any indication of cracking or failure of the
metal. If any of the above conditions exist, recommend
that a hydraulic elevator's static test be performed in
accordance with the ASME Pressure Vessel Code. Check
the tank for
(a) a pressure gauge
(b) a place to install an inspector's gauge
(c) a liquid level gauge
Verify that these are in good working order and install
an inspector's gauge to check the accuracy of the perma-
nently installed gauge.
2.33.2 Periodic Test
2.33.2.2 Hydraulic Elevators: 3-Year Inspection and
Test of Pressure Tanks (for A17. ld-2000 and Earlier
Editions); Category 3 Test and Test Pressure Tanks (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions)
WARNING: Hydraulic elevator's static test can be dangerous
if not performed by qualified persons.
39
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
The pressure tank should be thoroughly cleaned and
inspected both internally and externally. It should be
subjected to hydraulic elevator's static test at 150% of the
working pressure. This is done by removing all control
devices, and isolating the tank. A calibrated inspector's
gauge with maximum reading twice the test pressure
must be installed.
The tank is then filled completely with water. Care
must be taken to remove all of the air from the tank. If
air or any compressible gas is trapped in the tank, the
test will become dangerous. A hand pump can then be
used to provide the test pressure. The tank should be
held at the test pressure for at least 1 min and inspected
for leaks, distortions, or damage. Since there is no com-
pressible fluid (air or other gas) in the tank, a very small
leak will cause a rapid loss of pressure. This may be
cause for replacement of the tank.
After the test, the tank must be thoroughly cleaned
before returning to service.
2.33.3 Acceptance
2.33.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. The tank should be
visually inspected for damage that may have resulted
from handling and installation. The data required by
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code should be
verified (see Item 2.16.1.2).
2.33.4 References
2.33.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 304; and Rules 1004.2(b)(16),
1005.3b, 1203.6, and 1206.5b.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.24, 8.11.3.1.2(p)/ 8.11.3.3.2, 8.7.3.29,
8.6.5.1, 8.6.5.2, 8.6.5.5, and 8.6.5.6.
A17.3 — Section 4.5.
ITEM 2.34
FLEXIBLE HYDRAULIC HOSE AND
FITTING ASSEMBLIES
2.34.1 Periodic Inspections
2.34.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Visually examine flex-
ible hydraulic hoses, fitting assemblies, and flexible cou-
plings for evidence of leakage, slippage of hose fittings,
and damage to outer hose covering sufficient to expose
reinforcement or cause distortion or bulging of hose
body. Such damage will warrant further test. Check hose
and fitting assemblies for proper identification and per-
manent marking and replacement date.
2.34.2 Periodic Test
2.34.2.2 Hydraulic Elevators: Yearly Test (for
A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions). From the
machine room have the car inched up at slow speed
until the stop ring is engaged. Then operate the system
Table 2.34.3 Minimum Bend Radius for
SAE 100R2 Hose
From 5AEJ517 100R2 Hose
ID
OD
Minimum Burst
Minimum Bend
in.
in.
Pressure, psi
Radius, in.
v2
31/32
14,000
7
%
l3/32
11,000
8
%
I1/*
9,000
9%
%
iVs
8,000
11
i
l9/l6
8,000
12
iy«
2
6,500
I6V2
iv2
2Y<
5,000
20
2
2%
4,000
25
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. = 25.4 mm
at rated speed to provide full relief valve bypass pressure
for 30 s. While under pressure, observe the hose for any
signs of leakage, slippage of hose fittings, damage to
outer hose covering, bulging, or distortion of the hose
body. Any of these signs require replacement of the hose.
Have a metal tag attached to the hose in a permanent
manner indicating the date of the test and the name of
the person or firm that performed the test.
2.34.3 Acceptance Test
2.34.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Check that the hose
is not installed in the hoist way or projects into or through
any wall. Check for twists, kinks, or sharp bending
radius. See Table 2.34.3.
2.34.4 References
2.34.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 303.3c, 1004.2(b)(17), and 1005.2d.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.19.3.3, 8.11.3.1.2(q), and 8.11.3.2.4.
ITEM 2.35
SUPPLY LINE AND SHUTOFF
VALVE
2.35.1 Periodic Inspections
Inspect the supply line between the cylinder and the
pumping unit for leaks, adequate support, vibration, or
other evidence of damage. A careful examination of the
piping and fittings will indicate if a replacement has
been made that does not match the rest of the system.
In such cases, the replacement part pressure rating
should be checked by examining the rating supplied by
the manufacturer. Also, inspect the piping for support
to prevent undue stress due to weight of pipe or other
equipment.
Check fittings for absence of corrosion, leaks, and
evidence of excessive vibration. On grooved fittings,
check that the housing segments are bolt pad to bolt
(10)
40
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
pad, that coupling keys are in the pipe groove, that bolt
heads are seated and nuts are tight.
Inspect the manual shutoff valve in the machine room
for condition and leaks. Manual shutoff valves are
required for elevators installed under A17. 1-1978 and
later editions with unexposed cylinders. A17.1-1996 and
later editions require a manual shutoff valve for all eleva-
tors. Editions of the Code prior to A17.1-1993 required
a material safety factor of 5 and elongation of not less
than 10% for valves, fittings, and supply piping. Some
valves and fittings are rated with a material safety factor
of 3. In such a case, the manufacturer's published rating
should be down-rated for elevator application. This can
be done by multiplying the published rating by 3 and
dividing by 5.
EXAMPLE: Manufacturer's rating 1,000 psi
1000 x % = 600 psi
If the material elongation for the material in this exam-
ple is at least 10%, the valve or fitting could be used for
working pressure up to 600 psi.
2.35.2 Periodic Test
235.3 Acceptance
Inspect the valves and fittings as indicated under rou-
tine inspection. However, for new equipment, the factor
of safety may vary inversely with the elongation of the
material. This will allow a lower factor of safety if the
elongation is increased. Likewise, if the elongation is
decreased, the factor of safety must be increased. There-
fore, it is recommended that the installer furnish docu-
mentation that the presure rating complies with the
requirements of ASME A17.1 for the applicable working
pressure, with data from the valve, fitting, and pipe
manufacturers. Review this to verify compliance with
pressure rating requirements.
If the elevator supplier has obtained a type approval
from the jurisdiction, verify that all installed compo-
nents are included in the type approval.
Determine that pipe fittings have been installed in
locations that permit disassembly and inspection of
components.
2.35.4 References
2.35.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 303.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 3.19.
A17.3 — Paragraph 4.4.4.
ITEM 2.36
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
2.36.1 Periodic Inspections
2.36.2 Periodic Test
2.36.2.2 Hydraulic Elevators: Yearly Test (for
A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions). This test
should be performed after the relief valve test in
Item 2.31 and the flexible hose test in Item 2.34. Cylin-
ders that cannot be inspected visually should be tested
in the following manner with no load in the car. Mark
the location of the car at any convenient position. Open
the disconnect switch for 15 min. Note the position of
the car platform with respect to the reference mark. A
change in car position that cannot be accounted for by
visible oil leakage, valve leakage, or temperature change
of the oil indicates a leak of the cylinder or in the under-
ground piping and a need for further inspection, tests,
or repairs.
2.36.3 Acceptance
2.36.4 References
2.36.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 302.3, 1004.2(b)(19), and 1005.2b.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.18.3, 8.11.3.1.2(s), and 8.11.3.2.2.
ITEM 2.37
PRESSURE SWITCH
2.37.1 Periodic Inspections
2.37.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators. For elevators installed
under A17. 1-1981 and later editions, a pressure switch
is required if the top of the cylinder is above the storage
tank. This switch is to prevent operation of the valves
if there is no pressure in the line between the down
valve and cylinder. Visually inspect for condition and
damage.
2.37.2 Periodic Test
2.37.2.2 Hydraulic Elevators: Yearly Test (for
A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions). Test the pres-
sure switch in the following manner:
(a) Place the car at any landing except the bottom
landing.
(b) Remove one electrical lead from the pressure
switch and try to run the car in the down direction. If
the car will not run by normal means, open the main
line disconnect switch. Connect a circuit continuity tes-
ter, such as an ohmmeter, across the pressure switch and
lower the car on the buffer with the manual lowering
valve.
(c) The ohmmeter should indicate that the pressure
switch is open when the car comes to rest on the buffer.
2.37.3 Acceptance
2.37.4 References
2.37.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 306.14, 1004.2(b)(20), and 1005.2e.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.26.8, 8.11.3.1.2(t), and 8.11.3.2.5.
41
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. /^
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. vfi
ASME A17.2-2010
ITEM 2.38
ROPED WATER HYDRAULIC
ELEVATORS
2.38.1 Periodic Inspections
2.38.2 Periodic Test: 3-Year Test (for A17.1d-2000
and Earlier Editions); Category 3 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions)
Check the condition of the rod at the thread end,
which is where the bolt and nut are against the plunger.
This should be done on the bottom and top ends. It is
very common for the rod to break where the thread and
nut end are against the plunger of packing thread.
2.38.3 Acceptance
2.38.4 References
ITEM 2.39
LOW OIL PROTECTION
2.39.1 Periodic Inspections
2.39.2 Periodic Test
For elevators installed under A17.1-1993 and later
editions, check that a means is provided to detect when
the liquid level in the tank falls below the minimum
required for the car to reach the topmost landing. Verify
that when activated, the car will automatically travel to
the lowest landing, cycle power-operated horizontally
sliding passenger elevator doors that are equipped with
reopening devices, and shut down. Also, verify that
the in-car door open button (where provided) remains
operative. Also, see requirement 2.11.3 of A17.1.
2.393 Acceptance
2.39.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rule 306.15.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions — Requirement
3.26.9.
ITEM 2.40
MAINTENANCE RECORDS
2.40.1 Periodic Inspections
Review the maintenance records and verify that they
are available to elevator personnel and that they are
legible and up to date. They should include the
following:
(a) description of maintenance task performed and
dates
(b) description and dates of examinations, tests,
adjustments, repairs, and replacements
(c) description and dates of call backs (trouble calls)
or reports that are reported to elevator personnel by any
means, including corrective action taken
(d) written record of the findings on the firefighter's
service operation monthly test is maintained
2.40.1.1 Hydraulic Elevators. Check the record of
oil usage where required. Investigate any unaccountable
fluid loss.
2.40.4 References do)
2.40.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1-2000/B44-00 and
later editions — Requirements 8.6.1.4, c8.6.12.2.5, and
8.6.10.1.
2.40.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1-2000/B44-00
and later editions — Requirements 8.6.1.4, c8.6.12.2.5,
8.6.10.1, and 8.6.5.7.
ITEM 2.41
STATIC CONTROL
2.41.1 Periodic Inspections
2.41.2 Periodic Test
2.41.3 Acceptance
The person or firm installing or maintaining an eleva-
tor employing static control should demonstrate confor-
mance with the Code as follows:
(a) If in the up direction, the pump motor is the only
control means, run the car and demonstrate that there are
two devices provided to remove power independently
from the pump motor. At least one device shall be an
electromechanical contactor.
(b) If in the up direction, the pump motor is one con-
trol means and there is a second control means (e.g., a
valve), run the car and demonstrate that a device is
provided to remove power independently from each
control means. At least one device shall be an electrome-
chanical contactor or relay.
(c) Prevent the above electromechanical contactor or
relay from being energized and register a call. Demon-
strate, with the doors closed, that the car will not move.
(d) Demonstrate that the operation of the devices
specified in Items 2.21.2(a) and (b) will remove power
from each control means.
2.41.4 References
ITEM 2.42 (10)
EARTHQUAKE INSPECTION AND TESTS (SEISMIC
RISK ZONE 2 OR GREATER)
2.42.1 Periodic inspection
(a) Verify that all rope retainers or rope guards are in
place.
(b) Verify that equipment in the machine room, con-
trol panels, machines, machine beams, support beams,
and sheaves are properly fastened to the overhead beams
and floor to prevent overturning, where required.
42
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
2.42.1.1 Electric Elevators
(a) If the seismic switch is used exclusively for control
of the elevator, check to see that the switch is located
in the machine room and on a vertical structural member
or at the nearest accessible vertical load-bearing member.
(b) Verify that there is a momentary reset button or
switch, for each elevator, located in its control panel
2.42.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators
(a) Verify that a means is provided which will prevent
the tank from overturning during seismic activity.
(b) Verify that all the pipe supports are in place.
2.42.2 Periodic Test
2.42.3 Acceptance
Verify that rope retainers are continuous over not less
than % of the arc of contact between the rope and its
sheave or drum and located so not more than \ of the
arc of contact is exposed. For double wrap, the arc of
contact is the length of arc that is uninterrupted by
the entry /exit of the ropes leading to /from the car or
counterweight. Rope restraints may be used in lieu of
retainers and, if they are used, there must be one for
each 30 deg or less of arc contact.
2.42.3.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Verify that the seismic switch operates properly.
When the switch is tripped, the elevator in motion shall
proceed to the nearest available floor, the doors shall
open, and the elevator shall shut down. If Phase II emer-
gency in-car operation is in effect, the door operation
shall conform to 2.27.3.3.
(b) Check the operation of the displacement switch.
When this switch is actuated, the elevator, if in motion,
shall stop (emergency stop) and then proceed away from
the counterweight at a speed not to exceed 150 ft/min
(0.75 m/s) to the nearest available floor, open the doors,
and shut down. If Phase II operation is in effect, door
operation must conform to 2.27.3.3.
(c) If a car with power-operated doors is just reaching
a landing, the doors shall open and remain open. If an
elevator is standing at a floor with its doors open, the
elevator shall remain at that floor. If an elevator is stand-
ing at a floor with the doors to the elevator closed, the
doors shall open. If Phase II operation is in effect, door
operation shall conform to 2.27.3.3. If an elevator is not
in operation when an earthquake protective device is
actuated, the elevator shall remain at the floor on which
it is located.
(d) An elevator may be operated at a speed not
exceeding 150 ft/min (0.75 m/s) as long as the displace-
ment switch operated by the counterweight is the contin-
uous monitoring type and is not actuated. If the
displacement switch is actuated then the car shall not
operate except with the top-of-car inspection operating
devices and shall prevent operation of the car by the
Phase I, Phase II, hospital emergency keys, or any other
similar types of operation. In a power loss situation, the
status of the earthquake protective device or slow speed
status of the elevator shall not be cancelled when power
is restored. The electric protective devices of 2.26.2 shall
not be rendered inoperative or bypassed by any earth-
quake devices.
2.42.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators
(a) If the building is designed with an expansion joint,
the machine room and the hoistway shall be located on
the same side of the expansion joint.
(b) Verify that the proper number of supports are used
to support the hydraulic lines and that supports to resist
transverse motion are provided near changes in direc-
tion and at valves and joints.
2.42.4 References
2.42.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1-1993 through
A17.1d-2000 editions — Rules 2401, 2400.1, 2408, and
2409.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.4.2, 8.4.3.1, 8.4.9, and 8.4.10.
2.42.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17. 1-1993 through
A17.1d-2000 editions — Rules 2401, 2400.1, 2410.1, and
2410.7.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.4.2, 8.4.3.1, 8.4.11.1, 8.4.11.3, and 8.4.11.6.
43
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Part3
Elevator — Top of Car
(10)
ITEM 3.1
TOP-OF-CAR STOP SWITCH
3.1.1 Periodic Inspections
Check the top-of-car stop switch in both directions to
ensure it is functioning properly and in compliance with
the Code before proceeding with the inspection.
3.1.2 Periodic Test
3.1.3 Acceptance
3.1.4 References
3.1.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 210.2(h) and 1001.2(c)(1).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.26.2.8 and 8.11.2.1.3(a).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.10.4(e).
3.1.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 306.4 and 1004.2(c)(1).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.26.1, 3.26.4, and 8.11.3.1.3(a).
A17.3 — Paragraph 4.7.4(a).
ITEM 3.2
CAR TOP LIGHT AND OUTLET
3.2.1 Periodic Inspections
For elevators installed under A17.1a-1979 and later
editions, check that a light and outlet have been provided
and that they are operational. The light must be guarded
to prevent damage when accidentally hit by a person
moving onto or around on the car top. For elevators
installed under the 1993 ANSI/NFPA 70, verify that
the outlet is GFCI protected. The 1996 ANSI/NFPA 70
requires the receptacle be the GFCI type. Test GFCI oper-
ation with either the built-in test button or GFCI tester.
NOTE: If the GFCI protection is not in the receptacle, the top car
light will go out when it is tested.
3.2.2 Periodic Test
3.2.3 Acceptance
Check the GFCI receptacle operation using the test
button. Use a receptacle tester to check the receptacle
for grounding and polarity. The inspector is not required
to have the unit disassembled but should visually
inspect the installation for evidence of nonlisted compo-
nents. Also, see Item 2.11.3(c) for car lighting disconnect
located in the machine room.
3.2.4 References
3.2.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 204.7 and 1001.2(c)(2).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.14.7 and 8.11.2.1.3(b).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.4.5.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
3.2.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 204.7 {301.7} and 1004.2(c)(2).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.14.7 {3.14} and 8.11.3.1.3(b).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.4.5 {4.2.3}.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
ITEM 3.3
TOP-OF-CAR OPERATING DEVICE
3.3.1 Periodic Inspections
Check top-of-car operating device for proper opera-
tion. A17.1d-1970 and later editions and A17.3 require
that the means to transfer control be on top of the car
between the crosshead and the access entrance. If sepa-
rate additional means are provided for making power
door or automatic car leveling devices operative, verify
that operation is by constant pressure means.
3.3.2 Acceptance
Confirm that top-of-car inspection operation has pri-
ority over in-car inspection operation.
3.3.3 References
3.3.3.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 204. lg, 210.1d, and 1001.2(c)(3).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.14.1.7, 2.26.1.4, and 8.11.2.1.3(c).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.10.3.
3.3.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 306.2 and 1004.2(c)(3).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.26.1, 3.26.2, and 8.11.3.1.3(c).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.10.3 and 4.7.2.
44
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
ITEM 3.4
TOP-OF-CAR CLEARANCE,
REFUGE SPACE, AND STANDARD RAILING
3.4.1 Periodic Inspections
3.4.1.1 Electric Elevators. Check the refuge space
for elevators installed under A17. 1-1978 and later
editions.
Before making any inspections or tests, determine the
available top car clearance. Where possible, determine
this by placing the car with its floor level with the top
terminal landing. Care must be exercised in measuring
this clearance from the car top as, in many existing
elevators, the top clearance may be insufficient to permit
a person to stand when the car floor is level with the
top terminal landing. Where the clearance appears to
be insufficient, stop the car at or below the top landing
and the top car clearance determined as follows:
(a) Measure the distance from the top of the car cross-
head to the nearest obstruction directly above it.
(b) Measure the projection of any sheaves, or other
equipment mounted in or on the car crosshead, above
the top of the crosshead.
(c) Measure the distance from the top of any equip-
ment mounted on top of the car (not the car crosshead)
to the nearest obstruction directly above it.
(d) For underslung car frames, measure the distance
between the overhead car rope dead-end hitch or over-
head car sheave and the portions of the car structure
directly below them.
(e) Subtract the distance, if any, the car floor is below
the top terminal landing from the distances measured
in Items 3.4.1(a), (c), and (d). The question of whether
or not the top car clearance, as measured, is adequate
or conforms to Code requirements cannot be determined
until the counterweight runby and counterweight buffer
stroke have been measured. (See Item 5.2.3.)
(f) Where an oil buffer is used for the counterweight
and no provision is made to prevent the jump of the car
upon counterweight engagement, add one-half of the
gravity stopping distance.
NOTE: The projection of rope fastenings or guide shoes above
the car structure is not to be considered an encroachment on the
top car clearance. However, excessive projection is not permitted
if interference with sheaves or other equipment would be encoun-
tered on maximum overtravel.
(10) 3.4.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Check the refuge space
for elevators installed under A17. 1-1978 and later edi-
tions. For elevators installed under A17. 1-1978 to
A17.1b-1995, verify that the refuge space is at least
650 in.2 (0.419 m2) and at least 16 in. (406 mm) on any
side with minimum vertical clearance of at least 42 in.
(1 067 mm).
Before making any inspections or tests, determine the
available top car clearance. Where possible, determine
this by placing the car with its floor level with the top
terminal landing.
Prior to Al 7. 1-1978, neither the refuge space nor the
6 in. (152 mm) clearance shown in Fig. 3.4.1.2 was
required. A17. 1-1955 through 1977 (located in the 1978
edition) required only that the top car clearance be equal
to the sum of the top car runby plus 2 ft (609 mm), or
the distance that any equipment projected above the
crosshead or car top if there is no crosshead provided.
For elevators installed under A17. 1-1955 through
A17.1a-1985, overhead beams or hoistway construction
located vertically over the car must be located at least 2 ft
(609 mm) horizontally from the crosshead. For elevators
installed under A17.1-1987 and later editions, the mea-
surement should be made from the lowest part of the
obstruction or beam over the car.
Care must be exercised in measuring this clearance
from the car top as, in many existing elevators, the top
clearance may be insufficient to permit a person to stand
when the car floor is level with the top terminal landing.
Where the clearance appears to be insufficient, stop the
car at or below the top landing and the top car clearance
determined as follows:
(a) Measure the distance from the top of the car cross-
head to the nearest obstruction directly above it.
(b) Measure the projection of any sheaves, or other
equipment mounted in or on the car crosshead, above
the top of the crosshead.
(c) Measure the distance from the top of any equip-
ment mounted on top of the car (not the car crosshead)
to the nearest obstruction directly above it.
(d) For underslung car frames, measure the distance
between the overhead car rope dead-end hitch or over-
head car sheave and the portions of the car structure
directly below them.
(e) Subtract the distance, if any, the car floor is below
the top terminal landing from the distances measured
in Items 3.4.1(a), (c), and (d).
The question of whether or not the top car clearance,
as measured, is adequate or conforms to Code require-
ments cannot be determined until the top car runby is
determined.
NOTE: The projection of rope fastenings or guide shoes above
the car structure is not to be considered an encroachment on the
top car clearance. However, excessive projections are not permitted
if interference with sheaves or other equipment would be encoun-
tered on maximum overtravel.
3.4.2 Periodic Test
3.4.3 Acceptance
3.4.3.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Measure and record the top car and counterweight
clearances.
(b) Measure and verify dimensions of the refuge
space.
45
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 3.4.1-2 Top Car Clearance and Runby (A17.1-1978 and Later Editions)
6 in. (152 mm),
Requirement 3.8
(Rule300.3e)
Door operator, or
other equipment
on top of car
Top car runby >
Possible obstruction
at top of hoistway
Any equipment on top
of crosshead (junction
box, light fixture, etc.)
42 in. (1067 mm),
Requirement 3.8
(Rule300.3g)
Top terminal landing
(c) Check that a standard railing is provided where
required.
3.4.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. For elevators installed
under A17. 1-1996 and later editions, check that the ref-
uge space is outlined with a contrasting color.
(a) Determine the top car runby and verify existence
of stop ring by inching the car against the stop ring,
from outside the car (not from car top) then open the
top hoistway door and measure the distance from the
car platform to the top landing. The runby should be
recorded.
(b) The top car clearances should be measured and
recorded.
(c) Measure and verify dimensions of the refuge
space.
(d) Check that a standard railing is provided where
required.
3.4.4 References
3.4.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rule 1206.8 and Sections 107 and 1304.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.6.4.11, 2.4, 2.10.2, 2.14.1.7, and 8.2.4.
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.4.4.
3.4.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 300.8, 302.4, 1004.2(c)(4), 1006.2a,
and 1006.2c.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.4, 2.10.2, 2.14.1.7(3.14}, 3.18.4,
8.11.3.1.3(d), 8.10.3.2.2(s), and 8.10.3.2.3(d).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.4.4 {Section 4.1}.
ITEM 3.5
NORMAL TERMINAL STOPPING
DEVICES
3.5.1 Periodic Inspections
3.5.1.1 Electric Elevators. Observe caution if the
top car clearance is limited. Run the car to the top of
its travel at inspection speed to examine the normal
terminal stopping device.
46
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Normal terminal stopping devices of traction eleva-
tors may be located in the machine room or overhead
machinery space and mechanically connected to and
driven by the car. If mechanically attached to the car,
manually open the broken drive device switch with the
car at rest. This should prevent the car from starting.
When the normal terminal stopping devices are located
in the hoistway determine that stopping switches and
cams are in correct alignment and are securely fastened.
The alignment of the bottom terminal stopping device
can be checked by stopping the car near the bottom
terminal and sighting the alignment of the car and
switch roller (see Item 5.5). The switch roller should
strike the bevel of the cam. Also, determine the condition
of the limit switch rollers, as reduction of the effective
roller diameter due to either wear or loss of the tires
may interfere with or prevent proper switch operation.
The combination of excessively worn car guide shoes
and limit switch rollers may cause cars to overrun their
terminals.
3.5.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Observe caution if the
top car clearance is limited. Run the car up at inspection
speed to examine the normal terminal stopping device.
Normal terminal stopping devices are usually located
in the hoistway Verify that stopping switches and cams
are in correct alignment and are securely fastened. The
alignment of the bottom terminal stopping device can
be checked by stopping the car near the bottom terminal
and sighting the alignment of the cam and switch roller
(see Item 5.5). The switch roller should strike the bevel
of the cam. Also, determine the condition of the limit
switch rollers, as reduction of the effective roller diame-
ter due to either wear or loss of roller(s) may interfere
with or prevent proper switch operation. The combina-
tion of excessively worn car guide shoes and limit switch
rollers, may cause cars to malfunction.
Test the operation of the normal terminal stopping
device by operating the car at inspection speed until
the normal terminal stopping device can be reached by
hand. Use an insulated object to actuate this device and
try to move the car in the direction of the device. The
car should not move in the direction of the device, but
should be able to move in the opposite direction.
3.5.2 Periodic Test
3.5.2.1 Electric Elevators: Yearly Test (for
A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions). Test the opera-
tion of the normal terminal stopping device by operating
the car at inspection speed until the normal terminal
stopping device can be reached by hand. Use an insu-
lated object to actuate this device and try to move the
car in the direction of the device. The car should not
move in the direction of the device, but must be able to
move in the opposite direction.
3.5.2.2 Hydraulic Elevators: Yearly Test (for
A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions)
(a) Render the normal elevator stopping means and
the emergency terminal stopping inoperative.
(b) Do not disable the emergency terminal speed lim-
iting device or the normal terminal stopping device.
(c) Run the car at rated speed (from outside the car)
into the bottom terminal and demonstrate that the car
slows down and stops in the vicinity of the bottom
terminal.
(d) Repeat the above test for the top terminal.
(e) Restore all stopping means and check for proper
operation.
3.5.3 Acceptance
3.5.3.1 Electric Elevators. See Item 2.28.3.
3.5.4 References
3.5.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 207.4, 209.2, 210.2, 1001.2(c)(7), 1002.2e,
1003.2f, and 1003.3(k).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.25.1, 2.25.2, 2.26.2, 8.11.2.1.3(g),
8.11.2.2.5, 8.10.2.2.2(z), and 8.10.2.3.2(k).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.9.1 and 3.10.4.
3.5.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 305.1a, 1002.2e {1005.2c}, 1003.3(k),
and 1004.2(c)(5).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.25.1.1, 8.11.2.2.5 {8.11.3.2.3},
8.10.2.3.2(k), and 8.11.3.1.3(e).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.9.1 {Section 4.6} and 3.10.4.
ITEM 3.6
FINAL AND EMERGENCY TERMINAL STOPPING
DEVICES
3.6.1 Periodic Inspections
3.6.1.1 Electric Elevators. Observe caution if the
top car clearance is limited. Run the car to the top of its
travel at inspection speed and examine the final terminal
stopping device.
(a) The upper final terminal stopping device must
be located as close to the terminal landing as possible
without interfering with the normal terminal stopping
device, but actuate before the car strikes the overhead.
(b) Check the fastening and alignment of the switch
and cam. The switch roller should strike the bevel sur-
face of the cam. If properly located and adjusted, the
roller will center laterally on the cam, assuring free
motion of the roller arm and positive opening of the
switch contact without damaging the switch.
3.6.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-1970 and later
editions require an emergency terminal speed limiting
47
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
device at the top terminal landing where the rated speed
exceeds 100 ft/min (0.51 m/s) and at the bottom landing
where reduced stroke buffers are used. In A17.1-1955
through A17.1c-1969 an emergency terminal stopping
device was required where a reduced stroke buffer was
used or the speed was over 100 ft/min (0.51 m/s). Verify
that the emergency terminal stopping device functions
independent of the normal stopping means and the nor-
mal terminal stopping device. Verify that the emergency
terminal speed limiting device functions independent
of the normal terminal stopping device and that its car
speed sensing device functions independent of the nor-
mal speed control system.
Where mechanical or hydraulic emergency terminal
speed limiting devices are provided, refer to the manu-
facturer's recommended test procedures.
Inspect the device for condition and alignment. Slowly
move the car up and verify that the device will be oper-
ated by movement of the car.
3.6.2 Periodic Test
3.6.2.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Yearly Test (for A17,ld-2000 and Earlier Editions);
Category 1 Test (for All .1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions).
Before testing final terminal stopping devices from the
top of the car, determine whether the potential switch
on the controller is of the manually or electrically
restored type. If it is the manually restored type, opera-
tion of the final terminal stopping device should not be
tested from the car unless someone is in the machine
room to reset the controller switch when instructed to
do so by the inspector.
Run the car up the hoistway at inspection speed until
the upper final terminal stopping device may be reached
by hand. Use an insulated object to actuate this device,
and try to move the car in each direction. The car should
not move; if it does, the inspection should not be contin-
ued until this defect is corrected.
The operation of the final terminal stopping device
(final limit) and its relation to the cam can be tested by
jumping out the normal terminal stopping device and
running the car past the terminal floor at inspection
speed. The car should stop close to the floor. It may be
necessary to jump out the final terminal stopping device
to move the car back to floor level. After the final termi-
nal stopping device has been tested, remove all jumpers.
(b) 5-Year Test of Emergency Terminal Stopping Means
(for A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 5 Test of
Emergency Terminal Stopping Means (for A17. 1-2000 and
Later Editions). For static control elevators, see Item
2.28.2.1(b) and for emergency terminal speed limiting
devices, see Item 5.3.2.
3.6.2.2 Hydraulic Elevators: Yearly Test (for
A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions). Block or tie
the device in the functioning position and move the car
down. Then attempt to run the car up at rated speed.
The emergency terminal speed limiting device should
prevent the car from running in excess of 100 ft/min
(0.51 m/s). The car should not run with the emergency
terminal stopping device in the functioning position.
3.6.3 Acceptance
3.6.4 References
3.6.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 209.3, 1001.2(c)(8), 1002.2e, and
1003.3(k).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.25.3, 8.11.2.1.3(h), 8.11.2.2.5, and
8.10.2.3.2(k).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.9.2.
3.6.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 305.2, 1004.2(c)(6), and 1005.2.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.25.2, 8.11.3.1.3(f), and (NR 1005.2).
A17.1-1955 — Rule 320.2.
ITEM 3.7
CAR LEVELING AND ANTICREEP DEVICES
3.7.1 Periodic Inspections
3.7.1.1 Electric Elevators. Examine fastenings and
clearances of car leveling devices, including cams and
vanes located in the hoistway.
3.7.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Examine fastenings
and clearances of car leveling devices, including cams
and vanes located in the hoistway. With the car level
with the floor, place a mark on the rail relative to a guide
shoe or roller. Lower it slightly more than 1 in. (25 mm)
by using inspection operation. Turn the car back on
normal operation and observe that it levels within 1 in,
(25 mm) of the floor level for elevators installed under
A17.1-1978 and later editions. For elevators installed
prior to A17.1-1978 edition and/or required to comply
with A 17. 3, observe that the car will level to within
3 in. (76 mm) of the floor. If a manual lowering valve
is available in the machine room, required under
A17. 1-1984 and later editions, it is used as described in
Item 2.32.1 for testing the anticreep device. Check that
the anticreep device remains operative regardless of the
position of the car and hoistway doors, emergency stop
switch or in-car stop switch, hinge car platform sill elec-
tric contacts and broken rope, tape, or chain switch for
normal stopping devices.
For maintained pressure hydraulic elevators, operate
the car in both directions.
3.7.2 Periodic Test
3.7.3 Acceptance
3.7.4 References
3.7.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 210.1e and 1001.2(c)(10).
48
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.26.1.6 and 8.11.2.1.3(j).
3.7.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 306.3, 306.4, and 1004.2(c)(7).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.26.3, 3.26.4, and 8.113.1.3(g).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 4.7.3 and 4.7.4.
ITEM 3.8
TOP EMERGENCY EXIT
(to) 3.8.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) For elevators installed under A17. 1-1955 through
A 17. 1-1 960, check that the top emergency exit opens
outward. Verify that the exit is hinged or otherwise
attached to the car and can be opened from both inside
and from the top of the car without the use of special
tools. For elevators installed under A17.1-1965 and later
editions, and those elevators required to meet A17.3,
verify that the top emergency exit is locked, and open-
able from the top of the car only without the use of
special tools. For elevators installed under A17. 1-2000/
B44-00 and later editions, check the emergency exit elec-
tric contact.
(b) For elevators in unenclosed hoistways, top emer-
gency exits are prohibited for elevators installed under
A17.1b-1989 through A17.1d-2000. On elevators in par-
tially enclosed hoistways, installed under Al 7. 1-2000/
B44-00 and later editions, check the means to facilitate
emergency evacuation.
3.8.2 Periodic Test
3.8.3 Acceptance
Measure the top emergency exit size and clearances.
3.8.4 References
3.8.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 204.1e and 1001.2(c)(12).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.14.1.5 and 8.11.2.1.3(1).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.4.4.
3.8.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 204.1e {301.7} and 1004.2(c)(9).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.14.1.5 {3.14} and 8.11.3.1.3(i).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.4.4 {4.2.3}.
ITEM 3.9
FLOOR AND EMERGENCY IDENTIFICATION
NUMBERING
(io) 3.9.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) For elevators installed under A17.1b-1973 and
later editions, check that floor numbers have been pro-
vided in the hoistways, not less than 4 in. (102 mm) in
height, placed on the walls and /or doors of the hoistway
at intervals where a person on top of the car can deter-
mine the floor position. Check that floor numbers are
provided and legible.
(b) For elevators installed under A17.1-1990 and later
editions, check that emergency identification numbers
are provided on the crosshead, or the car frame where
there is no crosshead where more than one elevator's
machinery is in a hoistway or machine room.
3.9.2 Periodic Test
3.9.3 Acceptance
3.9.4 References
3.9.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 100.7, 211.9, and 1001.2(c)(15).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.29.2, 2.29.1, and 8.11.2.1.3(o).
3.9.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 100.7 {300.1}, 211.9 {306.11}, and
1004.2(c)(10).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.29.2 {3.1}, 2.29.1 {3.27}, and 8.11.3.1.3(j).
ITEM 3.10
HOISTWAY CONSTRUCTION
3.10.1 Periodic Inspections
Check the condition of the hoistway enclosure, and
remote counterweight hoistway; note any damage or
loose materials.
For elevators installed under A17.1-2000 and later
editions, projections greater than 4 in. (102 mm) are
required to be beveled.
For elevators installed under A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions, projections greater than 2 in. (51 mm) are
required to be beveled.
3.10.2 Periodic Test
3.10.3 Acceptance
Determine if the hoistway enclosure conforms to the
building code requirements. Inspect the hoistway enclo-
sure for substantially flush construction. Projections
should be properly beveled or protected. For elevators
with no top emergency exit installed in unenclosed
hoistways, determine that all landings are provided with
either hoistway entrances or emergency doors.
3.10.4 References
3.10.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 100 and Rule 1001.2(c)(16).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.1 and 8.11.2.1.3(p).
A17.3 — Section 2.1.
49
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
3.10.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 300.1 and 1004.2(c)(ll).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.1 and 8.11.3.1.3(k).
A17.3 — Section 2.1 {4.1}.
ITEM 3.11
HOISTWAY SMOKE CONTROL
(io) 3.11.1 Periodic Inspections
For elevators installed under A17.1-1955 through
A17.1b-1980/ that serve more than three floors, check
that one-third of the required venting is permanently
open or automatically opened by a damper. All venting
should be to the outside. Portions of the required vents
may be closed with glass. This should consist of plain
glass, a maximum of % in- (3.2 mm) thick. The vent area
was required to be a minimum of 3.5% of the cross-
sectional area of the hoistway (3 ft2 min.) for each car.
Verify that elevators installed under A17.1-1981 and
later editions are provided with an approved means to
prevent the accumulation of smoke and hot gases in
case of fire. Assure ventilation is in accordance with
building code requirements and is in working order.
Check that any required openings are in the open posi-
tion and not locked or blocked.
3.11.2 Periodic Test
3.11.3 Acceptance
Check that means to prevent the accumulation of
smoke and hot gases in case of fire is in accordance with
the requirements of the building code.
3.11.4 References
3.11.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 100.4 and 1001.2(c)(17).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.1.4 and 8.11.2.1.3(q).
3.11.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 100.4 {300.1} and 1004.2(c)(12).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.1.4 {3.1} and 8.11.3.1.3(1).
ITEM 3.12
PIPES, WIRING, AND DUCTS
3.12.1 Periodic Inspections
Only pipes, wiring, and ducts used in connection with
the elevator may be installed in the hoistway. Check
sprinkler piping for leakage. For elevators required to
meet A17.3, pipes conveying gases, vapors, or liquids
not connected with the operation of the elevator must
be guarded so that any discharge will not affect the
operation of the elevator.
3.12.2 Periodic Test
3.12.3 Acceptance
Check that sprinkler risers and return piping have
been located outside the hoistway. Check that shutoff
valves have been provided for each branch line and are
accessible outside the hoistway. Check to see that an
automatic, non-resetting means is provided to discon-
nect the main line power to affected elevators before
water is discharged into the hoistway. The Code prohib-
its sprinkler activation or disconnection of main line
power by smoke detectors.
3.12.4 References
3.12.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 102 and Rule 1001.2(c)(18).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.8 and 8.11.2.1.3(r).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.1.4.
3.12.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 102 {Rule 300.3} and Rule
1004.2(c)(13).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.8 {3.8} and 8.11.3.1.3(m).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.1.4 {Section 4.1}.
ITEM 3.13
WINDOWS, PROJECTIONS, RECESSES, AND
SETBACKS
3.13.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Hoistway Windows. Elevators installed under
A 17. 1-1971 and later editions are not permitted to have
windows in the hoistways.
Where windows are provided in hoistways of existing
elevators, verify that they are guarded on the inside or
outside as required by local regulations or the Code
edition in effect at the time of installation.
For elevators required to meet A 17.3, check that every
hoistway window ten stories or less above a thorough-
fare, and every such window opening three stories or
less above a roof of an adjacent building are guarded.
Also, check that every exterior hoistway window has
been identified with 4 in. (102 mm) high letters marked
"ELEVATOR."
(b) Projections, Recesses, and Setbacks. Determine that
guards for recesses in the hoistway enclosure opposite
car openings, other than landing entrances, are in place
and secured. Check that landing sill guards, dust covers,
and landing entrance toe guards are securely in place.
3.13.2 Periodic Test
3.13.3 Acceptance
3.13.4 References
3.13.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 100.5, 100.6, 110.10, and 1001.2(c)(19).
50
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Table 3.14.3(a) Horizontal Clearances
Clearances Between
Maximum,
in.
Minimum,
in.
Rqmt.
No.
Car platform and landing sill
Side-post construction
Corner-post construction
Car and hoistway enclosure (except sides used
for loading and unloading)
Car platform sill and hoistway enclosure for full
width of hoistway opening
Vertically sliding hoistway doors
Other than vertically sliding hoistway doors
Car and counterweight
Two adjacent cars
Counterweight and counterweight screen
Counterweight and hoistway enclosure
1V2
iy3
v2
2.5.1.4
2.5.1.4
2.5.1.1
7V2
5
2.5.1.5
2.5.1.5
1
2.5.1.2
2
2.5.1.3
3A
2.5.1.2
3A
2.5.1.2
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. = 25.4 mm
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.1.5, 2.1.6, 2.11.10, and 8.11.2.1.3(s).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 2.1.2 and 2.1.3.
3.13.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 100.5 and 100.6 {300.1}, 110.10
{300.11}, and 1004.2(c)(14).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.1.5 and 2.1.6 {3.1}, 2.11.10 {3.11}, and
8.11.3.1.3(n).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 2.1.2 and 2.1,3 {Section 4.1}.
ITEM 3.14
HOISTWAY CLEARANCES
3.14.1 Periodic Inspections
3.14.1.1 Electric Elevators. Observe the clearances
between car and hoistway enclosures, between car and
counterweight or counterweight screen, between the
counterweight and hoistway enclosure, and between
adjacent cars.
3.14.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators: Car Horizontal
Clearances. Observe the clearances between car and
hoistway enclosures, and between adjacent cars.
3.14.2 Periodic Test
3.14.3 Acceptance
Measure and record horizontal hoistway dimensions
and clearances. See Tables 3.14.3(a) and 3.14.3(b).
3.14.4 References
3.14.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Sections 107 and 108 and Rule 1001.2(c)(20).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later
Requirements 2.4, 2.5, and 8.11.2.1.3(t).
A17.3 — Section 2.4.
editions —
3.14.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Sections 108 {Rule 300.9} and 110 (Rule
300.11}; and Rule 1004.2(c)(15).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.5 {3.5} and 2.11 {3.11}, and 8.11.3.1.3(o).
A17.3 — Section 2.4 {4.1}.
ITEM 3.15
MULTIPLE HOISTWAYS
3.15.1 Periodic Inspections
Observe the clearances between cars in a multiple
hoistway. See Table 3.14.3(a).
3.15.2 Periodic Test
3.15.3 Acceptance
Verify multiple hoistways are constructed in compli-
ance with the building code. Measure the running clear-
ances between cars including equipment attached to
the car.
3.15.4 References
3.15.4.1 Electric Elevators. Al 7. ld-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules lOO.ld and 1001.2(c)(21).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.1.1.4 and 8.11.2.1.3(u).
3.15.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules lOO.ld {300.1} and 1004.2(c)(16).
51
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. X^ .
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ^
ASME A17.2-2010
Table 3.14.3(b) Horizontal Distances
Distance Between Horizontally Sliding and Swinging Maximum, Minimum, Rqmt.
Hoistway Door and Edge of Landing Sill in. in. No.
Elevators that can be opened from car only
New installations
New or altered elevators in existing multiple
hoistways
Swinging doors
Sliding doors
Automatic or continuous pressure operation
Sliding hoistway doors
Swinging hoistway doors
Swinging hoistway doors on freight elevators not
accessible to general public and located in
industrial-type buildings
2%
2.11.4
2.11.4
2.11.4
2.11.4
2.11.4
2.11.4
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. = 25.4 mm
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.1.1.4 {3.1} and 8.11.3.1.3(p).
ITEM 3.16
TRAVELING CABLES AND JUNCTION BOXES
3.16.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Junction Boxes and Traveling Cable Supporting Means.
Hoistway and car junction boxes should be securely
fastened with covers in place. Examine the supporting
means of the cable at the connection points. Where a
steel member is used to support the traveling cable,
examine its attachment to the hoistway or car connection
point and verify that it is securely fastened. The live load
on steel supporting fillers should hang in the direction
of tightening of the supporting bolt or other means of
fastening and the dead end taped or clamped to the live
end. Examine for any evidence of wear or breaks in the
steel supporting fillers, which may damage the insula-
tion of the conductors or cause the traveling cable to
release, causing strain or breakage to the conductors at
the terminal lugs.
(b) Flexible Wire Mesh Automatic Tightening Devices.
Where a flexible wire mesh automatic tightening device
is used, examine the grip to be sure that it is securely
fastened to its support at the hoistway or car connection
point. Examine the eye of the grip attached to the sup-
porting member. When a double eye attachment is used,
the eyes should be attached so they share the load
equally and do not exceed 15 deg from the axis of the
vertical cable.
There are basically three types of flexible wire mesh
automatic tightening devices (see Fig. 3.16.1):
(1) closed type
(2) split-laced type
(3) split-rod type
Examine the grip where the eye is attached to the
wire mesh section for any visible signs of wear or break-
age. This point is subject to damage because of flexing
of the cable. It is recommended that the lower section
of the grip be secured to the traveling cable to prevent
triggering (total or partial relaxing of the grip) and cul-
minate in milking of the grip (slight movement of grip
on the outer section of the traveling cable). Examine for
damage caused by the securing means. The triggering
of the grip may cause the cable to release, thereby placing
strain or breakage on the individual conductors. Milking
of the grip may cause wear to the insulation of travel-
ing cable.
(c) Traveling Cables. Examine the traveling cables for
(1) excessive twists or kinks
(2) damage due to chafing
(3) intertwining of multiple cables
(4) clearance from hoistway equipment such as
buffers, plungers, brackets, beams, etc.
3.16.2 Periodic Test
3.16.3 Acceptance
Check that traveling cables are properly installed, sup-
ported, and protected against damage. Traveling cables
should be supported by one of the following means:
(a) by internal steel supporting member
(b) by looping the cables around supports for unsup-
ported lengths of less than 100 ft (30.5 m)
(c) by suspending from the supports by a means that
automatically tightens around the cable when tension
is increased for unsupported lengths of up to 200 ft
(61 m)
3.16.4 References
3.16.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 102.1 and 1001.2(c)(22).
52
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 3.16.1 Self-Tightening Grips
Closed
Split-Laced
Split-Rod
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.8.1 and 8.11.2.1.3(v).
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
3.16.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 102.1 (300.3} and 1004.2(c)(17).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.8.1 {3.8} and 8.11.3.1.3(q).
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
ITEM 3,17
DOOR AND GATE EQUIPMENT
(io) 3.17.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Car and Hoistway Door and Gate Operating, Locking
and Contact Devices, and Interlocking Retiring Cams
(1) Examine all hoistway and car door or gate
operating motors and cams. Check locking and contact
devices, switches, or other operating mechanisms
located on top of the car or in the hoistway. Determine
whether they are in proper working order, securely fas-
tened in place, and properly lubricated. Check hydraulic
door operators for any oil leakage.
(2) Examine any stationary or retiring cams,
operating interlocks, interlock contacts, or door opera-
tors. Determine whether they are in correct alignment
with the roller arm of the interlock or door operating
mechanism. Check whether their travel is sufficient to
ensure proper operation of the interlocks or door
operators.
(3) Examine relating chains, sprockets, and wire
cables for proper tension and note any excessive wear.
(4) Test hoistway door operators actuated by mag-
netic controls to determine the car is within the landing
zone, or within the limits of the leveling zone where an
automatic leveling device is provided, before the control
causes the door operator to open to the hoistway door.
Check that the car is at rest or substantially level with
the landing before the door is in the fully open position.
Air- (pneumatic) operated doors must meet similar
requirements, provided they are manually controlled.
The car must be within the landing zone or within the
leveling zone before the door operating device is in a
position to engage the door operating cam.
(5) Examine the name plates on hoistway door or
gate interlocks, combination mechanical locks and elec-
tric contacts, and car door or gate electric contacts. Verify
that they are of a type approved by the authority having
jurisdiction. For elevators installed under A 17. 1-1 987
and later editions, check that mercury tube switches
have not been used for electric contacts.
(6) Combination mechanical locks and electric con-
tacts of the hoistway unit system are permitted by
A17.1-1955 and later editions, on freight elevators under
restricted conditions.
(a) Inspect mechanical locks operated manually
from top of car, where used, with hoistway door or gate
electric contacts. With the door or gate in the fully closed
position, pull on the door or gate, which should be
held closed by the lock. Determine whether the locking
member is in a position to lock the door when or before
the contact is closed by the door or gate.
(b) Where the locking members of such devices
are operated by car cams, place the door or gate in
the fully closed position and move the car a sufficient
distance away from the floor to permit the locking mem-
ber to lock the door or gate. With the car in this position,
pull or push on the door, which should be held closed
by the lock. Release the lock manually and open the
door or gate. Then slowly close it to the position where
53
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
the electric contact just closes and note whether the
locking member is in a position to lock the door.
(b) Car and Hoistway Door, Gate Hangers, and Equipment
(1) Examine the condition of hoistway and car door
or gate hangers, tracks, and guides to determine they
are securely fastened in place, engaged and not worn,
so that the doors will not come out of their guideway
at any point in their travel, and are lubricated. If the
guides are not made out of fire-resistive materials, check
that tabs (this is not the hoistway door safety retainer)
to retain the door in place during a fire are engaged in
the guideway. Check that the door frames are securely
fastened to the building structure. Hoistway door safety
retainers are required on elevators installed under
A17.1-1993/B44-1985 and later editions.
NOTE: The requirement that hoistway door panels and guides
meet certain fire-resistive criteria was specifically stated in Part 1
for horizontally sliding doors until A17.1c-1986 and for vertically
sliding doors until A17.1-1984. However, where required by
requirement 2.1.1, the entire entrance assembly is still required to
meet the fire-resistive criteria, but is now specified in require-
ment 8.3.4.
(2) When multipanel entrances are provided, check
that they are interconnected or equipped with interlocks
on each driven panel for elevators installed under
A17.1-1990 and later editions. A17.1b-1989 and earlier
editions require the panels to be interconnected. Exam-
ine interconnections of the panels of multisection doors.
Determine if they are in proper condition and are
securely fastened to the door panels. Examine intercon-
nections, whether in hanger chains, ropes, or other parts,
or in the door closer arms and pins. Check for any wear,
which might cause the panels to become disconnected
from each other and permit the car to operate with one
or more of the panels open. On two-speed entrances for
elevators installed under A17.1-1990 and later editions,
check that the slow and fast panels are provided with
a secondary mechanical interconnecting means. On cen-
ter-opening doors with a single interlock, check that
the interlock is operated by the nondriven panel for
elevators installed under A17.1-1990 and later editions.
(3) Horizontally sliding or single section swinging
doors of automatic elevators must be provided with door
closers arranged to close an open door automatically if
the car leaves the landing zone for any reason. Check
the door closers by manually opening the doors to the
fully open position, then release the doors. As they are
returning to the closed position, manually stop and
release the doors at approximately the halfway point
and at approximately 2 in. (51 mm) from the strike jamb.
Verify that the doors return to the fully closed and locked
position.
(4) Examine hoistway and car door or gate counter-
weights to determine they are properly guided or boxed
to retain the counterweight if the suspension means
breaks.
(5) Examine car and hoistway door or gate suspen-
sion members together with their connections, pulleys,
and pulley supports.
(c) Restricted Opening of Hoistway Doors and/or Car
Doors on Passenger Elevators. For elevators required to
comply with the restricted opening requirements (Item
1.18), check that the car doors can be opened from the
top of the car within specified zones, without the use
of special tools.
(d) Landings Locked Out of Service. Determine that the
following landings are not locked out of service:
(1) top and bottom landings
(2) for elevators installed under A17.1b-1989 and
later editions, the designated and alternate landings for
Phase I Firefighters' Service and all Phase II landings
(3) check that automatic fire doors can be opened
manually from the hoistway side and that they do not
lock any doors that lead to building exits
(e) Hoistway Door Interlocks: Auxiliary Lock. A 4 in.
(102 mm) locking range is permitted on elevators oper-
ated from inside the car only. An auxiliary lock is
required; it is incorporated either in the door closing
mechanism or consists of a rack attached to the landing
sill or top track and an engaging pawl on the door. When
the doors are power closing, the auxiliary lock is usually
placed on the closing mechanism to prevent damage.
3.17.2 Periodic Test
3.17.3 Acceptance
Check that entrance panel(s), frame hardware, and
transoms are labeled by a certifying agency acceptable
to the authority having jurisdiction, when installed in
fire-resistive construction. A single label may be pro-
vided for the complete entrance assembly. Check that
interlocks or combination mechanical locks and electric
contacts and car door or gate electric contacts are labeled
by a certifying agency acceptable to the authority having
jurisdiction.
When gasketing material is applied to entrances with
a fire-protection rating, check that it has been tested and
labeled by a certifying agency acceptable to the authority
having jurisdiction.
Check that center-opening doors are mechanically
interconnected or there is an interlock on each driven
panel. On horizontally sliding doors provided with a
single interlock, check that the door closer is attached
to the leading panel that moves in the opposite direction.
Check the secondary mechanical interconnecting means
on multispeed doors.
3.17.4 References
3.17.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Sections 110 and 111 and Rules 210.1e and
1001.2(c)(23).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.11, 2.12, 2.26.1.6, and 8.11.2.1.3(w).
54
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
A17.3 — Sections 2.6 and 2.7.
A17.1 — Inquiry 96-71.
3.17.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A 1 7. ld-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Sections 110 {Rule 300.11} and 111 {Rule
300.12}; and Rules 210.1e {306.3} and 1004.2(c)(18).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.11 {3.11}, 2.12 {3.12}, 2.26.1.6 {3.26.3}, and
8.11.3.1.3(r).
A17.3 — Sections 2.6 and 2.7 {4.1}.
A17.1 — Inquiry 96-71.
ITEM 3.18
CAR FRAME AND STILES
3.18.1 Periodic Inspections
Failure of the older car frame stiles (upright structural
members) has occurred sufficiently for these members
to receive special attention. Make a careful examination
of the stiles at the lowest bolt of the car frame crosshead
gusset plate. Note any evidence of cracks on the stiles,
especially directly in line with the bottom gusset bolts.
If any blistering of paint is noted, scrape to expose the
metal and determine its condition. If a crack appears,
it is probable that it will be found to have started from
the outer edge of the stile flange. Check that welded
repairs and required written certification are in compli-
ance with the Code. Wood car frames are prohibited by
A17.1-1955 and later editions.
3.18.2 Periodic Test
3.18.3 Acceptance
3.18.4 References
3.18.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Sections 203 and 213 and Rules 1001.2(c)(24),
1200.4, and 1202.4a.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.15, 8.8; 8.11.2.1.3(x), 8.6.2, and 8.7.2.15.1.
3.18.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 213 {Rule 302.5) and Rules 301.6
and 1004.2(c)(19).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.8 {3.18.5}, 3.15, and 8.11.3.1.3(s).
ITEM 3.19
GUIDE RAILS FASTENING AND EQUIPMENT
3.19.1 Periodic Inspections
For car and counterweight guide rails, rail fastenings,
car crossheads, and car guiding members, the following
requirements shall be met:
(a) Examine the guide rails, paying particular atten-
tion to the condition of the surfaces and the correct
alignment of the joints. Repeated operation of the car
safety or improperly adjusted or loose car guide shoes
that permit the safety jaws to run against the rail surfaces
frequently cause serious wear or scoring of the rails and
the safety jaws.
Where sliding-type guide shoes are used, determine
that rails are free of lint and dirt, and are adequately
but not excessively lubricated and that the proper lubri-
cant, as indicated on the crosshead data plate has been
used. Where roller guides are used, rails should be clean
and dry without lubricant.
(b) Check the following fastenings to determine
whether they are sound and tight, and that there are no
missing bolts or guide clips:
(1) rails to brackets
(2) brackets to building construction
(3) fishplate bolts
(4) crosshead connection bolts
(5) car guide shoe bolts
3.19.1.1 Electric Elevators: Alignment of Guide
Rails. If any excessive or irregular motion of the car
was noted during the in the car inspection, examine
guide rail alignment. Examine the counterweight guide
rails for distance between guides.
3.19.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators: Alignment of Guide
Rails. If any excessive or irregular motion of the car
was noted during the in-the-car inspection, examine
guide rail alignment. Examine the sheave guide rails as
outlined above and for distance between guides. On
roped-hydraulic elevators, inspect the sheave guide rails
as specified above.
3.19.2 Periodic Test
3.19.3 Acceptance
3.19.3.1 Electric Elevators. For elevators installed
with guide shoes, check that a metal lubrication marking
plate has been securely attached to the car crosshead,
readily visible, and legibly and permanently marked.
3.19.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Verify that a metal
lubrication marking plate has been securely attached
to the car crosshead, readily visible, and legibly and
permanently marked.
3.19.4 References
3.19.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 205.16, 1001.2(c)(25), and 1206.1d.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.17.16, 8.11.2.1.3(y), and 8.6.4.3.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.5.6.
3.19.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Sections 200 {Rule 301.1b} and 308; and
Rules 301.1, 301.6, and 1004.2(c)(20).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.23 {3.23.2), 3.28, 3.23, 3.15.1.1.2, and
8.11.3.1.3(t).
A17.3 — Paragraph 4.9.8.
55
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
ITEM 3.20
GOVERNOR ROPE
3.20.1 Periodic Inspections
Inspect the governor rope for evidence of lubricant
being added after installation as the additional lubricant
may interfere with the ability of the governor to retard
the governor rope and apply the safety. Check the gover-
nor rope data tag and verify that the rope complies with
the specification on the governor marking plate. Inspect
the governor rope as outlined in Item 3.23 for suspension
ropes.
3.20.2 Periodic Test
3.20.3 Acceptance
Verify the governor rope that has been installed is the
correct type, size, and construction as indicated on the
speed governor data plate. See Item 2.12. Check for
installation of the required governor rope data tag.
3.20.4 References
3.20.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 206.5, 1001.2(c)(26)/ 1202.7, and 1206.1c.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.18.5, 8.11.2.1.3(z), 8.7.2.19, and 8.6.4.2.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.6.2.
3.20.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 206.5, 301.8, 1001.2(c), 1004.2(c) (23),
1202.7, and 1206.1c.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.18.5, 3.17.1, 8.11.2.1.3(z), 8.11.3.1.3(w),
8.7.2.19, and 8.6.4.2.
A17.3 — Section 3.6 and para. 4.9.7.
ITEM 3.21
GOVERNOR RELEASING CARRIER
3.21.1 Periodic Inspections
3.21.1.1 Electric Elevators. Examine the governor-
rope releasing carrier on top of the car. Note whether
parts are rusted or caked with dirt and whether springs
are broken.
3.21.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators. For roped-hydraulic
elevators installed under A17.1b-1989 and later editions,
examine the governor-rope releasing carrier, if provided.
Note whether parts are rusted or caked with dirt or
paint and whether springs are broken.
3.21.2 Periodic Test: 5-Year Test (for A17.1d-2000
and Earlier Editions); Category 5 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions)
Test the governor releasing carrier as outlined in Item
2.13.2(b).
3.21.3 Acceptance
3.21.4 References
3.21.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 205.15 and 1001.2(c)(27).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.17.15, 8.6.2.4, and 8.11.2.1.3(aa).
A17.3 — Section 3.5.
3.21.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 205.15, 301,8, 1004.2(c)(22), and
1005.4.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.17.15, 3.17.1, 8.11.3.1.3(v), and 8.11.3.4.
ITEM 3.22
WIRE ROPE FASTENING AND HITCH PLATE
3.22.1 Periodic Inspections
3.22.1.1 Electric Elevators and Roped-Hydraulic
Elevators
(a) Wire Rope Fastenings and Sheaves. Check that ropes
conform to the specifications on the crosshead data plate
and rope data tag. Determine that rope fastenings at
both the car and the counterweight or dead-ends of the
ropes have been properly made up.
(b) Auxiliary Rope Fastening Devices. Where an auxil-
iary rope fastening device is provided, determine that
the auxiliary device is not carrying the load because of
rope stretch or failure at the regular rope fastening.
Check that an electric switch is provided to open motor
and control circuits when the auxiliary rope fastening
device operates. Determine that it is properly adjusted
and operational.
(c) Shackle Rods. Where the shackle rod and rope
socket are separate pieces, determine that the fastening
between the two parts is positive to prevent their
separation.
(d) Tapered Rope Sockets. Determine whether there are
any broken wires at the point where the rope enters the
socket. This is especially important in the case of the
car suspension ropes of drum machines. Such breaks
usually occur at rope fastenings just inside the small
end of the socket and can, in many cases, be detected
by prying the individual wires in the strand with a sharp
instrument, such as the blade of a knife. Also, determine
that the rope, where it enters the socket, has not had
wire or strand lays disturbed or changed and no strands
bulge out.
(1) Where babbitted metal sockets are used, note
any change in color of steel wires caused by overheating
when the socket was made up.
(2) Where thermosetting resin composition is used,
note the manufacturers directions must be strictly fol-
lowed in handling, mixing, pouring, and curing the resin
material.
56
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Fig. 3.22.1 Cross-Section Through Tapered Rope
Socket Showing Maximum and Minimum Projection
of Loops Above Embedment Medium
d+V
V2^rnin.
Rope strand
diameter,
d, in.
Tapered rope socket per
Requirement 2.20.9.4
(Rule212.9d)
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
(3) When the embedment medium has cooled or
cured, and the seizing at the small end has been
removed, make a visual inspection. See Fig. 3.22.1 and
Table 3.22.1. Check for retention of the rope lay where
it leaves the small end of the socket, full penetration of
filler material as evidenced by it being visible around
the circumference of the small end of the socket, and
correct seating of the strain loops in the filler material.
(e) Other Rope Fastenings. U-bolt type rope clips
(clamps) are prohibited for suspension ropes. Where
nontapered rope fastenings are used, and approved by
the authority having jurisdiction, review the certification
and verify that the socket used is marked and identical
to the one on the certification. Also, verify that the socket
is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's/
supplier's instructions. Inspect the socket for secure seat-
ing of the wedge and damage to the rope.
(f) Roping Arrangement
Table 3.22.1 Projection of Rope Strands Above
Embedment Medium for 6- and 8-Strand Ropes
Projection Above Embedment, in.
Rope
Diameter, in.
Maximum
Minimum
%
7/16
y2
9/l6
%
"AS
%
13/16
0.17
0.20
0.21
0.23
0.25
0.27
0.29
0.31
0.32
0.34
0.36
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.09
0.10
0.11
0.12
0.13
0.14
0.15
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. = 25.4 mm
(1) Where 1:1 roping is used, determine that any
steel plates used to support the rope shackle rods are
attached to the underside or to the webs of the car frame
members in such a manner that the fastening bolts or
rivets are not in tension. Where rope equalizing springs
are used, determine that shackle rods are not worn at
the point where they pass through the steel supporting
plate. Note any collapsed springs.
(2) Where 2:1 roping is used, examine dead-end
rope hitches. Determine that steel plates for supporting
rope shackle rods are placed on top of the supporting
beams or are located in such a manner that the bolts
supporting the suspension plates are not in tension.
Determine that suspension members are securely fas-
tened and that no bending of the supporting members
has occurred.
(g) Rope Equalizers. For elevators installed under
A17.1-1955 through A17.1-1987, suspension rope equal-
izers, if provided, must be of the individual compression
spring type. Other types of rope equalizers were permit-
ted subject to the approval of the enforcing authority on
the basis of adequate tensile and fatigue tests made by
a qualified laboratory.
For elevators installed under A17.1a-1988 and later
editions, single bar-type equalizers may be used on
winding drum machines subject to limitations. Other
types of rope equalizers are required to be tested by an
independent laboratory for Code compliance.
Examine rope equalizers and determine the range of
their motion with the car in each of the following
positions:
(1) midpoint of hoistway
(2) at top terminal landing
(3) at bottom terminal landing
If properly adjusted, the equalizer arms should be at
the center of their range of motion at the midpoint of
the hoistway and not be at either limit of their range of
motion at the top or bottom terminal landing.
57
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ^, .
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ^
ASME A17.2-2010
(h) Antirotation Device. For suspension ropes installed
or replaced under ASME A17.1-1993 through
A17.1-1996, check the antirotation device for proper
installation. The wire rope used should be a continuous
loop through the eye of each shackle and connected with
at least two wire rope clips. Verify that the loop is only
hand-tight so that it does not restrict the lateral motion
of the shackle rods. For elevators installed under
A17.1a-1997, verify that there is a means provided to
prevent rotation of suspension ropes without restricting
their movement.
3.22.1.2 Electric Elevators. On winding drum
machines, hoisting ropes must be refastened every
12 months for machines located above the hoistway and
24 months for machines located below or beside the
hoistway At least one turn of rope must remain on the
drum when the car is resting on its fully compressed
buffer.
3.22.2 Periodic Test
3.22.3 Acceptance
(10) 3.22.4 References
3.22.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 212 and Rules 105.3c, 203.13,
1001.2(c)(28), 1200.5, and 1206.3.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.20, 2.9.3.3, 2.15.13, 8.1L2.1.3(bb), 8.6.3,
8.6.4.10, c8. 6. 12. 4. 1.1, c8. 6. 12.4.3, c8. 6. 12.4.4, and
C8.6.12.4.5.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.12.5, 3.12.8, and 3.12.9.
3.22.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 212; and Rules 105.3c, 203.13,
302.1b, 1004.2(c)(24), and 1200.5.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.20, 2.9.3.3, 2.15.13, 3.18.1.2, 8.11.3.1.3(x),
8.6.3, C8.6.12.4.1.1, c8.6.12.4.3, c8.6.12.4.4, and c8.6.12.4,5.
A17.3 — Paragraph 4.9.10.
ITEM 3.23
SUSPENSION ROPE
(10) 3.23.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Wire Rope Inspection. Examine suspension ropes
and note if they conform to the Code requirements.
Always place the stop switch in the stop position while
inspecting the rope.
(1) Internal breakage of wire ropes is difficult to
detect and, consequently, may be a greater hazard than
surface wear. The surface of the rope may show little or
no wear, but if the rope is bent over a short radius,
individual wires will snap and in extreme cases the rope
may be broken by hand. Such failures are more likely
to occur in governor and compensating ropes where the
ropes are lightly loaded and the ratio of sheave diameter
to rope diameter is smaller.
(2) When replacing suspension ropes, all ropes in
a set must be replaced. The ropes in the set must all be
from the same manufacturer and of the same material,
grade, construction, and diameter.
(3) The lengths of all wire ropes in a set of suspen-
sion ropes, and consequently the rope tensions, should
be substantially equal if maximum rope life and effi-
ciency are to be obtained. If the tensions do not appear
to be substantially the same, equalization of the rope
lengths is recommended.
(4) If ropes are dirty or overlubricated, a proper
inspection may not be possible unless the dirt or excess
lubricant is removed.
(b) Wire Rope Inspection Procedure. Note that it is not
possible to describe the inspection procedure for every
single type of wire rope installation nor to outline every
detail of the inspection procedure. Select the location
from which a proper examination of the rope can best be
made. For example, the suspension ropes of an overhead
drum machine cannot be examined from the top of the
car. See Item 2.27.1.
(1) For suspension ropes on traction machines with
1:1 roping, examination of the ropes should preferably
start with the car located at the top of the hoistway and
made from the top of the car, examining the ropes on
the counterweight side.
(2) For traction machine ropes with 2:1 roping,
examination of the ropes should preferably start with
the car located at the top of the hoistway and made from
the top of the car. Examine both the dead-end side and
the traveling-end side of the counterweight ropes, and
dead-end side of the car ropes. The remainder of the
ropes can be examined at the traction sheave by moving
the car up the hoistway.
(3) For overhead winding drum machines with 1:1
roping, the hoisting ropes must be examined from the
overhead machinery space. Where the driving machine
is located below, those portions of the ropes leading
from the driving-machine drum or sheave and from the
counterweight to the overhead sheaves can be examined
from the car top as the car descends, except for a small
portion which must be examined from the pit.
(4) On all elevators, mark the ropes with chalk to
indicate the location of the unexamined section of ropes
and examine them later from the machine room or over-
head machinery space, or from the pit.
(c) Wire Rope Inspection Criteria
(1) The following method based on field experience
is recommended as a guide for the inspection and evalu-
ation of wire ropes. Give particular attention to where
the wire rope passes over sheaves with the car at terminal
landings.
(a) Move the car 2 ft (610 mm) or 3 ft (914 mm)
at a time and examine each rope at each of these stops.
Note when broken wires begin to appear. Thereafter
check at frequent intervals to determine the rate of
58
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 3.23.1 Types of Lay
Regular Lay [Note (1)] /<^^y
Strand ^ 1-J
Rope
(10)
Lang Lay [Note (2)]
Strand
Rope
NOTES:
(1) Regular lay: stranded rope in which the direction of the lay of the wires in the outer strand is in the opposite direction to the lay of the
outer strands in the rope. For example, the wires in the strand will be spiraled to the left and the strands will be spiraled around the
core to the right (right regular lay shown).
(2) Lang lay: stranded rope in which the direction of the lay of the wires in the outer strand is in the same direction as the lay of the
outer strands in the rope. For example, the wires in the strand will be spiraled to the right and the strands will be spiraled around the
core, also to the right (right lang lay shown).
increase in the number of broken wires. Any rapid
increase in the number of broken wires is significant.
(b) Count the number of broken crown wires in
a rope lay (see Figs. 3.23.1 and 3.23.2) measured along
the length of a rope within which the spiral strands
complete one turn about the axis. A lay may be consid-
ered as a section of rope approximately 6%. times the
diameter of the rope, that is, 3\ in. (83 mm) for \ in.
(13 mm) rope and 4V16 in. (103 mm) for % in. (16 mm)
rope (applies only to 6- and 8-strand configuration).
(c) Measure for minimum diameter at various
points along each rope. The measurement shall be taken
across the top of two opposing lays, not in the valleys.
Refer to the A17.1 Code for rope replacement criteria.
See Table 8.11.2.1.3(cc)(l) and Table 8.11.2.1.3(cc)(3).
(2) Breaks in the valleys of the ropes, while infre-
quent, may be an indication of internal breaks. This is
not to be confused with a broken outside wire when the
original break occurred at a worn crown and a secondary
fracture has occurred near the point where two adjacent
strands make contact. In this case, a piece of wire has
broken out and is missing, and generally both ends of
the broken wire remaining are visible.
(3) Note that where preformed rope is used, greater
care is required to detect broken wires that do not pro-
trude from the surface of the rope.
(d) Governor Ropes. Governor ropes should be
inspected and replaced as outlined for suspension and
compensating ropes of traction machines. Check gover-
nor rope and data tag. The Code also requires the gover-
nor rope data to be shown on a metal plate attached to
the speed governor.
(1) If a governor rope has been replaced since the
last inspection, determine that the new rope is of the
same material, diameter, and construction as that speci-
fied on the governor marking plate. If not, a test of the
car safety and governor is required.
(2) Ensure wire ropes that have been previously
installed have not been used.
3.23.2 Periodic Test
3.23.3 Acceptance
3.23.4 References
3.23.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 212; and Rules 206.7, 1001.2(c)(29)(a),
1200.5, 1202.14, 1203.9, and 1004.2(c).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.20, and requirements 2.18.7,
8.11.2.1.3(cc)(l), 8.6.3, 8.7.2.21, 8.7.3.25, and 8.11.3.1.3(y).
3.23.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Sections 212 and 1307; and Rules
1001.2(c)(29), 1004.2(c)(25), 1200.4d, 1202.14, and 1203.9.
59
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
v. No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(10)
Fig. 3.23.2 Cross Sections of Typical Wire Ropes
Standard Hoist Ropes
(a)8x 19Seale
[Note (1)]
Compensation Ropes
(d) 8 x 25 Filler Wire
[Note (2)]
•S£*
(b) 8x21 Filler Wire Type U
Governor Ropes
(c) 6 x 25 Filler Wire
*A^
*V«
«8&
m
iipl
£?•
(e) 8 x 25 Filler Wire
[Note (2)]
(f) 8 x 19 Warrington
[Note (2)]
Sample Hoist Rope-Designs Used in North America
(g) Dual-Strand Rope
(h) 8-Strand Steel Core
For Illustration Only
(i) 9-Strand Steel Core
(j) Tiller-Rope Construction
[Note (3)]
GENERAL NOTE: Both traction and iron grade are used for compensation and governor ropes.
NOTES:
(1) These ropes can be compacted for high fatigue usage.
(2) Use 8 x 19 Warrington for 3/8-in. and 7/i6-in. diameter ropes. Use 8 x 25 filler wire for Vrin. and larger ropes.
(3) Typically phosphor bronze material; used for hand-operating ropes. Not permitted for suspension rope or governor rope, except for
replacement on old elevators with governors designed for it. This type of rope is also prohibited to connect the safety to the governor
rope (Requirement 2.17.12).
60
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.20 and 8.2.7; and requirements
8.11.2.1.3(00), 8.11.3.1.3(y)/ 8.6.2.5, 8.7.2.21, and 8.7.3.25.
A17.3 - Paragraphs 4.8, and 4.9.10.
ITEM 3.24
TOP COUNTERWEIGHT CLEARANCE
3.24.1 Periodic Inspections
3.24.1.1 Electric Elevators. With the car at the bot-
tom terminal landing, check the top counterweight
clearance.
In many cases the measurement is taken from the rope
shackles to the deflection sheave since this would be the
first obstruction. With the car located near the top of the
hoistway, look at the counterweight rails and determine
how high the guides have been running on the rails.
From that point, place some calibration chalk or other
identifying- type marks either on the rail or the adjacent
wall level where the guides travel in order to measure
where the exact position of the counterweight is with
the car level at the lowest landing.
Run the car to the lowest landing.
If possible from an adjacent car, look at the marks
relative to the position of the counterweights and deter-
mine from the marks placed on the wall or rail the exact
position of the counterweights. In a single car hoistway,
exercise caution and open the hoistway doors only
enough to shine a flashlight in the hoistway looking at
the marks placed on the wall or rail to determine the
exact position of the counterweights.
Add the car runby, buffer stroke, jump, and 6 in.
(150 mm) together. This will determine the minimum
required top counterweight clearance. Jump is based on
115% of rated speed where oil buffers are used and
the actual governor- tripping speed where spring buffers
are used.
NOTE: The projection of rope fastenings or guide shoes above
the counterweight structure may not always be an encroachment
on the top counterweight clearance. However, excessive projection
should not be permitted if interference with sheaves or other equip-
ment would be encountered upon maximum overtravel.
3.24.2 Periodic Test
3.24.3 Acceptance
3.24.3.1 Electric Elevators. Measure and record the
top counterweight clearance.
3.24.4 References
3.24.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 107.1h and 1001.2(c)(5).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.4.9 and 8.11.2.1.3(e).
ITEM 3.25
CAR, OVERHEAD, AND DEFLECTOR SHEAVES
3.25.1 Periodic Inspections
3.25.1.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Car Sheaves. Inspect car sheave and sheave bear-
ings for condition and adequacy of lubrication. Verify
that sheave bearings are securely fastened to the frame
members. Hammer test rim and spokes of sheaves as
outlined in Item 2.26. Verify that required sheave guards
are in place.
(b) Overhead and Deflector Sheaves. Inspect overhead
and deflector sheaves where inspection cannot be made
from the overhead as outlined in Item 2.26.
3.25.2 Periodic Test
3.25.3 Acceptance
3.25.3.1 Electric Elevators. Record and check for
compliance with drawings and specifications the diame-
ter of drums, overhead sheaves, and deflector sheaves.
3.25.4 References
3.25.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 208.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 2.24.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.8.1.
ITEM 3.26
BROKEN ROPE, CHAIN, OR TAPE SWITCH
3.26.1 Periodic Inspections (10)
(a) Check the device by manually opening the switch,
and attempt to move the car. The car should not move.
(b) Verify that the linkage attached to the switch per-
mits free operation of the switch.
3.26.2 Periodic Test
3.26.3 Acceptance
3.26.4 References
3.26.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 209.2c(2), 210.2(f), 1001.2(c)(9), and
1002.21.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.25.2.3.2, 2.26.2.6, 8.11.2.1.3(1), and
8.11.2.2.9.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.10.4(d).
ITEM 3.27
CROSSHEAD DATA PLATE AND ROPE DATA
TAGS
3.27.1 Periodic Inspections
3.27.2 Periodic Test
3.27.3 Acceptance
3.27.3.1 Electric Elevators. Check and verify the
information on the crosshead data plate.
61
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ews)
ASME A17.2-2010
3.27.3.2 Electric and Roped-Hydraulic Elevators.
Check and verify the information on the hoist rope data
tag and the governor-rope data tag.
3.27.4 References
3.27.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 207.3, 212.2, 1001.2(c)(ll), and 1202.14.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.16.3, 2.20.2, 8.11.2.1.3(k), and 8.7.2.21.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.12.2.
3.27.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 207.3, 212.2, 1001.2(c)(ll), and
1202.14.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.16, 2.20.2, 8.11.2.1.3(k), and 8.7.2.21.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.12.2.
ITEM 3.28
COUNTERWEIGHT AND COUNTERWEIGHT BUFFER
3.28.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Check that lock nuts and cotter pins at the top
and bottom of the counterweight rods are in place and
that filler weights (subweights) are securely held in
place.
(b) Check that the counterweight guide shoes are
securely fastened to the frame and that the guiding
members are not worn excessively. Also, determine if
swivel- type or roller- type guide shoes are free to move
as intended.
(c) Where 2;1 roping is used, inspect the counter-
weight sheave and bearings for condition and adequacy
of lubrication. Also, determine that the sheave bearings
are securely fastened to the counterweight frame and
whether required sheave guards are in place. Hammer-
test the sheave rim and spokes as outlined in Item 2.26.
(d) Check fastenings for compensating chains or
ropes to determine that they are securely fastened to the
counterweight. For elevators installed under Al 7. 1-1 960
and later editions, compensating chains are required to
be fastened directly to steel counterweight frames or to
a bracket, but not to tie rods. Determine that compensat-
ing chains are suspended so that they will not catch on
beams or other projections in the hoistway.
(e) Verify the top counterweight clearance and bottom
counterweight runby.
(f) If a counterweight is provided and the space below
the hoistway is not permanently secured against access,
determine that a counterweight safety is provided.
(g) Verify that a counterweight guard is in place.
3.28.1.1 Electric Elevators. Where the counter-
weight buffer is attached to the counterweight, deter-
mine that the buffer fastening bolts are tight. Determine
that the oil buffers are filled with oil to the proper level.
Refer to Item 5.9 for buffer inspection information.
Verify that a counter-
3.28.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators.
weight buffer is not provided.
3.28.2 Periodic Test
3.28.3 Acceptance
3.28.3.1 Electric Elevators. Counterweights with-
out either mechanical compensation or counterweight
safeties may be located in a remote hoistway. See
Item 4.11.
3.28.4 References
3.28.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Sections 201 and 202 and Rule 1001.2(c)(13).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.3, 2.4.9, 2.21, 2.22, 8.11.2.1.3(m),
8.11.2.1.5(c), 8.11.2.3.3, and c8.11.2.3.3(d).
A17.3 — Sections 2.1.5, 2.4.3, 3.1, 3.2, and 4.9.
3.28.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 300.8f, 301.4, 301.9, and 1308.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.3, 3.4.6, 3.22.3, 8.11.3.2.3(d), and
c8.11.2.3.3(d).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 4.9.2 and 4.9.6.
ITEM 3.29
COUNTERWEIGHT SAFETIES
3.29.1 Periodic Inspections
If a counterweight safety is provided, determine that
all moving parts of the safety are lubricated, free from
corrosion, free to operate, and that under ordinary
operating conditions the clearance between the guide
rail and each rail gripping face of the safety components
is correct. Examine the car and counterweight guide
shoes and their fastenings to determine that they are
properly secured, aligned, and adjusted. Check the gibs
or rollers for excessive wear. Check that rope is free of
corrosion and that rope fastenings are secure. Where
provided, inspect the safety drum rope and its deflecting
sheaves and their fastenings to determine that they are
not worn excessively or corroded and that they are in
operating condition. Safety rope must be made from a
corrosion-resistant material (if not a continuation of the
governor rope). Use of Tiller rope is prohibited.
Check the buffer portion of Type C safeties to deter-
mine that the oil level is within allowable limits. Also,
test the buffer compression switch and the oil level
device for proper functioning.
3.29.2 Periodic Test
(a) Yearly Test (for A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions);
Category 1 Test (for A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions).
Check governor-operated counterweight safeties, if pro-
vided, as outlined in Item 2.29 and safeties that operate
do)
62
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
by breaking or slackening of the counterweight suspen-
sion means as outlined in Item 5.8.2.
(b) 5-Year Test (for A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions);
Category 5 Test (for A17. 1-2000 /B44-00 and Later Editions).
Check governor-operated counterweight safeties, if pro-
vided, as outlined in Item 2.29 and safeties that operate
by breaking or slackening of the counterweight suspen-
sion means as outlined in Item 5.8.2.
3.29.3 Acceptance
(a) Check that a metal marking plate has been
securely attached to the safety plank, readily visible,
and legibly and permanently marked. Check that the
date is accurate and complies with the Code.
(b) If a counterweight is provided and the space below
the hoistway is not permanently secured against access,
verify that a counterweight safety is provided. A coun-
terweight safety may be provided for ascending car
overspeed protection.
(c) Test the counterweight safeties as outlined in
Item 2.29 for governor-operated safeties or Item 5.8.2
for safeties that operate by breaking or slackening of
the counterweight suspension means.
Counterweight safeties, if provided, must be operated
by a slackening or breaking of the counterweight suspen-
sion means for hydraulic elevators irrespective of the
rated speed, and may be operated by a slackening or
breaking of the counterweight suspension means for
electric elevators with rated speeds not over 150 fpm
(0.75 m/s). Counterweights are seldom used on hydrau-
lic elevators and counterweight safeties would be even
less frequent.
3.29.4 References
3.29.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 205; and Rules 206.5(e), 1001.2(b),
1001.2(c)(14), 1001.2(c), 1002.3(a), 1003.2, and 1002.3.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.17.12.4, 2.18.5.3, 8.11.2.1.2(y),
8.11.2.1.3(k), 8.11.2.1.3(z), 8.10.2.2.2(z), 8.11.2. 1.3(n),
8.11.2.3.1, 8.10.2.2, and 8.11.2.3.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 3.5.2, 3.6.2, and 3.12.2.
3.29.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 301.9, 300.10., 1006.2, 1005.2(c), and
1005.4.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.17.2, 3.6, 8.10.3.2, 8.11.3.2.3, and 8.11.3.4.
ITEM 3.30
SPEED TEST
3.30.1 Periodic Inspections
3.30.2 Periodic Test
3.30.3 Acceptance
3.30.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Check and verify the
information on the crosshead data plate. Have the rated
load placed in the car and use a tachometer to verify
the rated speed going up and the operating speed in
the down direction. The following procedure is
recommended:
(a) After the top-of-car refuge area, top-of-car run-by,
and operation of top-of-car operating device have been
verified, have the rated load placed in the car and run
it to the top with the top-of-car operating device while
occupying the refuge area. Be sure to include the weight
of the person in and on top-of-car in the load.
(b) Have an assistant inside the car place the car on
independent service, if available, and place a call to the
lowest landing.
(c) Hold a tachometer against the rail and determine
the operating speed in the down direction.
(d) Have the person inside the car place a call to a
midlevel landing.
Hold the tachometer against the rail and determine
the rated speed.
For roped-hydraulic elevators, also verify the informa-
tion on the hoist rope data tag, the governor-rope data
tag, and the rail lubrication marking plate.
3.30.4 References
3.30.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 205.16, 300.8, 301, 1004.2(c)(8),
1006.2g, and Section 3.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.17.16, 3.4 (NR 301), 8.11.3.1.3(h),
8.10.3.2.3(cc), and 1.3.
A17.3 — Section 4.9.
ITEM 3.31
SLACK ROPE DEVICE -
ROPED-HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
INSTALLED UNDER A17.1b-1989
AND LATER EDITIONS
3.31.1 Periodic Inspections
3.31.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Visually inspect the
slack rope device to verify that there is no damage or
interference with its movement.
3.31.2 Periodic Test
3.31.2.2 Hydraulic Elevators: Yearly Test (for
A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions). Have the car
lowered on the safety or supports in the pit to prevent
the car from reaching the first floor. The device should
cause power to be removed from the lowering valve.
Then attempt to run the car up. The device should not
allow power to the pump. Jump the device, move the
car up. Then remove the jumper and attempt to run the
car by normal means. The car should not operate in
either direction until the slack rope device is manu-
ally reset.
63
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
3.31.3 Acceptance
3.31.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Inspect the device and
verify it will operate if any one of the ropes becomes
slack.
3.31.4 References
(10) 3.31.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Al 7. ld-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 302.1b, 306.4, 1004.2(c)(26),
(NR 8.6.5.14.7), and 1005.2f.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.18.1.2, 3.26.4, 8.11.3.1.3(z), 8.6.5.14.7, and
(NR 1005.2f).
A17.3 — Paragraph 4.9.9.
ITEM 3.32
TRAVELING SHEAVE - ROPED-
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS INSTALLED
UNDER A17.1b-1989 AND LATER
EDITIONS
3.32.1 Periodic Inspections
3.32.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Inspect the sheave for
the following:
(a) secure tight fastening to plunger or cylinder.
(b) means to prevent slack ropes from leaving the
sheave securely in place.
(c) guide shoes seated in guide rails and condition of
guides and rails.
(d) rope changes. Where the material, grade, number,
or diameter of ropes have changed and the existing
sheave has been retained, check for approval by a
licensed professional engineer of the original equipment
manufacturer.
3.32.2 Periodic Test
3.32.3 Acceptance
3.32.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Verify the following:
(a) sheaves exceed the minimum allowable pitch
diameter
(b) sheaves are marked with the minimum permissi-
ble groove bottom diameter
(c) finished grooves or lining for ropes
(d) fillet are provided for points of changes in
diameter
(e) sheave in guide rails and condition of rails and
guides
3.32.4 References
3.32.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 212; and Rules 208.2, 208.3, 208.5,
301.1b, 302.1b, 307, 1004.2(c)(27), and 1203.9.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.20, 2.24.2, 2.24.3, 2.24.5, 3.23.2, 3.18.1.2,
(NR 307), 8.11.3.1.3(aa), and 8.7.3.25.
A17.3 — Paragraph 4.9.8.
ITEM 3.33
COMPENSATING ROPES AND
CHAINS
3.33.1 Periodic Inspections
3.33.1.1 Electric Elevators. Examine compensating
chains and fastenings for excessive wear, damage, or
deterioration. Sash cord wear is no indication of chain
damage. See Item 3.23 for inspection of compensating
ropes.
3.33.2 Periodic Test
3.33.4 Acceptance
3.33.4 References
3.33.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 202.4, 1001.2(c)(30), and 1003.2g.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.21.4, 8.11.2.1.3(dd), 8.10.2.2.3(dd), and
8.10.2.2.5(h).
ITEM 3.34
EARTHQUAKE INSPECTION AND TESTS (SEISMIC
RISK ZONE 2 OR GREATER)
3.34.1 Periodic Inspection
(a) Verify that the clearances between the car and the
counterweight assembly, the counterweight assembly
and hoistway enclosure, and the counterweight assem-
bly and the nearest obstruction, including the counter-
weight screens, complies with requirement. These
clearances supersede those specified in A17.1a~2002,
2.5.1.2.
(b) Verify that all beams and supports are properly
anchored and all fastening devices are in place.
(c) Verify that all rope retainer guards or rope
restraints are in place.
(d) Verify that snag guards, where required, are in
place.
(e) Verify that upper and lower position restraints are
provided on the car or its guiding member.
(f) Measure the clearance between the counterweight
frame and the face of the counterweights and verify that
it complies with the requirements.
(g) Verify that the upper and lower position restraints
that are attached to the counterweight frame are in place.
Verify that the clearance between the upper and lower
position restraints and the guide rail comply with
requirement.
(h) Verify that the car and counterweight guide rail
system, including the bracket spacing, fastenings, sup-
ports, and joints, comply with requirement.
(i) Verify that the emergency exit can be opened from
the top of the car without the use of a key.
(10)
64
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
3.34.2 Periodic Test
3.34.3 Acceptance
(a) Measure the horizontal car and counterweight
clearances and verify that they comply with the
requirements.
(b) Verify that rope retainers are continuous over not
less than % of the arc of contact between the rope and
its sheave or drum, and located so not more than \ of
the arc of contact is exposed. Rope restraints may be
used, and if they are used, there must be one for each
30 deg or less of arc contact.
(c) Verify that snag guards are provided for snag
points created by rail brackets, rail clip bolts, fishplates,
vanes, and similar devices, where
(1) governor ropes are located 20 in. (500 mm) or
less from a snag point
(2) the loop of traveling cables below the midpoint
of the elevator travel is located 36 in. (915 mm) or less,
horizontally from a snag point
(d) Verify that the rail system is installed per design,
including bracket spacing.
(e) Verify that snag points less than 12 in. (300 mm)
from the suspension ropes are properly guarded.
3.34.3.1 Electric Elevators. Verify that snag guards
are provided for snag points created by rail brackets,
rail clip bolts, fishplates, vanes, and similar devices,
where the counterweight end of compensating ropes or
chains is located 30 in. (760 mm) or less from a counter-
weight rail bracket, the loop of compensating chains
below the midpoint of the elevator travel is within 36 in.
(915 mm) of a snag point.
3.34.4 References
3.34.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1-1993 through
A17.1d-2000 editions — Rules 2402, 2401, 2400, 2405,
2407, 2404, and 2403.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.4.1, 8.4.2, 8.4.3, 8.4.5, 8.4.6, 8.4.7, and
8.4.8.
3.34.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1-1993 through
A17.1d-2000 editions — Rules 2402, 2401, 2400.1(a),
2400.1(b), 2400.1(d), 2400.2, 2405, 2404, and 2403.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.4.1, 8.4.2, 8.4.3.1.1, 8.4.3.1.2, 8.4.3.1.4,
8.4.3.2, 8.4.5, 8.4.7, and 8.4.8.
65
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Part 4
Elevator — Outside Hoistway
(10)
ITEM 4.1
CAR PLATFORM GUARD
4.1.1 Periodic Inspections
Place the car 2 ft (610 mm) or 3 ft (914 mm) above
one of the landings with the hoistway door open and
inspect the guard to determine that it is in place and
securely fastened. In some cases, the guard can be
inspected from the pit with the car at the bottom terminal
landing.
On truck loading elevators with collapsible gates,
check that a head guard, which extends the full width
of the hoistway door, is provided when the vertical
hoistway door opening is greater than the distance from
the car platform to the car top.
4.1.2 Periodic Test
4.1.3 Acceptance
For all elevators where a car leveling or truck zoning
device is provided, check that there is a smooth metal
guard extending a distance below the platform floor
equal to the depth of the leveling or truck zone plus
3 in. (76 mm), but not less than 21 in. (533 mm) on the
entrance side of the platform. This apron must have a
width equal to or greater than the widest hoistway door
opening.
4.1.4 References
4.1.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 203.9 and 1001.2(d)(1).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.15.9 and 8.11.2.1.4(a).
A17.3 — Section 3.3 and para. 3.2.2.
4.1.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 301.6 and 1004.2(d)(1).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.15 and 8.11.3.1.4(a).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.3.2 {4.2.2}.
ITEM 4.2
HOISTWAY DOORS
4.2.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Manually Operated Hoistway Door. Open and close
each manually operated hoistway door, examine each,
including any hand-operated latches, and note any bro-
ken glass panels in the doors or any structural defects
in the frames. Try to open the door by pulling on it, and
also by lifting it without touching the lock or latch. If
it can be opened in this manner, the lock or latch is
defective, or the door has sagged so that the lock or
latch is not engaging properly. Check that pull straps
are in good condition and properly secured on the upper
panel of vertical slide biparting doors.
(b) Closed Position of Hoistway Door or Gate. With the
car door or gate in the closed position and with the
hoistway door or gate fully open, close the hoistway
door or gate slowly from the landing side until the maxi-
mum clear opening is reached at which the actuation
of the elevator operating device will cause the car to
start. Measure the distance from the nearest face of the
door jamb or gate sill to the nearest edge of the door or
gate, or between the meeting edges of biparting doors.
Verify that from this position the door cannot be
reopened from the landing side.
The measured distance should not exceed the dimen-
sions indicated in the following paragraphs:
(1) Horizontally sliding or swinging doors or verti-
cally sliding counterweighted doors or gates, % in.
(10 mm), except for elevators installed under A17. 1-1955
through 1990, horizontally sliding doors, 4 in. (102 mm),
where the conditions set forth below are met.
(a) Car is operated from inside only.
(b) The doors are power closing or equipped with
door closers that will normally close the door to % in.
(10 mm) of the closed position and lock it.
(c) Hoistway doors are equipped with auxiliary
locks (Item 3.17.1).
id) Where hoistway doors are equipped with
mechanical locks and electric contacts, 2 in. (51 mm).
(2) Vertically sliding biparting counterbalanced
doors, when the astragal of the upper panel is within
% in. (19 mm) of the lower panel. For elevators installed
under A17.1-1955 through A17.1a-1991, this distance
was when the door was not more than % in. (19 mm)
from their stopped position when provided with inter-
locks or when provided with mechanical locks and elec-
trical contacts within 2 in. (51 mm) of contact with each
other. The Code prohibits overlapping rigid astragals
and center latches.
(3) Check the condition of the leading edges of the
entrance panels. Verify that horizontally sliding doors
are in the closed position when the car is waiting at a
landing.
66
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
(c) Hoistway Door Clearance and Integrity. Verify that
door panels will not appreciably deflect, deform, or
come out of the guides or tracks. For horizontally sliding
doors installed under A17.1b-1992 and later editions,
check that safety retainers are provided at the top and
bottom of the panels. Verify that the clearances between
door panels with each other, their frames, and their sills
have not become excessive. The requirements became
effective:
Maximum
Clearance, in.
Door Type
Horizontal slide
Vertical slide
Swing
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. = 25.4 mm
Code Edition
1955 and later
1971 and later
1971 and later
(d) Opening of Locked Hoistway Door Panel(s). On ele-
vators installed under A17. 1-1990 and later editions
with horizontally sliding and vertically sliding hoistway
doors in the closed and locked position, apply 30 lbf
(133 N) using a door test scale to the leading edge of
the door at the furthest point from the interlock. Measure
the gap at the furthest point from the interlock. The
difference shall not exceed the 1 in. (25 mm) maximum
per panel.
4*2.2 Periodic Test
4.2.3 Acceptance
Examine hoistway doors, interlocks, and mechanical
locks and electric contacts (see Item 4.4). Determine
whether doors meet the requirements for passenger or
for freight elevators. Measure the height and width of
the entrance. Measure the distances between the
hoistway face of horizontally sliding or swinging doors
and the hoistway edge of the landing sill [see
Table 3.14.3(b)]. Also, measure the distances between
the hoistway face of the hoistway doors and the car door
or gate (see Item 1.7.1). Check that the doors, door frame,
and entrance hardware are labeled. See Item 3.17.3.
4.2.4 References
4.2.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 110; and Rules 111.7, 210.2, and
1001.2(d)(2).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.11, 2.12.7, 2.26.2, and 8.11.2.1.4(b).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.10.4.
4.2.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 110 (Rule 300.11}; Rules 111.2b
and 111.3b {300.12}; and 306.4, 1004.2(d)(2), and 1006.2h.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.11 {3.11}; 2.12.2.2 and 2.12.3.2 {3.12}; and
3.26.4, 8.11.3.1.4(b), and 8.10.3.2.3(r).
A17.3 — Paragraph 4,7.4.
ITEM 4.3
VISION PANELS
4.3.1 Periodic Inspections
Where vision panels are provided, note that clear
wired glass is used and is secured in place. For elevators
installed under A17.1-1990 and later editions, check that
the required vision panel grill is in place.
4.3.2 Periodic Test
4.3.3 Acceptance
Check that elevators with automatic or continuous
pressure operation, with manually operated or self-
closing hoistway doors of the vertically or horizontally
sliding type, have a vision panel at all landings except
at landings of automatic operating elevators where a
hall position indicator is provided.
Check that all horizontally swinging doors have vision
panels.
When a glass door is provided, check the type of glass,
thickness, minimum surface area, and edging.
4.3.4 References
4.3.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 110.7 and 1001.2(d)(3).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.11.7 and 8.11.2.1.4(c).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.6.3.
4.3.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 110.7 {300.11} and 1004.2(d)(3).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.11.7 {3.11} and 8.11.3.1.4(c).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.6.3 {Section 4.1}.
ITEM 4.4
HOISTWAY DOOR LOCKING
DEVICES
4.4.1 Periodic Inspections
On doors or gates equipped with interlocks, which
are unlocked automatically by retiring cams or similar
devices, when the car is in the unlocking zone place the
car near each landing outside this zone above and below
the landing so that the automatic unlocking device on
the car cannot release the interlock. With the car away
from the landing, try to manually open the hoistway
door. It should not be possible to open the door. For
sliding doors on elevators installed under A17.1a-1991
and later editions, check that a force of 30 lbf (133 N)
applied at the farthest point from the interlock will not
open the doors more than 1 in. (25 mm) per panel.
Observe the door operation and note that on closing the
doors do not bounce open beyond the closed position.
On vertical sliding biparting doors with retiring cams,
check the alignment of the cam and interlock rollers as
67
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
follows: With the doors open and the car level with the
landing, observe the alignment of the interlock roller
with the retiring cam and note as well that the interlock
roller is near the vertical center of the retiring cam so
that the retiring cam cannot operate the interlock when
the car is outside the landing zone.
4.4.2 Periodic Test
4.4.3 Acceptance
Determine whether interlocks or mechanical locks and
electric contacts are provided [see Item 3.17.1(a)(6)].
Note that they are inaccessible from the landing side.
Verify that the interlocks, or the mechanical locks and
electric contacts, are of a type that have been tested
and approved, and are marked for identification [see
Item 3.17.1(a)(5)].
Check the retiring cam and note that it is permanently
marked with its horizontal force and horizontal move-
ment. Verify that the horizontal force and movement
comply with minimum Code requirements. Where a
modernization did not replace a retiring cam, which
was installed under A17. 1-1960 or earlier editions, the
marking would not be present. See also Item 3.17.3.
4.4.4 References
4.4.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 111 and Rule 1001.2(d)(4).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.12 and 8.11.2.1.4(d).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.7.1.
4.4.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 111 {Rule 300.12} and Rule
1004.2(d)(4).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.12 {3.12) and 8.11.3.1.4(d).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.7.1 {Section 4.1).
ITEM 4.5
ACCESS TO HOISTWAY
4.5.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Unlocking Devices. Check any escutcheons on
doors and verify that they are intact, securely fastened
in place, and not deformed. The unlocking device key
is to be kept on the premises by a person responsible
for the maintenance of the elevators and only accessible
to qualified persons in case of emergency. For the eleva-
tors installed under A17.1-1978 and later editions, the
keyway should be located at a height not greater than
6 ft 11 in. (2.11 m) above the floor.
For elevators installed under A17.1a-1997 and later
editions, check that there is a hoistway door unlocking
device at each landing where there is an entrance.
(b) Hoistway Access Switches. Hoistway access
switches were required for all elevators installed under
A17. 1-1955 edition. Hoistway access switches are
required under certain conditions for elevators installed
under A17.1-1960 and later editions. For elevators
installed under A17.1b-1983 and later editions and
A17.3, the movement of the car by upper access switch is
limited in the down direction to the height of crosshead
above the platform and in the up direction to the length
of the platform guard. Check for proper operation. Verify
that the switch key is kept in a location where it is
available only to authorized persons.
4.5.2 Periodic Test
4.5.3 Acceptance
4.5.4 References
4.5.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 111.6, 111.7, and 1001.2(d)(5).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.12.6, 2.12.7, and 8.11.2.1.4(e).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.7.3.
4.5.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 111.6 and 111.7 {300.12}, and
1004.2(d)(5).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.12.6 and 2.12.7 {3.12}, and 8.11.3.1.4(e).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.7.3 {Section 4.1}.
ITEM 4.6
POWER CLOSING OF HOISTWAY
DOORS
4.6.1 Periodic Inspections
4.6.2 Periodic Test
4.6.3 Acceptance
Where both a hoistway door and a car door or gate are
opened and/or closed by power, check that the hoistway
door and the car door or gate are
(a) both of the horizontally sliding type; or
(b) both of the vertically sliding type.
4.6.4 References
4.6.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions - Section 112 and Rule 1001.2(d)(6).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13 and 8.11.2.1.4(f).
4.6.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 112.3 through 112.6 {300.13}, and
1004.2(d)(6).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13.3 through 2.13.6 {3.13}, and
8.11.3.1.4(f).
A17.3 — Section 2.8 {4.1}.
68
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(10)
ITEM 4.7
SEQUENCE OPERATION
4.7.1 Periodic Inspections
Check the door sequence operation on elevators with
vertical biparting power-operated hoistway doors and
power-operated car doors or gates.
(a) During opening operation, hoistway door should
be opened two-thirds or more of its travel before car
door or gate starts to open.
(b) During closing operation, the car door or gate
should be closed two-thirds or more of its travel before
the hoistway door starts to close.
4.7.2 Periodic Test
4.7.3 Acceptance
4.7.4 References
4.7.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 112.6, 1123d, and 1001.2(d)(7).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13.6, 2.13.3.4, and 8.11.2.1.4(g).
4.7.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 112.6 and 112.3d {300.13}, and
1004.2(d)(7).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13.6 and 2.13.3.4 {3.13}, and 8.11.3.1.4(g).
ITEM 4.8
HOISTWAY ENCLOSURE
4.8.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Hoistway Enclosures. Where openwork-type enclo-
sures and doors are permitted and used, check enclosure
panels at all floors and note whether they are securely
fastened in place. Also, verify that wire netting or mesh
required by the applicable regulations is in place and
securely fastened.
(b) Glass Hoistways (Curtain Walls). Al 7. 1-1978 and
later editions require laminated glass, where used for
elevator hoistways in nonfire-resistant enclosures.
A17.1b-1983 required the laminated glass to comply
with ANSI Z97.1. ASME A17.1-1993 recognized both
ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR Part 1201 and required that
each panel be marked as specified in ANSI Z97.1, and
that the marking be visible after installation.
ASME A17.1-2000/B44-00 added the Canadian stan-
dard CAN CGSB-12.1, where applicable, and required
marking as specified in the applicable standard be visi-
ble on each panel after installation.
4.8.2 Periodic Test
4.8.3 Acceptance
Determine whether the hoistway enclosure conforms
to building code requirements for fire-resistive
construction.
Verify that means to prevent accumulation of smoke
and hot gases, such as venting or pressurization, are
provided as required by the applicable building code.
See Item 3.11.
4.8.4 References
4.8.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions - Rules 100.1, 100.4, 100.5, and 1001.2(d)(8).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.1.1, 2.1.4, 2.1.5, and 8.11.2.1.4(h).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 2.1.1 and 2.1.2.
ANSI Z97.1 or CFR Part 1201.
4.8.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 100.1, 100.4, and 100.5 {300.1}; and
1004.2(d)(8).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.1.1, 2.1.4, and 2.1.5 {3.1); and
8.11.3.1.4(h).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 2.1.1 and 2.1.2 (Section 4.1}.
ITEM 4.9
ELEVATOR PARKING DEVICES
4.9.1 Periodic Inspections
Check operation of parking (service key) device and
verify that all parts of the device are free to operate and
that the door cannot be opened unless the car is at the
landing. For elevators installed under A17. 1-1978 and
later editions, the device should be located at a height
not greater than 6 ft 11 in. (2.11 m) above the floor.
4.9.2 Periodic Test
4.9.3 Acceptance
See Item 4.4.3.
4.9.4 References
4.9.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rule 1001.2(d)(9).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 8.11.2.1.4(i).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.7.2.
4.9.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rule 1004.2(d)(9).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 8.11.3.1.4(i).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.7.2 (Section 4.1}.
ITEM 4.10
EMERGENCY DOORS IN BLIND
HOISTWAYS
4.10.1 Periodic Inspections
For elevators installed under A17. 1-1955, check that
emergency doors are closed, locked, and free from fixed
69
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
obstructions. Check the operation of the door electric
contact. For elevators installed under A17.1-1960 and
later editions, check for the above and that the emer-
gency doors are self-closing and self-locking. Verify that
a cylinder-type lock with a minimum of five-pin or five-
disc combination is provided, that the key is removable
only in the locked position, and that the lock can be
unlocked from the landing side only. Verify that the key
for this lock is accessible only to elevator personnel.
Check that a sign indicating "DANGER, ELEVATOR
HOISTWAY" has been provided on the landing side of
each emergency door.
4.10.2 Periodic Test
4.10.3 Acceptance
Check the operation of the self-closing device and
functioning of the self-locking device, and that a door
electric contact is provided. Check that it can be
unlocked from the landing side only through the use of
the cylinder-type lock, with a key that will not unlock
any other door or device in the building.
Check that the key is kept where it is available only
to elevator personnel.
Verify that cylinder-type lock with a minimum of
either a five-pin or five-disc combination has been pro-
vided on the landing side of the door, that the key is
removable only in the locked position, and that the door
can be unlocked from the landing side.
NOTE: Emergency doors in blind hoistways are required on
hydraulic elevators only where car safeties are used.
4.10.4 References
4.10.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 110.1 and 1001.2(d)(10).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.11.1.1, 2.11.1.2, 8.1, and 8.11.2.1.4Q).
4.10.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 110.1 and 1004,2.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.11.1.1, 2.11.1.2, 8.1, and (NR 1004.2).
ITEM 4.11
SEPARATE COUNTERWEIGHT
HOISTWAY
4.11.1 Periodic Inspections
Where the counterweight runs within a separate
enclosure outside the hoistway, each rope and its fasten-
ing should be inspected at the door in such enclosure
nearest to the top of the hoistway. Determine that inspec-
tion doors in the counterweight enclosure meet the
requirements of the Code. Instruct the operator to move
the car a short distance at a time and inspect the ropes.
The Code prohibits the location of counterweights
outside the elevator hoistway, except for elevators with-
out mechanical compensation or counterweight safeties
installed under the A17.1f-1975 and later editions.
A17.1f-1975 through A17.1b-1983, limited separate
counterweight hoistways to observation-type elevators.
Elevators installed under A17.1-2000/B44-00 and
later editions, confirm that the enclosed stop switch, the
permanent light switch, outlet, and light are provided
in the hoistway immediately inside the entry door and
that all function properly.
4.11.2 Periodic Test
4.11.4 References
4.11.3.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 103.1, 103.3, 110.1, and 1001.2(d)(ll).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.3.1, 2.3.3, 2.11.1.1, 2.11.1.2, 2.26.2.27, and
8.11.2.1.4(k).
ITEM 4.12
STANDBY POWER SELECTION SWITCH
4.12.1 Periodic Inspections
Check that the standby power selection key is kept
in a location where it is available only to authorized
persons.
4.12.2 Periodic Test: Yearly Test (for A17.1d-2000
and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions)
See Item 1.17.2.
4.12.3 Acceptance
4.12.4 References
4.12.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17,ld-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 211.2, 211.8, 1001.2(d)(13), and 1002.2g.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.27.2, 2.27.8, 8.11.2.1.4(1), and 8.11.2.2.7.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.11.2.
4.12.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 207.8 {301.10}, 211.2 and 211.8
{306.11}, 1002.2g, 1004.2(d)(ll), and 1005.2c.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.16.8 {3.16}, 2.27.2 and 2.27.8 {3.27},
8.11.2.2.7, 8.11.3.1.4(k), and 8.11.3.2.3.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.11.2 {4.7.8}.
70
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Parts
Elevator — Pit
ITEM 5.1
PIT ACCESS, LIGHTING, STOP SWITCH, AND
CONDITION
5.1.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Check that the means of access is safe, convenient,
and accessible only to authorized persons,
(1) If a pit access door is provided, check that it is
locked and is self-closing and can be opened from inside
the pit without a key. A17.3 also requires that this door
be kept closed and locked.
(2) If access is through the lowest landing, check
that the hoistway door unlocking device or access switch
operates properly.
(b) If access is through the lower landing and the pit
floor is more than 4 ft (1 219 mm) below the access sill,
check the required pit ladder for compliance and secure
fastening to the wall. If the ladder is not secure, do not
use it. A17. 1-1978 and later editions required a pit ladder
for pit extending more than 3 ft (914 mm) below the
access sill.
(c) Check that the stop switch can be reached from
the access entrance and that it will prevent the car from
operating by placing it in the stop position and having
a person in the car attempt to move it. In addition to
the other requirements in A17.1-1971 and later editions,
require the stop and run positions to be marked on the
switch. For elevators installed under A17. 1-1978
through A17.1b-1992, two-pit switches are required
when the pit access is from the lowest landing and the
pit depth is more than 6 ft 7 in. (2 007 mm). For elevators
installed under Al 7.1-1993 and later editions, two-pit
switches are required when the depth exceeds 66 in.
(1 676 mm). Verify that either switch will stop the car.
(d) The pit light switch must be accessible from the pit
access door. Turn this switch on and verify that lighting
meets Code requirements. A17.1a-1988 and later edi-
tions require the bulb to be guarded externally to reduce
accidental breakage. This edition also requires that a
duplex receptacle be provided in the pit.
(e) From a safe position on the landing or pit access
door, use a light to visually inspect the pit for the pres-
ence of water, accumulation of combustible materials,
oil or other materials, or equipment not related to the
elevator operation. Carefully note the location of all
equipment in the pit and under the car, and identify a
refuge area to use in case the car runs down unexpect-
edly. Note the location of cars and equipment in adjacent
hoistways. Sump covers level with the pit floor are
required by A17.1a-1985 and later editions. On entering
the pit examine for cleanliness especially in trenches and
depressions allowed for buffers, vertically sliding doors,
or structural members.
Check the pit area for the installation of any pipes or
ducts not related to the operation of the elevator. For
elevators installed under A17.1-1993 and later editions,
a permanent means of preventing the accumulation of
water is required.
(f) For elevators installed under A17.1a-1988 and
later editions, check that a duplex receptacle has been
provided in the pit. For elevators installed under
ANSI/NFPA 70-1993, check the receptacle is provided
with ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection.
For elevators installed under ANSI/NFPA 70-1996
and later editions, check that the receptacle is of the
ground-fault circuit-interrupter type. A single receptacle
supplying a permanently installed sump pump does not
require ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection.
5.1.2 Periodic Test
5.1.3 Acceptance
Examine the pit construction for Code compliance and
note that the pit floor is approximately level. If the pit
has a drain, verify that it is not directly connected to a
sewer.
5.1.4 References
5.1.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 102, 103.2, 106.1, 210.2(g), 1001.2(e)(1),
and 1206.2a.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.8, 2.3.2, (NR 106.1), 2.26.2.7, 8.11.2.1.5(a),
and 8.6.4.7.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 2.3.1, 2.3.2, and 2.7.3.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
5.1.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 102 {Rule 300.3}; and Rules 106.1
{300.7}, 300.10, 306.4, 1004.2(e)(1), and 1206.2a.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.8 {3.8}; (NR 106.1) {3.2), 3.6, 3.26.4,
8.11.3.1.5(a), and 8.6.4.7.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 2.3.1, 2.3.2, and 2.7.3 {Section
4.1}; and 3.10.4.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
71
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
ITEM 5.2
BOTTOM CLEARANCE, RUNBY, AND MINIMUM
REFUGE SPACE
5.2.1 Periodic Inspections
If there has been an obvious change such as a new
buffer, buffer mounting, or rope fastenings, check the
car and counterweight bottom clearances and runbys
(see Item 5.2.3).
(10) 5.2.1.1 Electric Elevators. The car and counter-
weight runby may be less than provided upon installa-
tion, provided the car and counterweight does not strike
the buffer, the top car clearances have not been reduced
below that required at the time of installation or alter-
ation (Item 3.4), and the final terminal stopping devices
remain operational (Items 2.26, 3.8, and 5.4). For spring-
return-type oil buffers, where compression is permitted,
check that any compression of the car and counterweight
buffers does not exceed 25% of the buffer stroke.
Where required, examine the counterweight guard for
secure fastening and placement. In some cases, remov-
able blocking is furnished in connection with the coun-
terweight buffer to provide adjustment following rope
stretch in order to secure proper counterweight runby
without shortening the ropes. If smooth metal plates are
used for blocking, examine for evidence of the plates
being coated with oil and picked up by the
counterweight.
Check the available refuge space for elevators installed
under A17.1b-1992 and later editions.
5.2.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Check the available ref-
uge space for elevators installed under A17.1e-1987 and
later editions.
If a counterweight is provided, the minimum counter-
weight runby must not be reduced below the sum of
the distance the car can travel above the top terminal
landing until the plunger strikes its mechanical stop
plus 6 in. (150 mm).
5.2.2 Periodic Test
5.2.3 Acceptance
5.2.3.1 Electric Elevators. Check the bottom car and
counterweight clearance and runby for compliance with
the Code requirements. Position the car above the lower
landing to allow access to the pit. These may be deter-
mined as follows:
(a) Bottom Car Runby. See Fig. 5.2.3.
(1) Measure the distance from the landing sill to
the car floor sill dimension a.
(2) Without moving the car, measure distance from
the buffer to the buffer strike plate on the bottom of the
car, dimension b. Subtract a from b; this will be the
bottom car runby. Note that a negative number indicates
that the car will strike the buffer when level with the
bottom landing.
(3) For spring-return-type oil buffers, where com-
pression is permitted, check that any compression of the
car and counterweight buffers does not exceed 25% of
the buffer stroke.
(b) Bottom Car Clearance. See Fig. 5.2.3.
(1) Measure the distance (dimension c) from the
lowest structure member beneath the car, ignoring roller
guides, platform aprons, safety jaws, and other equip-
ment located within 12 in. (305 mm) horizontally of the
hoistway wall.
(2) Measure the distance from the buffer to the
buffer striking plate on the car and add the buffer stroke
to this measurement b plus buffer stroke. Subtract b plus
buffer stroke from c to obtain the bottom car clearance.
Do not consider trenches, depressions, or foundation
encroachments when making these measurements. Also,
use these measurements to determine that no part of
the car or equipment will touch the floor when the car
rests on its fully compressed buffer.
(c) Bottom Counterweight Runby, With the car level
with the top terminal landing, visually check the dis-
tance between the bottom of the counterweight and the
top of the counterweight buffer in the pit, or where a
gravity-return counterweight buffer is used, between the
buffer plunger and the striker block in the pit.
For spring- return- type oil buffers, where compression
is permitted, check that any compression of the car and
counterweight buffers does not exceed 25% of the buffer
stroke.
Check the counterweight runby against the data plate
shown in the pit.
5.2.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Check the bottom car
clearance and runby for compliance with the Code
requirements. Position the car above the lower landing
to allow access to the pit. These may be determined as
follows:
(a) Bottom. Car Runby. See Fig. 5.2.3.
(1) Measure the distance from the landing sill to
the car floor sill, dimension a.
(2) Without moving the car, measure distance from
the buffer to the buffer strike plate on the bottom of the
car, dimension b. Subtract a from b; this will be the
bottom car runby. Note that a negative number indicates
that the car will strike the buffer when level with the
bottom landing.
(b) Bottom Car Clearance. See Fig. 5.2.3.
(1) Measure the distance (dimension c) from the
lowest structure member beneath the car, ignoring roller
guides, platform aprons, and other equipment located
within 12 in. (305 mm) horizontally of the hoistway
walls.
(2) Measure the distance (dimension b) from the
buffer to the buffer striking plate on the car and add
the buffer stroke to this measurement. Subtract b plus
buffer stroke from c to obtain the bottom car clearance.
Do not consider trenches, depressions, or foundation
72
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 5.2.3 Bottom Car Clearance Hydraulic Elevators
Bottom car runby = b-
Bottom car clearance =
{b+ buffer stroke)
Example:
Buffer stroke = 10 in.
a = 24 in.
6 = 30 in.
c= 66 in.
Bottom car runby = 30 in. - 24 in. = 6 in.
Bottom car clearance = 66 in. - (30 in. + 10 in.) = 26 in.
GENERAL NOTES: Minimum refuge space not less than (a) or (b) below.
(a) 24 in. by 48 in. by 24 in, high; or
(b) 18 in. by 36 in. by 42 in. high.
encroachments when making these measurements. Also,
use these measurements to verify that no part of the car
or equipment will touch the floor when the car rests on
its fully compressed buffer.
(c) Bottom Plunger Clearance. Verify that with the car
on full compressed buffers, the plunger does not strike
the bottom of the casing. To do this, lower the car by
inspection or manual lowering and fully compress the
buffers. On spring buffers that may not be compressed
easily measure the distance from the buffer strike plate
to the buffer springs with the car level with the landing
(runby). Add to this distance the full stroke of the buffer.
With the buffer springs removed, the car must be low-
ered at least the sum of the two distances.
If a counterweight is provided, verify the bottom
counterweight runby and that no counterweight buffers
are provided.
Check the counterweight runby against the data plate
shown in the pit.
5.2.4 References
5.2.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 103.2, 107.1a, 107.1b, 201. 4h,
1001.2(e)(2), 1202.14b, and 1206.8.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.3.2, 2.4.1, 2.4.2, 2.22.4.8, 8.11.2.1.5(b),
(NR 1202.14b), and 8.6.4.11.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 2.4.2 and 2.4.3.
5.2.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d~2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 300.8, 302.3c, 1004.2(e)(2), and
1006.2e.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.4, 3.18.3.3, 8.11.3.1.5(b), and 8.10.3.2.5(c).
A17.3 — Paragraph 2.1.5.
ITEM 5.3
FINAL AND EMERGENCY TERMINAL STOPPING
DEVICES
53.1 Periodic Inspections
5.3.1.1 Electric Elevators. The lower final terminal
stopping device should be located as close to the termi-
nal landing as possible without interfering with the nor-
mal terminal stopping device.
Where spring buffers are used, the lower terminal
stopping device must stop the car before the car strikes
the buffer. With the car parked as near the device as
possible and the stop button in the stop position, use a
light to check alignment of the device and the operating
cam. The roller should be centered on the cam in such
a position that the cam or roller will not be damaged
when it operates. This must allow free motion of the
roller arm and positive opening of the switch contact
without damaging the switch. Have the car moved up
and check that the device is securely fastened and not
loose.
73
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(10)
5.3.2 Periodic Test
5.3.2.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Yearly Test (for A17.1d-2000 and Earlier Editions);
Category 1 Test (for A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions).
The operation of the final terminal stopping device (final
limit) and its relation to the cam by jumping out the
normal terminal stopping device and running the car
past the terminal floor at slow speed. The car should
stop as close to the floor as practical.
The final terminal stopping device should not func-
tion when the car is stopped by the normal terminal
stopping device. Where spring buffers are used, verify
that the device will function before the buffer is engaged.
Measure the length of the cam and, using the bottom
car runby and buffer stroke, check that the device will
continue to function until the car rests on its fully com-
pressed buffer. After this test, it will be necessary to
jump the final terminal stopping device to move the car
off of it.
(b) 5-Year Test of Emergency Terminal Stopping Means
(for A17.1d-2000/B44-00 and Earlier Editions); Category 5
Test of Emergency Terminal Stopping Means (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions). For static control
elevators see Item 2.28.2(b) and for emergency terminal
speed limiting devices see Item 5.3.2.
5.3.3 Acceptance
5.3.4 References
5.3.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 209.3, 1001.2(e)(4), and 1003.2e.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions - Requirements
2.25.3, 8.11.2.1.5(d), and 8.10.2.2.5(c) or c8.10.2.2.5(c)(6).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.9.2.
5.4.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d~2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 305.1, 1002. 2e {1005.2c}, and
1004.2(e)(5).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.25.1, 8.11.2.2.5 {8.11.3.2.3}, and
8.11.3.1.5(e).
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.9.1 {Section 4.6}.
ITEM 5.5
TRAVELING CABLES
5.5.1 Periodic Inspections
Examine the lower portion of the traveling cables and
their connections to the car as outlined in Item 3.11. The
cables should not touch the pit floor or rub against any
other equipment. Examine visible portion of cables for
wear, twist, or damage.
5.5.2 Periodic Test
5.5.3 Acceptance
5.5.4 References
5.5.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rule 102.2.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 2.8.2.
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
5.5.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 102.2 {300.3} and 1004.2(e)(6).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.8.2 {3.8} and 8.11.3.1.5(f).
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
ITEM 5.4
NORMAL TERMINAL STOPPING
DEVICES
5.4.1 Periodic Inspections
If the normal terminal stopping device is located in
the hoistway, check that it is securely fastened, that the
roller is in good condition and aligned with the cam.
The alignment with the cam may have to be checked
from the top of the car as described in Item 3.5.1.
5.4.2 Periodic Test
See Items 2.28 and 3.5.
5.4.3 Acceptance
5.4.4 References
5.4.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 209 and 1002.2e.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.25 and 8.11.2.2.5.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.9.1.
ITEM 5.6
GOVERNOR-ROPE TENSION DEVICES
5.6.1 Periodic Inspections
Examine the governor-rope tension device and deter-
mine whether
(a) there is sufficient remaining travel of the sheave
frame to maintain tension in the governor rope and that
the frame is securely fastened to the hoistway
(b) the frame moves freely in its guides
(c) the operation of the sheave while the car is in
motion, reveals no excessive wear of the sheave, shaft,
or bearings, and that all parts are lubricated
(d) check for excess lubricant or other contaminants
that may get on the governor rope
(e) with the car operating, listen for noise caused by
rubbing or bearing in a failure mode
Lifting of the tension weights with the car at rest and
the stop switch in the stop position may also assist in
detecting defects.
74
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
5.6.2 Periodic Test
5.6.3 Acceptance
5.6.3.1 Electric Elevators. See Item 2.28.3.
5.6.4 References
5.6.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 206.7, 1001.2(e)(7), and 1206.1a.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.18.7, 8.11.2.1.5(g), and 8.6.1.6.2.
5.6.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 206.7, 301.8, 1004.2(e)(ll), and
1206.1a.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.18.7, 3.17.1, 8.11.3.1.5(k), and 8.6.1.6.2.
A17.3 — Paragraph 4.9.7.
ITEM 5.7
CAR FRAME AND PLATFORM
5.7.1 Periodic Inspections
Examine the car portion of the car frame accessible
from the pit and determine whether all fastenings,
including those between the car frame and the platform,
are securely in place and that the frame is not distorted.
Examine the buffer strike plates to determine that they
have not been deformed or removed.
Examine the frame and platform members and their
fastenings. Distorted or straightened members, blistered
paint, exuded rust from between members or around
bolts or rivets, and oil bubbles on members may all be
clues to a cracked or fractured member. Where examina-
tion reveals the possibility of a fracture, further investi-
gation should be made as identified in Item 3.18.
Check any platform toe guards and aprons on
entrance sides and determine whether they are securely
fastened to the platform. Check platform balancing
weights and determine whether they are securely fas-
tened. Check the platform guard for secure fastening
and length. If a truck zoning device is provided, the
guard should meet Code requirements for this
application.
If a wood car platform is provided, check the fire
protection of the underside of the car platform for com-
pliance. If a fire-retard ant paint has been used, it should
be in good condition. If the underside is clad with sheet
metal, it must be in place.
5.7.2 Periodic Test
5.7.3 Acceptance
If a wood platform has been painted with fire-
retard ant paint, have the installer furnish data on the
paint to verify Code compliance.
5.7.4 References
5.7.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 203.8, 203.6, 207.2b(3), and 1001.2(e)(9).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.15.8, 2.15.6, 2.16.2.2, and 8.11.2.1.5(1).
A17.3 — Section 3.3.
5.7.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 308; and Rules 301.6, 302.2c, and
1004.2(e)(7).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.28, 3.15, 3.18.2.3, and 8.11.3.1.5(g).
A17.3 — Section 3.3 {para. 4.2.2}.
ITEM 5.8
CAR AND COUNTERWEIGHT SAFETIES AND GUIDING
MEMBERS - INCLUDING ROPED-HYDRAULIC
ELEVATORS INSTALLED UNDER A17.1b-1989 AND
LATER EDITIONS
5.8.1 Periodic Inspections
5.8.1.1 Guide Rails
(a) Steel Guide Rails. Examine the car and counter-
weight guiding members and their fastenings to deter-
mine that they are properly secured, aligned, and
adjusted, and that they are not worn excessively.
Determine that all moving parts of the safety are clean,
lubricated, not corroded, free to operate, and that the
clearance between the guide rail and each rail gripping
face of the safety parts is in compliance with the Code
(see note below).
Check that the rope used to connect the safety to the
governor rope is securely fastened and snugly seated in
the deflection sheaves without any kink or excess slack.
The rope should not be corroded. On drum-operated
safeties check that the safety drum rope is correctly
wound on the drum. Where the safety jaws are con-
nected with tie rods, such rods must be straight and
secure.
If the safety switch is located here, inspect its condi-
tion, position, and fastening. Check to see that a metal
marking plate is securely attached to the safety plank,
readily visible, and legibly and permanently marked
indicating the following:
(1) the maximum tripping speed, in ft/min (m/s),
for which the safety may be used — A17.1-1955 and
later editions
(2) the maximum weight in pounds that the safety
as installed is designed to stop and sustain —
A17.1-1955 and later editions
(3) the type of safety — A17.1-1955 and later
editions
(4) the name or logo /trademark of the manufac-
turer — A17.1-2000 and later editions
(5) the force required to activate the safety or
governor-rope releasing carrier — A17.1a-1997 and later
editions
75
C
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
This marking plate has been required since
A17.1-1955, but A17.3 does not require this marking
plate. Prior to Al 7. 1-1955 the safety was required to
be marked with load and speed date, but no marking
method was specified.
NOTE: A running clearance of %2 in. (2.4 mm) was permitted
for safeties installed under the 1937 and earlier editions of the
Code. A clearance of %4 in. (3.6 mm) is required for elevators
installed under A17. 1-1955 and later editions, with a V]6 in.
(1.6 mm) minimum between either side of the rail and the gripping
face. This facilitates adjusting the governor rope movement
(required to operate the safety mechanism to the point where the
safety jaws exert pressure on the rails) to within the maximum
permitted by Rule 205.11. The closer running clearance, permitted
for the older safeties, may result in wear on the gripping surface
of the jaws which requires careful inspection to detect, and may
necessitate frequent readjustment. A17.3 does not address safety
jaw running clearance but does address the safety rope pullout
that often affects the safety jaw clearance. If sliding guides have
been replaced with roller guides, the safety jaws must not touch the
guide rail when the roller guide is at its fullest extent of movement.
(b) Wood Guide Rails. Make an examination of the fol-
lowing items in addition to the governor- rope system
and guide rails.
(1) From the top of the car, examine all safety
operating parts including levers and linkage to be sure
that all keys and set screws are in place and tight. There
should not be an excessive amount of lost motion in the
transmittal of movement to the finger rods actuating the
safety jaws.
(2) From the pit, with the elevator car platform at
a convenient height, the safety jaws can be readily exam-
ined and applied against the guide rails by pulling the
governor rope. The safety jaws should be brought in
contact with both guide rails in such a manner that any
downward motion of the car would cause the jaw teeth
to dig into the rails.
(3) When a safety operating switch is provided, the
motion of bringing the safety jaws in contact with the
rails must be sufficient to operate the switch.
(4) The distance between the rail gripping surfaces
should not be less than the thickness of the rail plus
\ in. (6.4 mm).
5.8.2 Periodic Test
See Item 2.29.
5.8.2.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Test counterweight
safeties that are operated by breaking or slacking of the
counterweight suspension means by placing an
extended jack and blocking under the counterweight.
Then slowly move the car up allowing the counterweight
to contact the blocking. Then lower the jack, to obtain
slack rope, to operate the safety and verify that the
counterweight safety will stop and hold the counter-
weight, to obtain slack rope to operate the safety. It
will be necessary to jump the slack rope device when
conducting this test to prevent it from operating before
sufficient slack rope is obtained to operate the safety.
After this test the elevator should not operate until both
the safety switch and the slack rope device are manu-
ally reset.
For roped-hydraulic elevators, the car safeties may, in
addition to being activated by the governor, be activated
by the slacking or breaking of the suspension means.
Test as outlined above for counterweight safeties, except
place the jack under the car,
5.8.3 Acceptance
Examine the data on the safety marking plate.
5.8.4 References
5.8.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 203 and Rules 205.11, 1001.2(e)(10),
1001.2b(2)(c), 1002.3a, 1206.1g, and 1202.4a.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.15, 2.17.11, 8.11.2.1.5(j), 8.11.2.1.2,
8.11.2.3.1, 8.6.4.5, and 8.7.2.15.1.
A17.3 — Section 3.5.
5.8.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Sections 205 and 1306; and Rules 301.8,
301.9, 1004.2(e)(10), 1005.2c, and 1005.4.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.17 and 8.2.6; and 3.17.1, 3.17.2,
8.11.3.1.5(j), 8.11.3.2.3, and 8.11.3.4.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 4.9.6 and 4.9.8.
NOTE: Items 5.9 through 5.10 apply to electric elevators only.
ITEM 5.9
BUFFER AND EMERGENCY TERMINAL SPEED
LIMITING DEVICES
5.9.1 Periodic Inspections
5.9.1.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Oil Buffers, Make the following examinations:
(1) Check the bolts holding the buffers and mount-
ing to determine that they are tight.
(2) Check the buffer oil level by the means provided
to determine that it is within the maximum and mini-
mum allowable limits.
(3) Test the plunger for excessive side play.
(4) Verify that the plunger is free of dirt or rust.
(5) Check the buffer marking plate. A17.1-1987 and
later editions require the stroke to be shown on the buffer
marking plate. Check that the maximum and minimum
loads, the maximum striking speed, and the oil viscosity,
index number, and pour point are provided.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions also require that
name, trademark, or file number for identification of
the manufacturer and the certification markings on the
buffer data plate.
do)
76
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
(b) Spring Buffers. Check car and counterweight
spring buffers to determine that
(1) they and their supports are securely fastened
in place.
(2) they are vertical and in alignment with striker
plates on the car or counterweight.
(3) springs are properly seated in the cup or other
mounting provided.
(4) springs have not been deformed, obviously
weakened, or damaged.
(5) the buffer marking plate is in place and contains
all of the required information. A17.1d-1986 and later
editions require the number of springs to be shown on
the buffer marking plate.
(6) removable springs are identified and that the
marking plate indicates the identification.
(c) Solid Bumpers. Check car and counterweight solid
bumpers to determine that
(1) they and their supports are securely fastened
in place
(2) no damage or deterioration exists
(3) they are vertical and in alignment with the
striker plates of the car or counterweight
5.9.2 Periodic Test
5.9.2.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Yearly Tes t of Oil Buffers (for A17.1 d-2000 and Earlier
Editions); Category 1 Test of Oil Buffers (for A17. 1-2000/
B44-00 and Eater Editions). Test the gravity and spring-
re turn- type oil buffers by fully compressing the plunger
and verifying that it will return to a full extended posi-
tion in 90 s. If the buffer cannot be manually depressed,
it will be necessary to place blocking between the car or
counterweight and operating downward at slow speed.
This can be done by suspending a 4 x 4 beneath the
car or counterweight in alignment with the buffer. It is
usually best to operate the car at slow speed from the
car top operator for this test. If the 4x4 cannot be
suspended, it may be held in place with a 1 x 4 attached
to it. This will allow the person holding it to position
themselves in a safe position in case the 4x4 slips off
of the buffer and /or the car continues to move. If possi-
ble, the person should be positioned outside the
hoist way or in an adjacent pit with the adjacent pit car
out of service. Test buffers on Type C safeties in the
same manner.
Then place a 50 lb (23 kg) weight on spring-return-
type oil buffer and depress it 2 in. (51 mm). This can be
done using a small hydraulic jack between the car and
buffer. Release the buffer and verify that it will return
to its fully extended position within 30 s.
Test the compression switch on gas spring- return-type
buffers by compressing the buffer l/2 in. (13 mm) and
using a ohmmeter to determine that the switch opens.
Then move the car up, take one lead off of the switch, and
verify that the car cannot operate with the switch open.
Test the buffer compression switch on Type C safety
buffers by having the buffer compressed 10% of its stroke
and use an ohmmeter to verify that the switch opens.
Then move the car allowing the buffer to return to a
fully extended position. Remove one of the leads from
the switch and attempt to operate the car. The car must
not operate with the lead removed. Restore the lead and
remove one lead from the oil level switch. Again attempt
to operate the car. This should also prevent operation
of the car.
(b) 5-Year Test of Oil Buffers (for A17 .1 d-2000 and Earlier
Editions); Category 5 Test of Oil Buffers (for A17. 1-2000/
B44-00 and Eater Editions)
(1) For car buffers, if the elevator is equipped with
counterweight safeties, tie down the counterweight
safety lift lever with four wraps of No. 16 gage copper
wire or equivalent. This will avoid an accidental setting
of the counterweight safety by inertia. Do not block the
counterweight safety; it must remain workable. Reverse
the procedure for testing the counterweight buffer. Place
the rated load in the car. Jump out the terminal slow
downs and directional switches. The final terminal stop-
ping device must remain operative but temporarily relo-
cated to permit full compression of the buffer. Take the
cars in adjacent hoistways out of service.
(a) Full-Stroke Buffer. Move the car up sufficient
to obtain rated speed and run the car into the buffer.
(b) Reduced Stroke Buffer. Temporarily reduce the
speed of the car to the speed on the buffer marking
plate. Then run the car into the buffer at this speed.
(c) Emergency Terminal Speed Eimiting Device.
Where such a device is provided, determine that it is
operational. Then run the car into the terminal at rated
speed. The device should slow the car down so that the
stop is no more severe than that produced by running
the car into the buffer at the buffer design speed.
(2) After the test
(a) remove any jumpers that were installed
(b) examine the buffer for damage, excess oil loss
and determine that the plunger returns to full extended
position in 90 s
(c) examine the car (including car interior) for
damage
(d) restore the final terminal stopping device to
the proper position and test it as outlined in Item 5.4
(e) remove any tie-down that was wrapped on
the car or counterweight lift lever
(f) have the required test tags installed
(3) For counterweight buffer, remove the rated load
from the car and test the counterweight buffer as out-
lined for car buffers.
NOTE: This test is not required where Type C safeties are used.
However, where Type C safeties are applied, check the buffer por-
tion of Type C safeties to determine that the oil level is within
allowable limits. Also, test the buffer compression switch and the
oil level device for proper functioning.
77
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. X|
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ^s
ASME A17.2-2010
5.9.3 Acceptance
5.9.3.1 Electric Elevators. Compare the data on the
buffer marking plate with the data on the elevator layout
drawings and the actual installed conditions of the ele-
vator and verify that it meets Code requirements, espe-
cially for load rating, stroke, and speed, or number of
springs.
5.9.4 References
(10) 5.9.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Section 201 and Rules 109.1, 210.2(w), 1002.3f,
1003.2e, 1206.1f, and 1308.2.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.22 and 2.6, 2.26.2.22, 8.11.2.3.6,
8.10.2.2.5(c), c8.10.2.2.5(c)(6), 8.6.1.6.3, c8.6.12,2.6, 8.2.3,
and 8.3.1.3.
A17.3 — Section 3.1 and para. 3.10.4(m).
ITEM 5.10
COMPENSATING CHAINS, ROPES,
AND SHEAVES
5.10.1 Periodic Inspections
5.10.1.1 Electric Elevators. Where compensating
ropes or chains are used, determine that
(a) there is sufficient remaining travel of the sheave
frame to maintain tension in the compensating ropes
and to operate the compensating sheave switch. Ropes
should have sufficient tension to remain within the
sheave grooves.
(b) the sheave frame moves freely in the guides while
the car is in motion.
(c) there is no evidence of excessive wear of the
sheave, shaft, or bearings and all parts are lubricated.
(d) the car stops when the switch or switches operated
by the compensating sheave frame are opened. Manu-
ally open these switches while the car is in motion at
lowest operating speed.
(e) the ropes or chains are properly hung and securely
fastened to the underside of car and counterweight (see
Items 3.22, 3.23, 3,28, and 3.34).
(f) inspect the portion of the compensating chains or
ropes and their fastenings that could not be inspected
from the car top. Where chains are used, examine for
wear at mating links.
(g) if a tie-down is provided for holding the compen-
sating-rope sheave during the operation of the safety or
buffer, it should be visually examined for condition and
damage.
(h) check the compensating sheave switch. Check the
compensating rope tie-down, which was required for
speeds exceeding 800 ft/min (4.06 m/s) in A17.1d-1970,
and 700 ft/min (3.56 m/s) in A17.1-1971 to the present.
5.10.2 Periodic Test
5.10.3 Acceptance
5.10.3.1 Electric Elevators. Check the compensating
rope tie-down if the rated speed is greater than
700 ft/min (3.56 m/s).
5.10.4 References
5.10.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions) — Rules 202.4, 205.17, 210.2c, and 1001.2(e)(8).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.21.4, 2.17.17, 2.26.2.3, and 8.11.2.1.5(h).
NOTE: Items 5.11 through 5.14 apply to hydraulic elevators only.
ITEM 5.11
PLUNGER AND CYLINDER
5.11.1 Periodic Inspections
5.11.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Examine the plunger
for pitting, scoring, or corrosion that may cause excess
leakage and create a safety hazard. Check that the means
to collect leakage is in compliance with the Code and
properly maintained.
Examine the plunger fastening to the car frame to
verify that it is secure and adequately fastened to the car.
5.11.2 Periodic Test
5.11.3 Acceptance
5.11.4 References
5.11.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A 1 7. ld-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 302 and Rules 1004.2(e)(3) and
1206.5b.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.18, 8.11.3.1.5(c), 8.6.5.1, 8.6.5.2, 8.6.5.5,
and 8.6.5.6.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 4.3.1 and 4.3.2.
ITEM 5.12
CAR BUFFER
5.12.1 Periodic Inspections
5.12.1.1 Hydraulic Elevators
(a) Spring Buffers. Check car spring buffers to verify
that
(1) they and their supports are securely fastened
in place.
(2) they are vertical and in alignment with striker
plates on the car.
(3) springs are properly seated in the cup or other
mounting provided.
(4) springs have not been deformed, obviously
weakened, or damaged.
(5) the buffer marking plate is in place and contains
all of the required information. A17.1d-1986 and later
(10)
78
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
editions require that the number of springs be indicated
on the marking plate in addition to the other data.
(6) removable springs are identified and that the
marking plate indicates the identification.
(b) Oil Buffers. When they are used refer to Item 5.3
for the required inspection and test.
(c) Solid Bumpers. Prior to the A17.1-1978 edition
solid bumpers were allowed on passenger elevators with
rated speed not exceeding 50 ft/min (0.25 m/s) and
freight elevators with rated speed not exceeding
75 ft/min (0.38 m/s). A17.1-1978 did not allow the use
of solid bumpers (except with Type C safeties).
A17.1a-1982 and later editions allow solid bumpers on
hydraulic elevators that have an operating speed in the
down direction of less than 50 ft/min (0.25 m/s). Check
solid bumpers to verify that
(1) they and their supports are securely fastened
in place
(2) no damage or deterioration exists
(3) they are vertical and in alignment with the
striker plates of the car
(4) removable springs are identified and that the
marking plate indicates the identification
5.12.2 Periodic Test
5.12.3 Acceptance
5.12.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Compare the data on
the buffer marking plate with the data on the elevator
layout drawings and the actual installed conditions of
the elevator and verify that it meets Code requirements,
especially for load rating, stroke, and speed, or number
of springs.
5.12.4 References
5.12.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A 1 7. ld-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 301.3, 306.4, 1004.2(e)(4), 1206.1e,
and 1308.2.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.22.1, 3.26.4, 8.11.3.1.5(d), 8.6.4.4, and
8.2.3.2.
A17.3 — Paragraph 4.2.1.
ITEM 5.13
GUIDING MEMBERS
5.13.1 Periodic Inspections
5.13.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Examine the car guid-
ing members and their fastenings to verify that they are
properly secured, aligned, and adjusted, and that they
are not worn excessively. Examine for wear and proper
lubrication. See also Item 3.18.
5.13.2 Periodic Test
5.13.3 Acceptance
5.13.4 References
5.13.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 308; and Rules 301.1, 1004.2(e)(8),
and 1206.1d.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.28, 3.23, 8.11.3.1.5(h), and 8.6.4.3.
ITEM 5.14
SUPPLY PIPING
5.14.1 Periodic Inspections
5.14.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Inspect supply piping
as described in Item 2.18, giving special attention to
fitting and condition of piping. Piping supports are very
important in pits since the pipe is subject to being
stepped on. This can cause leaks and damage to connec-
tions. If a shutoff valve is in the pit, verify that it is in
good condition and has an adequate pressure rating
since failure of a pit valve could create a very hazardous
condition.
5.14.2 Periodic Test
5.14.3 Acceptance
5.14.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators. Inspect as outlined in
Item 2.35.4.
5.14.4 References
5.14.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Section 208 and Rules 1004.2(e)(9) and
1006.2f.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.24, 8.11.3.1.5(0, and 8.10.3.2.2(r).
A17.3 — Paragraph 4.4.4.
ITEM 5.15
OVERSPEED VALVE
5.15.1 Periodic Inspections
5.15.2 Category 5 Periodic Test
5.15.2.2 Hydraulic Elevators: Category 5 Test for
Al 7.1-2000 and Later Editions. Demonstrate that the
overspeed valve, when supplied, will stop the car run-
ning in the down direction with rated load in accordance
with the written procedure provided by the valve manu-
facturer or the person or firm maintaining the equip-
ment. Verify that the valve is sealed.
5.15.3 Acceptance
5.15.3.2 Hydraulic Elevators
(a) Verify that the overspeed valve, if provided, is
properly marked. Witness the testing of the overspeed
valve to ensure proper operation. For single jack
arrangements, verify that the valve is located in the
pressure piping within 12 in. (300 mm) of the hydraulic
(10)
79
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
jack. If multiple valves are used, verify that they are
located so as to minimize the distance from the valves
to the hydraulic jack. For multiple jack arrangements,
verify that one of the following installations is used.
(1) Verify that an overspeed valve is located in the
pressure piping on the hydraulic machine side of, and
immediately before, the tee junction, wye junction, or
branch junction that connects the branch pressure pipes
to the jacks.
(2) Verify that for dual hydraulic jack systems, the
total length of branch pressure pipe between the tee or
wye junction and the jacks does not exceed the distance
between the jacks, measured horizontally, plus 39 in.
(1 m). In these multiple jack systems, the length of the
branch pressure piping shall be minimized.
(3) If the elevator is equipped with a plunger grip-
per, review its marking plate and verify application for
the application.
(b) Verify that pipe supports are provided near
changes in pipe direction and particularly near valves
and joints. Verify that horizontal spans are supported
at intervals per Table 8.4.11.3.
5.15.4 References
5.15.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d -2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 303.3c(l)(d) (Line Rupture Valve)
and 2410.6 (Safety Valve), and (NR 3.19.4.7.2),
(NR 3.19.4.7.3), [NR 3.19.4.7.5(a)], (NR 3.19.4.7.6),
[NR 8.10.3.2.5(i)] and (NR 8.11.3.4.4).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 3.19.3.3 and 8.4.11.2 and 3.19.4.7.2,
3.19.4.7.3, 3.19.4.7.5(a), 3.19.4.7.6, 8.10.3.2.5(1), and
8.11.3.4.4.
(io) ITEM 5.16
EARTHQUAKE INSPECTION AND TESTS (SEISMIC
RISK ZONE 2 OR GREATER)
5.16.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Verify that rope retainers or rope restraints are in
place on governor tension sheaves located in the pit.
(b) Verify that the snag guards, where required, that
cannot be observed from the top of car, are in place.
(c) Observe the part of the car and counterweight rail
system that cannot be seen from the top of car.
5.16.1.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Verify that all rope retainer guards or rope
restraints are in place on compensating sheaves.
(b) Verify that the means to prevent the tension sheave
assembly, used with compensating ropes, from being
dislocated from its normal operation position is
provided.
5.16.1.2 Hydraulic Elevators
(a) For elevators not equipped with car safeties, verify
that they are equipped with either an overspeed valve
or plunger gripper and that they have been tested and
sealed.
(b) Verify that the pipe supports are in place.
5.16.2 Periodic Test
For seismic risk zones, test the overspeed valve
(Requirement 8.11.3.4.5).
5.16.3 Acceptance
(a) Verify that rope retainers on governor tension
sheaves located in the pit are continuous over not less
than % of the arc of contact between the rope and its
sheave or drum and located so not more than \ of the
arc of contact is exposed. Rope restraints may be used,
and if they are used, there must be one for each 30 deg
or less of arc contact.
(b) Verify that snag guards are provided for snag
points created by rail brackets, rail clip bolts, fishplates,
vanes, and similar devices, where
(1) governor ropes are located 20 in. (500 mm) or
less from a snag point
(2) the loop of traveling cables below the mid-point
of the elevator travel is located 36 in. (915 mm) or less
horizontally from a snag point
(c) Verify that the rail system that cannot be observed
from the top of car is installed per design, recording
bracket spacing.
(d) Verify that the proper information is contained on
the elevator layout drawings.
5.16.3.1 Electric Elevators
(a) Verify that rope retainers on compensating
sheaves are continuous over not less than % of the arc
of contact between the rope and its sheave or drum and
located so not more than V6 of the arc of contact is
exposed. Rope restraints may be used, and if they are
used, there must be one for each 30 deg or less of arc
contact.
(b) Verify that snag guards are provided for snag
points created by rail brackets, rail clip bolts, fishplates,
vanes, and similar devices, where the loop of compensat-
ing chains below the midpoint of the elevator travel is
within 36 in. (915 mm) of a snag point.
5.16.4 References
5.16.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1-1993 through
A17.1d-2000 editions — Rules 2400, 2407, and 2403.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.4.3, 8.4.6, and 8.4.8.
5.16.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1-1993 through
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 2400, 2410.6,
2410.5, 2410.2, and 2410.3.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.4.3, 8.4.11.2, 8.4.11.3, 8.4.11.5, and
8.4.11.7.
80
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Part 6
Elevator — Firefighters* Service
A17.1b-1973 and later editions and A17.3 require ele-
vators to be provided with firefighters' service. This ser-
vice was referred to previously as operation of elevators
under fire or other emergency conditions.
ITEM 6.1
OPERATION OF ELEVATORS UNDER FIRE AND
OTHER EMERGENCY CONDITIONS
(A17.1b»1973 THROUGH Al7.1b-1980)
6.1.1 Periodic Inspections
On all elevators provided with firefighters' service,
check that the monthly operation log is maintained.
6.1.2 Periodic Test: Yearly Test (for A17.1d-2000
and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions)
(a) General
(1) All automatic operating elevators serving three
or more landings or having a travel of 25 ft (7.62 m) or
more are required to return to the main floor, which is
the floor providing egress from the building, or elevators
without a landing at the main floor are required to return
to the landing closest to the main floor or other approved
landing. This is commonly referred to as Phase I
Emergency Recall Operation.
(2) All automatic operating elevators having a
travel of 70 ft (21 .33 m) or more above the lowest grade
elevation surrounding the building are required to have
provisions to allow firefighters or other authorized per-
sonnel to operate the elevator on emergency in-car oper-
ation. This is commonly referred to as Phase II
Emergency In-Car Operation.
(b) Phase I Emergency Recall Operation: Automatic
Elevators
(1) A three-position ("ON/7 "OFF," and "BYPASS")
key-operated switch must be provided at the main floor.
When the main floor three-position key-operated switch
is turned to the "ON" position, all cars must return to
the main floor and park with the doors open. Elevators
without a landing at the main floor must return to the
landing closest to the main floor or other approved
landing.
(2) The key is only permitted to be removable in
the "ON" or ''OFF" position.
NOTE: In order to cause as little inconvenience as possible with
multiple elevator systems, it is suggested that the elevators be put
back in service immediately and one elevator at a time be isolated
for individual testing.
(3) With the main floor key-operated switch in the
"OFF" position and the car at the main floor, register
several calls. With the inspector in the car, allow the car
to run. As the car leaves the floor, have the main floor
key switch turned to the "ON" position. The car must
stop and reverse at or below the next available floor
without opening the door(s) and return to the main floor
where it is required to park with the door(s) open. As
the car descends, operate the emergency stop switch to
see that it has been rendered inoperative. Check that
the car buttons have been rendered inoperative and that
the car will not respond to any car calls. Also, determine
that all call-registered lights and lanterns are extin-
guished and remain inoperative.
(4) With the main floor key-operated switch in the
"OFF" position, run the car to any floor. Then with the
doors open, have the main floor key-operated switch
turned to the "ON" position. Check to see that the door
reopening devices for power-operated doors which are
sensitive to smoke, heat, or flame are rendered inopera-
tive. Check to see that the mechanical safety edge is still
operative. With the doors open, actuate the emergency
stop switch to see that it is operative. The doors may
or may not close but the car must not move.
(5) Return the emergency stop switch to the "RUN"
position. The automatic power-operated doors should
close without delay and the car proceed to the main
floor and park with the doors open.
(6) Check all call buttons to see that they are inoper-
ative and call-registered lights and directional lanterns
are extinguished when the main floor key-operated
switch is in the "ON" position.
(7) Check to see that no stop switches other than
those inside the car (i.e., pit, car top, etc.) and no safety
circuits other than the door reopening devices which
are sensitive to smoke, heat, or flame, as previously
mentioned, are rendered inoperative when the main
floor key-operated switch is in the "ON" position.
(S) With the main floor key-operated switch in the
"OFF" position, activate the sensing device. A sensing
device is required to be located in every elevator lobby
except the main floor lobby, which when activated, will
perform the same functions as previously described
when the main floor key-operated switch is in the "ON"
position. Sensing devices must be of the manually reset-
ting type.
81
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. X^ .
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ^
ASME A17.2-2010
NOTES:
(1) If the sensing system is connected to a central fire alarm system,
notify proper authorities before activating.
(2) Sensing devices can be activated by using a test button if
supplied, or by simulating smoke or heat and smoke condi-
tions. Manufacturer's recommended test procedures should be
followed. Use of chemical smoke may oversensitize smoke
detectors.
(9) With the smoke sensor activated, turn the main
floor key-operated switch to the "BYPASS" position. The
elevator must return to normal service.
(c) Phase I Emergency Recall Operation: Attendant-
Operated Elevators. Elevators operable only by a desig-
nated attendant in the car must be provided with both
visual and audible signals.
(d) Phase I and Phase II Automatic Operating Elevators
With Dual Operation. Elevators arranged for dual opera-
tion must, when on automatic operation, conform to
Items 6.1.2(b) and (e), and when on attendant operation,
conform to Item 6.1.2(c).
(e) Phase II In-Car Emergency Operation. Where Phase
II operation is required, a three-position key-operated
switch must be provided in or adjacent to the operating
panel in each car. A17.1b-1973 through A17.1f-1975
required a three-position ("OFF," "ON," and "BYPASS")
key-operated switch, the third position being used to
bypass the interlocks. A17.1g-1976 removed the require-
ment for "BYPASS" position. The key must be removable
in the "OFF" position only. With Phase I Service acti-
vated, turn the in-car key-operated switch to the "ON"
position.
NOTE: The inspector is cautioned to check the position of the
various key switches relative to the installation date of the elevator
to be tested.
(1) Check that the elevator is operable only by the
car buttons and does not respond to corridor calls.
(2) Check that the doors will not open automati-
cally at any floor except the main floor.
(3) Check that the opening of the door is controlled
by a continuous pressure button or switch and that when
the button or switch is released prior to the door reaching
its fully open position, the door will automatically
reclose.
(4) Check that fully opened doors can be closed
only by registering a car call or by the use of an in-car
door close button or switch.
(5) Check to see that Phase II operation once acti-
vated cannot be deactivated until the car has returned
to the main floor. To do this, with the main floor
key-operated switch in the "ON" position, take the car
to any floor. Then turn the main floor key-operated
switch to the "OFF" position, or if a smoke detector is
activated, to the "BYPASS" position, and make sure the
Phase II operation is maintained until the car is returned
to the main floor.
(6) Turn the main floor key-operated switch to the
"OFF" position or, if a smoke detector is activated, to
the "BYPASS" position. Take the elevator to a floor above
the main floor and turn the in-car key-operated switch
to the "ON" position. Check to see that the Phase II
operation does not operate unless the main floor
key-operated switch is in the "ON" position or a smoke
detector has been activated.
(f) Multideck Elevators. Multideck elevators should be
inpsected as outlined in Items 6.1.2(b) through (e) as
well as the following:
(1) The main floor key-operated switch for Phase I
operation may be at either of the main floors.
(2) The in-car key-operated switch for Phase II
operation must be located in the top deck. Check the
operation of the in-car key-operated switch. The lower
deck must be rendered out of service before the Phase II
can be effective. Means for placing lower deck out of
service must be located in that deck or adjacent to the
entrance in the corridor.
(g) Operating Instructions and Keys
(1) Operating instructions for Phase I and Phase II
service must be posted adjacent to the main floor
key-operated switch. Instructions must be in letters not
less than V4 in. (6.4 mm) in height, be permanently
installed, and protected against removal and
defacement.
(2) All switches must be keyed alike for Phase I
and Phase II operation and not be a part of building
master key system. Keys must be kept on premises for
the main floor switch plus a key for each in-car
key-operated switch in a location readily accessible to
authorized persons but not readily available to the
public.
6.1.3 Acceptance
6.1.4 References
6.1.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1b-1973 through
A17.1b-1980 — Rule 211.3.
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 112.3d,
112.5, 1001.2(d)(12), 1002.2f, and 1206.7.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13.3.4, 2.13.5, 8.11.2.1.4(1), 8.11.2.2.6, and
8.6.10.1.
6.1.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1b-1973 through
A17.1b-1980 — Rule 211.3.
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 112.3d and
112.5 (306.11); and 1001.2(d)(12), 1002.2f, 1004.2(d)(12),
and 1206.7.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13.3.4 and 2.13.5 {3.27}; and 8.11.2.1.4(1),
8.11.2.2.6, [NR 1004.2(d)(12)], and 8.6.10.1.
82
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
ITEM 6.2
OPERATION OF ELEVATORS UNDER FIRE AND
OTHER EMERGENCY CONDITIONS (A17.1-1981
THROUGH A17.1b-1983)
6.2.1 Periodic Inspections
On all elevators provided with firefighters' service,
check that the monthly operation log is maintained.
6.2.2 Periodic Test: Yearly Test (for A17.1d-2000
and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions)
(a) General
(1) All automatic operating elevators serving three
or more landings or having a travel of 25 ft (7.62 m) or
more will return to the main floor, which is the floor
providing egress from the building, or elevators without
a landing at the main floor must return to the landing
closest to the main floor or other approved landing. This
is commonly referred to as Phase I Emergency Recall
Operation.
(2) All automatic operating elevators having
Phase I must have provisions to allow firefighters or
other authorized personnel to operate the elevator on
emergency in-car operation. This is commonly referred
to as Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation.
(b) Phase I Emergency Recall Operation: Automatic
Elevators
(1) A three-position ("ON," "OFF/' and "BYPASS")
key-operated switch must be provided at the designated
level. When the designated level three-position
key-operated switch is turned to the "ON" position, all
cars are required to return nonstop to the designated
level and park with the doors open.
(2) The keys are only permitted to be removable in
the "ON" and "OFF" positions.
NOTE: In order to cause as little inconvenience as possible with
multiple elevator systems, it is suggested that the elevators be put
back in service immediately and one elevator at a time be isolated
for individual testing.
(3) With the designated level key-operated switch
in the "OFF" position and the car at the main floor,
register several calls. With the inspector in the car, allow
the car to run. As the car leaves the floor, have the
designated level key-operated switch turned to the
"ON" position. The car should stop and reverse at or
below the next available floor without opening the
door(s) and return to the designated level and park
with the door(s) open. As the car descends, operate the
emergency stop switch to see that it has been rendered
inoperative. Check that the car buttons have been ren-
dered inoperative and that the car will not respond to
any car calls. Also, determine that all call-registered
lights and in-car lanterns are extinguished and remain
inoperative.
(4) With the main floor key-operated switch in the
"OFF" position, run the car to any floor. Then with the
doors open, have the main floor key-operated switch
turned to the "ON" position. Check to see that the door
reopening devices for power-operated doors that are
sensitive to smoke, heat, or flame are rendered inopera-
tive. Check to see that the mechanical safety edge and
door operating buttons are still operative. With the doors
open, actuate the emergency stop switch to see that it
is operative. The doors may or may not close but the
car must not move.
(5) Return the emergency stop switch to the "RUN"
position. The automatic power-operated doors must
close without delay and the car proceed to the main
floor and park with the doors open. If the elevator is
equipped with vertically sliding doors with automatic
or momentary pressure closing, the closing sequence
should initiate and the car proceed to the designated
level. If the elevator is equipped with manual doors or
power-operated continuous pressure closing, the visual
and audible signals should operate and when the doors
close, the car should return to the designated level.
(6) Check all call buttons to see that they are inoper-
ative and call-registered lights and directional lanterns
are extinguished when the designated level
key-operated switch is in the "ON" position.
(7) Check to see that no stop switches other than
those inside the car (i.e., pit, car top, etc.) and no safety
circuits other than the door reopening devices that are
sensitive to smoke, heat, or flame, as previously men-
tioned, are rendered inoperative when the main floor
key-operated switch is in the "ON" position.
(8) Check that the visual and audible signal device
is activated.
(9) With the main floor key-operated switch in the
"OFF" position, activate the smoke detector. A smoke
detector is required to be located in every elevator lobby
including designated level, and associated machine
room, which, when activated, performs the same func-
tions as previously described when the designated level
key-operated switch is in the "ON" position. If the
smoke detector at the designated level is activated, the
elevators must return to an alternate level designated
by the enforcing authority. Smoke detectors must not
be self-resetting.
NOTES:
(1) If the sensing system is connected to a central fire alarm system,
notify proper authorities before activating.
(2) Smoke detectors can be activated by using a test button if
supplied, or by simulating smoke conditions. Manufacturer's
recommended test procedures should be followed. Use of
chemical smoke may oversensitize smoke detectors.
(10) With the smoke sensor activated, turn the des-
ignated level key-operated switch to the "BYPASS" posi-
tion. The elevator must return to normal service.
83
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(11) Check to see that there are no other devices
other than the Phase I switch(es) or smoke detectors in
the elevator lobbies, machine room, or hoistway that
could initiate Phase I operation.
(c) Phase I Emergency Recall Operation: Attendant. Ele-
vators operable only by a designated attendant in the car
must be provided with both visual and audible signals.
(d) Phase I and Phase II Automatic Operating Elevators
With Dual Operation. Elevators arranged for dual opera-
tion must when on automatic operation, conform to
Items 6.2.2(b) and (e), and when on attendant operation,
conform to Item 6.2.2(c).
(e) Phase II In-Car Emergency Operation. Phase II oper-
ation requires that a two-position ("OFF/' "ON")
key-operated switch be provided in or adjacent to the
operating panel in each car. The key must be removable
in the "OFF" position only. With Phase I service activated
and after the car has returned to the designated or alter-
nate level, turn the in-car key-operated switch to the
"ON" position.
(1) Check that the elevator is operable only by the
car buttons and does not respond to corridor calls.
(2) Check that all corridor call buttons and direc-
tional lanterns are inoperative.
(3) Check that the opening of the door is controlled
by a continuous pressure button or switch and that when
the button or switch is released prior to the door reaching
its fully open position, the door will automatically
reclose.
(4) Check that fully opened doors can be closed
only by registering a car call or by the use of an in-car
door close button or switch.
(5) Check to see that door reopening devices sensi-
tive to smoke or flame are inoperative.
(6) Check to see that means provided to cancel car
calls is operative by registering calls and cancelling
them.
(7) Check to see that Phase II operation once acti-
vated cannot be deactivated until the car has returned
to the designated or alternate level. To do this, with
the designated level key-operated switch in the "ON"
position and the in-car key-operated switch in the "ON"
position, take the car to any floor except the designated
floor. Then turn the designated level key-operated
switch to the "OFF" position, or if a smoke detector is
activated, to the "BYPASS" position, and make sure the
Phase II operation is maintained until the car is returned
to the designated or alternate level.
(8) Turn the designated level key-operated switch
to the "OFF" position or, if a smoke detector is activated,
to the "BYPASS" position. Take the elevator to a floor
other than the designated level and turn the in-car
key-operated switch to the "ON" position. Check to see
that the Phase II operation does not operate even if the
designated key-operated switch is turned to the "ON"
position or a smoke detector has been activated.
(f) Multideck Elevators. Multideck elevators should be
inspected as outlined in Items 6.2.2(b) through (e) as
well as the following:
(1) The designated level key-operated switch for
Phase I operation must be at the designated level served
by the upper compartment.
(2) The in-car key-operated switch for Phase II
operation must be located in the upper compartment.
Check the operation of the in-car key-operated switch
in accordance with Item 6.2.2(e).
(3) Check to see that means is provided for locking
the lower deck out of service.
(g) Operating Instructions and Keys
(1) Operating instructions for Phase I service must
be posted adjacent to the designated level key-operated
switch. Instructions should be in letters not less than
\ in. (3.2 mm) in height, be permanently installed, and
protected against removal and defacement.
(2) All switches must be keyed alike for Phase I
and Phase II operation and shall not be a part of building
master key system. Keys should be kept on premises
for the main floor switch plus a key for each in-car
key-operated switch in a location readily accessible to
authorized persons but not readily available to the
public.
(h) Inspection Operation. Place the car on inspection
operation and operate from top of car. Check that an
audible signal sounds and that the elevator remains
under control of the top-of-car operating device when
the Phase I key switch is in the "ON" position or a
smoke detector is actuated.
(i) Firefighters' Service When on Standby (Emergency
Power). Elevators installed under A17.1b-1983 and later
editions are required to have a manual selection switch
to override an automatic sequencing of standby power.
With the elevator at an upper floor, switch the power
to the elevators to standby power and place the Phase I
key-operated switch in the "ON" position. Activate the
manual selection switch to select a car other than that
selected by the automatic sequencing. If the manual
selection switch is key operated, it must use the same
key as the firefighters' service key.
6.2.3 Acceptance
6.2.4 References
6.2.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1-1981 through
A17.1b~1983 — Rule 211.3.
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 112.3d,
112.5, 1001.2(d)(12), 1002.2f, and 1206.7.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13.3.4, 2.13.5, 8.11.2.1.4(1), 8.11.2.2.6, and
8.6.10.1.
6.2.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions— Rules 112.3d, 112.5, 1001.2(d)(12), 1002.2f,
and 1206.7.
C
84
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME,
ASME A17.2-2010
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13.3.4, 2.13.5, 8.11.2.1.4(1), 8.11.2.2.6, and
8.6.10.1.
ITEM 6.3
FIREFIGHTERS* SERVICE
(A17.1-1984 THROUGH A17.1a-1988 and A17.3)
6.3.1 Periodic Inspections
On all elevators provided with firefighters' service,
check that the monthly operation log is maintained.
6.3.2 Periodic Test: Yearly Test (for A17.1d-2000
and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions)
Elevators required to comply with A17.3 must comply
with A17.1-1987 or later editions.
(a) General All elevators that have a travel of 25 ft
(7.62 m) or more above or below the designated level
(see definition) are required to conform to Rules 211.3
through 211.8.
(b) Phase I Emergency Recall Operation: Automatic
Elevators
(1) A three-position ("ON/7 "OFF/7 and "BYPASS")
key-operated switch must be provided at the designated
level. When the designated level key-operated switch
is turned to the "ON" position, all cars must return to
the designated level and park with the doors open.
(2) The keys are only permitted to be removable in
the "ON" or "OFF" position.
NOTE: In order to cause as little inconvenience as possible with
multiple elevator systems, it is suggested that the elevators be put
back in service immediately, and one elevator at a time be isolated
for individual testing.
(3) With the designated level key-operated switch
in the "OFF" position and the car at the designated level,
register several calls. With the inspector in the car, allow
the car to run. As the car leaves the floor, have someone
turn the designated level key-operated switch to the
"ON" position. The car should stop and reverse at or
below the next available floor without opening the
doors(s) and return to the designated level where it
should park with the door(s) open. As the car descends,
operate the emergency stop switch to see that it has
been rendered inoperative. Check that the car buttons
have been rendered inoperative and that the car will
not respond to any car calls. Also, determine that all
call-registered lights and in-car lanterns are extin-
guished and remain inoperative.
(4) With the designated level key-operated switch
in the "OFF" position, run the car to any floor. Then with
the doors open, have the designated level key-operated
switch turned to the "ON" position. Check to see that
the door reopening devices for power-operated doors,
which are sensitive to smoke or flame, are rendered
inoperative. Check to see that the mechanical safety edge
and "DOOR OPEN" buttons are still operative and that
door closing conforms to Rule 112.5. With the doors
open, actuate the emergency stop switch to see that it
is operative. The doors may or may not close but the
car must not move.
(5) Return the emergency stop switch to the "RUN"
position. The automatic power-operated doors should
close without delay and the car proceed to the desig-
nated level and park with the doors open. If the elevator
is equipped with vertically sliding doors with automatic
or momentary pressure closing, the closing sequence
should initiate and the car proceed to the designated
level. If the elevator is equipped with manual doors or
power-operated continuous pressure closing, the visual
and audible signals required by Rule 211.3a(7) must
operate and when the doors are closed, the car should
return to the designated level.
(6) Check all call buttons to see that they are inoper-
ative and call-registered lights and directional lanterns
are extinguished when the designated level
key-operated switch is in the "ON" position.
(7) Check to see that no stop switches other than
emergency stop switch inside the car (i.e., pit, car top,
etc.) and no safety circuits other than the door reopening
devices, which are sensitive to smoke or flame, as pre-
viously mentioned, are rendered inoperative when the
designated level key-operated switch is in the "ON"
position.
(8) Check that the visual and audible signal device
is activated.
(9) With the designated level key-operated switch
in the "OFF" position, activate the smoke detector. A
smoke detector must be located in every elevator lobby,
including designated level and associated machine
room, which, when activated, performs the same func-
tions as previously described when the designated level
key-operated switch is in the "ON" position. If the
smoke detector at the designated level is activated, the
elevator should return to an alternate level designated
by the enforcing authorities unless the Phase I switch
is activated. Smoke detectors must not be self-resetting.
NOTES:
(1) If the sensing system is connected to a central fire alarm system,
notify proper authorities before activating.
(2) See Rule 211.3b for locations when sensing devices are not
required. Smoke detectors can be activated by using a test
button if supplied, or by simulating smoke conditions. Manu-
facturer's recommended test procedures should be followed.
Use of chemical smoke may oversensitize smoke detectors.
(10) With the smoke detector activated, turn the
designated level key-operated switch to the "BYPASS"
position. The elevator must return to normal service.
(c) Phase I Emergency Recall Operation: Attendant-
Operated Elevators. Elevators operable only by a desig-
nated attendant in the car must be provided with both
visual and audible signals.
85
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(d) Phase I and Phase II Automatic Operating Elevators
With Dual Operation. Elevators arranged for dual opera-
tion, except hospital service, must, when on automatic
operation, conform to Items 6.3.2(b) and (e), and when
on attendant operation, conform to Item 6.3.2(c). The
elevator must revert to automatic operation not less than
15 s nor more than 60 s after Phase I activation.
(e) Phase II In-Car Emergency Operation: Automatic
Elevators. Phase II operation requires that a three-
position key-operated switch must be provided in or
adjacent to the operating panel in each car. The key must
be removable in the "OFF," "HOLD," or "ON" positions.
With Phase I service activated and after the car has
returned to the designated or alternate level, turn the
in-car operated switch to the "ON" position.
(1) Check that the elevator is operable only by the
car buttons and does not respond to corridor calls.
(2) Check that all corridor call buttons and direc-
tional lanterns are inoperative.
(3) Check that the opening of the door is controlled
by a continuous pressure button or switch and that when
the button or switch is released prior to the door reaching
its fully open position, the door will automatically
reclose.
(4) Check that fully opened doors can be closed
only by continuous pressure on a door close button.
(5) Check to see that the door reopening devices
sensitive to smoke or flame are inoperative.
(6) Check that the means provided to cancel car
calls is operative by registering calls and cancelling
them. All elevators installed under A17.1a-1985 or later
editions require a separate car "CALL CANCEL" button.
(7) Check to see that Phase II operation once acti-
vated cannot be deactivated until the car has returned
to the designated or alternate level. To do this, with
the designated level key-operated switch in the "ON"
position, and the in-car key-operated switch in the "ON"
position, take the car to any floor except the designated
floor. Then turn the designated level key-operated
switch to the "OFF" position, or if a smoke detector is
activated, to the "BYPASS" position, and make sure the
Phase II operation is maintained until the car is returned
to the designated or alternate level.
(8) Turn the designated level key-operated switch
to the "OFF" position or, if a smoke detector is activated,
to the "BYPASS" position. Take the elevator to a floor
other than the designated level and turn the in-car
key-operated switch to the "ON" position. Check to see
that the Phase II operation does not operate even if the
designated level key-operated switch is turned to the
"ON" position or a smoke detector has been activated.
(9) Take the car to an upper floor and with the door
closed, turn the in-car key-operated switch to the "OFF"
and "HOLD" position. It should have no effect on the
Phase II operation.
(10) Take the car to an upper floor and with the
doors open, place the in-car key-operated switch in the
"HOLD" position. The car should remain at the floor
and the door close button should be inoperative. Take
the car to an upper floor, and with the doors open, place
the in-car key-operated switch in the "OFF" position.
The car should respond as specified in Item 6.3.2(e)(7)
and return nonstop to the designated level.
(f) Multideck Elevators. Multideck elevators should be
inspected as outlined in Items 6.3.2(b) through (e) in
addition to the following:
(1) The designated level key-operated switch for
Phase I operation should be at the designated level
served by the upper compartment.
(2) The in-car key-operated switch for Phase II
operation must be located in the upper compartment.
Check the operation of the in-car key-operated switch
in accordance with Item 6.3.2(e).
(3) Check to see that means is provided for locking
the lower deck out of service.
(g) Operating Instructions and Keys
(1) Operating instructions for Phase I service
should be posted adjacent to the designated level
key-operated switch. Instructions for operating under
Phase II operation should be incorporated with or adja-
cent to the in-car key-operated switch. Instructions
should be in letters not less than \ in. (3,2 mm) in height,
be permanently installed, and protected against removal
and defacement.
(2) All switches should be keyed alike for Phase I
and Phase II operation and not be a part of building
master key system. Keys should be kept on premises
for the designated level switch plus a key for each in-
car key-operated switch in a location readily accessible
to authorized persons but not readily available to the
public.
(h) Inspection Operation. Place the car on inspection
operation and operate from top of car. Check that an
audible signal sounds and that the elevator remains
under control of the top-of-car operating device when
the Phase I key switch is in the "ON" position or a
smoke detector is actuated.
(i) Firefighters' Service When on Standby (Emergency
Power). Elevators are required to have a manual selec-
tion switch to override an automatic sequencing of
standby power. With the elevator at an upper floor,
switch the power to the elevators to standby power
and place the Phase I key-operated switch in the "ON"
position. Activate the manual selection switch to select
a car other than that selected by the automatic sequenc-
ing. If the manual selection switch is key operated, it
must use the same key as the firefighters' service key.
6.3.3 Acceptance
6.3.4 References
6.3.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1-1984 through
A17.1a-1988/ Rules 211.3 through 211.8.
86
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 112.3d,
112.5, 1001.2(d)(12)/ 1002.2f, and 1206.7.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13.3.4, 2.13.5, 8.11.2.1.4(1), 8.11.2.2.6, and
8.6.10.1.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.11.3.
6.3.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1-1984 through
A17.1a-1988 — Rules 211.3 through 211.8.
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 112.3d,
112.5, 1001.2(d)(12)/ 1002.2f, and 1206.7.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13.3.4, 2.13.5, 8.11.2.1.4(1), 8.11.2.2.6, and
8.6.10.1.
A17.3 — Paragraph 3.11.3.
ITEM 6.4
FIREFIGHTERS* SERVICE
(A17.1b-1989 THROUGH A17.1d-2000)
6.4.1 Periodic Inspections
Check that the monthly operation log is maintained.
6.4.2 Periodic Test: Yearly Test (for A17.1d-2000
and Earlier Editions); Category 1 Test (for
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and Later Editions)
(a) General All elevators that have a travel of 25 ft
(7.62 m) or more are required to conform to Rules 211.3
through 211.8.
(b) Phase I Emergency Recall Operation: Automatic
Elevators. A three-position ("ON," "OFF," and
"BYPASS") key-operated switch should be located in
the elevator lobby in site of the elevator. It should not
be behind a locked door or cover. An additional two-
position "OFF" and "ON" key-operated switch may be
provided at any location.
(1) When the designated level three-position key-
operated switch is turned to the "ON" position, all cars
should return to the designated level and park with the
doors open. For elevators installed under A17. 1-1993
and later editions with two entrances at the designated
level, verify that the entrance to the lobby with the
Phase I key-switch opens.
(2) The key is only permitted to be removable in
the "ON" or "OFF" position.
NOTE: In order to cause as little inconvenience as possible with
multiple elevator systems, it is suggested that the elevators be put
back in service immediately and one elevator at a time be isolated
for individual testing.
(3) With the designated level key-operated switch
in the "OFF" position and the car at the designated level,
register several calls. With the inspector in the car, allow
the car to run. As the car leaves the floor, turn the desig-
nated level key-operated switch to the "ON" position.
The car should stop and reverse at or below the next
available floor without opening the door(s) and return
to the designated level where it should park with the
door(s) open. As the car descends, operate the in-car
stop switch or emergency stop switch to see that it has
been rendered inoperative. Check that the car buttons
have been rendered inoperative and that the car will
not respond to any car calls. Also, determine that all
call-registered lights and in-car lanterns are extin-
guished and remain inoperative.
(4) With the designated level key-operated switch
in the "OFF" position, run the car to any floor. Then with
the doors open, have the designated level key-operated
switch turned to the "ON" position.
Check to see that the door reopening devices for
power-operated doors, which are sensitive to smoke or
flame, are rendered inoperative. Check to see that the
mechanical safety edge and "DOOR OPEN" buttons
are still operative and that door closing conforms to
Rule 112.5. With the doors open, actuate the emergency
stop switch to see that it is operative. The doors may
or may not close but the car must not move.
(5) Return the emergency stop switch to the "RUN"
position. The automatic power-operated doors must
close without delay and the car should proceed to the
designated level and park with the doors open. If the
elevator is equipped with vertically sliding doors with
automatic or momentary pressure closing, the closing
sequence should initiate and the car proceed to the des-
ignated level. If the elevator is equipped with manual
doors or power-operated continuous pressure closing,
the visual and audible signals required by
Rule 211.3a(4)(c) should operate and when the doors
are closed, the car return to the designated level.
(6) Check all call buttons to see that they are inoper-
ative and call-registered lights and directional lanterns
are extinguished when the designated level
key-operated switch is in the "ON" position. Position
indicators, where provided, must remain in service.
(7) Check to see that no emergency stop switches
other than those inside the car (i.e., pit, car top, etc.) and
no safety circuits other than the door reopening devices,
which are sensitive to smoke or flame, as previously
mentioned, are rendered inoperative when the desig-
nated level key-operated switch is in the "ON" position.
(8) Check installations with vertical slide doors that
corridor "DOOR OPEN" and "DOOR CLOSE" buttons
remain operative.
(9) Check that the visual and audible signal device
is activated. For elevators installed under A17. 1-1990,
verify that the visual signal graphic is as shown in
Fig. 6.4.2(b)(9).
(10) With the designated level key-operated switch
in the "OFF" position, activate the smoke detector. A
smoke detector should be located in every elevator
lobby, including designated level and associated
machine room, which, when activated, performs the
87
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 6.4.2(b)(9) Visual Signal
oc
^»
^s
K
/
mr
s
h
/
\
\
s
I
J
V
c
,,***
—
'V
^
^s
_»■
1 in.
(25 mm)
min.
■ 1 in. (25 mm) min.
same functions as previously described when the desig-
nated level key-operated switch is in the "ON" position.
If the smoke detector at the designated level is activated,
the elevator should return to an alternate level desig-
nated by the enforcing authorities. Smoke detectors may
be installed in any hoistway and must be installed in
hoistways that are sprinklered. For elevators installed
under A17.1-1993 and later editions, activate any smoke
detectors in the hoistway at or below the lowest landing
of recall Check the elevator returns to the upper recall
level. No smoke detectors, other than those referenced,
or other devices are permitted to activate automatic
Phase I recall. Smoke detectors must not be self-resetting.
NOTES:
(1) If the sensing system is connected to a central fire alarm system,
notify proper authorities before activating.
(2) See Rule 211.3b for locations when sensing devices are not
required. Smoke detectors can be activated by using a test
button if supplied, or by simulating smoke conditions. Manu-
facturer's recommended test procedures should be followed.
Use of chemical smoke may oversensitize smoke detectors.
(11) With the smoke detector activated, turn the
designated level key-operated switch to the "BYPASS"
position. The elevator must return to normal service.
With the designated level smoke detector activated and
the designated level key-operated switch in the ''OFF"
position, turn the additional Phase I switch, if provided,
to the "ON" position. The car must remain at the alter-
nate level.
(12) If the car is provided with an in-car "DOOR
OPEN" button, take the car to an upper floor. With
the door open, have the designated level key-operated
switch turned to the "ON" position. The in-car "DOOR
OPEN" button should remain operative until the car
moves away from the landing.
(13) Turn the additional two-position Phase I
switch, if provided, to the "ON" position; turn the three-
position Phase I switch to the "BYPASS" position. The
elevator must remain on Phase I and not return to normal
service.
(c) Phase I Emergency Recall Operation: Attendant-
Operated Elevators. Elevators operable only by a desig-
nated attendant in the car must be provided with both
visual and audible signals.
(d) Phase I and Phase II Automatic Operating Elevators
With Dual Operation. Elevators arranged for dual opera-
tion must, when on automatic operation, conform to
Items 6.4.2(b) and (e), and when on attendant operation,
conform to Item 6.4.2(c). The elevator must revert to
automatic operation not less than 15 s nor more than
60 s after Phase I activation.
(e) Phase II In-Car Emergency Operation: Automatic
Elevators. Phase II operation requires that a
three-position key-operated switch ("OFF," "HOLD,"
and "ON," in that order) be provided in the operating
panel in each car. The key should be removable in the
"OFF," "HOLD," or "ON" position. With Phase I service
activated and after the car has returned to the designated
or alternate level, turn the in-car key-operated switch
to the "ON" position.
(1) Check that the elevator is operable only by the
car buttons and does not respond to corridor calls.
(2) Check that all corridor call buttons and direc-
tional lanterns are inoperative.
(3) Check that the opening of the door is controlled
by a continuous pressure button and that when the but-
ton is released prior to the door reaching its fully open
position, the door will automatically reclose. On cars
with two entrances, if both entrances can be opened at
the same landing, separate "DOOR OPEN" and "DOOR
CLOSE" buttons must be provided for each entrance.
(4) Check that automatic car doors or gates, oppo-
site manual hoistway doors, operate as specified in
Item 6.4.2(e)(3).
(5) Check to see that the door reopening devices
are inoperative.
(6) Check that corridor door open and close but-
tons, if provided, are inoperative.
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(7) Check that the means provided in the car
operating panel to cancel car calls is operative by regis-
tering calls and cancelling them. A traveling car should
stop at or before the next available landing.
(8) Check that floor selection buttons are provided
in the car to permit travel to all landings serviced by
the car. These buttons must be operational, by passing
all security during Phase II operation.
(9) With the car on Phase II operation, register two
or more car calls and proceed to close the door. The car
should proceed to the next available landing for the
registered call. Once the car stops at that landing, all
registered calls must be cancelled.
(10) Check to see that Phase II operation once acti-
vated cannot be deactivated until the car has returned
to the designated or alternate level. To do this, with
the designated level key-operated switch in the "ON"
position, and the in-car key-operated switch in the "ON"
position, take the car to any floor except the designated
floor. Then turn the designated level key-operated
switch to the "OFF" position, or if a smoke detector is
activated, to the "BYPASS" position, and make sure the
Phase II operation is maintained until the car is returned
to the designated level.
(11) Turn the designated level key-operated switch
to the "OFF" position or, if a smoke detector is activated,
to the "BYPASS" position. Take the elevator to a floor
other than the designated level and turn the in-car key-
operated switch to the "ON" position. Check to see
that the Phase II operation does not operate even if the
designated level key-operated switch is turned to the
"ON" position or a smoke detector has been activated.
(12) Take the car to an upper floor and with the
door closed, turn the in-car key-operated switch to the
"OFF" and "HOLD" position. It should have no effect
on the Phase II operation,
(13) With the Phase I key-operated switch in the
"ON" position, take the car to an upper floor and, with
the doors open, place the in-car key-operated switch in
the "HOLD" position. The car should remain at the floor.
(14) Take the car to an upper floor, and, with the
doors open, place the in-car key-operated switch in the
"OFF" position. Upon completion of the door closing
the car should revert to Phase I operation and return
nonstop to the designated or alternate level. For eleva-
tors installed under A17. 1-1993 and later editions
(a) check that the door reopening device is
inoperative.
(b) check that in-car "DOOR OPEN" and "DOOR
CLOSE" buttons remain operative regardless of the type
of doors. For vertically sliding doors, the corridor
"DOOR OPEN" and "DOOR CLOSE" buttons are
operative.
(c) check that the door reopens when in-car
key-operated switch is placed in the "ON" or "HOLD"
position before door closes completely.
Fig. 6.4.2(g)(1) Phase I Instructions
FIREFIGHTERS' OPERATION
To recall elevators
Insert fire key and turn to "ON"
(f) Multideck Elevators. Multideck elevators should be
inspected as outlined in Items 6.4.2(b) through (e) in
addition to the following:
(1) The designated level key-operated switch for
Phase I operation should be at the designated level
served by the upper compartment.
(2) The in-car key-operated switch for Phase II
operation must be located in the upper compartment.
Check the operation of the in-car key-operated switch
in accordance with Item 6.4.2(e).
(3) Check to see that means is provided for locking
the lower deck out of service.
(g) Operating Instructions and Keys
(1) Operating instructions for Phase I service
should be posted adjacent to the designated level key-
operated switch. Instructions for operating under
Phase II operation should be incorporated with or adja-
cent to the in-car key-operated switch. Instructions
should be in letters not less than % in. (3,2 mm) in height,
permanently installed, and protected against removal
and defacement. The instructions must be exactly as
shown in Figs. 6.4.2(g)(1) and 6.4.2(g)(2) or 6.4.2(g)(3).
All switches must be keyed alike for Phase I and
Phase II operation and not be a part of building master
key system. For elevators installed under A17.1b-1992
and later editions, check that all elevators in the building
are keyed alike. Keys should be kept on premises for
the designated level key-operated switch plus a key for
each in-car key-operated switch in a location readily
accessible to authorized persons but not readily available
to the public.
(h) Inspection Operation. Place the car on inspection
operation and operate from top of car. Check that an
audible signal sounds and that the elevator remains
under control of the top-of-car operating device when
the Phase I key-operated switch is in the "ON" position
or a smoke detector is actuated.
(i) Interruption of Power. Place the car on Phase II and
go to a floor other than the designated or alternate level.
Open the main line switch, then close the main line
switch. The elevator should remain on Phase II
operation.
(j) Firefighters' Service When on Standby (Emergency)
Power. Elevators are required to have a manual selection
switch to override an automatic sequencing of standby
89
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(10)
Fig. 6.4.2(g)(2) Phase II Instructions (A17.1b-1989 Through A17.1b-1995)
FIREFIGHTERS' OPERATION
To operate car
Insert fire key and turn to "ON"
Press desired floor button
To cancel
floor selection
Press "CALL CANCEL" button
To close door
Press and hold "DOOR CLOSE" button
To open door
Press and hold "DOOR OPEN" button
To hold car
at floor
With doors open, turn key to "HOLD"
To return car
to recall floor
With doors open, turn key to "OFF"
Fig. 6.4.2(g)(3) Phase II Instructions (A17.1-1996 Through A17.1d-2000)
FIREFIGHTERS' OPERATION
cCk
When flashing, exit elevator
To operate car
Insert fire key and turn to "ON'*
Press desired floor button
To cancel
floor selection
Press "CALL CANCEL" button
To close power-
operated door
Press and hold "DOOR CLOSE" button
To open power-
operated door
Press and hold "DOOR OPEN" button
To hold car
at floor
With doors open, turn key to "HOLD"
To automatically send
car to recall floor
With doors open, turn key to "OFF"
90
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. &
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ^^
ASMEA17.2-2010
power. With the elevator at an upper floor, switch the
power to the elevators to standby power and place the
Phase I key-operated switch in the "ON" position. Acti-
vate the manual selection switch to select a car other
than that selected by the automatic sequencing. Check
that power will be transferred to the manually selected
car only after the automatically selected car has stopped,
normally after Phase I recall has been completed. If the
manual selection switch is key operated, it must use the
same key as the firefighters' service key.
6.4.3 Acceptance
6.4.4 References
6.4.4.1 Electric Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and earlier
editions — Rules 112.3d, 112.5, 211.2 through 211.8,
1001.2(d)(12), 1002.2f, and 1206.7.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13.3.4, 2.13.5, 2.27.2 through 2.27.8,
8.11.2.1.4(1), 8.11.2.2.6, and 8.6.10.1.
6.4.4.2 Hydraulic Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and ear-
lier editions — Rules 112.3d, 112.5, 211.2 through 211.8
{306.11}, 1001.2(d)(12), 1002.2f, and 1206.7.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.13.3.4, 2.13.5, 2.27.2 through 2.27.8 (3.27),
8.11.2.1.4(1), 8.11.2.2.6, and 8.6.10.1.
ITEM 6.5
ACCEPTANCE CHECKLIST FOR FIREFIGHTERS'
SERVICE (ASME A17.1-2000 and CSA B44-00):
AUTOMATIC ELEVATORS
NOTE: The acceptance checklist is more detailed than the ''rou-
tine inspection" checklist. The routine inspection will confirm that
the operation has been maintained in working order. See Nonman-
datory Appendix B for the acceptance checklist.
6.5.1 Emergency Signaling Devices
6.5.1.1 "ALARM" must sound and illuminate
when pressed. If rise is over 100 ft (30 m), a second
device is required.
6.5.1.2 In-car emergency stop button (if present)
must sound alarm.
6.5.1.3 If rise is more than 60 ft (18 m), check for
two-way communication between cab and point outside
hoist way.
6.5.1.4 Ensure that audible alarms and communi-
cations are functional with loss of normal power.
6.5.1.5 Check for means to communicate with
machine room when required by A17.1, requirement
2.26.1.5.10(c).
6.5.2 Phase I Key Switch and Instructions
6.5.2.1 Operating instructions.
6.5.2.2 Group 3 security keys.
6.5.2.3 Labeled 'TIRE RECALL" marked "RESET/7
"OFF/' and "ON," in that order.
6.5.2.4 Provide at designated level for group.
6.5.2.5 Located in the lobby, visible and readily
accessible.
6.5.2.6 The key cannot be removed in the "RESET"
position. But it can be removed in the other positions.
6.5.2.7 Second switch, if present, must be at central
alarm and control facility labeled 'TIRE RECALL" only
be two-position switch marked "OFF" and "ON," in
that order.
6.5.3 Phase II In-Car Switch and Instruction
6.5.3.1 Ensure that there is a key for each Phase I,
each Phase II, and each standby power selection switch
in the building.
6.5.3.2 The same key is used for Phase I and
Phase II and standby power for all elevators in the
building.
6.5.3.3 Keys are available only to authorized emer-
gency and firefighting personnel.
6.5.3.4 The key can only be removed in the "OFF"
and "HOLD" positions.
6.5.3.5 The keys shall be Group 3 security (see
Item 8.1).
6.5.3.6 Labeled "FIRE OPERATION," marked
"OFF," "HOLD," and "ON," in that order.
6.5.4 Monthly Test
6.5.4.1 Monthly test log is completed.
6.5.5 Phase I Operation While Running
Place several floor calls in the car. While going up,
have the person at the designated level place the Phase I
switch in the "ON" position. Where a duplicate switch
is provided, verify that Phase I is initiated by placing the
switch to the "ON" position. Determine the following:
(a) The car stops and reverses without opening the
doors.
(b) The in-car stop switch or emergency stop switch
is inoperative.
(c) Call-registered lights and directional lanterns are
extinguished and inoperative.
(d) Position indicators, where provided, are inopera-
tive, except in car, designated level, and central control
station.
(e) The in-car door open button is rendered inopera-
tive as soon as car moves away from the landing.
(f) Car call buttons and corridor call buttons are
inoperative.
(g) The car returns to the designated level and parks
with power-operated doors open. If there is more than
91
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
one entrance at the designated landing, only the doors
serving the lobby with the fire recall switch open.
(h) The visual and audible signals operate and stay
on until car is at the designated level.
6.5.6 Phase I Operation With Doors Open
Place the Phase I switch to the "OFF" position and
run the car to any floor. With the doors open, have the
Phase I switch turned to the "ON" position and check
the following:
(a) Door reopening devices sensitive to smoke or
flame are inoperative immediately.
(b) If door reopening devices are rendered inopera-
tive, the closing speed is reduced so that the kinetic
energy is reduced to 2l/2 ft-lb (3.5 J).
(c) The emergency stop switch or in-car stop switch
is rendered inoperative as soon as the car moves away
from the landing.
(d) The in-car door open button is rendered inopera-
tive as soon as the car moves away from the landing.
6.5.7 Emergency Stop Switch and/or In-Car Stop
Switch and Doors Closing
Place the Phase I switch to the "OFF" position and
run the car to any floor. Activate the emergency stop
switch or the in-car stop switch. With the doors open,
have the Phase I switch turned to the "ON" position.
Return the emergency stop switch, or in-car stop switch
to the "RUN" position.
6.5.7.1 Verify that the automatic power-operated
horizontal sliding doors close promptly, that other types
of doors can be closed and once closed the car moves
to the designated level.
6.5.8 Stop Switches and Door Buttons
While on Phase 1 verify that
(a) stop switches other than those inside the car
remain operative
(b) for vertical sliding doors, the corridor door open
and door close buttons remain operative
6.5.9 Fire Alarm Initiating Device and Operation
6.5.9.1 Verify that there is a fire alarm initiating
device in each elevator lobby, the elevator machine room,
and sprinklered hoistway.
In jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC, verify that there
is a fire alarm initiating device in each elevator lobby,
at the designated level if not sprinklered throughout
and in the machine room if sprinklered.
6.5.9.2 With the car(s) on normal, have the input
for main return activated and verify that the elevator
commences Phase I operation and all cars return to the
designated level.
6.5.9.3 To reset operation initiated from fire alarm
system, the fire alarm signal must be reset, then the
Phase I switch must be cycled to "RESET" momentarily
then to "OFF"
6.5.9.4 With the car(s) on normal, have the input
for alternate level return activated and verify that the
elevator commences Phase I operation and all cars return
to the alternate level.
6.5.9.5 Car(s) should only respond to the first fire
alarm input.
6.5.9.6 Activate the machine room fire alarm ini-
tiating device input and verify Phase I and all cars return
to the designated level.
6.5.9.7 Activate the designated level machine
room fire alarm initiating device and verify Phase I and
all cars return to the alternate floor.
6.5.9.8 With the car(s) on normal, have the input
for machine room return activated and verify the visual
signal in the car illuminates intermittently.
6.5.9.9 In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC,
where the fire alarm initiating device is required in the
hoistway, activate the input and verify all cars return to
the designated landing, except that fire alarm initiating
devices installed at or below the lowest landing of recall
shall cause the cars to return to the upper recall level.
6.5.10 Fire Alarm Initiating Device and Phase I
Switch
6.5.10.1 Activate the alternate landing return
input and observe that the elevator returns to the alter-
nate landing.
6.5.10.2 If a two-position key switch is provided,
place it in the "ON" position and verify that the elevator
remains at the alternate landing.
6.5.10.3 Turn both the Phase I switch and the
additional Phase I switch (when provided) to the "ON"
position and verify that the car returns to the desig-
nated level.
6.5.11 Phase I! Key Switch and Sign
With Phase I activated and the car at the designated
or alternate landing, place the Phase II key switch in the
"ON" position. Operate the car and check the following:
(a) The elevator can be operated only from the car
buttons and will not respond to corridor calls.
(b) All corridor call buttons, door open and close but-
tons, and directional lanterns are inoperative. All land-
ing position indicators, except at the designated landing
and central alarm and control facility, are inoperative.
Car position indicators are operative.
(c) Power-operated doors can only be opened by con-
tinuous pressure on the door open button and if released
before the doors are in the normal "OPEN" position,
the door will close without delay.
92
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
(d) Open power-operated doors can be closed only
by continuous pressure means. If the means is released
before the door is fully closed, horizontal sliding doors
will reopen and vertical sliding doors will stop, or stop
and reopen.
(e) If two entrances can be opened and closed at the
same landing, separate door open and close buttons are
provided for each entrance.
(/) All door reopening devices are inoperative (except
the door open button). Full speed closing is permitted.
(g) "CALL CANCEL" button is labeled and when
activated, will cancel all calls and cause the car to stop
at or before the next available landing.
(h) Floor selection buttons are provided and func-
tional for all landings without restrictions.
(i) Moving car will stop at the next landing with a
car call registered and remaining car calls canceled.
6.5.12 Phase II Switch in "HOLD" Position
6.5.12.1 Place the Phase II switch in the "HOLD"
position and remove key. Verify that the car remains at
the landing and the door close button is inoperative.
6.5.12.2 Verify that the car call buttons are inoper-
ative.
6.5.13 Phase II Switch in "OFF" Position and Doors
Closing: Power-Operated Horizontally and
Vertically Sliding Doors
With the elevator away from the designated level,
Phase I in effect, place the Phase II switch in the "OFF"
position and verify that
(a) horizontally sliding doors close automatically and
continuous pressure on the door close button will close
vertically sliding doors
(b) car reverts to a Phase I-type return on completion
of door closing and reverts to Phase I when the doors
open at the designated landing
(c) door reopening device inoperative and full speed
closing permitted
(d) door open button operative
(e) if Phase II switch turned to "ON" or "HOLD"
before door is closed, it will reopen
6.5.14 Removal From Phase II
Verify that the elevator can be removed from Phase II
only when
(a) Phase II switch is in "OFF" position at designated
level and doors open
(b) Phase II switch is in "OFF" position and Phase I
is in effect
6.5.15 Power Disconnects Open
6.5.15.1 With the elevator on Phase I, have the
main line power interrupted and restored to verify that
the elevator will remain on Phase I.
6.5.15.2 With the elevator on Phase II, have the
main line power interrupted and restored to verify that
the elevator will remain on Phase II.
6.5.15.3 The car is allowed to move to a position
in the hoistway to reestablish position once movement
is attempted.
6.5.16 Top-of-Car Operating Device
While operating from top of car, have the Phase I key
switch placed in the "ON" position and verify that
(a) an audible signal sounds
(b) the elevator remains under control of the top-of-
car operating device
(c) the elevator remains under the control of the
hoistway access switch
6.5.17 Automatic Elevators With Attendant
Operation
With elevator on attendant operation, stop at a floor
and have the Phase I switch placed in the "ON" position.
Verify that
(a) the audible and visual signal operates and that a
parked elevator will automatically go on Phase I after
a time delay between 10 sec and 30 sec.
(b) a moving car on attendant operation will com-
mence Phase I operation without delay.
(c) if car is on hospital emergency service, it will
remain on that operation until removed by the operator
and at that point revert to Phase I operation. The audible
and visual signals in the car shall be activated immedi-
ately and remain activated until the car is returned to
the designated landing. With the car on firefighter emer-
gency operation, the elevator cannot be placed on hospi-
tal service.
6.5.18 Elevators on Phase I and Phase II, Prevention
of Operation and Disabling Not Allowed
With elevator on normal operation, verify the
following:
(a) Activate means other than those specified in this
Code to remove elevators from normal operation, and
verify that Phase I Emergency Recall Operation is not
prevented.
(b) Activate input for devices that measure loads and
verify that the elevator is not prevented from operating
at or below the capacity that is required.
(c) Verify that an accidental ground or short circuit
in equipment on landing side will not disable Phase II
operation.
93
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Part 7
Escalator — External
ITEM 7.1
GENERAL FIRE PROTECTION
7.1.1 Periodic Inspections
Examine the sides and undersides of the escalator
trusses and machinery spaces enclosure for damage to
fire-resistive materials. A17.1a-1994 and later editions
permit the use of noncombustible and limited combusti-
ble materials as defined by the building code or
ANSI/NFPA 101.
Check that guards are in place for openings provided
for ventilation of the driving machine and control equip-
ment spaces. Enclosure in fire- resistive ceiling does not
constitute adequate fire protection.
Verify that provisions to protect floor openings from
the passage of flame, heat, and/or smoke that are
required by the building code have not been damaged,
removed, or defeated. Escalators installed under
A17. 1-1981 and later editions require protection in com-
pliance with ANSI/NFPA 101 or local codes. Prior to
Al 7. 1-1981, A17.1 gave requirements for protection of
floor opening for escalators that were not accredited as a
means of egress. However, since escalators are no longer
accredited as a means of egress, the inspector must refer
to the local code or the Life Safety Code NFPA-101 for
the protection requirement at each location.
7.1.2 Periodic Test
7.1.3 Acceptance
Verify that floor openings are protected against the
passage of flame, heat, and /or smoke in accordance with
the requirements of the building code.
7.1.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Sections 800 and
801; and Rule 1009.2a.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.1 and 6.1.2; and 8.10.4.1.1(a).
ITEM 7.2
GEOMETRY
7.2.1 Periodic Inspections
Inspect for evidence of change to the geometry of the
balustrades and if change has been made, inspect as
outlined in Item 7.2.3.
If an escalator is relocated or a new escalator is
installed in existing trusses, it must comply with the
current Code requirements. See Figs. 7.2.1(a), 7.2.1(b),
and 7.2.1(c) for dimension requirements of existing
escalators.
Verify that the overhead clearance is in compliance
with local codes.
7.2.2 Periodic Test
The width of the balustrades must be the width of
the step tread to the next whole inch and should not
decrease in the direction of travel. For escalators
installed under A17.1-1955 to A17.1-1981 editions, the
width should not change abruptly nor more than 8% of
the greatest width, and the maximum angle of change
should not be more than 15% in the line of travel.
7.2.3 Acceptance
(a) Verify that the angle of inclination does not exceed
31 deg. If in doubt, a 30 deg/60 deg triangle, a level,
and a straight edge may be used to check the incline.
The straight edge may be placed on the front of several
steps as shown in Fig. 7.2.3. The bubble on the level
should be in the center or slightly to the left when placed
as shown in the figure. If the bubble is to the right, a
protractor or angle finder will be needed to verify that
the incline does not exceed 31 deg.
(b) Measure the width of the step at a right angle
transverse to the direction of travel.
(c) Measure and mark the centerline of each handrail
and use a plumb line to find the distance from the hand-
rail centerline to the width of the escalator or step edge.
(d) For an interior low deck escalator, measure the
distance from the vertical face of the interior panels to
the vertical face of the skirt panels using a machinist
level and ruler [see Fig. 7.2.1(c)]. Measure the slope of the
deck perpendicular to the line of travel using a machinist
level and protractor.
(e) Drop a plumb line to the edges of the steps and
measure the distance between the centerline of the hand-
rails to the edge of the steps.
7.2.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 802.1, 802.2,
802.3d, 1009.2b, 1009.2g, and 1207.5; and Appendix D.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.3.1, 6.1.3.2, 6.1.3.3.4, 8.10.4.1.1(b),
8.10.4.1.1(n), and 8.7.6.1.5; and (NR Appendix D).
94
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Fig. 7.2.1(a) Dimensions for Existing Escalators (for Escalators Installed Under A17.1-1955 and
A17.1-1960 Editions)
CD
Width between balustrades
CD
\
|
i I 27 in. above nose
| \ line of step
! \
Step tread
/ |
1 !
i 16 in. mm. i
i< >\
i i
Maximum allowed width
step tread width plus 13 in.
Not less than 22 in.
Not more than 48 in.
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. - 25.4 mm.
ITEM 73
HANDRAILS
7.3.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Mark one location on each handrail with chalk,
then operate the unit and inspect each handrail through
a complete revolution. The handrails, including splices
and joints, should be free of any cuts, cracks, gouges,
pinch points, or any other condition that would be a
hazard to passengers. Any rust or rubber filings present
on the balustrade deck indicates that an internal inspec-
tion of the handrail system may be warranted.
(b) Verify that the hand or finger guards are present
at the newel base. Check that the guards are in good
condition and properly sized to prevent fingers or hands
from being drawn into the newel. Finger guards are
required under A17.1-1965 and later editions and A17.3.
Al 7. 1-1 955 required that the balustrade be designed or
guarded to prevent fingers and hands from being drawn
into the balustrade where the handrail enters. There are
several types of guards in use including resilient boots,
brushes, and trap doors. Each may function differently
to provide the protection. Trap doors do allow entry but
prevent entrapment.
(c) Ride the escalator holding the handrails through
the entire travel. The handrails should move smoothly
without jerking, at substantially the same speed as the
steps. The need to change grip on the handrail more
than once during a single level rise would indicate a
need for adjustment. At several points in the ride firmly
grip the handrail and verify that it does not stall under
moderate force.
(d) During this ride observe any unusual noise that
may indicate the need for further inspection. Listen for
noise that may indicate wear of the turn around rollers,
or other parts.
(e) Check the horizontal clearance between both lips
of the handrail and the handrail stand (guide).
7.3.2 Periodic Test
For escalators installed to A17. 1-2000 and later edi-
tions, the person or firm maintaining the equipment
must provide a written checkout procedure and demon-
strate that the handrail speed does not change when a
95
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 7.2.1(b) Dimensions for Existing Escalators (for Escalators Installed Under A17.1-1965
Through A17.1-1981)
-4 in. min., A17.1-1981
61/2in. max.
6V2 in- rnax.
10 in. max., A17. 1-1981
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
retarding force, up to the maximum required by Code,
is applied opposite to the direction of travel. Note that
it may be easier to retard the handrail motion when
the handrail is traveling in the down direction (i.e., the
retarding force will oppose the handrail drive system).
7.3.3 Acceptance
Check whether each handrail extends at normal
height not less than 12 in. (305 mm) beyond the escalator
combplates, and verify that required clearances are
present.
Check the vertical height from the step noseline to
the top of the handrail.
7.3.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 802.2, 802.4,
and 1009.2c; and Appendix D.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.3.2, 6.1.3.4, 8.11.4.2.13, 8.6.8.12, and
8.10.4.1.1(c); and (NR Appendix D).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 5.1.5 and 5.1.6.
ITEM 7.4
ENTRANCE AND EGRESS ENDS
7.4.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) The floor surfaces adjacent to the landing plates
must be continuous with the top of the landing plate,
with no abrupt changes in elevation of more than \ in.
(6.4 mm). Access to an egress from the escalator should
be free of obstacles and tripping hazards. Check that
the pit covers are present and in good condition.
(b) For escalators installed under the A17.1a-1988 and
later editions and A17.3, a safety zone should be main-
tained free of obstacles (see Fig. 7.4.1). These Code
96
C
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 7.2.1(c) Relationship of Escalator Parts (A17.1a-1982 and Later Editions)
4 in. min.
(10)
1 in. min
10 in. max., A17.1a-1982-A17.1-1987.
9V2 in. max., A17.1a-1988 and later
6 in. max.-
1 in. min.
Step tread width plus 19 in. max.,
A17.1(a)-1982 through A17. 1-1987
Angle:
20 deg min.
30 deg max.
Interior High Deck
Balustrade
22 in. min.
40 in. max.
S
D£
1 in. min.
IV4 in. max.
Interior Low Deck
Balustrade
Width of the escalator is the width of the step to the
next whole inch Requirement 6.1.3.2 (Rule 802.2)
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
Fig. 7.2.3 Checking Incline
Straight edge-
Level -
30 deg/60 deg
triangle
97
C
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. X^s)
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ^
ASMEA17.2-2010
Fig. 7.4.1 Safety Zone
(io)
2W
■ Handrail
- Newel
-w-
Safety Zone
W+8in.
dimensions are minimums and traffic patterns may
require larger distances.
(c) While standing on the unit, verify that the landing
and combplates provide a secure foothold and outdoor
units should provide a secure foothold when wet.
7.4.2 Periodic Test
7.4.3 Acceptance
Verify that vertical headroom clearance of 7 ft (2.13 m)
is provided and that the required safety zone is present.
Check that floor openings adjacent to the entire length
of the wellway are protected in accordance with the
applicable building code.
7.4.4 References
A17.1d~2000 and earlier editions — Rules 802.6 and
802.12.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.3.6, 8.6.8.15, and 6.1.3.12.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 5.5.3 and 5.5.4.
ITEM 7.5
LIGHTING
7.5.1 Periodic Inspections
Check whether the lighting at the landing plates and
steps is in compliance with the applicable code by using
a light meter while the escalator is operating. Take care
not to cast a body shadow on the meter. Note any lamps
that are not operating and their affect on the escalator
lighting. For escalators installed under A17.1-1987 and
later editions and A17.3, lighting must be of uniform
intensity and not contrast materially with the sur-
rounding area.
For escalators installed under A17. 1-1955 through
1971, the minimum intensity was 2 fc (22 lx).
A17.1a-1979 required step tread lighting to be uniform
throughout the run and the lighting intensity to be in
accordance with local codes and ordinances for stair-
ways. For escalators installed under A17. 1-1987 and
later editions and A17.3, the minimum intensity of 5 fc
(54 lx) is required. For escalators installed under the
A17.1-1978 to A17.1a-2005 editions, verify that green
demarcation lights are present below the steps at both
landings and are on when the escalator is in operation.
7.5.2 Periodic Test
7.5.3 Acceptance
7.5.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 806.2, 805.7,
and 1009.2d.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.7.2, 6.1.6.7, and 8.10.4.1.1(e),
A17.3 — Paragraphs 2.2.3 and 5.4.
ITEM 7.6
CAUTION SIGNS
7.6.1 Periodic Inspections
For escalators installed under A17. 1-1981 and later
editions and escalators that are required to comply with
A17.3, verify that the required caution signs are located
at both landings readily visible to boarding passengers.
For escalators installed under A17. 1-1993 and later
editions, verify that any additional signs are located at
least 10 ft (3.05 m) horizontally from the end of the
newels and that they do not impede traffic or otherwise
cause persons to stop.
7.6.2 Periodic Test
7.6.3 Acceptance
7.6.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rule 805.9; and
Fig. 805.9a.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 6.1.6.9; and Fig. 6.1.6.9.1.
A17.3 — Paragraph 5.3.11.
ITEM 7.7
COMBPLATE AND COMB STEP IMPACT DEVICE
7.7.1 Periodic Inspections
Inspect the comb for missing teeth and proper mesh
with each step tread (see Fig. 7.7.1). Verify proper mesh
with each step tread by holding a sheet of stiff paper
or a business card where the teeth mesh with the step
tread, while standing well back from the plate to prevent
forcing the plate down. Use of an extension with an
alligator clip to hold the card is recommended.
(io)
98
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Fig. 7.7.1 Checking Step/Combplate Mesh
Cleated risers required
by A17. 1-1971 and
later editions
and mesh of vertical cleats
with slots in adjacent step riser
Use business card to verify
mesh of step tread and combplate.
The points of the combplate teeth
must be below the upper surface
of the treads
Combplate
Upper surface of tread
Alligator clip holding
card on extension rod
/
Point of combplate
teeth below tread
NOTE: Telescoping pointers with alligator clips that are used to
ignite water heater pilot lights are available in hardware /plumbing
supply stores.
The comb teeth should mesh with and set into the
tread surface so that the teeth are always below the
upper surface of the treads. Any section with one or
more missing or broken teeth should be replaced. For
escalators installed under A17.1c-1986 and later edi-
tions, the comb surfaces must contrast visibly by color,
pattern, or texture.
7.7.2 Periodic Test
For units installed under A17.1b-1992 and later edi-
tions, have the operation of combplate impact devices
tested as follows:
(a) Have a vertical force applied to the center front
edge of the combplate until the device trips. Record the
force required to trip the device and verify the unit will
not start until manually reset.
(b) Have a force applied in the direction of travel at
the front center of the combplate, increasing the force
until the device trips. Record the force required to trip
the device and verify the unit will not start until manu-
ally reset.
(c) Have a force applied in the direction of travel on
one side of the front of the combplate, increasing the
force until the device trips. Record the force required to
trip the device and verify the unit will not start until
manually reset. Repeat this test for the opposite side.
Note that while the maximum horizontal forces were
112 lbf (500 N) at each side and 225 Ibf (1 000 N) at
the center of the combplate for escalators installed to
A17.1b-1992 through A17.1-1996, it is permitted to have
the maximum horizontal forces at higher values permit-
ted by A17.1a-1997 and later editions.
7.7.3 Acceptance
(a) Visually verify that the combplates are vertically
adjustable and that the sections forming the comb teeth
are replaceable.
99
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 7.7.3 Test of Combplate/Landing Plate Assembly
Steps
Test plate
350 lb (159 kg)
Comb section
combplate and
landing plate
assembly
77/8in.
Comb
117/8in.
Move test plate and
weight to several
locations on the
combplate/landing
plate along the
escalator centerline
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
(b) Place weight on the combplate and landing plate
assembly to verify that the combplate and landing plate
will not contact the step (see Fig. 7.7.3).
(io) 7JA References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 802.6,
805.3n, 807.3, 1206.6, (NR 8.6.9.2.3), 1008.2r, and 1009.2e.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.3.6, 6.1.6.3.13, 6.1.8.3, 8.6.8, 8.6.9.2.3,
8.11.4.2.13, and 8.10.4.1.1(g).
A17.3 — Paragraph 5.1.9.
ITEM 7.8
DECK BARRICADES AND ANTISLIDE DEVICES
7.8.1 Periodic Inspections
For low deck escalators installed under the
A17.1c-1986 and later editions, check to see that deck
barricades are firmly in place and in good condition
at each end when the outer deck width exceeds 5 in.
(127 mm). The barrier must extend to 4 in. (102 mm)
below the handrail top. See Fig. 7.8.1(a). If the escalator
is not located at the edge of a floor surface, check that
the barricade(s) is in place, properly located, and firmly
secured on the outer deck for escalators installed to
A17.1b-1995 and later editions.
On high deck escalators installed under A17.1-1981
and later editions and A17.3, check that antislide
devices, where required, are in place and secure. See
Fig. 7.8.1(b).
7.8.2 Periodic Test
For escalators installed under A17.1a-1988 and later
editions, verify that glass and plastic replacement panels
meet the requirements of ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR
Part 1201.
7.8.3 Acceptance
All glass or plastic (glazing material) must be legibly
and permanently marked 16 CFR Part 1201, "American
National Standard Z97.1" or the characters "ANSI
Z97.1" and shall be marked also with the manufacturer's
distinctive mark or designation.
100
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 7.8.1(a) Deck Barricade
/
Wall
Barrier between
escalator and
wall
Barrier between
parallel adjacent
units
~X~? C7~~
Typical Design
(Other Designs Acceptable)
Fig. 7.8.1(b) High Deck Balustrade Antislide Devices
I Greater than 12 in. I
h< *i
101
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Check that all exposed fastener heads are the tamper-
resistant type.
7.8.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 802.3i and
1009.2f.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.3.3.10, 6.1.3.3.11, 8,6.8.11, and
8.10.4.1.1(h).
ITEM 7.9
STEPS AND UPTHRUST DEVICE
7.9.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Mark one of the steps with chalk, then run the
escalator through one complete revolution. Check that
each step is present, clean, free of debris, and that the
step treads and risers are in good condition.
(b) Check at least every tenth step, by riding on it, to
verify that the following requirements are met:
(1 ) There is no excessive movement or play in the
direction of travel, at right angles to the direction of
travel and vertically. While standing on the step, a lateral
shift of weight should not cause the step to strike the
skirt panels.
(2) For escalators installed prior to A17. 1-1971, ver-
ify that the clearance between step treads on the hori-
zontal run (between the step and riser) is not more than
%2 in. (4 mm). A thickness gauge or a rule may be used
for this purpose. With the escalator moving in the up
direction lay the rule on the step and read the clearance.
At least every tenth step should be checked. Cleated
step risers are required for all escalators installed under
A17.1-1971 and later editions, and they must mesh with
the slots of adjacent step treads. Mesh can be verified
by trying to fit a thin piece of stiff paper, or business card,
between steps and riser while the escalator is moving in
the up direction. The check should be made across the
entire width. [See Figs. 7.9.1(a) and 7.9.1(b).]
For escalators installed under A17.1-2000/B44-00 and
later editions, check that the clearance between the steps
on the horizontal run does not exceed 0.25 in. (6 mm).
[See Fig. 7.9.1(c).]
(3) Use a level to check if the steps are horizontal.
(4) The tread surface should be slotted in the direc-
tion parallel to the travel so that they mesh with the
combplate teeth. Verify that a cleat is formed adjacent to
the skirt panel on each side of the step [see Fig. 7.9.1(d)].
(5) Check risers, cleats, and step tread surfaces. Spe-
cial consideration should be given to excessive clearance
and sharp edges. While standing on the step tread, verify
that it provides a secure foothold.
(6) A jerking motion on the steps and excessive
noise in the machinery space indicates that the drive
and support system should be examined to discover the
source or cause.
7.9.2 Periodic Test (10)
For escalators installed under A17.1b-1980 and later
editions and those required to comply with A 17.3, have
the operation of the step upthrust device tested as
follows:
(a) With the escalator running down, apply an
upthrust force to a step to resist leveling as it enters the
lower curve. This should stop the escalator.
(b) If this will not operate the upthrust device, it
should be checked more closely during the internal
inspection described in Item 8.9.2 and a meter should
be used to verify that the safety circuit is opened when
the upthrust device operates.
For escalators required to comply with A17.3 that have
smooth risers, test the operation of the upthrust at both
the upper and lower curves. Test the lower curve with
the escalator running down and the upper curve with
the escalator running up. This may require two pair of
pliers gripping on both sides at the front of the step
tread.
7.9.3 Acceptance
Review fatigue test and certification for Code
compliance.
Verify that there are at least two and no more than
four flat steps at each end of the escalator. Refer to
Fig. 7.9.3 for flat step configuration identification.
Check that the materials for step frames, treads, and
risers, including any attachments or inserts, meet Code
requirements.
Check that all steps have yellow demarcation lines on
each side and along the back. Check the step dimensions
for Code compliance.
7.9.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Section 3; and
Rules 802.5, 802.6e, 802.9d, 805.3i, 1008.21, and 1105.1.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 1.3, 6.1.3.5, 6.1.3.6.5, 6.1.3.9.4, 6.1.6.3.9,
8.11.4.2.9, 8.6.8.6, 8.3.11.1, and Fig. 18.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 5.1.7 and 5.1.8.
ITEM 7.10
OPERATING AND SAFETY DEVICES
7.10.1 Periodic Inspections (10)
(a) Starting Switches. Verify that a record of personnel
that were trained in the proper procedure to start up the
escalator is available on site. Verify that a key-operated
switch, located so that the steps are within sight, is the
only means of starting the escalator. Verify that the key
is only accessible to authorized personnel. A17. 1-1937
and later editions require the use of a key to start an
escalator. However, A17.1a-1988 and later editions and
A17.3 specifically prohibit the starting by automatic
means. Start the escalator using the key-operated switch.
102
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 7.9.1(a) Smooth Riser
//
Measurement of clearance
between skirt panel and step
/
Measurement of clearance
between vertical riser and
f / step treads is 5/32 in-
Skirt panel
Vertical riser
Step treads
Step
Escalators Installed Prior to the
1971 Code Edition
When operating the switch, verify that the escalator
steps are within sight and that no one is on the step.
Where the escalator can be operated in both directions,
check the switch operation in both directions. Where
there is more than one key-operated starting switch, the
function and location of all switches shall be checked.
For units installed under Al 7. 1-1996 and later edi-
tions, verify that the start switch operating positions are
properly marked. Check that the key is only removable
in the "RUN" position. Turn the switch from "RUN" to
either "UP" or "DOWN" and quickly let go of the key.
The switch must return to the "RUN" position. Repeat
for the other direction of travel. Next turn the switch to
either "UP" or "DOWN" position. Stop the unit with
the emergency stop button and keep the switch in the
"UP" or "DOWN" position. The unit must not restart.
Repeat for the other direction of travel.
(b) Emergency Stop Switches. Operate the emergency
stop switches/buttons and verify that the escalator
stops. Also, verify that the stop switch cannot start the
escalator. If automatic starting devices are provided (pre-
A17.1a-1988), check that they will not function after the
stop switch is operated. Verify proper labeling and signal
where required. The requirements for emergency stop
switches in prior editions of the Code are as follows:
(1) A17.1-1955: An emergency stop button or other
type of manually operated switch, marked "STOP BUT-
TON" or "STOP SWITCH" shall be conspicuously and
accessibly located at or near the top and bottom landing
of each escalator and shall be protected from accidental
contact.
(2) A17. 1-1960: Emergency stop button or other
type of manually operated switches having a red button
or handle shall be accessibly located at or near the top
and bottom landing of each escalator, and shall be pro-
tected against accidental operation.
(3) A17.1-1965 added: An escalator stop button
with an unlocked cover over it that can be readily lifted
or pushed aside shall be considered accessible.
(4) A17.1a-1979 required that the stop button be
located in the right-hand newel base facing the escalator
at both landings. Handles were no longer allowed.
(5) A17.1b-1983 and later editions required a
readily moveable self-closing transparent cover and an
80 dBA signal when the cover is moved. The cover
should be marked "Emergency Stop." The button should
103
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 7.9.1(b) Cleated Riser
Measurement of clearance
between skirt panel and step
Check the space in
these positions
//
Step treads and
// vertical cleats
must be in mesh
all the time
Vertical cleats
Step treads
Step
(10)
Fig. 7.9.1(c) Escalator Step Riser
Cleated riser must mesh
with the adjacent step
wherever the steps are exposed,
(SeeA17.1/B44 — 6.1.3.5.3.).
Escalator
panel
104
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Fig. 7.9.1(d) Escalator Step Tread [A17.1-1955 Through A17.1-1990, Rule 802.5 (Requirement 6.13.5)]
Cleat required on each
side of step adjacent
to skirt
_ 153/4 in.
min. run
V4in. max.
slot width h H-
fJMJLllMI
3/8 in. max. slot
center to center
8V2in.
max. rise
3/8in. min.
slot depth
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
Combplate
Fig. 7.9.3 Example of Two Flat Steps
- Intersection of comb teeth
with step tread
105
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ^s|
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ^
ASME A17.2-2010
(10)
(10)
be in the upper right quadrant when facing the escalator
for high deck balustrades, and for low deck balustrades
it must be below the handrail height. Remote stop
switches were prohibited under A17.1b-1983 and later
editions.
(6) A17.3: An accessible red stop button marked
"EMERGENCY STOP" must be on the right-hand side
of each entrance. Remote stop switches are prohibited.
(c) Tandem Operation. For escalators operated in tan-
dem, A17.1-1981 and later editions and A17.3, where a
common landing is shared by two units, verify that the
units are electrically interlocked. The interlocks must
stop the unit carrying passengers into the common inter-
mediate landing, where bunching will occur, when the
unit carrying passengers away from the landing stops.
Also, verify that the interlocks assure that the units run
in the same direction.
7.10.2 Periodic Test
7.103 Acceptance
Check that the starting switches are within reach of
an emergency stop button. Start the unit and hold the
start switch in the "UP" position, then actuate the emer-
gency stop button. The unit must not restart until the
start switch is placed in the "RUN" position and the
starting sequence is repeated. Repeat this for the down
direction and for the other start switch.
For low deck escalators, check the clearances between
the handrail and the stop switch enclosure and the dis-
tance from the button to the handrail.
7.10.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 805.2,
805.3a, 805.6, and (NR 8.6.10.5).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.6.2.1, 6.1.6.3.1, c6.1.6.3.1(a), 6.1.6.6,
8.6.10.2, and 8.6.10.5.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 5.3.1, 5.3.2, and 5.3.10.
ITEM 7.11
SKIRT OBSTRUCTION DEVICE
7.11.1 Periodic Inspections
Test the skirt obstruction device for escalators
installed under A17.1-1971 and later editions and A17.3,
by having the person performing the test manually trip
the skirt obstruction device switches on each side of
steps at each landing while the escalator is running. This
can be done by placing an object such as a wooden stick
between the steps and the skirt as the step moves by the
switch (see Fig. 7.11.1). If the switch activation requires
displacement of the skirt panel, a soft hand-held rubber
eraser can be used to displace the panel by holding it
so that it will be drawn between the step and skirt panel.
A rubber kitchen spatula may also be used for this. A
soft material should always be used to prevent damage
to the equipment. Kicking the panel does not verify
proper operation of the skirt switch. All four switches
should be tested.
For escalators installed under A17.1b-1983 and later
editions, the maximum stopping distance should not
exceed the distance from the location of the switch to
the combplate for any load up to the rated load.
Escalators installed under A17.1-1971 through 1978
editions required skirt obstruction devices only at the
lower landing. Prior to A17.1-1971 skirt obstruction
devices were not required but were sometimes installed.
If they are installed, they should be tested.
7.11.2 Periodic Test
7.11.3 Acceptance
7.11.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rule 805.3f.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 6.1.6.3.6.
A17.3 — Paragraph 5.3.7.
ITEM 7.12
(RESERVED)
ITEM 7.13
EGRESS RESTRICTION (ROLLING SHUTTER) DEVICE
7.13.1 Periodic Inspections
Where rolling shutters are provided to protect floor
openings, check that when the shutters begin to close
power is removed from the driving machine and brake,
and remains off until the shutter is fully retracted. If the
shutter is power operated, the building code may require
a pressure sensitive leading edge to reverse direction
and /or stop it when it strikes an object.
7.13.2 Periodic Test
7.13.3 Acceptance
7.13.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rule 805.3g.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 6.1.6.3.7.
A17.3 — Paragraph 5.3.8.
ITEM 7.14
SPEED
7.14.1 Periodic Inspections
For escalators with DC motors or variable frequency
drive motor controls, perform a speed test. The maxi-
mum permitted speed was 125 ft/min (0.64 m/s) for
escalators installed under A17.1d-2000 and earlier edi-
tions, and 100 ft/min (0.5 m/s) for escalators installed
under Al 7. 1-2000 /B44-00 and later editions.
106
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 7.11.1 Typical Skirt Obstruction Device
Switch
plunger
7.14.2 Periodic Test
7.14.3 Acceptance
Verify that the speed of the escalator cannot be
changed without first stopping it.
Verify that the no-load speed of the escalator does not
exceed the maximum permitted speed as follows:
(a) Run a tachometer wheel along the deck, skirt, or
other stationary flat object when riding the escalator.
(b) Use a stopwatch to time the travel from one landing
to the other. Divide the travel in feet (meters) by the time
in minutes (seconds) to obtain the speed in ft/min (m/s).
7.14.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 803. 1,
805.3b, 1008.2O/ and 1009.2o.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.4.1, 6.1.6.3.2, (NR 1008. 2o), and
8.10.4.1.2(1).
ITEM 7.15
BALUSTRADES
7.15.1 Periodic Inspections
Inspect the balustrades and note any cracked or bro-
ken panels. Panels and fasteners should be smooth and
(io)
107
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
free of burrs and snag points. Interior panels or molding
must not be raised or depressed by more than \ in.
(6.4 mm). Check that the balustrades are totally enclosed
along both exterior and interior lengths, except where
the handrail enters the newel base. For escalators
installed under the A17.1a-1982 and later editions and
A17.3, if gaps exist between interior panels, they should
not be wider than %6 in. (4.8 mm) and the edges should
be beveled or rounded.
7.15.2 Periodic Test
Check that glass replacement panels are tempered for
escalators installed under A17.1-1955, or tempered or
shatterproof for escalators installed under A17.1-1965,
and that glass or plastic replacement panels meet the
requirements of ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR Part 1201 for
escalators installed under A17.1-1971 and later editions.
7.15.3 Acceptance
Verify that the balustrades are adequately supported
and meet the material, strength, and dimensional
requirements.
Glass or plastic (except plastic bonded to basic support
panels), if used, must meet the requirements of
ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR Part 1201 and properly marked.
Check that components not used directly in connec-
tion with the operation of the escalator are not installed
on, in, or through the escalator.
Check that the width between the balustrade interior
panels does not change in the direction of travel.
7.15.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 802.3 and
1009.2g; and Appendix D.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.3.3, 6.1.3.14, and 8.10.4.1.1(n); and (NR
Appendix D).
A17.3 — Paragraph 5.1.1.
ITEM 7.16
CEILING INTERSECTION GUARDS
(10) 7.16.1 Periodic Inspections
Escalators installed under A17.1-1978 and later edi-
tions where the clearance of the exterior deck and the
ceiling or soffit is 12 in. (305 mm) or less or where the
projected intersection of the exterior deck and ceiling
or soffit is 24 in. (610 mm) or less from the adjacent
handrail centerline, require ceiling intersection guards.
This requirement was restricted to high decks for escala-
tors installed under A17.1a-1982 and later editions and
A17.3 (see Fig. 7.16.1).
On low decks for escalators installed under
A17.1a-1982 and later editions and A17.3, where the
centerline of the handrail is 14 in. (356 mm) or less from
the ceiling or soffit, guards are also required.
Inspect the guards for damage and secure attachment.
7.16.2 Periodic Test
7.16.3 Acceptance
Verify that ceiling and soffit guards are correct size,
in place, and secure. Check that glass or plastic guards
are marked ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR Part 1201, or
CAN/CGSB 12.1; CAN/CGSB 12.11; CAN/CGSB 12.12,
as applicable.
7.16.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rule 802.3g; and
Appendix D.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 6.1.3.3.9; and (NR Appendix D).
A17.3 — Paragraph 5.1.3.
ITEM 7.17
STEP/SKIRT CLEARANCES, PANELS, AND
PERFORMANCE INDEX
7.17.1 Periodic Inspections
Verify that the skirt panels are smooth for escalators
installed under A17.1-1971 and later editions.
Check the clearance between the skirt panel and the
step using a thickness gauge or by laying a small rule
on the edge of the step to read the distance. Several
steps should be checked through their entire travel. The
allowable clearances are as follows (see Fig. 7.17.1):
(a) A17.1-1955 through A17.1d-1970: not more than
3/16 in. (4.8 mm) with a total of both sides not more than
% in. (6.4 mm), except where skirt obstruction devices
are installed at the lower entrance for escalators installed
under the A17.1-1965 through A17.1d-1970.
(b) A17.1-1971 through A17.1a-1979 editions: not
more than % in. (9.5 mm) on each side.
(c) A17.1b-1980 through A17.1c-1999 and A17.3: not
more than 3/16 in. (4.8 mm) on each side.
(d) A17.1d-2000 and later editions, not more than
0.2 in. (5 mm) when 25 lbf (110 N) is laterally applied
from the step to the adjacent skirt panel. Each side shall
be independently tested.
For escalators installed under A17.1a-1982 through
A17.1c-1999, inspect the exposed surface of the skirt
panel to check whether it is either made from a low
friction material or treated with a friction-reducing
material. The skirt panels of escalators installed prior
to A17.1a-1982 should also be treated with a friction-
reducing material. The panel should be tested at several
places during the run and especially near the transition
entrance and exit. If examination of the panels raises
a question about the friction of the skirt panels, the
manufacturer's recommendation should be requested
and compared to the treatment schedule if available. If
skirts are treated, examine the steps to verify that fric-
tion-reducing treatment has not been applied on them.
Skirt deflectors, when provided, shall be checked to
ensure that all fasteners are flush and tamper resistant,
do)
108
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
I No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Fig. 7.16.1 Ceiling or Soffit Guard [Requirements 6.1.3.3.9 and 6.2.3.3.7 (Rules 802.3g and 902.3g)]
Ceiling soffet, or
adjacent deck
Handrail
Guard
Balustrade
Moving Walks, A17.1-1965 |
through A17.1d-1986f
7 in. min.
A17.M987and later
editions, 8 in. min.
Escalators, A1 7. 1a-1982
and later editions and
A17.3, 8 in. min.
Escalators,
A17.1-1955 through
A17. 1-1981, 14 in. min.
Fig. 7.17.1 Measuring Gap Between Step and Skirt
Skirt
Use gauge to
measure gap
between skirt
and step
Steps
109
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
that rigid elements are smooth, and that exposed sur-
faces have their low friction material treatment intact
and the dimensional, strength, and deflection require-
ments are met.
7.17.2 Periodic Test
Visually inspect the condition of step/skirt panel gap
while the escalator is stationary. Mark a step and operate
the escalator to bring other steps into view as required
until every step on the escalator has been examined.
Document any outstanding conditions, such as step/
skirt gaps, damaged steps, damaged step treads, dam-
aged skirt panels, mismatched skirt panel joints, or sharp
edges on the edge of the step or skirt panel. Pay particu-
lar attention to the gaps between the riser portion of
the step and the skirt panel.
Run the escalator in its normal direction of travel for
at least two cycles of steps. If the escalator is operated
in both directions, run the escalator for at least two
cycles of steps in both the up and down directions.
Visually examine the step /skirt gaps along the entire
length of the escalator. Pay particular attention to the
gaps at the transitions. Note any abnormal operation
of the escalator such as jumping steps, irregular step
movement, step /skirt panel interference, or skirt panel
misalignments.
(a) Step/Skirt Performance Index Test (Moving Step).
Select two steps to conduct this test. One step should
be selected as a representative step. It should appear
similar to the majority of the other steps on the escalator.
A second step should be chosen to represent any unusual
step or group of steps. Steps that appear to have been
replaced, exhibit wear, show signs of damage, or move
in irregular ways are candidates for the second test step.
If all the steps appear similar, then the steps should be
randomly selected. In any case, the test steps should be
separated by at least eight steps.
If the escalator is a "DOWN" escalator, or the escalator
is operated in both directions, the test step should be
moved to the top of the escalator before the curved skirt
panels prior to each test run, and run down during the
test. If the escalator is normally operated as an "UP"
escalator, then the test step should be moved to the
bottom of the escalator just before the curved skirt panels
prior to each test run, and run up during the test.
(1) Install the test apparatus on the step to be tested.
Install a polycarbonate test specimen on the test
apparatus.
(2) Orient a frictional force transducer to match the
angle of the skirt panel as shown in Fig. 7.17.2.
(3) Using the test apparatus apply a 25 lbf (110 N)
load between the step and skirt. The load should be
maintained throughout the test,
(4) Start a new test and begin acquiring data as
soon as the escalator is operating at rated speed. Data
obtained prior to the escalator operating at rated speed
Fig. 7.17.2 Angle of Skirt Panel
Step nose
>1 in.
(25 mm)
<4 in
{100 mm)
<10 in.
(250 mm)
is to be discarded. A coefficient of friction and a loaded
gap measurement should be recorded every 6 in.
(150 mm) at a minimum.
(5) Run the escalator continuously until the test
step and apparatus reach the curved skirt panel at the
opposite end of the escalator. Stop collecting data.
(6) Process the collected data.
(7) Repeat steps (1) through (6) for both sides of
both test steps. Use a new polycarbonate test specimen
for each run. The index values obtained should not
exceed the values specified by ASME A17.1 and /or
A17.3 Codes.
(b) Loaded Gap Test (Stationary Step). This test will be
conducted in the curved portions of the escalator where
moving step testing was not conducted. The steps
selected for this test can be the same as those used for
the coefficient of friction and loaded gap moving step
tests. The escalator should be stationary while these
measurements are taken.
(1) Move the step to be tested to the flat portion
of the escalator at the bottom of the escalator. The edge
of the combplate should be approximately 6 in. (150 mm)
from the edge of the test step.
(2) Install the test apparatus on the step to be tested.
Install a polycarbonate test specimen on the portion of
the apparatus that touches the skirt panel.
(3) Using the test apparatus apply a 25 lbf (110 N)
load between the step and the skirt.
(4) Measure and record the loaded gap.
(5) Remove the 25 lbf (110 N) load and advance
device or escalator so that the device moves approxi-
mately 12 in. (300 mm) further away from the combplate.
(6) Repeat steps (3) through (5) until the test appa-
ratus has reached the point where the coefficient of fric-
tion and loaded gap moving step test begins.
(7) Repeat steps (1) through (6) for the opposite
skirt panel.
(S) Repeat the previous seven steps, but this time
start at the top of the escalator and gradually move the
110
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
escalator down until the apparatus has reached the area
where moving step measurements were made.
The recorded loaded gap measurements should not
exceed the values specified by ASME A17.1 and/or
ASME A17.3 Codes.
7.17.3 Acceptance
Check that the skirt panels extend to a height of at
least 1 in. (25 mm) vertically above the step tread nose
line and that they meet Code deflection requirements.
7.17.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 802.Se,
802.3f, 802.3k, 1008.2s, 1008.21, 1206.6b, and 1206.6c.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.3.3.5, 6.1.3.3.6, (NR 802.3k), (NR
1008.2s), (NR 1008.2t), 8.6.8.4, and (NR 1206.6c).
ITEM 7.18
OUTDOOR PROTECTION
7.18.1 Periodic Inspections
For escalators installed under A17.1a-1988 and later
editions, check that the required cover over the hori-
zontal projection of the unit is present and in good condi-
tion. Verify that there is no accumulation of snow or
freezing rain on the steps or landing plates.
7.18.2 Periodic Test
Heaters are required for escalators installed under
A17.1a-1988 and later editions only if steps are subject
to snow or freezing rain. Check that heaters are opera-
tional. Heaters may be located inside the unit (see
Item 8.3.2).
7.18.3 Acceptance
Check that the cover extends outward from the center-
line of the handrail such that a line from the edge of
the cover to the handrail centerline is not less than 15 deg
from the vertical. Two methods for checking this are
shown in Fig. 7.18.3.
Check that the landing plates and combplates have
provisions to provide a secure foothold when wet.
Check that all electrical components are weatherproof,
that all wiring is identified for use in wet locations, and
that they are properly installed (gaskets, seals, etc.).
7.18.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Section 807; and
Rules 1008.2p and 1009.2L
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.8; and 8.11.4.2.14 and 8.10.4.1.1(q).
ITEM 7.19
MAINTENANCE RECORDS
7.19.1 Periodic Inspections
Review the maintenance records and verify that they
are available to elevator personnel and that they are
legible and up to date. They should include the
following:
(a) description of maintenance task performed and
dates
(b) description and dates of examinations, tests,
adjustments, repairs, and replacements
(c) description and dates of call backs (trouble calls)
or reports that are reported to elevator personnel by any
means, including corrective action taken
(d) verify that a start up procedure is available to
authorized personnel (A17.1, requirement 8.6.10.5)
(e) electronic format is acceptable
7.19.2 Periodic Test
7.19.3 Acceptance
7.19.4 References
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.6.1.4, c8.6.12.2.5, and 8.6.10.5.
ITEM 7.20
EARTHQUAKE INSPECTION AND TESTS (SEISMIC
RISK ZONE 2 OR GREATER)
7.20.1 Periodic Inspections
7.20.2 Periodic Test
Check the operation of the seismic switch where
provided.
7.20.3 Acceptance
(a) Verify that the balustrades are installed and fas-
tened according to the manufacturer's drawings.
(b) Verify that seismic switch is installed and if it is
used exclusively to control the escalator, it is located in
a machine room, machinery space and, where possible,
mounted adjacent to a vertical load-bearing member. If
there is no vertical load-bearing member in close prox-
imity, it may be located at the nearest accessible vertical
load-bearing member at approximately the same hori-
zontal level as the upper machinery space or machine
room.
(c) Verify that the seismic switch, when actuated,
causes power to be removed from the escalator driving
machine and brake.
(io)
(10)
7.20.4 References
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and
Requirements 8.5.1 and 8.5.4.
later editions —
111
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 7*18.3 Escalator Cover Overlap
c/2/c/l must be 0.268 or more
Use a protractor to
measure either angle
15 deg or more
Plumb line
Two Methods for Checking Compiiance
with Requirement 6.1.8.2 (Rule 807.2)
Cover Requirement
112
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Part 8
Escalator — Internal
ITEM 8.1
MACHINERY SPACE ACCESS, LIGHTING,
RECEPTACLE, AND CONDITION
8.1.1 Periodic Inspections
For remote machine rooms, see Item 8.1.2.
do) 8.1.2 Periodic Test
Determine that the means of access is securely fas-
tened in place. A17.3b-1995 requires that access plates
be fastened in place when no more than 30 lbf (311 N)
effort is required to open them. If a door is used, verify
that it is kept locked and the key is available only to
authorized personnel. Check the lighting and test the
receptacle. In remote machine space, check that lighting
at floor level is at least 10 fc (108 lx) for escalators
installed under A17.1-1981 and later editions.
Verify that the space is clean of dirt and rubbish and
free of oil and combustibles. Items unrelated to escalator
maintenance or operation shall not be stored in machine
space. No lubricant or solvent with a flashpoint less than
110°F (43°C) shall be stored in such space. Water should
not have accumulated on the floor of the space. Verify
that jumpers are not stored in the machine space,
hoistway, or pit. For escalators installed under
A17.1-1978 to A17.1a-2005, verify that the two fluores-
cent demarcation lamps are clean, green, and in good
condition at each landing.
Verify that no penetrations exist through the sides
and undersides of the machinery space and truss that
compromises its fire resistance or allows physical contact
with moving parts.
For escalators installed under Al 7. 1-2000 /B44-00 and
later editions, check that a fixed guard is in place to
protect against accidental contact with the moving steps.
(10) 8.1.3 Acceptance
Check whether a reasonable means of access to the
interior is provided. Where access plates are used, they
should comply with the Code weight restrictions.
Removal of the floor plates over the landing pit consti-
tutes reasonable access if the opening uncovered affords
ample space for the entry of one person. When an access
door is provided on the side of the enclosure, verify the
proper functioning of the door key and lock and that
the key is only removeable in the locked position.
If fire shutters are required by the local building code,
verify that they are present at ventilation openings and
operate correctly. Verify that demarcation lights are
located within 16 in. (406 mm) of the combplate, and
properly installed (see Item 7.5.1).
Verify that the 15 A, 120 V duplex receptacle is prop-
erly located in machine rooms, under access plates and
machine areas in the incline, are functional, and that the
light control for remote machine rooms is within easy
reach of the access and can be operated without reaching
or passing over any machinery components.
Check that components not used directly in connec-
tion with the operation of the escalator are not installed
on, in, or through the escalator.
8.1.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Section 806; and
Rules 801.1, 805.7, 1008.2a, 1009.2J, and 1206.6a.
A17.1-2000/R44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.7; and 6.1.2.1, 6.1.6.7, 6.1.3.14,
8.11.4.2.1, 8.10.4.1.2(a), 8.1, 8.6.1.6.3, c8.6.12.2.6, 8.6.8.14,
8.6.8.15, and 8.6.8.13.
A17.3 — Paragraph 555.
ITEM 8.2
MACHINERY SPACE STOP SWITCHES AND
INSPECTION CONTROL
8.2.1 Periodic Inspections
For remote machine rooms, see Item 8.2.2.
8.2.2 Periodic Test
Test the operation of machine space stop switch (es)
by placing them in the stop position. Then, make sure
that everyone is clear and attempt to start the escalator
with the key switch.
For escalators installed under A17.1-2000/B44-00 and
later editions, check the operation of the inspection con-
trol device from each end. The device only permits
movement by a constant pressure means, and clearly
indicates the direction of travel.
If a plug in control station is used, verify that it is
stored in the upper landing machinery space.
Have the unit operated with the inspection control
device. Check that the device only permits movement
by a constant pressure means and clearly indicates the
direction of travel.
8.2.3 Acceptance
Check that stop switches are properly installed, cor-
rectly labeled, and operate correctly in all machine
(io)
(10)
113
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
spaces or other spaces where access to the interior is
provided. Where the main line disconnect switch is
located, a separate stop switch is not required.
8.2.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 210.2,
805.Se, (NR 6.1.6.2.2), 1008.2b, and 1009.2k.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.26.2, 6.1.6.3.5, 6.1.6.2.2, 8.11.4.2.2, and
8.10.4.1.2(b).
ITEM 8.3
CONTROLLER AND WIRING
8.3.1 Periodic Inspections
For remote machine rooms, inspect as outlined in
Item 8.3.2.
(io) 8.3.2 Periodic Test
Examine the controller visually to verify that it is clean
and that the switches, contactors, and relays and their
electrical connections are in good condition. Check that
the fuses are in place, of the proper type and rating,
and have not been jumped or otherwise tampered with.
Check for jumper wires or other changes which may
indicate that safety devices have been defeated or
altered. Visually examine wiring for damage and all
components for evidence of overheating. Operate the
main line circuit breakers or disconnect switch to verify
that all power is removed from the drive machine.
Verify that all electrical components are enclosed to
prevent accidental contact. If heaters are present (see
Item 7.18.2), verify that they are operational. For escala-
tors installed under A17.1-1965 through A17.1a-1985,
verify that the circuit breakers will not be automatically
opened by the fire alarm.
(io) 8.3.3 Acceptance
Check for proper voltage, correct wiring, and arrange-
ment of wiring, controller, and other components.
Check numbering of drive machines and disconnects
where multiple drive machines are in a machine room.
Verify that disconnects are in sight of machines operated.
Inspect all wiring enclosure raceways conduit, electrical
metallic tubing, metal wireways, junction boxes for con-
dition, workmanship, and fastening.
Visually inspect condition of weatherproof electrical
enclosure where required on outdoor units. Verify that
use of flexible conduit, armored cable, and flexible leads
complies with the applicable code requirements.
The person or firm installing the escalator must pro-
vide a manufacturer's written procedure and demon-
strate compliance with 6.1.6.10 or 6.2.6.9. Where there
are no test or check requirements, the written checklist
must state "No test or check required/' The documenta-
tion must state the reason no test or check is required.
This procedure may also be part of the maintenance
control program (MCP) as required by 8.6.1.2.1.
The following shall be documented or demonstrated:
(a) completion or maintenance of circuit (6.1.6.13)
(b) redundancy and its checking (6.1.6.10.1 and
6.1.6.10.2)
(c) static control (6.1.6.10.3)
(d) electrically powered safety devices (EPD)
(6.2.6.10)
(e) installation of devices to make electrical protective
devices (EPD) ineffective (6.2.6.11)
(f) contactors and relays for use in critical operating
circuits (6.1.6.14)
Also include documentation when required by
A17.7-2007/B44.7-07and later editions — Requirements
2.10.1 and 2.10.2.
8.3.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Sections 806 and
807.2, 805.10b, 805.12, 1101, 1206.1, 1008.2c, 1009.21,
1009.2, and (NR 10.3.3).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.7; 6.1.8.2, 6.1.6.10, 6.1.6,13, 8.3.3,
8.6.1.2.1, 8.11.4.2.3, 8.10.4.1.2(c), and 10.3.3.
A17.1a-2008 — Requirement 8.11.4.2 redesignated as
8.6.8.15.
ITEM 8.4
DRIVE MACHINE AND BRAKE
8.4.1 Periodic Inspections
8.4.2 Periodic Test
Verify that the driving machine is properly secured,
lubricated, clean, and in good condition. Visually check
the driving-machine fastenings and bearing caps to ver-
ify that they are tight.
Verify that the driving machine is connected to the
main drive shaft by toothed gearing, a mechanical cou-
pling, or a chain and that it is in good condition. Look
for evidence of any excessive backlash in the driving
gears or chains. If a chain is used to connect the driving
machine to a sprocket on the main drive shaft, visually
examine the chain and sprockets for wear, excessive
slack, and proper lubrication. Lack of lubrication for a
chain may be indicated by rouge (red rust deposits) on
the side plates of the links.
For escalators installed under A17.1a-1988 and later
editions, verify that cast iron links are not used. If the
links appear to be cast iron, have a small hole drilled
(in a low stress area) and observe the drill cuttings. If
the cuttings are a fine powder, cast iron is indicated. If
the cuttings are shavings, then the links are not cast iron.
Inspect any drive belts and sheaves for damage and
wear. Check for proper belt tension and reasonable
equality of tension in a set of belts.
(10)
(10)
114
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
A5MEA17.2-2010
Visually examine the components for signs of over-
heating. Verify that an electrically released brake is pres-
ent and automatically applied when power is
interrupted. It is to be located on the driving machine
for units installed under A17. 1-1955 through
A17.1a-1957 and A17.1c-1986 and later editions. Other
editions allowed the brake to be on the main drive shaft.
For escalators installed under A17.1b-1983 and later
editions, verify that the driving-machine brake is located
on the gear reducer of main drive shaft if means other
than a continuous shaft mechanical coupling or toothed
gearing is used to connect the motor to the gear reducer.
For escalators installed under A17.1b-1983 and later
editions and A17.3, the brake may be magnetically
applied using a ceramic permanent magnet. Prior to
this, a mechanically applied brake was required. Visually
inspect the condition of the brake pads, drums, and
discs.
For escalators installed to A17.1b-1983 and later edi-
tions, this brake must stop a down-running escalator
with a retardation not exceeding 3 ft/s2 (0.91 m/s2). For
escalators installed to A17.1b-1983 through A17.1-2000,
this was a maximum rate. For escalators installed to
A17.1a-2002 and later editions, it is an average rate, but
there is an additional restriction on the peak horizontal
retardation, which is not intended to be field verified.
It is not required to measure the actual retardation.
Instead, the brake torque will provide verification that
those requirements are met in addition to other brake
requirements (e.g., stopping and holding the rated load).
Visually inspect all mechanisms for condition and
operation.
Verify that escalators installed under A17.1b-1983 and
later editions have a nameplate or data plate that speci-
fies the required brake torque. Escalators installed under
A17.1a-1988 and later editions require that the name-
plate or data plate torque be specified as breakaway, the
maximum torque required to cause the brake to begin
moving, or dynamic, the torque required to keep the
shaft moving very slowly at a steady rate. The location
where the torque is to be measured is required to be
clearly indicated.
For escalators installed under A17.1a-1991 and later
editions, the nameplate or data plate is required to spec-
ify the range of brake torque. For escalators installed to
A17. 1-2000 and later editions, it must also indicate the
minimum distance from the skirt obstruction device to
the combplate.
For escalators installed to A17. 1-2004 and later edi-
tions, it must also indicate the type of brake (fixed or
variable). While the range of brake torque is still required
to be indicated for fixed torque brakes, for variable
torque brakes the minimum brake torque for a loaded
escalator and minimum stopping distance for an
unloaded escalator must be indicated.
Have the torque tested to verify that the torque com-
plies and check the minimum stopping distance for vari-
able torque brakes. Note that temperature can affect the
brake torque.
The torque wrench should have a current calibration
certificate traceable to the National Bureau of Standards
and have a range of at least 25% higher than the required
torque.
If the driving-machine brake is separated from the
main drive shaft by a chain, check for the presence of
a second brake that is required on the main drive shaft.
The requirements for this additional brake on the main
drive shaft are:
(a) A17.1-1960 through A17.1a-1982 required that it
be electrically released if an electrically released brake
was not provided on the driving machine.
(b) A17.1-1955 through A17.1a-1982 required that it
be mechanically applied, while A17.1b-1983 and later
editions required that it be either mechanically or mag-
neticaly (ceramic permanent magnet) applied.
(c) A17.1b-1983 through A17.1d-2000 required that
it stop a down-running escalator with rated load at a
rate not to exceed 3 ft/ sec2 (0.91 m/s2).
(d) A17.3 requires the brake to be mechanically or
magnetically (permanent magnet) applied and capable
of stopping a down-running escalator with rated load.
8.4.3 Acceptance
Check the certification for the driving-machine brake.
Check the stopping distance with no load. Compare
this with the minimum stopping distance and the mini-
mum distance from the skirt obstruction devices to the
combplate against the information on the data plate.
Check the brake certification.
8.4.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Section 804; and
Rule 1008.2d.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.5; and 8.11.4.2.4.
A17.3 — Section 5.2.
ITEM 8.5
SPEED GOVERNOR
8.5.1 Periodic Inspections
8.5.2 Periodic Test
When a speed governor is required, test it to verify
that it is functioning. Manually operate the switch or
use any testing mechanisms (such as flywheel weights)
that may be provided. The flyballs and all operating
mechanisms must be present and in good operating
condition. When the switch is opened, it should inter-
rupt power to the driving machine. For escalators
installed under A17.1-1990 and later editions, verify
115
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
that the escalator cannot be started by the starting switch
until the device is manually reset.
When a manual reset is required for units installed
under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the power
off and then back on, and then try the start switch to
check that the device will not reset. Also, some indication
that the device has been activated needs to be provided
(fault finder, etc.).
8.53 Acceptance
When an overspeed governor is required, verify that
it activates at the proper speed, which cannot be more
than 40% above the rated speed. This can be done using
a rubber drive wheel driven by a variable speed drill
and a tachometer. Other methods approved by the man-
ufacturer for field testing may be used.
8.5.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 805.3b,
1008.2e, and 1009.2m.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.6.3.2, 8.11.4.2.5, and 8.10.4.1.2(e).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 5.3.3 and 5.3.5.
ITEM 8.6
BROKEN DRIVE CHAIN AND
DISCONNECTED MOTOR SAFETY DEVICE
8.6.1 Periodic Inspections
8.6.2 Periodic Test
(a) If the driving machine is connected to the main
drive shaft by a chain, check the broken drive chain
device to verify that it will apply the main shaft brake
and stop the drive machine if the drive chain parts. All
parts of the device should be in good condition and
show freedom to move. Have the switch manually oper-
ated and verify that it will open the drive motor circuit.
Common devices include a block that is held in tension
by the drive chain that activates the switch when tension
is lost, or a plate that depresses a switch when the drive
chain strikes it. For escalators installed under
A 17. 1-1 990 and later editions, verify that the escalator
cannot be started by the starting switch until the device
is manually reset.
When a manual reset is required for units installed
under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the power
off and then back on, and then try the start switch to
check that the device will not reset. Also, some indication
that the device has been activated needs to be provided
(fault finder, etc.).
(b) If the drive motor is attached to a gear reducer
by means other than a continuous shaft, coupling, or
toothed gearing, check that the device provided will
apply the brake if the motor becomes disconnected from
the gear reducer. Have the switch manually operated
and verify that all operating mechanisms are present,
clean, lubricated, and in good condition. For escalators
installed under Al 7. 1-1990 and later editions, verify
that the escalator cannot be started by the starting switch
until the device is manually reset.
When a manual reset is required for units installed
under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the power
off and then back on, and then try the start switch to
check that the device will not reset. Also, some indication
that the device has been activiated needs to be provided
(fault finder, etc.).
8.6.3 Acceptance
8.6.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 804.3b,
805.3d, 805.3J, and 1008.2f.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.5.3.2, 6.1.6.3.4, 6.1.6.3.10, and
8.11.4.2.6.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 5.3.5 and 5.3.6.
ITEM 8.7
REVERSAL STOP SWITCH
8.7.1 Periodic Inspections
8.7.2 Periodic Test
Manually operate the device and verify that all
operating mechanisms are present and in good condition
and that the device will open the circuits to the driving-
machine motor and brake to stop an ascending escalator
from reversing its direction of travel. For escalators
installed under A17. 1-1990 and later editions, verify that
the escalator cannot be started by the starting switch
until the device is manually reset.
When a manual reset is required for units installed
under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the power
off and then back on, and then try the start switch to
check that the device will not reset. Also, some indication
that the device has been activated needs to be provided
(fault finder, etc.).
There are several different types of devices that are
used (friction reversal devices, speed monitoring, etc.).
Therefore, the type of device will dictate the testing
procedure. If the device cannot be manually operated,
a written procedure must be provided by the person or
firm performing the tests.
8.7.3 Acceptance
8.7.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 805.3h and
1008.2g.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.6.3.8, 8.10.4.1.2(g), and 8.11.4.2.7.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 5.3.5 and 5.3.9.
116
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
ITEM 8.8
BROKEN STEP CHAIN DEVICE
8.8.1 Periodic Inspections
8.8.2 Periodic Test
Manually operate the broken step chain devices to
verify that each will interrupt power to the driving
machine and brake. Visually inspect each device to ver-
ify that they are in position to operate and will activate
when either step chain breaks, and (where automatic
tensioning is not provided) when excessive sag occurs
in either step chain. For escalators installed under
A17.1-1990 and later editions, verify that the escalator
cannot be started by the starting switch until the device
is manually reset.
When a manual reset is required for units installed
under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the power
off and then back on, and then try the start switch to
check that the device will not reset. Also, some indication
that the device has been activated needs to be provided
(fault finder, etc.).
8.8.3 Acceptance
8.8.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 805.3c and
1008.2h.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6,1.6.3.3 and 8.11.4.2.8.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 5.3.4 and 5.3.5.
ITEM 8.9
STEP UPTHRUST DEVICE
8.9.1 Periodic Inspections
(10) 8.9.2 Periodic Test
The operation of the upthrust device was tested dur-
ing the external inspection and test in Item 7.9.2. While
the steps are removed (Item 8.12.2), manually move the
mechanism and visually inspect the components of the
upthrust device. Visually examine the upthrust tabs on
each step for damage, alignment, and attachment (see
Fig. 8.9.2).
8.9.3 Acceptance
8.9.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 805.3i and
1008.2L
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.6.3.9 and 8.11.4.2.9.
A17.3 — Paragraph 5.1.7.
ITEM 8.10
MISSING STEP DEVICE
8.10.1 Periodic Inspections
8.10.2 Periodic Test
For escalators installed under A17.1b-1989 and later
editions, test the missing step device by running the
escalator with a step missing on the underside of the
escalator. The device must stop the escalator before the
gap resulting from the missing step emerges from the
combplate.
For escalators installed under A17.1-1990 and later
editions, verify that the escalator cannot be started by
the starting switch until the device is manually reset.
When a manual reset is required for units installed
under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the power
off and then back on, and then try the start switch to
check that the device will not reset. Also, some indication
that the device has been activated needs to be provided
(fault finder, etc.).
8.10.3 Acceptance
8.10.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions
1008.2).
do)
Rules 805.5 and
editions
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later
Requirements 6.1.6.5 and 8.11.4.2.10.
ITEM 8.11
STEP LEVEL DEVICE
8.11.1 Periodic Inspections
8.11.2 Periodic Test
For escalators installed under A17.1-1990 and later
editions, visually inspect the step level devices at each
end and on both sides to verify that it is in place and
able to function. Have the switch manually operated to
verify that it will open the safety circuit and stop the
escalator.
For escalators installed under A17. 1-1990 and later
editions, verify that the escalator cannot be started by
the starting switch until the device is manually reset.
When a manual reset is required for units installed
under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the power
off and then back on, and then try the start switch to
check that the device will not reset. Also, some indication
that the device has been activated needs to be provided
(fault finder, etc.).
8.11.3 Acceptance
Have the devices tested (at both ends and on each
side) by mechanically lowering a step \ in. (3.2 mm)
and operating the escalator. A smaller roller or adjust-
ment may be used to lower the step.
117
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 8.9.2 Typical Step Upthrust Device
Pivot
Step hooks
Upthrust switch
8.11.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 805.3k,
1008.2k, and 1009.2n.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.6.3.11, 8.11.4.2.11, and 8.10.4.1.2(k).
ITEM 8.12
STEPS, STEP CHAINS, AND TRUSSES
8.12.1 Periodic Inspections
8.12.2 Periodic Test
Have at least half of the steps removed, then move
the remaining steps to the upper half of the escalator
(see Fig. 8.12.2). Some escalators use the steps as the
side guide means and require every sixth step to be left
in to prevent the chain from falling off. Using a good
light visually inspect the drip pans, undersides of steps,
trusses, roller tracks, chains, handrails, and the interiors
of balustrades, skirts, and newels. Verify that they are
present, in good condition, clean of dirt and rubbish,
and free of oil and combustibles. Visually inspect for
any damage to the fire-resistive material on the escalator
enclosure (see Item 8.1).
Visually inspect the chains for lubrication and buildup
of dirt and grease. Lack of lubrication may be indicated
by rouge (red rust deposits) on the side plates of the
links.
Verify that cast iron links are not used on escalators
installed under A17. 1-1978 and later editions. See
Item 8.4.2 for method of identifying cast iron.
Check the operation of any escalator step-chain ten-
sion devices. If they are of the automatically operated
"tension-weight"-type, verify that the truss is provided
with a positive means to retain the weights in the truss
if the weights are released.
Move the remaining steps to the lower half of the
escalator and inspect the upper half in the same manner
(see Fig. 8.12.2).
Inspect each of the steps for evidence of structural
damage, condition of the step rollers and upthrust tabs
and material. Verify that the step tread material is non-
combustible or that the undersides are properly covered
with fire-resistive materials. Escalators installed under
A17.1-1955 through A17.1-1993 required that step
frames be made of noncombustible materials.
A17.1a-1994 and later editions specifically required that
step frames, treads, and risers, excluding any attach-
ments or inserts, be made of metal (except magnesium
alloys) or meet certain flammability requirements.
8.12.3 Acceptance
Verify that if the tracking system fails, the running
gear is retained in its guides and the step wheel tracks
will prevent displacement of the steps and running gear
if the chain breaks.
Verify that foreign material such as stone or concrete
is not in the truss interior.
If the step rollers are not located directly under the
step (i.e., located past the edges of the sides of the steps),
then check that provisions (e.g., unistrut, c-channel) are
made to prevent the step from falling into the truss/
step band upon the loss of the step roller assemblies.
Check that components not used directly in connec-
tion with the operation of the escalator are not installed
on, in, or through the escalator.
8.12.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 801.1, 802.7,
802.8, 802.11, 806.3, 1008.21, 1009.2o, and 1206.6.
118
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 8.12.2 Positioning of Steps for Inspection of Truss
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.2.1, 6.1.3.5.8, 6.1.3.7, 6.1.3.8, 6.1.3.11,
6.1.3.1.4, 6.1.7.3, 8.11.4.2.12, 8.10.4.1.2(1), and 8.6.8.
ITEM 8.13
HANDRAIL SYSTEMS AND SAFETY DEVICES
8.13.1 Periodic Inspections
(10) 8.13.2 Periodic Test
Examine the handrail drive systems to ensure that all
chains, pulleys, gears, rollers, and belts are present and
in good condition. The operation should be free of exces-
sive noise and slack, which indicates wear.
(a) For escalators installed under A17.1a-1988
through A17.1b-1992, test the operation of the stopped
handrail device. Have the handrail motion sensor
mechanically disconnected while the unit is off and then
run the unit, or grab the handrail and stall it while
the escalator is running. Verify that the alarm sounds
immediately and the escalator stops within 15 sec.
(b) For escalators installed under A17. 1-1993 and
later editions, check the operation of the handrail speed
monitoring device. An alarm must sound immediately
if the speed of either handrail deviates from the step
speed by 15% or more, and the unit must shut down if
the speed deviation is continuous for 2 sec to 6 sec. If
holding the moving handrail cannot activate the device,
then it will be necessary to activate the device by another
means (disconnecting the speed sensor, changing dip
switch settings on the controller, etc.). Verify that the
unit cannot be started until the device is manually reset.
For units installed under A17.1b-1995 and later editions,
turn the power off and then back on and then try the
start switch to check that the device will not reset. Also,
some indication that the device has been activated needs
to be provided (fault finder, etc.).
(c) For escalators installed under A17.1b-1992 and
later editions, test the operation of the handrail entry
device by having a soft object that will not damage the
unit inserted between the handrail and hand guard.
After the unit stops, verify that it cannot be restarted
with the key switch until the device has been manually
reset. The device need only operate in the direction of
the handrail travel, except for units installed under
A17.1-1996 and later editions, the device must operate,
irregardless of the direction of travel of the handrail
where an opening is created in the balustrade to prevent
119
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
v No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
entrapment. When a manual reset is required for units
installed under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the
power off and then back on and then try the start switch
to check that the device will not reset. Also, some indica-
tion that the device has been activated needs to be pro-
vided (fault finder, etc.).
8.13.3 Acceptance
(10) 8.13.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 802.4,
802.11, 805.4, 805.3m, (NR 8.6.8.1), 1008.2m, 1008.2q, and
1009.2c.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.3.4, 6.1.3.11, 6.1.6.4, 6.1.6.3.12, 8.6.8.1,
8.11.4.2.13, 8.11.4.2.18, and 8.10.4.1.1(c).
ITEM 8.14
CODE DATA PLATE
8.14.1 Periodic Inspections
Check that the Code Data Plate is installed. This is
the Code that is to be used for the inspection and test.
8.14.2 Periodic Test
8.14.3 Acceptance
8.14.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 808, 908,
and 1200.6.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.9, 8.9, and 8.7.1.8.
ITEM 8.15
RESPONSE TO SMOKE DETECTORS
8.15.1 Periodic Inspections
8.15.2 Periodic Test
For units installed under A17.1a-1994 and later edi-
tions, when smoke detectors are provided that will shut
down a running unit, verify that the emergency stop
button alarm will sound and the unit does not shut down
for at least 15 s. The unit may be tested by activating the
smoke detector or by other means.
CAUTION: If the sensing system is connected to a central fire
alarm system, notify proper authorities before activating.
8.15.3 Acceptance
8.15.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rule 805.8.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 6.1.6.8.
ITEM 8.16
STEP LATERAL DISPLACEMENT DEVICE
8.16.1 Periodic Inspections
8.16.2 Periodic Test
For curved escalators, manually actuate the device on
the stopped escalator. Verify that the starting switch
cannot start the escalator until the device is manually
reset.
8.16.3 Acceptance
8.16.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 805. 3p,
1003.2b(20).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.1.6.3.14, 8.11.4.2.21, and 8.10.4.1.2(r).
ITEM 8.17
INSPECTION CONTROL
8.17.1 Periodic Inspections
8.17.2 Periodic Test
If provided, check the operation of the inspection con-
trol device. Check that the device only permits move-
ment by a constant pressure means, and clearly indicates
the direction of travel. If a plug-in control station is used,
verify that it is stored in the upper pit.
8.17.3 Acceptance
Verify that when the transfer switches located at each
landing are enabled, only the inspection control device
can operate the equipment. Verify that the switches are
properly located, manually operated, protected against
accidental contact, and properly labeled. Verify that if
both switches are activated, then all inspection control
devices are inoperative.
If a portable control station is used, verify that the
cord does not exceed the maximum allowed length. If
a plug-in portable control station is used, check that
either a transfer switch is provided or that when the
portable control station is plugged in, the control of the
equipment is automatically transferred to the control
station.
8.17.4 References
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 6.1.6.2.2.
120
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(io) ITEM 8.18
EARTHQUAKE INSPECTION AND TESTS (SEISMIC
RISK ZONE 2 OR GREATER)
8.18.1 Periodic Inspection
8.18.2 Periodic Test
8.18.3 Acceptance
(a) Verify that the connections between the truss and
the building are installed according to the manufactur-
er's drawings.
(b) Verify that restraints are installed and allow move-
ment as required.
8.18.4 References
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and
Requirements 8.5.2 and 8.53.
later editions
121
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Part 9
Moving Walk — External
ITEM 9.1
GENERAL FIRE PROTECTION
9.1.1 Periodic Inspections
Examine the sides and undersides of the moving walk
trusses and machinery spaces enclosure for damage to
fire-resistive materials. A17.1a-1994 and later editions
permit the use of noncombustible and limited combusti-
ble materials as defined by the building code or
ANSI/NFPA 101.
Check that guards are in place for openings provided
for ventilation of the driving machine and control equip-
ment spaces. Enclosure in fire-resistive ceiling does not
constitute adequate fire protection.
Verify that provisions to protect floor openings from
the passage of flame, heat, and/or smoke that are
required by the building code have not been damaged,
removed, or defeated.
Moving walks installed under Al 7. 1-1981 and later
editions require protection in compliance with
ANSI/NFPA 101 or local codes. Prior to A17.1-1981,
A 17.1 gave requirements for protection of floor opening
for moving walks that were not accredited as a means
of egress. However, since moving walks are no longer
accredited as a means of egress, the inspector must refer
to the local code or the Life Safety Code NFPA-101 for
the protection requirement at each location.
9.1.2 Periodic Test
9.1.3 Acceptance
Verify that floor openings are protected against the
passage of flame, heat, and /or smoke in accordance with
the requirements of the building code.
9.1.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Sections 900 and
901; and Rule 1009.2a.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.1 and 6.2.2; and 8.10.4.1.1(a).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 9.1.1 and 9.2.2.
ITEM 9.2
GEOMETRY
9.2.1 Periodic Inspections
Inspect for evidence of change to the geometry of the
balustrades and if change has been made, inspect as
outlined in Item 9.2.3.
If a moving walk is relocated or a new moving walk
is installed in existing trusses, it must comply with the
current Code requirements. See Figs. 9.2.1(a) and 9.2.1(b)
for dimension requirements of existing moving walks.
Verify that the overhead clearance is in compliance
with local codes.
9.2.2 Periodic Test
9.2.3 Acceptance
(a) Measure the slope of the treadway at the centerline
using a level and protractor or an angle finder at each
incline (if any). See Fig. 9.2.3.
(b) Measure the width of the treadway at a right angle
transverse to the direction of travel. See Tables 9.2.3(a),
9.2.3(b), and 9.2.3(c) for existing moving walks installed
prior to 1971. For moving walks installed under
A17.1-1971 and later editions, refer to A17.1a-1991.
(c) Measure and mark the centerline of each handrail
and use a plumb line to find the horizontal distance
from the handrail centerline to the vertical plane through
the exposed treadway edge. Measure the height from
the top of the handrail to the treadway at several points.
(d) For an interior low deck moving walk, measure
the distance from the vertical face of the interior panels
to the vertical face of the skirt panels using a machinist
level and ruler [see Fig. 9.2.1(b)]. Measure the slope
of the deck perpendicular to the line of travel using a
machinist level and protractor.
9.2.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 902.1, 902.2,
902.3d, (NR 8.6.8.12), 1009.2b, 1009.2g, and 1208.5; and
Appendix D.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.2, 6.2.3.3.4, 8.6.8.12,
8.10.4.1.1(b), 8.10.4.1.1(n), and 8.7.6.2.5; and
(NR Appendix D).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, and 9.3.6.
ITEM 9.3
HANDRAILS
9.3.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Mark one location on each handrail with chalk,
then operate the unit and inspect each handrail through
a complete revolution. The handrails, including splices
and joints, should be free of any cuts, cracks, gouges,
do)
122
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 9.2.1(a) Moving Walk Geometry (for Moving Walks Installed Under A17.1-1965 Through A17.1b-1980) (10)
C^>
30jn_.__
Minimum height
of balustrades
Width of moving walk
[width of moving walk is
exposed width of treadway.
See Tables 9.2.3(a), (b), and (c)]
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
pinch points, or any other condition that would be a
hazard to passengers. The undersides of the handrails
should be close enough to the handrail stand to prevent
any fingers from getting between the handrail and the
handrail stand. Any rust or rubber filings present on
the balustrade deck indicates that an internal inspection
of the handrail system may be warranted.
(b) Verify that the hand or finger guards are present
at the newel base. Check that the guards are in good
condition and properly sized to prevent fingers or hands
from being drawn into the newel. Finger guards are
required under A17. 1-1965 and later editions.
(c) Ride the moving walk holding the handrails
through the entire travel. The handrails should move
smoothly without jerking, at substantially the same
speed as the tread ways. The need to frequently change
grip on the handrail indicate a need for adjustment.
During this ride observe any unusual noise that may
indicate the need for further inspection. At several points
in the ride firmly grip the handrail and attempt to see
if it stalls under moderate force. On many units the
handrails will normally stall if it is firmly gripped
and held.
(d) Listen for noise that may indicate wear of the turn-
around rollers, or other parts.
(e) Moving walks installed under A17.1-1981 through
A17.1a-1987 editions required only one moving handrail
if the slope was 3 deg or less, the width was 24 in.
(610 mm) or less, and the speed was 70 ft/min or less.
Moving walks installed under A17. 1-1965 through
A17.1a-1979 did not require a moving handrail if the
slope was 3 deg or less, and the speed was 70 ft/min
or less. Only one handrail was required (regardless of
speed or incline) if the width was less than 21 in.
(533 mm). A balustrade with no moving handrail should
not have any surface that can be gripped.
(/) Check the horizontal clearance between both lips
of the handrail and the handrail stand (guide).
9.3.2 Periodic Test
For moving walks installed to A17. 1-2000 and later
editions, the person or firm maintaining the equipment
must provide a written checkout procedure and demon-
strate that the handrail speed does not change when a
retarding force, up to the maximum required by Code,
is applied opposite to the direction of travel. Note that
it may be easier to retard the handrail motion when
the handrail is traveling in the down direction (i.e, the
retarding force will oppose the handrail drive system).
123
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
(io) Fig. 9.2.1(b) Moving Walk Geometry (for A/loving Walks Installed Under A17.1-1981 Through A17.1a-1991)
— 4 in. min.
10 in. max., A17.1-1981-A17. 1-1987; "A |\ I/
91/2 in. max., A17.1a-1988 and later ^ ' X V
1 in. min
1 in. min.
42 in. max.
33 in. min., A17.1-1981-A17.1-1987,
30 in. min., A17.1a-1988-1991
Width of moving walk
(exposed width of treadway)
See Fig. 7.2.1(c) for low
deck configuration
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
(10)
Fig. 9.2.3 Maximum Treadway Angle
3 deg max.
12 deg max. at any point, A17. 1-1981 and later editions
andA17.3a-1994
12 deg max. at any point, A17.1-1965-A17.1b-1980
3 deg max.
GENERAL NOTE; 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
124
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
(io) Table 9.2.3(a) Treadway Width (A17.1-1965
Through A17.1d-1970)
(10)
Maximum
Maximum Moving Walk Treadway Width, in.
Treadway Slope
Treadway Speed,
Treadway Speed,
at any Point on
Maximum,
Above 140 ft/min to
Treadway, deg
140 ft/min
180 ft/min
0 to 3
Unlimited
40
Above 3 to 5
110
40
Above 5 to 8
78
40
Above 8 to 12
40
Above 12 to 15
40
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) 1 deg = 1.75 E - 02 radian
(b) 1 in.= 25.4 mm
Table 9.2.3(b) Treadway Width (A17.1-1971 and
Later Editions)
Maximum
Treadway Slope
at any Point,
deg
Maximum Moving Walk Treadway Width, in.
90.1 ft/min 140.1 ft/min
Up to to to
90 ft/min 140 ft/min 180 ft/min
0 to 4(1)
Unrestricted
60
40
4(1) to 8
40
40
40
8 to 12(2)
40
40
Not Permitted
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) 1 deg = 1.75 E - 02 radian
(b) 1 in. = 25.4 mm
NOTES:
(1) 5 deg for units installed under A17. 1-1971 through A17.1-
1978.
(2) 15 deg for units installed prior to A17. 1-1981.
Table 9.2.3(c) Minimum Treadway Width
A17.1a-1980
and Prior
Editions
A17.1-1981 and
Later Editions
and A17.3a-1994
16 in.
22 in.
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) 1 deg = 1.75 E - 02 radians
(b) 1 in. = 25.4 mm
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.3.2, 6.2.3.4, 8.11.4.2.13, and
8.10.4.1.1(c); and (NR Appendix D).
A17.3 — Paragraph 9.3.4.
ITEM 9.4
ENTRANCE AND EGRESS ENDS
9.4.1 Periodic Inspections (io)
(a) The floor surfaces adjacent to the landing plates
must be continuous with the top of the landing plate,
with no abrupt changes in elevation of more than \ in.
(6.4 mm). Access to and egress from the moving walk
should be free of obstacles and tripping hazards. Check
that the pit covers are present and in good condition.
For moving walks installed under A17. 1-1965 through
A17.1b-1989 editions, the landing plate should be
smooth from the line of intersection of the teeth and
the treadway surface for a distance not to exceed 4 in.
(102 mm) and not less than 1 in. (25 mm).
(b) For moving walks installed under the A17.1b-1989
and later editions, a safety zone should be maintained
free of obstacles (see Fig. 7.4.1). These Code dimensions
are minimums and traffic patterns may require larger
distances.
(c) While standing on the unit, verify that the landing
and combplates provide a secure foothold and that out-
door units provide a secure foothold when wet.
9.4.2 Periodic Test
9.4.3 Acceptance
Verify that vertical headroom clearance of 7 ft (2.13 m)
is provided and that the required safety zone is present.
Check that floor openings adjacent to the entire length
of the wellway are protected in accordance with the
applicable building code.
9.4.4 References (io)
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 902.8, 907.3,
and 902.16.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.3.8, c6.2.3.8.5, 6.2.8.3, 6.2.3.16, and
8.6.8.15.
A17.3 — Paragraph 9.4.3.
9.3.3 Acceptance
Check whether each handrail extends at normal
height not less than 12 in. (305 mm) beyond the moving
walk combplates, and verify that required clearances are
present (see Fig. 9.3.3).
9.3.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 902.2, 902.4,
1008.2m, and 1009.2c; and Appendix D.
ITEM 9.5
LIGHTING
9.5.1 Periodic Inspections
Check whether the lighting at the landing plates and
treadway is in compliance with the applicable code by
using a light meter while the moving walk is operating.
Take care not to cast a body shadow on the meter. Note
any lamps that are not operating and their affect on the
moving walk lighting. For moving walks installed under
125
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 9.3.3 Moving Walk Handrail Extension (A17.1-1971 and Later Editions)
End of exposed treadway
^\^^ *- -* 12 in. min.
Handraik
Normal handrail height
10 in. max.
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
A17.1-1965 and later editions, lighting must be a mini-
mum of 5 fc (54 lx), of uniform intensity, and must not
materially contrast with the surrounding area.
9.5.2 Periodic Test
9.5.3 Acceptance
9.5.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 906.2 and
1009.2d.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.7.2 and 8.10.4.1.1(e).
A17.3 — Paragraph 9.7.1.
ITEM 9.6
CAUTION SIGNS
9.6.1 Periodic Inspections
For moving walks installed under A17. 1-1981 and
later editions and moving walks required to conform to
A17.3a-1994/ verify that the required caution signs are
located at both entrances readily visible to boarding
passengers. For moving walks installed under
A17.1-1996 through A17.1d-2000, verify that any addi-
tional signs are located at least 10 ft (3.05 m) horizontally
from the end of the newels and that they do not impede
traffic or otherwise cause persons to stop.
9.6.2 Periodic Test
9.6.3 Acceptance
9.6.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rule 905.8; and
Fig. 805.9a.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.6.8; and Fig. 6.1.6.9.1.
A17.3 — Paragraph 9.6.11.
ITEM 9.7
COMBPLATE AND COMB STEP IMPACT DEVICE
9.7.1 Periodic Inspections
Inspect the comb for missing teeth and proper mesh
with each treadway tread (see Fig. 7.7.1). Verify proper
mesh with each treadway tread by holding a sheet of
stiff paper or business card where the teeth mesh with
the treadway tread while standing well back from the
plate to prevent forcing the plate down. Use of an exten-
sion with an alligator clip to hold the card is
recommended.
NOTE: Telescoping pointers with alligator clips that are used to
ignite water heater pilot lights are availbale in hardware /plumbing
supply stores.
The comb teeth should mesh with and set into the
tread surface so that the teeth are always below the
upper surface of the treads. Any section with one or
more missing or broken teeth should be replaced. For
moving walks installed under A17.1a-1988 and later
editions and moving walks required to conform to
Al 7.33-1994, the comb surfaces must contrast visibly by
color, pattern, or texture.
9.7.2 Periodic Test
For units installed under A17.1b-1992 and later edi-
tions, have the combplate impact devices tested as
follows:
(a) Have a vertical force applied to the center front
edge of the combplate until the device trips. Record the
force required to trip the device and verify the unit will
not start until manually reset.
(b) Have a force applied in the direction of travel at
the front center of the combplate, increasing the force
until the device trips. Record the force required to trip
the device and verify the unit will not start until manu-
ally reset.
126
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(c) Have a force applied in the direction of travel on
one side of the front of the combplate, increasing the
force until the device trips. Record the force required to
trip the device and verify the unit will not start until
manually rest. Repeat this test for the opposite side.
Note that while the maximum horizontal forces were
112 lbf (500 N) at each side and 225 lbf (1 000 N) at the
center of the combplate for moving walks installed to
A17.1b-1992 through A17.1-1996, it is permitted to have
maximum horizontal forces at the higher values permit-
ted by A17.1a-1997 and later editions.
9.7.3 Acceptance
(a) Visually verify that the combplates are vertically
adjustable and that the sections forming the comb teeth
are replaceable.
(b) Place the required weight on the combplate and
landing plate assembly to verify that the combplate and
landing plate will not contact the treadway (see
Fig. 7.7.3).
9*7.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 902.8,
905.3k, 907.3, 1206.6, 1008.2r, and 1009.2e.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.3.8 6.2.6.3.11, 6.2.8.3, 8.6.8, 8.11.4.2.13,
and 8.10.4.1.1(g).
A17.3 — Section 9.4.
ITEM 9.8
DECK BARRICADES
9.8.1 Periodic Inspections
For low deck moving walks installed under
A17.1a-1988 and later editions and moving walks
required to comply with A17.3a-1994, check to see that
deck barricades, when required, are firmly in place and
in good condition when the outer deck exceeds 5 in.
(125 mm) and the deck is more than 36 in. (915 mm)
above any part of the floor. The barrier must extend to
4 in. (102 mm) below the handrail top.
9.8.2 Periodic Test
For moving walks installed under A17.1b-1989 and
later editions, verify that glass or plastic replacement
panels meet the requirements of ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR
Part 1201.
9.8.3 Acceptance
All glass or plastic (glazing material) must be legibly
and permanently marked 16 CFR Part 1201, " American
National Standard Z97 .1" or with the characters
"ANSI Z97.1" and also shall be marked with the manu-
facturer's distinctive mark or designation.
Check that all exposed fasteneer heads are the tamper-
resistant type.
9.8.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 902.3h and
1009.2f.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.3.3.8 and 8.10.4.1.1(h).
A17.3 — Paragraph 9.3.3.6.
ITEM 9.9
TREADWAYS
9.9.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Mark treadways with chalk, then run the moving
walk through one complete revolution. Check that each
treadway is continuous, unbroken, clean, free of debris,
and that the treads are in good condition.
(b) Check at least everytenth pallet or a distance of
approximately one-tenth the entire length, by riding on
it, to verify that the following requirements are met:
(1) There is no excessive movement or play in the
direction of travel, at right angles to the direction of
travel, and vertically. While standing on the treadway,
a shift of weight should not cause the treadway to strike
the skirt panels.
(a) Belt Type. The treadway consists of an integral
belt of uniform width and thickness, made or spliced
in one continuous piece forming a loop.
(b) Pallet Type. The treadway consists of closely
coupled meshing pallets, or small platforms. This is simi-
lar to an escalator step without a riser.
(c) Belt Pallet Type. For moving walks installed
under A17.1-1987 and earlier editions, this type was
permitted. The treadway consists of a continuous inte-
gral belt supported on coupled pallets. The pallets may
not ordinarily be visible when standing on the treadway.
(2) Alternate cleats on adjacent pallets should mesh
so that no continuous transverse gap exist between pal-
lets. Mesh can be verified by trying to fit a thin piece
of stiff paper or business card between treadways while
the moving walk is moving in the up direction. The check
should be made across the entire width (see Fig. 7.7.1).
(3) The tread surface should be slotted in the direc-
tion parallel to the travel so that they mesh with the
combplate teeth. Verify that a cleat is formed adjacent
to the skirt panel on each side of the treadway (see
Fig. 9.9.1).
(4) The cleats in the treadway tread surfaces should
not be damaged, broken, or worn. Special consideration
should be given to excessive clearance and sharp edges.
While standing on the treadway tread, verify that it
provides a secure foothold.
(5) A jerking motion on the treadways and exces-
sive noise in the machinery space indicates that the drive
and support system should be examined to discover the
source or cause.
(6) Use a straight edge to verify that adjacent pallets
do not vary more than V16 in. (1.6 mm) in elevation
127
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
t No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(10)
Fig. 9.9.1 Moving Walk Treadway Slots
V4 in. max.
slot width,
A17.1-1965-A17.1a-1991
| 3/gin., A17.1a-1988 and later editions;
Cleat adjacent to
skirt panel
3/8 in., A17. 1-1988 and later editions;
3/16 in., A17.M965-A17.1-1987
Minimum slot depth
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. = 25.4 mm
(10)
(vertical displacement). On belt-pallet-type treadways,
verify that the fasteners that attach the belt to the pallets
do not project above the exposed treadway surfaces.
Inspect the splices in belt-type treadways to verify that
they produce a continuous unbroken treadway.
(7) For moving walks required to conform to
A17.3a-1994, check that the splices of belt-type
treadways are continuous and unbroken.
9.9.2 Periodic Test
9.9.3 Acceptance
Review fatigue test and certification for the Code
compliance.
Check that the material for pallet frames and
treadways, including any attachments or inserts, meet
Code requirements.
9.9.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 902.5, 902.6,
902.9, 902.11, and 1105.1.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.3.5, 6.2.3.6, 6.2.3.9, 6.2.3.11, 8.6.8.6, and
8.3.11.1.
A17.3 — Paragraph 9.3.5.
ITEM 9.10
OPERATING AND SAFETY DEVICES
9.10.1 Periodic Inspections
(a) Starting Switches. Verify that a record of personnel
that were trained in the proper procedure to start up
the moving walk is available on site. Operate the moving
walk in both directions using the key-operated start
switch. When operating the switch, the exposed
treadways should be within sight. Check the operation
and location of this switch. A17.1b-1989 and later edi-
tions specifically prohibit automatic starting by any
means. Verify that the key is only accessible to author-
ized personnel.
For units installed under A17.1-1996 and later edi-
tions, verify that the start switch operating positions are
properly marked. Check that the key is only removable
in the "RUN" position. Turn the switch from "RUN" to
either "UP" or "DOWN" and quickly let go of the key.
The switch must return to the "RUN" position. Repeat
for the other direction of travel. Next turn the switch to
either the "UP" or "DOWN" position. Stop the unit with
the emergency stop button and keep the switch in the
"UP" or "DOWN" position. The unit must not restart.
Repeat for the other direction of travel.
(b) Emergency Stop Switches. Operate the emergency
stop switches/buttons and observe that the moving
walk stops. Verify that this stop switch will not start the
moving walk. If automatic starting devices are provided
(A17.1a-1988), verify that they will not function after
the stop switch is operated. Verify proper labeling and
signal where required. The requirements for emergency
stop switches in prior editions of the Code are as follows:
(1) A17.1-1965: Emergency stop button or other
type of manually operated switches having a red button
or handle shall be accessible located at or near the top
and bottom landing of each moving walk, and shall be
protected against operation by accident.
(2) A17.1a-1988 and later editions required a
readily moveable self-closing transparent cover and an
80 dBA signal when the cover is moved. The cover
should be marked "Emergency Stop." The location of
the button should be in the upper right quadrant when
128
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
facing the moving walk at each end for high deck balus-
trades, and for low deck balustrades it must be below
the handrail height. Remote stop switches were prohib-
ited and handles were not allowed.
(c) Tandem Operation. For moving walks operated in
tandem, A17.1a-1988 and later editions, where traffic
flow is such that bunching will occur if the moving walk
carrying passengers away stops, verify that the units are
electrically interlocked. The interlocks must stop the unit
carrying passengers into the common intermediate land-
ing, if the unit carrying passengers away from the land-
ing should stop. Also, verify that the interlocks assure
that the units run in the same direction.
9.10.2 Periodic Test
(10) 9.10.3 Acceptance
Check that the starting switches are within reach of
an emergency stop button. Start the unit and hold the
start switch in the "UP" direction, then actuate the emer-
gency stop button. The unit must not restart until the
start switch is placed in the "RUN" position and the
starting sequence is repeated. Repeat this for the
"DOWN" direction and for the other start switch.
For low deck moving walks, check the clearances
between the handrail and the stop switch enclosure and
the distance from the button to the handrail. In jurisdic-
tions enforcing NBCC, if provided, check that the auxil-
iary emergency stop is within view of the moving walk.
(to) 9.10.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 905.1, 905.2,
905.3a, 905.6, and (NR 8.6.10.5).
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.6.1, 6.2.6.2.1, 6.2.6.3.1, c6.2.6.3.1(a),
6.2.6.6, 8.6.10.2, and 8.6.10.5.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 9.3.5, 9.6.3, and 9.6.9.
ITEM 9.11
(RESERVED)
ITEM 9.12
(RESERVED)
ITEM 9.13
EGRESS RESTRICTION (ROLLING SHUTTER) DEVICE
9.13.1 Periodic Inspections
Where rolling shutters are provided to protect floor
openings, check that when the shutters begin to close,
the power is removed from the driving machine and
brake, and remains off until the shutter is fully retracted.
If the shutter is power operated, the building code may
require a pressure sensitive leading edge to reverse
direction and /or stop it when it strikes an object.
9.13.2 Periodic Test
9.13.3 Acceptance
9.13.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rule 905.3f.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions — Requirement
6.2.6.3.6.
A17.3 — Paragraph 9.6.7.
ITEM 9.14
SPEED
9.14.1 Periodic Inspections
For moving walks with DC motors, perform a
speed test.
9.14.2 Periodic Test
9.14.3 Acceptance
Determine the no load speed of the moving walk in
both directions as follows:
(a) Run a tachometer wheel along the deck, skirt, or
other stationary flat object when riding the moving
walk, or
(b) Use a stopwatch to time the travel from one land-
ing to the other. Divide the travel in feet (meters) by the
time in minutes (seconds) to obtain the speed in ft/min
(m/s).
Refer to Tables 9.14.3(a), 9.14.3(b), and 9.14.3(c) for
allowable speeds of existing equipment.
Table 9.14.3(a) Treadway Speed
(A17.1-1981 and Later Editions)
Maximum Treadway Slope
at any Point on Treadway, Maximum Treadway
deg Speed, ft/min
0 to 8
Above 8 to 12
180
140
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) 1 deg = 1.75 E - 02 radian
(b) 1 ft/min = 5.08 E - 03 m/s
Table 9.14.3(b) Treadway Speed (A17.1-1965
Through A17.1b-1980)
(10)
Maximum Treadway Slope
at Point of Entrance or
Maximum Treadway
Exit, deg
Speed, ft/min
Oto 3
180
Above 3 to 5
160
Above 5 to 8
140
Above 8 to 12
130
Above 12 to 15
125
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) 1 deg = 1.75 E - 02 radian
(b) 1 ft/min = 5.08 E - 03 m/s
129
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Table 9.14.3(c) Treadway Speed
Maximum Treadway Slope
at any Point on Treadway, deg
Maximum Treadway
Speed, ft/min
0 to 8
Above 8 to 1 5
180
140
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) 1 deg = 1.75 E - 02 radian
(b) 1 ft/min = 5.08 E - 03 m/s
Verify that the speed of the moving walk cannot be
changed without first stopping it.
9.14.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 903.1,
905.3b, 1008.20, and 1009.2o.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.4, 6.2.6.3.2, (NR 1008.2o), and
8.10.4.1.2(1).
(io) ITEM 9.15
BALUSTRADES
9.15.1 Periodic Inspections
Inspect the balustrades and note any cracked or bro-
ken panels. Panels and fasteners should be smooth and
free of burrs and snag points. Interior panels or molding
must not be raised or depressed by more than \ in.
(6.4 mm). Check that the balustrades are totally enclosed
along both exterior and interior lengths, except where
the handrail enters the newel base. For moving walks
installed under A17.1a-1988 and later editions and mov-
ing walks required to conform to A17.3a-1994, if gaps
exist between interior panels, they should not be wider
than %6 in. (4.8 mm) and the edges should be beveled
or rounded. Check that glass or plastic panels meet the
treadway and skirt panels should not exceed V4 in.
(6.4 mm). For skirtless balustrades installed under
Al 7. 1-1965, the vertical clearance between the top of
the treadway and the underside of the balustrade should
not exceed \ in. (3.2 mm).
For units installed under A 17. 1-1 971 and later edi-
tions and moving walks required to conform to
A17.3a-1994, the vertical clearance between the top of
the treadway and the underside of the balustrade should
not exceed \ in. (6.4 mm). See Fig. 9.17.1. Verify that
skirt panels are smooth for moving walks installed under
A17.1a-1988 and later editions and moving walks
required to conform to A17.3a-1994.
9.15.2 Periodic Test
9.15.3 Acceptance
Check that the skirt panels, tions and A17.3a-1994.
Verify that the balustrades meet the material, strength,
and dimensional requirements.
Glass or plastic, if used, should meet the requirements
of the ANSI Z97.1, or 16 CFR Part 1201, or CAN/CGSB
12.1; CAN/CGSB 12.11; CAN/CGSB 12.12, as applica-
ble. The glass or plastic (glazing material) must be legi-
bly and permanently marked "16 CFR Part 1201",
"American National Standard Z97.1" or the characters
"ANSI 7371" and must also be marked with the manu-
facturer's distinctive mark or designation. Plastic
bonded to basic support panels need not conform to
ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR Part 1201.
Check that components not used directly in connec-
tion with the operation of the moving walk are not
installed on, in, or through the moving walk.
Check that the width between the balustrade interior
panels does not change in the direction of travel.
9.15.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 902.3 and
1009.2g; and Appendix D.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.3.3, 6.2.3.17, and 8.10.4.1(n); and (NR
Appendix D).
A17.3 — Paragraphs 9.3.3.1 and 9.3.3.2.
ITEM 9.16
CEILING INTERSECTION GUARDS
9.16.1 Periodic Inspections
Moving walks installed under A17, 1-1981 and later
editions where the clearance of the exterior deck and
the ceiling or soffit is 12 in. (305 mm) or less or where
the projected intersection of the exterior deck and ceiling
or soffit is 24 in. (610 mm) or less from the handrail
centerline, require ceiling intersection guards. This
requirement was restricted to high decks for moving
walks installed under A17. 1-1987 and later editions and
moving walks required to conform to A17.3a-1994. On
low decks for moving walks installed under A17. 1-1987
and later editions and moving walks required to con-
form to A17.3a-1994 where the centerline of the handrail
is 14 in. (356 mm) or less from the ceiling or soffit, guards
are also required.
Inspect the guards for damage and secure attachment.
9.16.2 Periodic Test
9.16.3 Acceptance
Verify that guards are correct size, in place and secure,
and conform to dimensional requirements (see
Fig. 7.16.1).
Check that glass or plastic guards are properly
marked.
9.16.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rule 902.3g; and
Appendix D.
130
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
iNo reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Fig. 9.17.1 Treadway Clearances
(10)
I V8in. max., A17. 1-1965 i
] V4in. max., A17. 1-1971 and later editions i
CD
V4in. max.,
A17.1d-1970
and later editions
Width of moving walk
GENERAL NOTE: 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 6.2.3.3.7; and (NR Appendix D).
A17.3 — Paragraph 9.3.3.5.
ITEM 9.17
SKIRT PANELS
(10) 9.17.1 Periodic Inspections
Check the clearance between the skirt panel and the
treadway using a thickness gauge or by laying a small
rule on the side of the treadway to read the distance.
The treadways should be checked at several points along
its entire travel.
For moving walks installed under A17. 1-1971 and
later editions and moving walks required to conform
to A17.3a-1994, the horizontal clearance between the
treadway and skirt panels should not exceed V4 in.
(6.4 mm). For skirtless balustrades installed under
A17.1-1965, the vertical clearance between the top of
the treadway and the underside of the balustrade should
not exceed \ in. (3.2 mm).
For units installed under A17.1-1971 and later edi-
tions and moving walks required to conform to
A17.3a-1994, the vertical clearance between the top of
the treadway and the underside of the balustrade should
not exceed \ in. (6.4 mm). See Fig. 9.17.1. Verify that
skirt panels are smooth for moving walks installed under
A17.1a-1987 and later editions and moving walks
required to conform to A17.3a-1994.
9.17.2 Periodic Test
9.17.3 Acceptance
Check that the skirt panels, where provided, extend
to a height of at least 1 in. (25 mm) vertically above the
treadway tread nose line. Skirt panels should not deflect
more than V16 in. (1.6 mm) under a force of 150 lbf (667 N).
Inspect the exposed surface of the panel adjacent to the
treadway for smoothness.
9.17.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 902.3e and
902.3f.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.3.3.5 and 6.2.3.3.6.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 9.3.3.3 and 9.3.3.4.
ITEM 9.18
OUTDOOR PROTECTION
9.18.1 Periodic Inspections
For moving walks installed under A17.1b-1989 and
later editions, check that the required cover over the
horizontal projection of the unit is present and in good
condition.
131
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Verify that there is no accumulation of snow or freez-
ing rain on the treadways or landing plates.
9-18.2 Periodic Test
Heaters are required for moving walks installed under
A17.1b-1989 and later editions only if treadways are
subject to snow or freezing rain. Check that heaters are
operational. The heaters may be located inside the units
(see Item 10.3.2).
9.183 Acceptance
Check that the cover extends outward from the center-
line of the handrail such that a line from the edge of
the cover to the handrail centerline is not less than 15 deg
from the vertical. Two methods for checking this are
shown in Fig. 7.18.3.
Check that the landing plates and combplates have
provisions to provide a secure foothold when wet. Check
that all electrical components are weatherproof, that all
wiring is identified for use in wet locations, and that
they are properly installed (gaskets, seals, etc.).
9.18.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 907,
1008.2p, and 1009.2i.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.8, 8.11.4.2.14, and 8.10.4.1. l(q).
ITEM 9.19
MAINTENANCE RECORDS
9.19.1 Periodic Inspections
Review the maintenance records and verify that they
are available to elevator personnel and that they are
legible and up to date. They should include the
following:
(a) description of maintenance task performed and
dates
(b) description and dates of examinations, tests,
adjustments, repairs, and replacements
(c) description and dates of call backs (trouble calls)
or reports that are reported to elevator personnel by any
means, including corrective action taken
(d) verify that a startup procedure is available to
authorized personnel (Al 7. 1-2000/ B44-00 — 8.6.10.5)
9.19.2 Periodic Test
9.19.3 Acceptance
9.19.4 References
A17.1-2000 and later editions -
C8.6.12.2.5, and 8.6.10.5.
- Requirements 8.6.1.4,
(10)
ITEM 9.20 (10)
EARTHQUAKE INSPECTION AND TESTS (SEISMIC
RISK ZONE 2 OR GREATER)
9.20.1 Periodic Inspections
9.20.2 Periodic Test
Check the operation of the seismic switch where
provided.
9.20.3 Acceptance
(a) Verify that balustrades are installed and fastened
according to manufacturer's drawings.
(b) Verify that seismic switch is installed and if it is
used exclusively to control the moving walk, it is located
in a machine room, machinery space and, where possi-
ble, mounted adjacent to a vertical load-bearing member.
If there is no vertical load-bearing member in close prox-
imity, the seismic switch may be located at the nearest
accessible vertical load-bearing member at approxi-
mately the same horizontal level as the upper machinery
space or machine room.
(c) Verify that the seismic switch, when actuated,
causes power to be removed from the moving walk
driving machine and brake.
9.20.4 References
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.5.1 and 8.5.4.
132
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
A5ME A17.2-2010
Part 10
Moving Walk — Internal
ITEM 10.1
MACHINERY SPACE ACCESS, LIGHTING,
RECEPTACLE, AND CONDITION
10.1.1 Periodic Inspections
For remote machine rooms, see Item 10.1.2.
10.1.2 Periodic Test
Determine that the means of access is securely fas-
tened in place. If a door is used, verify that it is kept
locked and the key is available only to authorized per-
sonnel. Check the lighting and test the receptacle. In
remote machine space, check that the lighting is at least
10 fc (108 lx) for moving walks installed under
A17.1-1981 and later editions.
Verify that the space is clean of dirt and rubbish and
free of oil and combustibles. Combustible items unre-
lated to moving walk maintenance or operation with a
flashpoint less than 110°F (43°C) should not be present.
Water should not have accumulated on the floor of the
space. Verify that jumpers are not stored in the machine
space, hoistway, or pit.
Verify that no penetrations exist through the sides
and undersides of the machinery space and truss that
compromises its fire resistance rating or allows contact
with moving parts by the public.
For moving walks installed under A17.1-2000/B44-00
and later editions, check that a guard is in place to
protect against accidental contact with the moving pal-
lets or treadway.
10.1.3 Acceptance
Determine whether a reasonable means of access to
the interior is provided. Verify that the weight of access
plates is in compliance with the Code requirements.
Removal of the floor plates over the landing pit consti-
tutes reasonable access if the opening uncovered affords
ample space for the entry of one person. When an access
door is provided on the side of the enclosure, verify that
the door is locked and the key is removable only in the
locked position.
If fire shutters are required by the local building code,
verify that they are present at ventilation openings and
operate correctly Verify that the 15 A, 120 V duplex
receptacles located in the machine space, under access
plates and machine areas located along the line of travel
within the unit, are functional. Verify that the light con-
trol for remote machine rooms is within easy reach of
the access and can be operated without reaching or pass-
ing over any machinery components.
Check that components not used directly in connec-
tion with the operation of the moving walk are not
installed on, in, or through the moving walk.
10.1.4 References (10)
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Section 906; and
Rules 901.1, 907.2, 1008.2a, and 1009.2J.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.7; and 6.2.2.1, 6.2.8.2, 8.1, 8.6.1.6.3,
c8.6.12.2.6, 8.6.14, 8.6.8.15, 8.11.4.2.1, and 8.10.4.1.2(a).
A17.3 — Paragraph 9.7.2.
ITEM 10.2 (10)
STOP SWITCH AND INSPECTION CONTROL
10.2.1 Periodic Inspections
For remote machine rooms, see Item 10.2.2.
10.2.2 Periodic Test (10)
Test the operation of machine space stop switch(es)
by placing them in the stop position, then make sure
that everyone is clear and attempt to start the moving
walk with the key switch.
For moving walks installed under Al 7. 1-2000 /B44-00
and later editions, check the operation of the inspection
control device from each end. The device only permits
movement by a constant pressure means, and clearly
indicates the direction of travel.
If a plug in control station is used, verify that it is
stored in the upper landing machinery space.
Have the unit operated with the inspection control
device. Check that the device only permits movement
by a constant pressure means, and clearly indicates the
direction of travel.
10.2.3 Acceptance
Check that proper stop switches are installed and
operate correctly in all machine spaces or other space
where access to the interior is provided. Where the main
line disconnect switch is located, a separate stop switch
is not required.
10.2.4 References (10)
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 905.3e,
1008.2b, and 1009.2k.
133
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.6.3.5, 6.2.6.2.2, 8.11.4.2.2, and
8.10.4.1.2(b).
ITEM 10.3
CONTROLLER AND WIRING
10.3.1 Periodic Inspections
Inspect remote machine rooms as outlined in
Item 10.3.2.
(io) 10.3.2 Periodic Test
Examine the controller visually to verify that it is clean
and that the switches, contactors, and relays and their
electrical connections are in good condition. Check that
the fuses are in place, of the proper type and rating,
and have not been jumped or otherwise tampered with.
Check for jumper wires or other changes, which may
indicate that safety devices have been defeated or
altered.
Visually examine wiring for damage and all compo-
nents for evidence of overheating. Operate the main line
circuit breakers or disconnect switch to verify that all
power is removed from the drive machine. Verify that all
electrical components are enclosed to prevent accidental
contact. If heaters are present (see Item 9.18.2), verify
that they are operational. For moving walks installed
under A17.1-1965 through A17.1c-1986, verify that the
circuit breakers will not be automatically opened by the
fire alarm.
(io) 10.3.3 Acceptance
Check for proper voltage, correct wiring, and arrange-
ment of wiring, controller, and other components.
Check numbering of drive machines and disconnects
where multiple drive machines are in a machine room.
Verify that disconnects are in sight of machines operated.
Inspect all wiring enclosure raceways conduit, electrical
metallic tubing, metal wireways, junction boxes for con-
dition workmanship and fastening. Visually inspect con-
dition of weatherproof electrical enclosure where
required on outdoor units. Verify that use of flexible
conduit, armored cable, and flexible leads comply with
the applicable electrical Code requirements.
The person or firm installing the moving walk shall
provide a manufacturer's written procedure and demon-
strate compliance with 6.1.6.10 or 6.2.6.9. Where there
are no test or check requirements, the written checklist
must state "No test or check required/' The documenta-
tion must state the reason no test or check is required.
This procedure may also be part of the maintenance
control program (MCP) as required by 8.6.1.2.1.
The following shall be documented or demonstrated:
(a) completion or maintenance of circuit (6.1.6.13)
(b) redundancy and its checking (6.1.6.10.1 and
6.1.6.10.2)
(c) static control (6.1.6.10.3)
(d) electrically powered safety devices (EPD)
(6.2.6.10)
(e) installation of devices to make electrical protective
devices (EPD) ineffective (6.2.6.11)
(f) contactors and relays for use in critical operating
circuits (6.1.6.14)
Also include documentation when required by
A17.7-2007/B44.7-07 and later editions —
Requirements 2.10.1 and 2.10.2.
10.3.4 References (io)
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Section 906 and
Rules 907.2, 905.3i, (NR6.2.6.12), 1206.1, 1008.2c, and
1009.21.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.7; and 6.2.8.2, 6.2.6.9, 6.2.6.12, 8.6.1.2.1,
8.11.4.2.3, and 8.10.4.1.2(c).
NFPA 70 or CSA C22.1, as applicable.
ITEM 10.4
DRIVE MACHINE AND BRAKE
10.4.1 Periodic Inspections
10.4.2 Periodic Test
Determine whether the driving machine is properly
secured, lubricated, clean, and in good condition. Visu-
ally check the driving-machine fastenings and bearing
caps to verify that they are secure and in place.
Verify that the driving machine is connected to the
main drive shaft by toothed gearing, a mechanical cou-
pling, or a chain and that it is in good condition. Look
for evidence of any excessive backlash in the driving
gears or chains. If a chain is used to connect the driving
machine to a sprocket on the main drive shaft, visually
examine the chain and sprockets for wear, excessive
slack, and proper lubrication. Lack of lubrication for a
chain may be indicated by rouge (red rust deposits) on
the side plates of the links.
For moving walks installed under A17.1a-1988 and
later editions, verify that cast iron links are not used. If
the links appear to be cast iron, have a small hole drilled
(in a low stress area) and observe the drill cuttings. If
the cuttings are a fine powder, cast iron is indicated. If
the cuttings are shavings, then the links are not cast iron.
Inspect any drive belts and sheaves for damage, wear,
belt tension, and reasonable equality of tension in a set
of belts.
Visually examine the components for signs of over-
heating. Verify that an electrically released brake is pres-
ent and automatically applied when power is
interrupted. A brake was not required for units installed
under A17.1-1987 and earlier editions if the unit would
not run in the down direction under rated load with
the power off. The brake is to be located on the driving
machine for units installed under A17.1a-1988 and later
(io)
134
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
editions and moving walks required to conform to
A17.3a-1994. Earlier editions allowed the brake to be
on the drive shaft. For moving walks installed under
the A17.1-1981 through A17.1-1987 editions and A17.3,
the brake may be applied to specially attached braking
surfaces directly on the tread way.
For moving walks installed under A17.1a-1988 and
later editions and moving walks required to conform to
A17.3a-1994 where means other than a continuous shaft,
mechanical coupling, or toothed gearing is used to con-
nect the motor to the reduction gear, verify that the
brake is located on the gear reducer or main drive shaft.
A17.3a-1994 requires this brake on the main drive shaft
or a specially attached braking surface attached directly
to the tread way.
For moving walks installed under A17.1a-1988 and
later editions, and moving walks required to conform
to A17.3a-1994, the brake may be magnetically applied
using a ceramic permanent magnet. Prior to this, a
mechanically applied brake was required. Visually
inspect the condition of the brake pads, drums, and
discs.
For moving walks installed to A17.1a-1988 and later
editions, this brake must stop a down or horizontal
running moving walk with a retardation not to exceed
3 ft/s2 (0.91 m/s2). For moving walks installed to
A17.1a-1988 through A17.1-2000, this was a maximum
rate. For moving walks installed to A17.1a-2002 and
later editions, it is an average rate, but there is an addi-
tional restriction on the peak horizontal retardation,
which is not intended to be field verified.
It is not required to measure the actual retardation.
Instead the brake torque will provide verification that
those requirements are met in addition to other brake
requirements (e.g. stopping and holding the rated load).
Verify that moving walks installed under A17.1a-1988
and later editions have a nameplate or data plate that
specifies the required brake torque. Moving walks
installed under A17.1b-1989 and later editions require
that the nameplate or data plate torque be specified as
breakaway, the maximum torque required to cause the
brake to begin moving, or dynamic, the torque required
to keep the shaft moving very slowly at a steady rate. The
location where the torque is to be measured is required to
be clearly indicated.
For moving walks installed under A17.1a-1991 and
later editions, the nameplate or data plate is required
to specify the range of brake torque. For moving walks
installed under Al 7. 1-2000 and later editions, the mini-
mum stopping distance with no load must be indicated.
Have the torque tested to verify that the torque com-
plies and check the minimum stopping distance. Note
that temperature can affect the brake torque. The torque
wrench should have a current calibration certificate
traceable to the National Bureau of Standards and have
a range of at least 25% higher than the required torque.
If the driving-machine brake is separated from the
main drive shaft by a chain and the moving walk is
capable of running by gravity with any load, check for
presence of a second brake that is required on the main
drive shaft. The requirements for this brake are
(a) A17.1-1965 through A17.1-1987 required this
brake to be electrically released unless an electrically
released brake was provided on the driving machine.
(b) A17.1a-1988 and later editions required the brake
to be mechanically or magnetically applied (ceramic per-
manent magnets), and allowed it to be located either on
the main drive shaft or a special braking surface attached
to the treadway.
(c) For moving walks installed under the A17.1a-1988
through A17.1d-2000, the brake is required to stop hori-
zontal or a down-running moving walk at a rate not
greater than 3 ft/sec2 (0.91 m/s2).
10.4.3 Acceptance
Check the stopping distance with no load against the
minimum distance information on the data plate.
10.4.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Section 904; and
Rule 1008.2d.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.5; and 8.11.4.2.4.
A17.3 — Paragraph 9.5.1.
ITEM 10.5
SPEED GOVERNOR
10.5.1 Periodic Inspections
10.5.2 Periodic Test
Test speed governor when provided to verify that it
is functioning. Manually operate the switch or use any
testing mechanisms (such as flywheel weights) that may
be provided. The flyballs and all operating mechanisms
must be present and in good operating condition. When
the switch is opened, it should interrupt power to the
driving machine. For moving walks installed under
A 17. 1-1 990 and later editions, verify that the moving
walk cannot be started by the starting switch until the
device is manually reset.
A17.3a-1994 requires that the speed governor activate
when the speed exceeds 20% above the rated speed.
Al 7. 1-1965 and later editions require that the speed
governor activate when the speed exceeds 40% above
the rated speed.
When a manual reset is required for units installed
under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the power
off and then back on, and then try the start switch to
check that the device will not reset. Also, some indication
that the device has been activated needs to be provided
(fault finder, etc.).
135
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
10.5.3 Acceptance
When a speed governor is required, verify that the
speed governor activates at the proper speed, which
cannot be more than 40% above the rated speed. This
can be done on some models using a rubber drive wheel
driven by a variable speed drill and a tachometer. Other
methods approved by the manufacturer for field testing
pulse pickup type or other electronic governors may
be used.
10.5.4 References
A17.1d-2000/B44-00 and earlier editions —
Rules 905.3b, 1008.2e, and 1009.21.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.6.3.2, 8.11.4.2.5, and 8.10.4.1.2(c).
A17.3 — Paragraph 9.6.4.
ITEM 10.6
BROKEN DRIVE CHAIN
AND DISCONNECTED MOTOR
SAFETY DEVICE
10.6.1 Periodic Inspections
10.6.2 Periodic Test
(a) If the driving machine is connected to the main
drive shaft by a chain, check the broken drive chain
device to verify that it will apply the main shaft brake
and stop the drive machine if the drive chain parts. All
parts of the device should be in good condition and
show freedom to move. Have the switch manually oper-
ated and verify that it will open the drive motor circuit.
Common devices include a block that is held in tension
by the drive chain that activates the switch when tension
is lost, or a plate that depresses a switch when the drive
chain strikes it. For moving walks installed under
A17.1-1990 and later editions, verify that the moving
walk cannot be started by the starting switch until the
device is manually reset.
When a manual reset is required for units installed
under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the power
off and then back on, and then try the start switch to
check that the device will not reset. Also, some indication
that the device has been activated needs to be provided
(fault finder, etc.).
(b) If the drive motor is attached to a gear reducer
by means other than a continuous shaft, coupling, or
toothed gearing, check that the device provided will
apply the brake if the motor becomes disconnected from
the gear reducer. Have the switch manually operated
and verify that all operating mechanisms are present,
clean, lubricated, and in good condition. For moving
walks installed under A17.1-1990 and later editions,
verify that the moving walk cannot be started by the
starting switch until the device is manually reset.
When a manual reset is required for units installed
under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the power
off and then back on, and then try the start switch to
check that the device will not reset. Also, some indication
that the device has been activated needs to be provided
(fault finder, etc.).
10.6.3 Acceptance
10.6.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 904.3b,
905.3d, 905.3h, and 1008.2f.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.5.3.2, 6.2.6.3.4, 6.2.6.3.8, and 8.11.4.2.6.
A17.3 — Paragraphs 9.6.6 and 9.6.10.
ITEM 10.7
REVERSAL STOP SWITCH
10.7.1 Periodic Inspections
10.7.2 Periodic Test
Manually operate the reverse stop switch to verify
that all operating mechanisms are present and in good
condition and that the device will open the circuits to the
driving-machine motor and brake to stop an ascending
moving walk from reversing its direction of travel. For
moving walks installed under A17.1-1990 and later edi-
tions, verify that the moving walk cannot be started by
the starting switch until the device is manually reset.
When a manual reset is required for units installed
under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the power
off and then back on, and then try the start switch to
check that the device will not reset. Also, some indication
that the device has been activated needs to be provided
(fault finder, etc.).
There are several different types of devices that are
used (friction reversal devices, speed monitoring, etc.).
Therefore, the type of device will dictate the testing
procedure. If the device cannot be manually operated,
a written procedure must be provided by the person or
firm performing the tests.
10.7.3 Acceptance
10.7.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 905.3g and
1008.2g.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.6.3.7 and 8.11.4.2.7.
A17.3 — Paragraph 9.6.8.
ITEM 10.8
BROKEN TREADWAY DEVICE
10.8.1 Periodic Inspections
10.8.2 Periodic Test
Manually operate the broken treadway devices to ver-
ify that each will interrupt power to the driving machine
136
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
and brake. Visually inspect each device to verify that
they are in position to operate and that either will acti-
vate when the connecting means breaks between pallets
or belt.
For moving walks installed under A17.1-1990 and
later editions, verify that the moving walk cannot be
started by the starting switch until the device is manu-
ally reset.
When a manual reset is required for units installed
under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the power
off and then back on, and then try the start switch to
check that the device will not reset. Also, some indication
that the device has been activated needs to be provided
(fault finder, etc.).
10.8.3 Acceptance
10.8.4 References
Rules 905.3c and
editions —
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions
1008.2h.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later
Requirements 6.2.6.3.3 and 8.11.4.2.8.
ITEM 10.9
(RESERVED)
ITEM 10.10
MISSING PALLET DEVICE
10.10.1 Periodic Inspections
(10) 10.10.2 Periodic Test
For moving walks installed under A17.1b-1989 and
later editions, test the missing pallet device by running
the moving walk with a pallet missing on the underside
of the moving walk. The device must stop the moving
walk before the gap resulting from the missing pallet
emerges from the combplate.
For moving walks installed under A17. 1-1990 and
later editions, verify that the moving walk cannot be
started by the starting switch until the device is manu-
ally reset.
When a manual reset is required for units installed
under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the power
off and then back on, and then try the start switch to
check that the device will not reset. Also, some indication
that the device has been activated needs to be provided
(fault finder, etc.).
10.10.3 Acceptance
10.10.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 905.5 and
1008.2J.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.6.5 and 8.11.4.2.10.
ITEM 10.11
PALLET LEVEL DEVICE
10.11.1 Periodic Inspections
10.11.2 Periodic Test
For moving walks installed under A17.1-1990 and
later editions that are equipped with pallets and trail
wheels, visually inspect the pallet level devices at each
end and on both sides to verify that it is in place and
able to function. Have the switch manually operated to
verify that it will open the safety circuit and stop the
moving walk.
For moving walks installed under A17.1-1990 and
later editions, verify that the moving walk cannot be
started by the starting switch until the device is manu-
ally reset.
When a manual reset is required for units installed
under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the power
off and then back on, and then try the start switch to
check that the device will not reset. Also, some indication
that the device has been activated needs to be provided
(fault finder, etc.).
10.11.3 Acceptance
Have the devices tested (at both ends and on each
side) by mechanically lowering a pallet \ in. (3.2 mm)
and operating the moving walk. A smaller roller or
adjustment may be used to lower the pallet.
10.11.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 905.3i,
1008.2k, and 1009.2n.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.6.3.9, 8.11.4.2.11, and 8.10.4.1.2(k).
ITEM 10.12
PALLETS, PALLET CHAINS,
AND TRUSSES
10.12.1 Periodic Inspections
10.12.2 Periodic Test
Have at least half of the pallets removed, then move
the remaining pallets to one end of the moving walk
and using a good light, visually inspect the drip pans,
undersides of pallets, trusses, roller tracks, chains, hand-
rails, and the interiors of balustrades, skirts, and newels
to verify that they are present, in good condition, clean
of dirt and rubbish, and free of oil and combustibles.
Visually inspect for any damage to the fire- resistive
material on the moving walk enclosure. See Item 10.1.
Visually inspect the chains for lubrication and buildup
of dirt and grease. Lack of lubrication may be indicated
by rouge (red rust deposits) on the side plates of the
links.
137
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Verify that cast iron links are not used on moving
walks installed under A 17. 1-1978 and later editions. See
Item 10.4.2 for method of identifying cast iron.
Check the operation of any moving walk pallet chain
tension devices. If they are of the automatically operated
"tension-weight" type, verify that the truss is provided
with a positive means to retain the weights in the truss
if the weights are released.
Move the remaining pallets to the opposite end of the
moving walk and inspect the other half in the same
manner.
10.123 Acceptance
(a) Verify that if the tracking system fails, the running
gear is retained in its guides and the treadway wheel
tracks will prevent displacement of the treadways and
running gear if the chain breaks.
(b) Inspect the treadway support structure for compli-
ance with the Code for the following types of walks:
(1) Slider Bed. Verify that the treadway is supported
for its entire length, except where it passes a pulley
support and that the bed is smooth and noncombustible.
(2) Roller Bed. Test the deflection of the treadway
surface by placing a 25 lb (11.3 kg) weight on a cylinder
2 in. (51 mm) long and 1 in. (25 mm) in diameter with
its long axis across the belt midway between rollers. Use
a straight edge that spans the rollers and a feeler gauge
or dial indicator depth gauge to measure the deflection.
Perform this test on 5% of the rollers at random and
verify that the deflection does not exceed 0.09 in.
(2.29 mm) plus 0.004 times the distances in inches
between the roller centers. Ride the moving walk and
observe for roller concentricity over the full width of
the belt.
(3) Edge Support Belt. When the treadway belt is
transversely rigid and is supported by rollers along the
edges, test the slope (or tension) as follows:
(a) The belt should be properly tensioned and a
150 lb (68 kg) weight placed on a rigid plate 6 in.
(152 mm) by 10 in. (254 mm) with the 10 in. (254 mm)
dimension in the direction of travel located on the
treadway centerline.
(b) Use a straight edge and feeler gauge or dial
indicator depth gauge to measure the deflection across
the treadway from the center. The Code allowance of
3 deg maximum would result in deflection of 0.576 in.
(14.6 mm) for a 22 in. (559 mm) width, 1.048 in. (26.6 mm)
for 40 in. (1 016 mm) width, and 1.572 in. (39.9 mm) for
a 60 in. treadway width.
(c) Inspect the center support for localized load-
ing for distance apart [6 ft (1.789 m) max.] and distance
from the underside of the treadway [2 in. (51 mm) max.].
(4) Pallet Type. Inspect the support and wheels to
verify that the pallets cannot be displaced vertically
more than \ in. (3.2 mm) should the pallet connecting
means break. With the power off have two pallets discon-
nected at the center of the moving walk run. Find the
maximum displacement by lifting on the pallet edges
with a moderate force. The stop should be detected
before the maximum displacement allowed by the Code
is reached. Verify that foreign material such as stone or
concrete is not in the truss interior.
(c) Check that components not used directly in con-
nection with the operation of the moving walk are not
installed on, in, or through the moving walk.
10.12.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 901.1, 902.9,
902.13, 1008.21, 1009.2o, and 1206.6.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.2.1, 6.2.3.9, 6.2.3.13, 6.2.3.17,
8.11.4.2.12, 8.10.4.1.2(1), and 8.6.8.
ITEM 10.13
HANDRAIL SYSTEMS AND SAFETY DEVICES
10.13.1 Periodic Inspections
10.13.2 Periodic Test
Examine the handrail drive systems to ensure that all
chains, pulleys, gears, rollers, and belts are present and
in good condition. The operation should be free of exces-
sive noise and slack, which indicates wear.
(a) For moving walks installed under A17.1b-1989
through A17.1b-1992, test the operation of the stopped
handrail device. Have the handrail motion sensor
mechanically disconnected while the unit is off and then
run the unit, or grab the handrail and stall it while the
moving walk is running. Verify that the alarm sounds
immediately and the moving walk stops within 15 sec.
(b) For moving walks installed under Al 7. 1-1 993 and
later editions, check the operation of the handrail speed
monitoring device. An alarm must sound immediately
if the speed of either handrail deviates from the step
speed by 15% or more, and the unit must shut down if
the speed deviation is continuous for 2 sec to 6 sec. If
holding the moving handrail cannot activate the device,
then it will be necessary to activate the device by another
means (disconnecting the speed sensor, changing dip
switch settings on the controller, etc.). Verify that the
unit cannot be started until the device is manually reset.
For units installed under A17.1b-1995 and later editions,
turn the power off and then back on and then try the
start switch to check that the device will not reset. Also,
some indication that the device has been activated needs
to be provided (fault finder, etc.).
(c) For moving walks installed under A17.1b-1992
and later editions, test the operation of the handrail
entry device by having a soft object that will not damage
the unit inserted between the handrail and hand guard.
After the unit stops, verify that it cannot be restarted
with the key switch until the device has been manually
(10)
138
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
reset. The device need only operate in the direction of
the handrail travel, except for units installed under
A17.1a-1997 and later editions the device must operate
irregardless of the direction of travel of the handrail
where an opening is created in the balustrade to prevent
entrapment. When a manual reset is required for units
installed under A17.1b-1995 and later editions, turn the
power off and then back on and then try the start switch
to check that the device will not reset. Also, some indica-
tion that the device has been activated needs to be pro-
vided (fault finder, etc.).
10.13.3 Acceptance
(10) 10.13.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 902.4,
902.13, 905.1, 905.4, 905.3J, (NR 8.6.9.1), 1008.2m, 1008.2q,
and 1009.2c.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 6.2.3.4, 6.2.3.13, 6.2.6.1, 6.2.6.4, 6.2.6.3.10,
8.6.9.1, 8.11.4.2.13, 8.11.4.2.18, and 8.10.4.1.1(c).
ITEM 10.14
CODE DATA PLATE
10.14.1 Periodic Inspections
Check that the Code Data Plate is installed. This is
the Code that is to be used for the inspection and test.
10.14.2 Periodic Test
10.14.3 Acceptance
10.14.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rules 808, 908,
and 1200.6.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 8.9, 8.9, and 8.7.1.8.
ITEM 10.15
RESPONSE TO SMOKE DETECTORS
10.15.1 Periodic Inspections
10.15.2 Periodic Test
For units installed under A17.1a-1994 and later edi-
tions, when smoke detectors are provided that will shut
down a running unit, verify that the emergency stop
button alarm will sound and the unit does not shut down
for at least 15 s. The unit may be tested by activating the
smoke detector or by other means.
CAUTION: If the sensing system is connected to a central fire
alarm system, notify proper authorities before activating.
10.15.3 Acceptance
10.15.4 References
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rule 905.7.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 6.2.6.7.
ITEM 10.16
INSPECTION CONTROL
10.16.1 Periodic Inspections
10.16.2 Periodic Test
If provided, check the operation of the inspection con-
trol device. Check that the device only permits move-
ment by a constant pressure means, and clearly indicates
the direction of travel. If a plug-in control station is used,
verify that it is stored in the upper pit.
10.16.3 Acceptance
Verify that when the transfer switches located at each
landing are enabled, only the inspection control device
can operate the equipment. Verify that the switches are
properly located, manually operated, protected against
accidental contact, and properly labeled. Verify that if
both switches are activated, then all inspection control
devices are inoperative.
If a portable control station is used, verify that the
cord does not exceed the maximum allowed length. If
a plug-in portable control station is used, check that
either a transfer switch is provided or that when the
portable control station is plugged in, the control of the
equipment is automatically transferred to the control
station.
10.16.4 References
A17.1-2000/B44-00
Requirement 6.2.6.2.2.
and later editions
ITEM 10.17
EARTHQUAKE INSPECTION AND TESTS (SEISMIC
RISK ZONE 2 OR GREATER)
10.17.1 Periodic Inspections
10.17.2 Periodic Test
10.17.3 Acceptance
(a) Verify that the connections between the truss and
the building are installed according to the manufactur-
er's drawings.
(b) Verify that restraints are installed and allow move-
ment as required.
(10)
10.17.4 References
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and
Requirements 8.5.2 and 8,5,3.
later editions
139
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
v No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(10)
Part 11
Elevator — Machine- Room -Less (MRL)
This part is an informative guide to the inspection
and testing of elevators with machine-room-less (MRL)
configurations. In many cases, the inspections and tests
in Parts 1 through 5 are the same as conventional config-
urations. However, this part is intended to supplement
the procedures in Parts 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 in order to account
for the inspection and test procedures that may be neces-
sary for MRL configurations,
CAUTION: It is important for the inspector to be familiar with
the location of all components and manufacturer's recommended
procedures prior to beginning any inspections or tests.
See the Elevator Industry Field Employee's Safety Handbook
foreword regarding the need to carefully observe the safety con-
ditions at each job site to make sure there are no conditions that
would require safety precautions beyond those contained in the
Handbook.
ITEM 11.1
ACCESS TO MACHINE ROOM/MACHINERY SPACE/
CONTROL ROOM/CONTROL SPACE
11.1.1 Periodic Inspections
11.1.2 Periodic Test
11.1.3 Acceptance
Check to ensure that permanent and unobstructed
access is provided to machine /control rooms, machinery
and control spaces outside of the hoistway, and to
machinery and control spaces inside the hoistway that
do not have a means of access specified in Requirement
2.73.1.2. For spaces located in the hoistway, ensure the
following:
(a) Where machine or emergency brake(s) or elevator
motion or motor controllers are located in the pit, a
permanent means stored or installed in the pit to provide
access when required.
(b) Where access to a working platform is in the line
of movement with a car or counterweight through an
access panel or door, verify it is provided with an electro-
mechanical device that will prevent operation of the
machine.
Access panels for access through the car to machine/
control spaces in the hoistway must use a key to open
that is Group 1 security. The access panel must have an
electrical switch to prevent operation when the panel is
open. The access panel must not be self-closing and must
be self-locking.
Where required, vertical ladders can be used in lieu
of stairs to overhead machinery spaces, except those
containing controllers and generators.
11.1.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and later editions — Requirements 2.7.3,
2.2.4/2.7.5.2.4, 2.12.6/2.12.7, 2.7.3.1.2/2.7.5.3.5, and
2.7.3.1.2/2.7.5.1.4.
ITEM 11.2
ACCESS DOOR AND OPENINGS
11.2.1 Periodic Inspections
Verify that access doors
(a) are self-closing and self-locking
(b) have spring type lock, made to be opened from
the inside without a key
(c) are kept closed and locked
(d) are Group 2 security
11.2.2 Periodic Test
11.2.3 Acceptance
Check to see that doors to machine and control rooms
are 29.5 in. (750 mm) x 80 in. (2 030 mm). All other
access doors shall be a minimum width and height of
29.5 in. (750 mm).
11.2.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and later
Requirements 2.7.3.4.1 and 2.7.3.4.2.
editions —
ITEM 11.3
ENCLOSURE OF ROOMS AND SPACES
11.3.1 Periodic Inspections
11.3.2 Periodic Test
11.3.3 Acceptance
When the local building code requires the room to
be of fire-resistive construction, ensure that the room
containing the elevator equipment complies with the
requirements of the building code.
When of the nonfire-resistive construction, the follow-
ing shall apply:
(a) machine rooms/control rooms/control spaces
must be enclosed a minimum of 79 in. (2 000 mm)
140
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(b) machinery spaces must be enclosed to a height of
not less 79 in. (2 000 mm) or to the height of the machin-
ery space if it is less than 79 in. (2 000 mm)
113.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and later editions —
Requirements 2.7.1.1.1/2.7.1.1.2 and 2.7.1.2/2.7.1.2.1.
ITEM 11.4
MAINTENANCE PATH AND CLEARANCE
11.4.1 Periodic Inspections
Verify that a clear path is kept at all times.
11.4.2 Periodic Test
11.4.3 Acceptance
A path for maintenance must be kept as follows:
(a) Machine and control rooms: Verify a clear path of
18 in. (450 mm) to all maintainable components.
(b) Machine and control spaces: Check for safe and
convenient access to maintainable equipment.
However, if the space is to be used as full bodily entry,
it shall have a path of 18 in. (450 mm).
11.4.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and later editions — Requirement 2.7.2.
ITEM 11.5
MACHINE/CONTROL ROOMS CONTAINING
OVERHEAD DRIVE MACHINES
11.5.1 Periodic Inspections
11.5.2 Periodic Test
11.5.3 Acceptance
For machine /control rooms, and machinery /control
spaces, verify
(a) permanent lighting is installed in room or space
(b) lighting switch is within easy reach of the access
to such room or space
(c) that operating instructions for safe access to car
top working area are kept on the premises
(d) correct lighting intensity
NOTE: The machinery space lighting may be the top of car light-
ing provided it meets the requirements.
11.5.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and later editions — Requirements 2.7.4,
2.7.9 /2.7.632(c), and 8.6.11.6.
ITEM 11.6
TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY
11.6.1 Periodic Inspections
11.6.2 Periodic Test
11.6.3 Acceptance
Machine /control room and machinery/ control space
temperature and humidity allowances, verify
(a) that requirements are posted
(b) current conditions are within posted requirements
11.6.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and later editions — Requirement 2.7.9.2.
ITEM 11.7
DISCONNECTING MEANS
11.7.1 Periodic Inspections
11.7.2 Periodic Test
11.7.3 Acceptance
Verify that a stop switch or disconnecting means is
provided in the machinery or control space and is acces-
sible and visible from the point of access.
11.7.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and later editions — Requirement 2.7.3.5.
ITEM 11.8
REMOTE MACHINE ROOMS AND CONTROL ROOMS
11.8.1 Periodic Inspections
11.8.2 Periodic Test
11.8.3 Acceptance
(a) If the elevator has a remote machine and /or con-
trol room, verify the following:
(1) permanent means of communication is opera-
tive between car and room
(2) ropes /sheaves are fully enclosed, if necessary
(3) unauthorized persons cannot access these
enclosures — Group 2 security key
(b) If means are provided to access the equipment for
inspection, verify
(1) a stop switch is present
(2) a permanent light and switch are present and
accessible from the access door or opening
(3) a duplex receptacle is present (GFI receptacle,
if CSA C22.1 enforced)
11.8.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and later editions —
Requirements 2.7.8.1, 2.7.8.4, and 2.7.8.3.
141
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
ITEM 11.9
INSPECTION AND TEST PANELS
11.9.1 Periodic Inspections
11.9.2 Periodic Test
11.9.3 Acceptance
(a) Means necessary for tests are as follows:
(1) If the drive machine or emergency brake, or
motion or motor controller are located in the hoistway
or pit, verify that the car can be moved from outside of
the hoistway (see Cautionary Note).
(2) In order to move the car, verify that normal
building power is not needed, the means is accessible to
only elevator personnel and requires continuous effort.
(3) If the drive sheave or rope cannot be seen from
the test location, verify display devices are provided for
the following:
(a) direction of movement
(b) indication of position within the door
unlocking zone
(c) indication of speed
(d) verify display device is operable if loss of
normal building power
(4) If display devices are dependent on batteries,
verify the following:
(a) monitoring of any batteries is operative
(b) the car cannot restart after a normal stop
when there is insufficient power for the display devices
(5) Verify that the means to move the car from
outside of the hoistway
(a) not be dependent on normal power
(b) is accessible only by Group 1 security
(c) needs continuous effort to move car
(6) If manual effort means is needed to move the
car, verify
(a) its presence
(b) it is suitably marked and, if portable, is stored
outside the hoistway and only accessible by Group 1
security
(c) the manual device must not require more than
90 lbf (400 N) to move the car or an electrical means
shall be provided
(7) If electrical means are provided to move the car
(a) verify that it requires constant pressure
(b) if monitoring system indicates it is insufficient
of the electrical operation for the movement of the car,
it must not be permitted to restart after a normal stop
(c) prevents operation of the car by all other
operating means
(b) Check the inspection and test panel where pro-
vided for the following:
(1) readily accessible
(2) keyed for Group 1 Security
(3) has self-locking but not self-closing doors or
panels
(4) stop switch is present
(5) lighting is permanent and of sufficient lux/ foot-
candles
(6) contains car and hoistway door bypass switches
(7) has means to manually reset the following:
(a) unintended car movement
(b) ascending car protection
(c) car safety mechanism
(d) car buffer switch
(e) final terminal stopping devices and governor
switches (where these devices are not accessible from
outside the hoistway)
11.9.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and later editions —
Requirements 2.7,6.4, 2.7.6.4.1, 2.7.6.4.3, 2.7.6.5.2,
2.7.6.4.3(e), and 2.7.3.5.
ITEM 11.10
GOVERNOR, OVERSPEED SWITCH
11.10.1 Periodic Inspections
11.10.2 Periodic Test
11.10.3 Acceptance
If governor can only be inspected or serviced within
the hoistway, verify the following:
(a) secure car against movement before servicing the
governor
(b) required signage is present
(c) switches are of manual reset type; see
Note (2.18.6.5) for definition of what is considered
manual
id) governor is arranged to be manually tripped or
activated; see Note (2.18.6.5) for definition of what is
considered manual
(e) a manually reset pit governor tension sheave
switch is used if the governor is dependent on the ten-
sion of the sheave weight to operate
11.10.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and later editions —
Requirements 2.7.6.3.4, 2.18.4.4, 2.18.6.5, and 2.18.7.2.
ITEM 11.11
EMERGENCY BRAKE
11.11.1 Periodic Inspections
11.11.2 Periodic Test
11.11.3 Acceptance
Verify that if the design of the emergency brake is
such that field adjustment or servicing is required, and
the emergency brake acts on the brake drum or braking
surface of the driving-machine, that it has a sign visible
from the service area stating "emergency brake."
142
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
11.11.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and
Requirement 2.193.2(h).
later
editions —
ITEM 11.12
TRACTION SHEAVES
11.12.1 Periodic Inspections
Refer to Cautionary Note.
11.12.2 Periodic Test
11.12.3 Acceptance
Refer to Cautionary Note.
11.12.4 References
ITEM 11.13
SECONDARY AND DEFLECTOR SHEAVES
11.13.1 Periodic Inspections
Refer to Cautionary Note.
11.13.2 Periodic Test
11.13.3 Acceptance
Refer to Cautionary Note.
11.13.4 References
ITEM 11.14
TERMINAL STOPPING DEVICES
11.14.1 Periodic Inspections
11.14.2 Periodic Test
11.14.3 Acceptance
For normal terminal stopping devices (NTSDs)
located in machine /control room or machinery /control
space, verify that the NTSDs are operated by movement
of the car.
If a switch is provided to bypass top final-terminal
or buffer switch when on top-of-car inspection, verify
for proper operation.
11.14.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and later editions —
Requirements 2.25.2.2.1, 2.26.1.4.2(g), and 2.26.1.4.4.
ITEM 11.15
WORKING AREAS INSIDE THE HOISTWAY AND IN
THE PIT
11.15.1 Periodic Inspections
11.15.2 Periodic Test
11.15.3 Acceptance
11.15.3.1 Working Area in the Car or on Car Top
(a) If the drive machine or emergency brake or motion
or motor controller are inspected or maintained from
inside the car or on the car top
(1) if unexpected movement can occur during
inspection or maintenance, verify means to prevent
movement
(2) provide a clearance above the crosshead of 24 in.
(600 mm) when the car has reached its maximum
upward movement
(3) ensure 6 in. (150 mm) critical clearance is main-
tained above the car top handrails and car top equipment
when the car reaches its maximum upward movement
(b) When means provided to prevent movement is
engaged, verify
(1) car cannot be operated
(2) that the electrical device conforms to 2.26.2.34
(3) that proper signage is present
(4) access and egress from working area is present
(5) that platform guard completely covers the dis-
tance between the landing and car sill
(6) clear headroom of not less than 53 in.
(1 350 mm)
(c) When access panels are provided in the car for
access to elevator equipment outside of the car, verify
(1) it is self-locking but not self-closing
(2) access panels are equipped with an electrical
switch to prevent movement
(3) Group 1 security is provided
11.15.3.2 Working Area in the Pit
(a) If the drive machine brake or emergency brake or
motion or motor controller are inspected or maintained
from within the pit, and if unexpected movement can
occur during inspection or maintenance, verify the
means to prevent movement by one of the following:
(1) When means provided to prevent movement is
engaged, verify
(a) car cannot be operated
(b) that proper signage is present
(c) access and egress from working area is present
(d) clear headroom of not less than 53 in.
(1 350 mm)
(2) For mechanical means to stop vertical move-
ment, verify
(a) that car can only operate on inspection when
the device is active
(b) that proper signage is present
(c) that the device cannot be accidentally
disengaged
(b) When egress is through the landing door, verify
(1 ) it can be opened from the hoistway side
(2) required vertical opening is provided [48 in.
(1 220 mm)]
(c) When egress is through a pit access door, verify
car does not block the opening.
(d) When access to machine or emergency brake or
elevator motion or motor controllers exceeds the maxi-
mum distance from the pit floor, verify means are perma-
nently provided in the pit to access the equipment.
143
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
11.15.3.3 Working Platforms
(a) For working platforms, verify the following:
(1) Ensure working platform is permanently
installed.
(2) Verify the operation of the electrical devices on
any retractable platform that is in the path of a moving
car or counterweight. However, if this electrical device
permits inspection operation, then an additional electri-
cal device must be provided to stop the car before it
strikes the moveable stops, but is rendered ineffective
when the stops are retracted.
(3) Verify standard railing when required.
(4) Verify shear protection is provided when
required.
(5) When access to a platform that is in the path of
moving car or counterweight is through an access door
in the hoist way, verify that the electromechanical device
for the access door is operative.
(b) For working platforms in the line of movement
of the car or counterweight, verify means to prevent
movement by one of the following:
(1 ) If retractable stops are provided and the car is
(a) below the platform, verify that you have suffi-
cient car top refuge space
(b) above the platform, verify that the required
vertical clearance is provided
(2) If unexpected movement can occur during
inspection or maintenance, verify means to prevent
movement.
11.15.3.4 Retractable Stops. When provided
(a) verify operation of electrical device is provided to
ensure it removes the power from the elevator driving
machine motor and brake when it is not in the com-
pletely retracted position
(b) if an electrical device is provided to allow inspec-
tion operation, verify that the car cannot strike these
stops
(c) verify it is operable from outside hoistway or from
platform
(d) verify that the device cannot be accidentally
disengaged
11.15.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and later editions — Requirements 2.7.5,
2.7.5.1, 2.7.5.2, 2.7.5.3, 2.7.5.4, 2.26.2.36, 2.26.4.3, 2.7.4.2,
and 2.4.
ITEM 11.16
LOCATION OF MACHINERY SPACES, MACHINE
ROOMS, CONTROL SPACES, CONTROL ROOMS,
AND EQUIPMENT
11.16.1 Periodic Inspections
11.16.2 Periodic Test
11.16.3 Acceptance
11.16.4 References
ITEM 11.17
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS - SHUTOFF/MANUAL
LOWERING VALVES
11.17.1 Periodic Inspections
11.17.2 Periodic Test
11.17.3 Acceptance
(a) If the hydraulic machine and the shutoff valve are
located in the hoistway, verify the following:
(1) The valve is accessible from outside of the
hoistway.
(2) It is not accessible by anyone but elevator
personnel.
(b) If the hydraulic machine is located in the hoistway,
verify the following:
(1) The manual lowering valve is accessible from
outside of the hoistway
(2) It is not accessible by anyone but elevator
personnel.
11.17.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and later editions — Requirements 3.19.4
and 3.19.4.4.
ITEM 11.18
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS - PRESSURE GAUGE
FITTINGS
11.18.1 Periodic Inspections
11.18.2 Periodic Test
11.18.3 Acceptance
If the hydraulic machine is located in the hoistway,
verify the following:
(a) The fittings are accessible from outside of the
hoistway.
(b) It is not accessible by anyone but elevator
personnel.
11.18.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and later editions —
Requirement 3.19.4.5.
ITEM 11.19
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS - ATMOSPHERE STORAGE
AND DISCHARGE TANKS
11.19.1 Periodic Inspections
11.19.2 Periodic Test
11.19.3 Acceptance
If the tank is located in the hoistway, verify
(a) it is vented so that fumes cannot accumulate in
the hoistway
(b) covers will resist force of falling objects
144
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
11.19.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and
Requirement 3.24.3.1.
later
editions
ITEM 11.20
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS - PRESSURE PIPING
11.20.1 Periodic Inspections
11.20.2 Periodic Test
11.20.3 Acceptance
If the hydraulic machine is located in the hoistway
and the piping, tubing, or fittings are located outside of
the hoistway verify one of the following:
(a) These objects shall be protected from damage.
(b) If not protected from damage, ensure means are
provided to prevent uncontrolled movement.
11.20.4 References
A17.1S-2005 and
Requirement 3.19.2.6.
later editions —
ITEM 11.21
EXPLANATORY FIGURES FOR DEFINITIONS OF
ELEVATOR MACHINERY SPACE, MACHINE ROOM,
CONTROL SPACE, CONTROL ROOM, REMOTE
MACHINE ROOM, OR REMOTE CONTROL ROOM
See Figs. 11.21-1 through 11.21-6 and Table 11.21.
ITEM 11.22
INSPECTION OPERATION AND HOISTWAY ACCESS
SWITCH OPERATION HIERARCHY
See Table 11.22.
Fig. 11.21-2 Configuration B
Hoistway
Machinery
space
Machine
Landing doors
Motor
-"■"" controller
■ Access
Control space
Fig. 11.21-3 Configuration C
Hoistway
Machinery
space
Machine
-t-1
Landing doors
Control space,
remote
Access
Fig. 11.21-1 Configuration A
Hoistway
Machinery
space \ J
Machine
— Motor
C
Dntrol
room
controller
ill 1
Landing doors
Access
145
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Fig. 11.21-4 Configuration D
Hoistway
Machinery
space
Machine
■r —
Landing doors
Control room
remote
Motor
controller
Fig. 11.21-5 Configuration E
Machine
\
Machine
room
Motor
controller
- Access
Hoistway
located
below
146
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. &
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ^3
ASMEA17.2-2010
Fig. 11.21-6 Configuration F
Overhead sheave
/
Machine
/
Motor controller
Machine room, remote
Hoistway
located
below
Access
Table 11.21 Definitions of Elevator Machinery Space, Machine Room, Control Space, Control Room,
Remote Machine Room, or Remote Control Room
Location
Entry into the
Space, Full or
Partial
Equipment Used Directly
in Connection With the
Elevator, Dumbwaiter, or
Material Lift
Equipment Contained Within
Inside or
Outside the
Hoistway
Attached to or
Within the
Hoistway
Mechanical
Other Than
Electric
Driving
Machine or
Hydraulic
Machine
Electrical
Other Than
Motor
Controller
Electric Driving
Machine or
Hydraulic
Machine
Motor
Controller
Machinery Space
[Note (1)]
Either
Either
Either
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Control Space
Not permitted
Required
Machine Room
[Note (1)]
Outside the
hoistway
Attached to
but not within
Full bodily
entry required
Required
Permitted
Control Room
Not permitted
Required
Machine Room,
Remote
No
Required
Permitted
Control Room,
Remote
Not permitted
Required
Machinery Space
Remote
Either
Permitted
Permitted
Control Space
Remote
Either
Not permitted
Required
NOTE:
(1) A machinery space outside the hoistway containing an electric driving machine and a motor controller or a hydraulic machine and a
motor controller is a machine room.
147
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
Table 11.22 Inspection Operation and Hoistway Access Switch Operation Hierarchy
I 9
If
B ©
CD K)
V! O
sr s
I*
CD ft
3. g5
£* 2.
> CD*
B1 o
o '-♦»
8 I.
if
> s
t/3
Operation
Modes
Activated
Top-of-Car
In-Car
Hoistway
Access
Machine
Room
Control
Room
Machinery
Space
Outside
Hoistway
Control
Space
Outside
Hoistway
Landing
Pit
Working
Platform
Top -of- Car,
2.26.1.4.2
Hoistway
In-Car, Access,
2.26.1.A.3 2.12.7.3
Machine
Room,
2.26.1.4.4
Machinery Control
Space Space
Control Outside Outside
Room, Hoistway, Hoistway,
Landing,
Pit,
Working
Platform,
BYPASS Operation,
2.26.1.5
2.26.1.4.4 2.26.1.4.4 2.26.1.4.4 2.26.1.4.4 2.26.1.4.4 2.26.1.4.4 Top-of-Car
In-Car
Top- of- car
Top-of-car
Top-of-car
Top-of-car
Top-of-car
Top-of-car
Top-of-car Top-of-car
In-car fn-car
In-car
In-car
In-car
In-car
Hoistway
access
Hoistway
access
Hoistway
access
Hoistway
access
Top-of-car Top-of-car Top-of-car Top-of-car Top-of-car No No Top-of-car Top-of-car
operation operation
In-car In-car In-car In-car In-car No No Top-of-car In-car
operation operation
Hoistway Hoistway Hoistway Hoistway Hoistway No No Top-of-car In-car
access access access access access operation operation
Machine No No No No No No Top-of-car In-car
room operation operation operation operation operation operation
No Control No No No No No Top-of-car In-car
operation room operation operation operation operation operation
No No Machinery No No No No Top-of-car In-car
operation operation space operation operation operation operation
Top-of-car In-car Hoistway No No No Control No No No Top-of-car In-car
access operation operation operation space operation operation operation
Top-of-car In-car Hoistway No No No No Landing No No Top-of-car In-car
access operation operation operation operation operation operation
No No No No No No No No
operation operation operation operation operation operation operation operation
Pit No No No
operation operation operation
No No No No No No No No No Working No No
operation operation operation operation operation operation operation operation operation platform operation operation
Operation
Modes
Activated
Top-of-car
Hoistway
access
Machine
>
Room
5
m
Control
>
room
Machinery
ro
o
o
space
outside
hoistway
Control
space
outside
hoistway
Landing
Pit
Working
platform
ASME A17.2-2010
MANDATORY APPENDIX I
GUIDE FOR INSPECTION OF INCLINED ELEVATORS
(10)
1-1 General
1-1.1 Foreword. This Mandatory Appendix is to be
used in conjunction with Parts 1 through 6 of
A17.2-2000, Inspection of Elevators and Moving Walks,
and later editions. It covers the variations in the recom-
mended testing procedures for electric inclined elevators
required to conform with the Code provisions of
A17. 1-1980 and later editions.
1-1.2 Preface
1-1.2.1 Form and Arrangement. The inclined eleva-
tor appendix to the Inspection Guide only addresses
variations in the guidelines and cautionary notes.
Inclined elevators are required by the Code to conform
with the requirements for electric elevators except as
modified by the specific rules pertaining to this particu-
lar type of electric elevator. Where no item is cited,
inspection guides and procedures shall be as contained
in Parts 1 through 6.
1-1.2.2 Requirements for Existing Installations. At
the time of publication, the only requirements applicable
to inclined elevators in those jurisdictions that have
adopted Al 7.3-2008, Safety Code for Existing Elevators
and Escalators, are those items that apply to electric
elevators.
1-1.2.3 Scope. This Mandatory Appendix only
applies to inclined elevators.
1-1.2.4 Special Safety Concerns. Inspectors are
cautioned to note that inclined elevators, due to
operating at some degree from the horizontal, present
some hazards not expected by persons familiar with the
inspection of vertical electric elevators. The horizontal
motion of the car and counterweight must always be
considered, as well as the fact that most inclined eleva-
tors have their counterweight operating directly below
the car chassis (frame).
1-1.2.5 Orientation. The majority of inclined eleva-
tor installations will provide hoistway inspections from
the uphill emergency exit and, on end-loading installa-
tions, from the uphill loading door. Use the same cau-
tions in making inspections that would be appropriate
for escalators with the steps removed. When inspecting
at the midpoint of the hoistway, the counterweight will
be passing below the car chassis often on the same rail
assembly.
Part 1-1
Elevator — Inside of Car
ITEM 1-1.6
CAR EMERGENCY SIGNAL
1-1.6.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Inclined elevators
installed exterior to a building structure must have spe-
cial emergency signaling devices with backup power
supply.
Check the operation of the alarm or means of voice
communication and verify that the receiving location is
always manned when the elevator is in operation. Where
the emergency power supply is provided by batteries,
verify that they are in good condition and are properly
maintained.
1-1.6.4.3
earlier editions
Inclined Elevators.
- Rule 1714.1.
A17.1d-2000 and
A17.1-2000/B44-00
Requirement 5.1.21.1.
and later editions —
ITEM 1-1.10
POWER OPENING OF DOORS
1-1.10.2.3 Inclined Elevators. Verify that the
doors cannot open unless the car is located within the
6-in. (152-mm) unlocking zone in each direction of travel.
1-1.10.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1a-1997
through A17.1d-2000 — Rule 1709.3.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.1.9.
149
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
ITEM 1-1.11
CAR VISION PANELS AND CAR DOORS
1-1.11.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Inclined elevators
have been permitted to use glass or plastic in cars or
doors since first appearing in A17.1. Prior to
A17.1-2000/B44-00, glass was required to conform to
the requirements of Rule 204. lh and plastics to the
requirements of ANSI Z97.1, without restrictions as to
size. A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions require glass
or plastics to conform to Z97.1 or CFR 1201.1 or 1202.2.
1-1.11.3.3 Inclined Elevators. When a glass or
plastic window or door is provided, check the type of
glass or plastic, check the thickness, minimum surface
area, and edging.
1-1.11.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rule 1708.5.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.1.11.3.
ITEM 1-1.13
EMERGENCY EXIT
1-1.13.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Very few inclined
elevators have car top emergency exits. Some inclined
elevators can use the car door for an emergency exit,
although most installations will require the uphill end
emergency exit.
For car top located emergency exits, follow
Item 1.13.1.1. For uphill end emergency exits, check the
electric contact. The key for unlocking the uphill end
emergency exit must be available to authorized person-
nel but not available to the public.
1-1.13.3.3 Inclined Elevators. Verify that the
uphill end emergency exit is so hinged as to swing in,
that it can be opened from inside the car only by using
a special shape removable key, that it can be opened from
outside the car by means of a nonremovable handle, and
that it is provided with a properly functioning electric
contact to interrupt power to the driving machine and
the brake when opened. Check that the electric contact
and nonremovable handle are not accessible from inside
the car. If an emergency exit unloading platform is pro-
vided to assist exiting the car, verify that it is attached
to the car, that it is retractable and only openable from
the exterior of the car, and that it is equipped with an
electrical contact that will not permit the car to start or
run unless the platform is retracted.
1-1.13.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rules 1708.3.8a, 1708.3b, and 1708.3c.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 5.1.11.1.1, 5.1.11.1.2, and 5.1.11.1.3.
ITEM 1-1.16
RATED LOAD, PLATFORM AREA, AND DATA PLATE
1-1.16.3.3 Inclined Elevators. Follow the proce-
dures in Item 1.16.3.1 except deduct from the inside
measurement of the car 50% of the area of a permanently
installed nonfolding bench or seat prior to computing
the net platform area. The net area computed now relates
to the rated load formula for electric elevators.
1-1.16.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rule 17.1.1.1.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.11.13.1.
ITEM 1-1.18
RESTRICTED OPENING OF CAR OR HOISTWAY
DOORS
1-1.18.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Prior to
A17.1-2000/B44-00, inclined elevators were required to
have a car door interlock if the car was more than 6 ft
(2 m) above grade and the enclosure was more than 6 in.
(152 mm) away Prior to A17.1a-1997/ the door was only
permitted to be unlocked in the leveling zone. In
A17.1a-1997, leveling zone was changed to unlocking
zone. The interlock was required to be openable from
outside of the car. This special requirement was in addi-
tion to the requirement for electric elevators. In
A17.1-2000/B44-00, inclined elevators now have the
same requirement as electric elevators, except that the
unlocking zone is limited to 6 in. (152 mm).
(a) For inclined elevators installed under A17.1-1996
and earlier editions, check that the car door can be
opened only within the leveling zone, except by the
means provided on the car exterior.
(b) For inclined elevators installed under
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions, check that the car door
can be opened only within the unlocking zone, except
by the means provided on the car exterior.
(c) For inclined elevators installed under A17.1-2000/
B44-00 and later editions, check that the car door can
be opened only within the 6 in. (152 mm) unlocking
zone, except by means provided on the car exterior.
1-1.18.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1-1996 and
earlier editions — Rule 1709.3.
A17.1a-1997 — Rule 1709.3.
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rule 1709.3.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions ■—
Requirement 2.12.5.
150
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Part 1-2
Inclined Elevators — Machine Room
ITEM 1-2.13
GOVERNOR, OVERSPEED SWITCH, AND SEAL
1-2.13.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Some inclined ele-
vators will have the governor located on the car, either
driven by a static wire rope drive or by another positive
type drive. Rope driven governors are not required. If
the governor is located on the car, inspection will have
to be performed under Part 5.
Examine per Item 2.13.1.1. Where the governor is
driven by other than a wire rope drive, verify that the
driving means is free of evidence of excessive wear and
lost motion, and whether all bearings and moving com-
ponents are not restricted by paint or other foreign sub-
stances. Move the components to verify that all parts
will move freely.
1-2.13.2.3 Inclined Elevators. Test per Item
2.13.2.1 when the governor is located in machine room
or machinery space. When the governor is located on
the car and is wire rope driven, perform similar testing.
When the governor is located on the car, testing will
have to be performed under Item 5.
1-2.13.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rule 1710.4.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.1.15.
ITEM 1-2.20
WINDING DRUM MACHINE AND SLACK CABLE
DEVICES
1-2.20.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Inspect per
Item 2.20.1.1.
(a) Winding Drum Machine. Inclined elevators are per-
mitted to use winding drum machine without counter-
weights for passenger use when the net rated load does
not exceed 1,000 lb (453 kg), the distance of travel does
not exceed 125 ft (38 m), and the rated speed does not
exceed 100 ft/min (0.51 m/s).
(b) Slack Cable Device. Unlike vertical electric eleva-
tors, traction drive inclined elevators operating at an
inclination of less than 35 deg must have slack cable
devices. The devices must be located on both the car
and counterweight sides of the driving machine.
1-2.20.3.3 Inclined Elevators. For winding drum
machines, verify that the net rated load, speed, and
distance of travel do not exceed Code limitations and
that no counterweight is provided.
1-2.20.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Section 1712 and Rule 1713.2.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 5.1.19 and 5.1.20.5.
ITEM 1-2.28
TERMINAL STOPPING DEVICES
Inclined elevators with runby can be inspected as per
Item 2.28. End-loading inclined elevators have no runby
and must be inspected with greater care. In addition
to normal and final terminal stopping devices, some
installations may be equipped with retractable sills that
include switchgear. Note that end-loading inclined ele-
vators are limited to a speed of 100 ft/min (0.51 m/s)
and will have precompressed oil buffers at each terminal.
1-2.28.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Inspect per Item
2.28.1.1 including, if retractable sills are provided, exam-
ination of the switchgear.
1-2.28.2.3 Inclined Elevators. Test per Item
2.28.2.1. If retractable sills are provided on an end-
loading inclined elevator, retract the sill and verify that
the car cannot operate in the direction towards that
landing.
1-2.28.3.3 Inclined Elevators. Perform the test as
indicated in Item 2.28.3.1.
1-2.28.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rules 1716.4 and 1716.5.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 5.1.22.4 and 5.1.22.5.
ITEM 1-2.29
CAR AND COUNTERWEIGHT SAFETIES
There are major differences between vertical electric
elevators and inclined electric elevators with regard to
safeties and the guide rails to which they apply. The
stopping distances are governed in A17.1b-1995 and
earlier editions by a formula and table based on V2 £■
Beginning with A 17. 1-1996, the formula and table are
based on \ g and this edition also includes horizontal
151
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
retardations for emergency electrical stopping that
should be tested with the safeties. Guide rails used with
Types A and C safeties do not have to be machined;
however, inclined elevators installed under A17. 1-1996
and later editions are not permitted to use a Type A or
C safeties that develop horizontal retardation in excess
of the Code-permitted allowance. Inclined elevators
installed under A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions
are permitted to have a single safety guide rail located
between the main guide rails. If the governor is provided
on the car, tests will have to be performed under Item 5.
NOTE: Inclined elevators must conform to the requirements for
occupied space. A17.1-2000/B44-00 clarifies that occupied space
on inclined elevators is in line with the direction of travel rather
than underneath the counterweight or car.
1-2.29.1.3 Inclined Elevators
(a) See Item 5.8.1.1 of the Guide.
(b) Examine the means provided to prevent
derailment of the car or counterweight.
1-2.29.2.3 Inclined Elevators
(a) Perform the examinations indicated in
Item 2.29.2.1(a) from the pit or from the workspace, if
provided.
(c) Perform the test indicated in Item 2.29.2.1(c) with
the car positioned either in the lower portion of the
hoistway or just above the work space, if provided.
(e),(f) Perform the tests indicated in Items 2.29.2.1(e)
and 2.29.2.1(f) using Tables 1710.2(a) and 1710.2(b) for
installations under A17.1-1996 and earlier editions. Use
the revised Tables 1710.2(a) and 1710.2(b) for installa-
tions under A17.1a-1997 and later editions.
1-2.29.3.3 Inclined Elevators. In addition to the
inability of some AC driving machine motors to permit
sufficient overspeed, some inclined elevators provided
with DC driving machine motors and with shallow
angles of inclination will not cause sufficient overspeed.
Test as per Items 2.29.3.1(a) and 2.29.3.1(b).
A17.1b-1995 and
and 1707.3 and
1-2.29.4.3 Inclined Elevators.
earlier editions — Rules 1706.3
Section 1710 with Table 1710.4.
A17.1d-2000 and earlier editions — Rule 1706.3, Rule
1707.3, Section 1710 with Tables 1710.2(a) and 1710.2(b),
and Rule 1713.3.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.1.14 with Tables 5.1.14.2, 5.1.15, 5.1.17.3,
5.1.18.3, 5.1.18.4, and 5.1.20.6.
Part 1-3
Elevator — Top Car/Uphill Emergency Exit/End-Loading Top
Car Door
Due to the horizontal component of their travel,
inclined elevators rarely have use for car top access and
such access normally will not be found under 49 deg of
inclination where it starts to be possible for inspection,
etc., of some components. The majority of installations
will have the uphill emergency exit or uphill loading
door to be used to make hoistway inspections. Car tops
do not have to meet structural requirements unless
access is provided.
Starting with A17.1-2000/B44-00, inclined elevators
were specifically permitted to omit car top stop switches
when access was not provided to the car top.
Safety precautions are as follows:
(a) Follow the safety precautions for top of car in
Part 3.
(b) Uphill emergency exit
(1) On cars equipped with an unloading platform,
move the platform from its retracted position.
(2) Without an unloading platform, remain inside
the door until the car stops to perform examinations.
(3) As inclined elevator counterweights are most
commonly located within the same guide rail assembly
and below the car, be extremely cautious near the mid-
point of travel.
(c) End-loading top car door: End-loading inclined
elevators have no runby and the car door will be
extremely close to the landing door at the uphill termi-
nal. Keep all parts of the body and any tools inside the
car when in motion.
ITEM 1-3.1
TOP-OF-CAR STOP SWITCH
1-3.1.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Check the top-of-
car stop switch if provided, or the uphill emergency exit
or end-loading top car door stop switch in accordance
with Item 3.1.1.
1-3.1.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rules 1708.3, 1708.4, and 1713.1.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 5.1.11, 5.1.20.1, 5.1.20.2, and 5.1.20.3.
152
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
ITEM 1-3.2
CAR TOP/INSPECTION LOCATION LIGHT AND
OUTLET
The light and outlet on inclined elevators should be
located at the inspection location. Follow the checks as
described in Items 3.2.1 and 3.2.3.
1-3.2.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rules 204.7 and 1713.1.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.14.7 and 5.1.2.
ITEM 1-3.3
TOP-OF-CAR EXTERIOR OPERATING DEVICE
1-3.3.1.3 Inclined Elevators. The operating
device is located most commonly at the uphill end emer-
gency exit of the uphill loading door on end-loading
inclined elevators; on very steep inclined elevators with
access to the car top, an operating device must be located
on the car top and may also be located at an uphill
emergency exit, if provided.
Check in accordance with the directions in Item 3.3.1.
1-3.3.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rules 204.1g, 210.1(1, and 1713.1.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.14.1.7, 2.26.1.4, and 5.1.20.
ITEM 1-3.4
TOP-OF-CAR/UPHILL-OF-CAR CLEARANCE AND
REFUGE SPACE
Before making any inspections or tests, determine the
available car top or uphill end clearance following the
procedure provided in Item 3.2.1.1. Where the measure-
ment is to be made in the direction of travel, measure
the distance from the car chassis or uphill unloading
platform or the furthest projecting item in the direction
of travel. There is no clearance or refuge space on
end-loading inclined elevators.
1-3.4.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Measure as
described in Item 3.4.1.1 as modified above.
1-3.4.3.3 Inclined Elevators. Measure as
described in Item 3.4.3.1 as modified above.
1-3.4.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rule 1702.2.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.1.5.2.
ITEM 1-3.5
NORMAL TERMINAL STOPPING DEVICES
In addition to the other cautions in this Guide, use
special care when examining or testing end-loading
inclined elevators as they do not have runby or refuge
space.
ITEM 1-3.6
FINAL AND EMERGENCY TERMINAL STOPPING
DEVICES
In addition to the other cautions in this Guide, use
special care when examining or testing end-loading
inclined elevators as they do not have runby or refuge
space.
1-3.6.2.3 Inclined Elevators. Test inclined eleva-
tors as suggested by this Guide, using extra caution
on end-loading inclined elevators. If a retractable sill is
provided, its contact may have to be jumped out to
properly test the final terminal stopping device.
1-3.6.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rules 209.3, 1716.4, and 1716.5.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.25.3, 5.1.22.4, and 5.1.22.5.
ITEM 1-3.8
TOP/UPHILL END EMERGENCY EXIT
Prior to Al 7. 1-2000 /B44-00, top emergency exits were
not required on inclined elevators unless there was
equipment installed that required servicing from the top
of the car. Inclined elevators installed under
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions require top emer-
gency exits where the angle of inclination exceeds 49
deg and where an uphill emergency exit is not provided.
1-3.8.3.3 Inclined Elevators. Inspect top emer-
gency exits in accordance with Item 3.8.3.1. Inspect
uphill emergency exits to verify that they open only into
the car and that the size of the opening is as required
by the Code. Check that the locking means can be
opened only from the car exterior by a nonremovable
handle and may be opened from within the car by a
special key. Check that the electric contact meets code
requirements.
1-3.8.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rule 1708.3.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.1.11.
ITEM 1-3.10
HOISTWAY CONSTRUCTION
Inclined elevators installed in open areas are not nor-
mally required to meet fire-resistive construction. There
are special requirements for these open installations.
1-3.10.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Inspect
fire-resistive hoistways as per Item 3.10.1.1. Inspect
hoistway enclosures on nonfire-resistive construction to
153
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
determine if the enclosure is maintained in a condition
that will provide the intended security.
1-3.10.3.3 Inclined Elevators. For fire-resistive
enclosures, inspect per Item 3.10.3.1. For
nonfire-resistive enclosures, measure the clearances and
heights and examine the materials used for compliance
with the Code. If structures are used to support the
hoist way, note that they are designed to prevent climb-
ing. If acrylics, glass, or wired glass are used in the
construction of the enclosure, verify their compliance
with the Code.
1-3.10.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Section 1700.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.1.2.
ITEM 1-3.16
TRAVELING CABLES, JUNCTION BOXES, AND
PROTECTIVE MEANS
Traveling cables on inclined elevators must have addi-
tional protection against abrasion and fouling as they
pass by the guide rail structure. The protective means
provided may be in conjunction with that provided to
protect the hoist ropes. Corrosion protection is required
for components used on weather-exposed installations.
1-3.16.1.3 Inclined Elevators. In addition to the
examinations called for in Item 3.16.1, examine the
means provided to protect the cables from abrasion and
fouling. Verify that it is not excessively worn and that
moving parts operate freely. Verify that corrosion is not
affecting components used in weather-exposed
installations.
1-3.16.3.3 Inclined Elevators. In addition to the
examinations called for in Item 3.16.3, examine the
means provided to protect the cables from abrasion and
fouling. Note that the means provided prevents lateral
motion of the cables into an area where fouling is possi-
ble. Verify that all moving components operate freely.
Verify components used in weather-exposed installa-
tions are protected against corrosion.
1-3.16.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rules 1717.1 and 1717.2.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.7.
ITEM 1-3.18
CAR FRAME (CHASSIS)
Inclined elevator car frames (chassis) are weight bear-
ing and are usually located below the car enclosure.
There are no styles but the car must be considerably
more structural due to the horizontal forces imposed in
a safety stop or buffer engagement. Cast iron is not
permitted to be used for guiding support or guide shoes
on inclined elevators.
1-3.18.1.3 Inclined Elevators. In addition to the
procedures found in Item 3.18.1.1, also take note of the
operating/ supporting roller guides for bad bearings,
tread delamination, and cracks. Most installations will
also have lateral guiding rollers to be checked.
1-3.18.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rule 1708.1.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.1.12.1.
ITEM 1-3.19
GUIDE RAILS FASTENING AND EQUIPMENT
Inclined elevators are not required to have finished
surfaces when used with a Type A or C safety. Slower
speed installations often have H beams for guide rails
with the car chassis operating on the upper flange and
the counterweight operating on the lower flange. Guide
rails together with guiding members must retain the car
and counterweight from derailment. A single guide rail
located between the main guide rails permitted to be
used for application of the safety and side guiding
should be included in the inspection procedure.
1-3.19.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Examine in accor-
dance with the procedures found in Item 3.19.1.1.
1-3.19.3.3 Inclined Elevators. Verify that the
design includes protection against derailment upthrust
or side thrust forces.
1-3.19.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Section 1706.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.1.18.
ITEM 1-3.20
GOVERNOR ROPE
1-3.20.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Inclined elevators
are permitted to use other than rope to drive governors.
Such drives will be found located on the car chassis. In
addition, some governors located on the car will be
driven by a static governor rope.
Inspect in accordance with Item 3.20.1.1.
1-3.20.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rule 1710.4.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 5.1.15 and 5.1.16.
ITEM 1-3.23
SUSPENSION ROPE
1-3.23.1.3 Inclined Elevators. In addition to the
requirements for electric elevators, suspension ropes on
154
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
inclined elevators must be protected against abrasion as
the ropes move over the supporting structure. The
means used may also protect the governor rope, if used,
and the traveling cable.
Inspect in accordance with Item 3.23.1.1, including the
protection against abrasion, unless previously inspected
under Item 3.16.
1-3.23.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Section 1715.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.1.16.
ITEM 1-3.27
CROSSHEAD/UPHILL CHASSIS MEMBER DATA
PLATE
1-3.27.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Inclined elevator
data plates will be found on the uphill chassis member.
Inspect in accordance with Item 3.27.3.1.
1-3.27.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rule 1711.2.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.1.13.2.
Part 1-4
Elevator — Outside Hoistway
ITEM 1-4.1
CAR PLATFORM GUARD
Prior to A17.1-2000/B44-00, inclined elevator plat-
form guards were required to cover all of the vertically
exposed area during leveling and 2 in. (51 mm) over
the leveling zone in each direction. Inclined elevators
installed under A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions
must have aprons that extend at least the width of the
widest hoistway opening plus the leveling zone in each
direction, and a vertical face in the direction of travel
as described +3 in. (75 mm). In addition, they must be
angled in the direction of travel and extend a minimum
of 1 in. (25 mm) below the landing sill at any position
to the extent of the leveling zone.
1-4.1.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Position the car at
each extreme of the leveling zone with the hoistway
door open and inspect the guard to determine that it is
in place and securely fastened. In some cases, the guard
can be inspected from the pit or from the workspace, if
provided, but the dimensions of the leveling zone will
have to be a known factor.
1-4.1.3.3 Inclined Elevators. Verify that a smooth
guard extends beyond the leveling zone in each direction
of travel +3 in. (75 mm) and that it extends a minimum
of 1 in. (25 mm) vertically below the landing sill in all
positions throughout the leveling zone, that it is bent
back in the direction of travel, and that it is secured
against the required forces.
1-4.1.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rules 1708.1 and 1708.2.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.1.12.2.
ITEM 1-4.5
ACCESS TO HOISTWAY
Inclined elevators installed under A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions that are located exterior to a building
and are not fully enclosed were not required to conform
to the access requirements for vertical electric elevators.
Inclined elevators installed under Al 7. 1-2000 /B44-00
and later editions that are of nonfire-resistive construc-
tion, due to their location exterior to building structure,
are permitted to have other means of access than those
required for electric vertical elevators. The means used
will vary considerably at each location, but must provide
safety equivalent to that provided by vertical elevators,
and if it includes entrance through the hoistway guard-
ing, it must be locked and contacted. Operating device
requirements are special to inclined elevators including
speed limitation to 125 ft/min (38 m/s).
1-4.5.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Inspect enclosed
hoistway installations in accordance with Item 4.5.1.
Inspect other type access for the condition and security
of the means of access.
1-4.5.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Section 1704 and Rule 1713.1.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.1.10.
ITEM 1-4.8
HOISTWAY ENCLOSURE
Inclined elevators are permitted to have enclosures of
acrylics, laminated glass, or wire glass, subject to the
provisions of the building code. Installations located in
nonfire-resistive hoistways have specific requirements
to protect against unauthorized access.
155
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
1-4.8.1.3 Inclined Elevators
(a) Hoistway Enclosures. Where nonf ire-resistive con-
struction is permitted and used, check that the materials
used are in satisfactory condition and maintained ade-
quately braced to maintain running clearances. Verify
that the means used to prevent climbing any structures
are in satisfactory condition.
(b) Transparent Enclosures. Verify that the glazing
means are in good condition to prevent penetration of
the enclosure.
1-4.8.3.3 Inclined Elevators. Inspect fire-resistive
hoistways in accordance with Item 4.8.3.1. Inspect
nonfire-resistive hoistways to verify that the materials
used are within the requirements and will sustain the
horizontal forces, and that supporting structures are pro-
tected against climbing to prevent unauthorized access.
1-4.8.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rule 1700.1.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 5.1.1.1 and 5.1.2.
Part 1-5
Elevator Pit
Some inclined elevator installations are configured so
that the area surrounding the terminus of the guides
cannot be used as a pit in which work can be performed.
These installations must provide a workspace of mini-
mum size and provided with a stop switch, lighting,
and convenience outlet.
Safety precautions are as follows:
(a) In addition to all of the safety precautions found
in the Guide, inspectors must be very aware of the multi-
directional movement of the car and counterweight.
Note also that as counterweights are normally located
directly under the car chassis, sometimes within the
same rail structure, counterweight pit guards are not
required. In some installations, the pit will not provide
adequate inspection space and a workspace must be
provided.
(b) Before entering the pit or workspace, if provided,
observe the operation and locations of the car and coun-
terweight and the available refuge spaces.
ITEM 1-5.1
PIT ACCESS, LIGHTING, STOP SWITCH, AND
CONDITION
1-5.1.1.3 Inclined Elevators
(a) Inspect either the pit or the workspace, if provided,
in accordance with Item 5.1.1.1.
(b) For inclined elevators installed outside a building
structure under Al 7.1-2000/ B44-00 and later editions,
verify that the means provided to remove weather-
caused water collection has been maintained.
1-5.1.3.3 Inclined Elevators. Examine the pit or
workspace as per Item 5.1.3.1. On exterior installations,
verify that electrical devices are weatherproof and that
provision has been made to remove rainwater.
1-5.1.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Section 1701 and Rule 1702.1.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later
Requirements 5.1.3, 5.1.4, and 5.1.10.
editions —
ITEM 1-5.2
BOTTOM CLEARANCE, RUNBY, AND MINIMUM
REFUGE SPACE
1-5.2.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Inclined elevators
must meet the requirements for electric elevators or
provide refuge space to either side of the pit or towards
the downhill end of the pit.
Inspect in accordance with Item 5.2,1,1, making mea-
surements in the direction of travel.
1-5.2.3.3 Inclined Elevators. Inspect in accor-
dance with Item 5.2.3.1 in direction of travel. Verify the
refuge space for Code compliance.
1-5.2.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rules 1701.2 and 1702.1.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 5.1.4 and 5.1.5.1.
ITEM 1-5.3
FINAL AND EMERGENCY TERMINAL STOPPING
DEVICES
End-loading inclined elevators have special require-
ments due to the absence of runby. The final terminal
stopping device must operate within the extremely short
distance between the normal stopping device and the
landing. Some installations may be provided with
retractable sills to permit a form of runby. Spring buffers
are not permitted on end-loading inclined elevators and
oil buffers with switch gear are required at both terminals
and will be compressed under normal stopping
conditions.
Perform inspections and tests in accordance with
Item 5.3.1.1.
1-5.3.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rules 209.3, 1716.4, and 1716.5.
156
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 2.25.3, 5.1.22.4, and 5.1.22.5.
ITEM 1-5.4
NORMAL TERMINAL STOPPING DEVICES AND
RETRACTABLE SILLS
End-loading inclined elevators are permitted to use a
retractable sill to provide an extremely short form of
runby.
1-5.4.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Perform inspections
in accordance with Item 5.4.1.1. If retractable sills are
provided on end-loading inclined elevators, verify that
the car cannot operate in the direction of the particular
sill unless the sill has returned to its normal location.
1-5.4.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rule 1716.5.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirement 5.1.22.5.
ITEM 1-5.5
TRAVELING CABLES
1-5.5.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Inclined elevators
require means to guide and protect traveling cables from
pinching and abrasion as they move over the guide rail
supporting structure. The means provided may also be
used for suspension and compensating rope guidance
and abrasion protection.
In addition to the procedures in Item 5.5.1.1, examine
the means provided to guide and protect the traveling
cables from abrasion and fouling.
1-5.5.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rules 1715.2 and 1717.1.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 5.1.7.1 and 5.1.16.1.
ITEM 1-5.8
CAR SAFETIES AND GUIDING MEMBERS
There are several special conditions to be observed
on inclined elevators. The rails used for Types A and C
safeties are not required to have machined surfaces and
structural steel shapes might be used. The guiding sup-
ports and guide shoes are not permitted to be of cast
iron. When making safety tests, be aware that some
inclined elevators have the governor located on the car
(see Items 2.13, 2.29, and 3.20).
1-5.8.1.3 Inclined Elevators.
dance with Item 5.8.1.1.
Examine in accor-
1-5.8.2.3 Inclined Elevators. See Item 2.29.
1-5.8.3.3 Inclined Elevators. Examine in accor-
dance with Item 5.8.3.1.
1-5.8.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Rules 1706.3 and 1708.1, and
Section 1710.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 5.1.12.1, 5.1.14, 5.1.15, and 5.1.18.
ITEM 1-5.9
BUFFER AND EMERGENCY TERMINAL SPEED
LIMITING DEVICES
1-5.9.1.3 Inclined Elevators. Inclined elevators
installed at exterior locations require corrosion protec-
tion. End-loading inclined elevators must use only oil
buffers located at each terminal.
Inspect and test in accordance with Item 5.9.1.1. Note
the buffer stroke tables for inclined elevators are different
from those for electric elevators.
1-5.9.2.3 Inclined Elevators. Note that the buffer
stroke tables for inclined elevators are different from
those for electric elevators.
1-5.9.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1d-2000 and
earlier editions — Section 1707 and Rule 1716.3.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
Requirements 5.1.17 and 5.1.22.3.
Part 1-6
Elevator — Firefighters' Service
Until A17.1a-1997, there was no specific exception
for firefighters' service for inclined elevators installed
exterior to a building structure.
Where inclined elevators are installed within a build-
ing structure, inspect in accordance with Part 6.
If the jurisdictional authority requires inclined eleva-
provided with firefighters' service, inspect in accordance
with Part 6.
1-6.4.4.3 Inclined Elevators. A17.1-1996 and ear-
lier editions — no rule.
A17.1a-1997 through A17.1d-2000 — Rule 1714.2.
A17.1-2000/B44-00 and later editions —
tors located exterior to a building structure to be Requirement 2.27.3.
157
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 1-1.16.3 Net Platform Area Measurements
A
8ft
(2.5 m)
1ft
1ft
< (0.3 m) >
(0.3 m)
S
e
a
E
S
e
a
t
t
^
Example: 8 ft x 4 ft = 32 ft2, gross platform area (gpa}. Seats: 1 ft x 4 ft x 2 =
8 ft2 x 50% = 4 ft2. 32 ft2 gpa - 4 ft2 = 28 ft2 net platform area
(1.2 m X 2.5 m = 3 m2, gross platform area (gpa). Seats: 0.3 m x 1.2 m = 0.36 m2
x 2 = 0.72 m2, 50% of seat area = 0.36 m2; deducted from 3 m2 (gpa) = 2.64 m2 net
platform area.)
Fig. I-2.13.2-1 Static Governor Rope Drive
One end of the governor
rope is weighted or under
spring tension
The other end is
tied off >^
Fig. I-2.13.2-2 Wheel Driven Governor
158
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Fig. 1-2.28.2 Retractable Sill
Spring loaded or power driven retractable sill
u
^5
u
Switch made permitting car movement
towards landing
Fig. 1-3.4 Uphill Clearance
This sketch illustrates the need
for special caution while examing
the equipment located below the
car platform
159
C
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Fig. 1-4.1 Car Platform Guard
Car
Leveling zone
+ 3 in. (75 mm
Bent portion
Fig. 1-5.1 Pits and Work Spaces
Elevation View
No pit space
18 in. (450 mm) min. J
r
*
u. . /^
Plan View
Workspace
/
Guide rails
18 in. (450 mm) min. :
7^
'
*
/
Running line of car or counterweight, whichever is greater
160
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ^|
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ^
ASMEA17.2-2010
Fig. 1-5.2 Refuge Space When Conformance to Requirement 2.4.1 is Not Provided
24 in. x 24 in. x 84 in. high
(610 mm x 610 mm x 2134 mm)
Plan View
48 in. (1220 mm) high
Running line of car or counterweight, whichever is greater
48 in. (1220 mm) high
24 in. (610 mm)
161
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ^L .
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ^
ASME A17.2-2010
Additional Checklist for Inclined Elevators
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000
Requirements
Comments
1
Elevator Inclined — Inside of Car
1.6
Special car emergency signal
1714.1
5.1.21.1
1.10
Special zoning for power open
1709.3
5.1.9
1.11
Special materials allowed
1708.5
5.1.11.3
1.13
Emergency exit car top uphill
1708.3a
1708.3b
1708.3c
5.1.11.1.1
5.1.11.1.2
5.1.11.1.3
1.16
Special platform area
1711.1
5.1.13.1
1.18
Special restricted opening
1709.3
2.12.5
Note A17.1a-1997
2
Elevator Inclined — Machine Room
2.13
Special governor location/drive
1710.4
5.1.15
2.20
Special winding drum/slack cable
1712
1713.2
5.1.19
5.1.20.5
2.28
Special for end-loading
1716.4
1716.5
5.1.22.4
5.1.22.5
2.29
Special requirements for safeties
Prior A17.1D-1995
1706,3
1707.3
1710
Table 1710.4
1706.3
1707.3
1710
Table 1710.2(a)
Table 1710.2(b)
1713.3
5.1.14
Table 5.1.14.2
5.1.15
5.1.17.3
5.1.18.3
5.1.18.4
5.1.20.6
Major change in stopping
distances
Electrical stopping
3
Elevator, Inclined — Top of Car/Uphill Exit/End-Loading Top Car Door
3.1
Stop switch at location
1708.3
1708.4
1713.1
5.1.11
5.1.20.1
5.1.20.2
5.1.20.3
3.2
Light and outlet at location
204.7
1713.1
2.14.7
5.1.20
3.3
Operating device at location
204.1g
210.1d
1713.1
2.14.1.7
2.26.1.4
5.1.20
3.4
Top of car/directional clearance and refuge space
1702.2
5.1.5.2
3.6
Final emergency terminal and special for end-
loading
209.3
1716.4
1716.5
2.25.3
5.1.22.4
5.1.22.5
3.8
Top/Uphill end emergency exit
1708.3
5.1.11
3.10
Hoistway construction
1700
5.1.2
3.16
Traveling cables and junction box
1717.1
1717.2
5.1.7
3.18
Car frame (chassis)
1708.1
5.1.12.1
3.19
Guide rails, fastening, and equipment
1706
5.1.18
162
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Additional Checklist for Inclined Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000
Requirements
Comments
3
Elevator, Inclined — Top of Car/Uphill Exit/End-Loading Top Car Door (Cont'd)
3.20
Governor rope
1710.4
5.1.15
5.1.16
3.23
Suspension rope
1715
5.1.16
3.27
Crosshead/uphill chassis member data plate
1711.2
5.1.13.2
4
Elevator, Inclined — Outside Hoistway
4.1
Car platform guard
1708.1
1708.2
5.1.12.2
4.5
Access to hoistway
1704
1713.1
5.1.10
4.8
Hoistway enclosure
1700.1
5.1.1.1
5.1.2
5
Elevator, Inclined - Pit or Work Space
5.1
Pit access, lighting, stop switch, and condition
1701
1702.1
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.10
5.2
Bottom clearance, runby, and minimum refuge
space
1701.2
1702.1
5.1.4
5.1.5.1
5.3
Final and emergency terminal stopping devices
209.3
1716.4
1716.5
2.25.3
5.1.22.4
5.1.22.5
5.4
Normal terminal stopping devices
1716.5
5.1.22.5
5.5
Traveling cables
1715.2
1717.1
5.1.7.1
5.1.16.1
5.8
Car safeties and guiding members
1706.3
1708.1
1710
5.1.12.1
5.1.14
5.1.15
5.1.18
5.9
Buffers and emergency terminal speed limiting
devices
1707
Table 1707.2
Table 1707.4
5.1.17
Table 5.1.17.2
Table 5.1.17.4.4
6
6.4
Elevator, Inclined — Firefighters' Service
Firefighters' service
No rule
A17.1a-1997
1714.2
2.27.3
163
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(10)
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX A
INSPECTION CHECKLISTS
Checklist for Electric Elevators
A17.1-2000/
A17.1-1996
B44-00
A17.3
Item
Check
Section/Rule
Requirements
Section/Para.
Comments
1
ELEVATOR - INSIDE OF CAR
1.1
Door reopening device
112,
1001.2(a)(1)
2.13,
8.11.2.1.1(a)
2.8
1.2
Stop switches
210.2(e),
2.26.2.5,
3.10.4(t),
210. 2(v),
2.26.2.21,
3.10.4(u)
1001.2(a)(2)
8.11.2.1.1(b)
1.3
Operating control devices
210.1a,
2.26.1.1,
3.10.1,
210.1e,
2.26.1.6,
3.10.2,
1001.2(a)(3)
8.11.2.1.1(c)
3.10.7
1.4
Sills and car floor
108.1,
2.5.1,
3.3.3,
ANSI A117.1
llO.lOd,
2.11.10.3,
3.3.4
110.11a,
2.11.11.1,
110.13a,
2.11.13.1,
203.16,
2.15.16,
210.12,
8.11.2.1.1(d)
1001.2(a)(4)
1.5
Car lighting and receptacles
204.7,
2.14.7,
3.4.5,
1001.2(a)(5)
8.11.2.1.1(e)
3.4.6
1.6
Car emergency signal
211.1,
1001.2(a)(6)
2.27.1,
8.11.2.1.1(f)
3.11.1
1.7
Car door or gate
112.2a,
2.5.1.5.3,
3.4.2,
204.4,
2.13.2.1,
3.4.3,
204.5,
2.14.4,
Appendix A
204.6,
2.14.5,
210.2q,
2.14.6,
1001.2(a)(7)
2.26.2 (2,26,2.15),
8.11.2.1.1(g)
1.8
Door closing force
112.4(b),
1001.2(a)(8),
1002. 2h
2.13.4.2.3,
8.11.2.1.1(h),
2.13.4.2.4,
8.11.2.2.8
2.8.1
1.9
Power closing of doors or
112.3,
2.13.3,
2.8.2
gates
1001.2(a)(9)
8.11.2.1.1(0
1.10
Power opening of doors or
111.12,
2.26.1.6,
gates
210.1e,
210.9c,
1001.2(a)(10),
1002.3g,
1002. 3h,
1002.31
2.26.9 (2.26.9.3),
8.11.2.1. lQ),
8.11.2.3.7,
8.11.2.3.8,
c8. 11. 2.3. 8,
8.11.2.3.9
1.11
Car vision panels and glass
204.2e,
2.14.2.5,
3.4.2,
car doors
204.51,
1001.2(a)(ll)
2.14.5.8,
8.11.2.1.1(k)
3.4.3
164
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Checklist for Electric Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
1
ELEVATOR - INSIDE OF CAR
(Cont'd)
1.12
Car enclosure
(NR 2.7.5.1.4),
2.7.5.1.4,
3.4.1,
NFPA 70 or CSA
204,
2.14,
3.7.5
C22.1, as
204.1b,
2.14.1.2,
applicable
204.1h,
2.14.1.8,
(NR 2.14.2.6),
2.14.2.6,
207.2b,
2.16.2.2,
207.4,
2.16.4,
207.5,
2.16.5,
211.9,
2.29.1,
1104,
8.3.7,
1206.9
8.6.10.3,
1202.5,
8.7.2.14,
1001.2(a)(12),
8.11.2.1.1(1),
204.2b,
2.14.2.2,
(NR 2.14.2.6),
2.14.2.6,
(NR 8.1)
8.1
1.13
Emergency exit
204. le,
204.1],
204.2d,
1001.2(a)(13)
2.14.1.5,
2.14.1.10,
2.14.2.4,
8.1.2,
8.6.10.2,
8.11.2.1.1(m)
3.4.4
1.14
Ventilation
204.1(i),
2.14.1.9.1(f),
NFPA 70 or CSA
204.2c,
2.14.2.3,
C22.1, as
204.3c,
2.14.3.3,
applicable
1001.2(a)(14)
8.11. 2.1. l(n)
1.15
Signs and operating device
210.13,
2.16.12,
symbols
1001.2(a)(15)
8.11.2.1.1(o)
1.16
Rated load, platform area, and
207,
2.16,
3.7
data plate
1001.2(a)(16)
8.11.2.1.1(p)
1.17
Standby power operation
207.8,
210.10,
211.2,
1001.2(a)(17),
1002. 2g,
1002. 3e
2.16.8,
2.26.10,
2.27.2,
8.11.2. l.l(q),
8.11.2.2.7,
8.11.2.3.5
1.18
Restricted opening of car or
hoistway doors
111.12,
1001.2(a)(18)
8.11.2.1.1(r)
2.7.4
1.19
Car ride
200,
203.2,
1001.2(a)(19)
2.23,
2.15.2,
8.11.2.1.1(s)
1.20
Earthquake inspection and
tests (seismic Zone 2 or
greater)
2406
8.4
2
ELEVATOR - MACHINE ROOM
2.1
Access to machine space
101.1a,
2.7.1.1,
2.2.2
NFPA 70 or CSA
101.3a,
2.7.3.1,
C22.1, as
101.3b,
2.7.3.2,
applicable
101.3c,
2.7.3.3,
101.3d,
2.7.3.4,
1001.2(b)(1)
8.11.2.1.2(a)
165
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Checklist for Electric Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
2
ELEVATOR - MACHINE ROOM (Cont'd)
2.2
Headroom
101.4,
1001.2(b)(2)
2.7.4,
8.11.2.1.2(b)
2.3
Lighting and receptacles
101.5a,
2.7.5.1,
2.2.3
NFPA 70 orCSA
101.5c,
8.11.2.1.2(c)
C22.1, as
1001.2(b)(3)
applicable
2.4
Machine space
100.3c,
2.1.3.3,
2.2.1,
100.3d,
2.1.3.4,
2.2.6
100.5,
2.1.5,
101.1a,
2.7.1.1,
101.2,
2.7.2.1,
101.8,
2.7.8,
1001.2(b)(4)
8.11.2.1.2(d)
2.5
Housekeeping
1001.2(b)(5),
1206.2b,
1206.9
8.11.2.1.2(e),
8.6.4.8,
8.6.10.3
2.6
Ventilation
101.5b,
102.4,
1001.2(b)(6)
2.7.5.2,
2.8.4,
8.11.2.1.2(0
2.2.4
2.7
Fire extinguisher
1001.2(b)(7),
1206.1h
8.11.2.1.2(g),
c8. 11. 2. 1.2(g),
8.6.1.6.5
2.8
Pipes, wiring, and ducts
102.1,
2.8.1,
2.2.5
ANSI/NFPA13; A17.1,
102.2,
2.8.2,
Inquiry 88-26
1001.2(b)(8)
8.11.2.1.2(h)
2.9
Guarding of exposed auxiliary
104.1,
2.10.1,
equipment
1001.2(b)(9)
8.11.2.1.2(0
2.10
Numbering of elevators,
208.10,
2.26.4,
NFPA 70 orCSA
machines, controllers, and
210.4,
2.29.1,
C22.1, as
disconnect switches
211.9,
1001.2(b)(10)
8.11.2.1.2Q)
applicable
2.11
Disconnecting means and
210.4,
2.26.4,
3.10.5
NFPA 70 orCSA
control
1001.2(b)(ll)
8.11.2.1.2(p)
C22.1, as
applicable
A17. 5-1991
clause 20.7
2.12
Controller wiring, fuses,
102.1,
2.8.2,
3.10
NFPA 70 or CSA
grounding, etc.
210.4,
2.26.4,
C22.1, as
1001.2(b)(12),
8.11.2.1.2(q),
applicable
1206. If
8.6.1.6.1,
C8.6.12. 3.1.3,
8.6.1.6.3,
c8. 6.12. 2.6
2.13
Governor, overspeed switch,
206,
2,18,
3.6.1,
and seal
205.15,
210.2Q),
1001.2(b)(28),
1002.2c,
1002.3a,
1002.3b,
1003.2a,
1206.1a
2.17.15,
2.26.2 (2.26.2.10),
8.11.2.1. 2(bb),
8,11.2.2.3,
8.11.2.3.1,
8.11.2.3.2,
C8.ll. 2. 3.2(c)
8.10.2.2.2(cc)(l),
8,6.1.6.2
3.10.4(g)
166
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Checklist for Electric Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
2
ELEVATOR - MACHINE ROOM (Cont'd)
2.14
Code data plate
215,
1200.6
8.9,
8.7.1.8
2.15
Static control
210.2,
210.9(d),
1001.2(b)(13),
1003.2h
2.26.2,
2.26.9.5,
8.11.2,1.2(m),
8.10.2. 2. 2(m)
2.16
Overhead beam and fasten-
105.1,
2.9.1,
ings
105.2,
105.3,
1001.2(b)(14)
2.9.2,
2.9.3,
8.11.2.1.2(n)
2.17
Drive machine brake
207.2b,
207.8,
(NR 2.24.8),
210.8,
1001.2(b)(15),
[NR 8.11.2.3.10(a)],
1002.3d
2.16.2.2,
2.16.8,
2.24.8,
2.26.8,
8.11.2.1.2(0),
8.11.2.3.10(a),
8.11.2.3.4
3.8.4
2.18
Traction drive machines
208,
100l.2(b)(16),
1003.2,
[NR 811.2.3.10(b)]
2.24,
8.11.2. 1.2(p),
8.10.2.2.2(v)(b)(3),
8.11.2.3.10(b)
3.8.1
2.19
Gears, bearings, and flexible
208,
2.24,
3.8.1
couplings
1001.2(b)(17),
1206.1a
8.11.2.1.2(q),
8.6.1.6.2
2.20
Winding drum machine and
208.1,
2.24.1,
3.8.2,
slack rope device, stop
2093c(2),
2.25.3.3.2,
3.10.4,
motion switch and rope
209.3e,
2.25.3.5,
3.12.6,
fastening
210.2,
2.26.2,
3.12.7,
212.6,
2.20.2,
3.12.9
212.7,
2.20.7,
212.10,
2.20.10,
1001.2(b)(18),
8.11.2.1.2(w),
(NR 8.6.4.19.4),
8.6.4.19.4,
(NR 8.6.4.19.5),
8.6.4.19.5,
1002.2d,
8.11.2.2.4,
1206.3
8.6.4.10,
C8.6.12.4.2
2.21
Belt- or chain-drive machine
208.9,
1001.2(b)(19)
2.24.9,
8.11.2.1.2(s)
3.8.3
2.22
Motor generator
210.9f,
1001.2(b)(20),
1003.2]
2.26.9.7,
8.11. 2.1. 2(t),
8.10.2.2.2(t)
2.23
Absorption of regenerated
210.10,
2.26.10,
3.10.10
power
1001.2(b)(21),
1003.2k
8.11.2. 1.2(u),
8.10.2. 2. 2(u)
2.24
AC drives from a DC source
210.2,
210.9(e),
1001.2(b)(22),
1003. 2i
2.26.2,
2.26.9.6,
8.11.2.1.2(v),
8.10.2.2.2(m)(3)
167
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Checklist for Electric Elevators (Cont'd)
A17.1-2000/
A17.1-1996
B44-00
A17.3
Item
Check
Section/Rule
Requirements
Section/Para.
Comments
2
ELEVATOR - MACHINE ROOM (Cont'd)
2.25
Traction sheaves
207.8,
208.2,
208.3,
212,
1001.2(b)(23),
1202.14,
1206.1a,
1206.1b
2.16.8,
2.24.2,
2,24.3,
2.20,
8.11.2. 1.2(w),
8.7,2.21,
8.6.1.6.2,
8.6.4.1
3.8.1
2.26
Secondary and deflector
208,
2.24,
3.8.1
sheaves
1001.2(b)(24),
1206.1a
8.11.2. 1.200,
8.6.1.6.2
2.27
Rope fastenings
105.3c,
1001.2(b)(25),
212
2.9.3.3,
8.11.2.1. 2(y),
2.20
3.12
2.28
Terminal stopping devices
209,
2.25,
3.8.2,
1001.2(b)(26),
8.11.2.1.2(z),
3.9.1,
1002.3f
8.11.2.3.6
3.9.2,
3.10.4
2.29
Car and counterweight safeties
205,
2.17,
3.5,
1306,
8.2.6,
3.6,
Table 205.3,
Table 2.17.3,
3.10.4(m)
1001.2(b)(29),
8.11.2.1.2(cc),
1002.2b,
8.11.2.2.2,
1002.3a,
8.11.2.3.1,
1003.2,
8.10.2.2,
1202.6
8.7.2.18
2.40
Maintenance records
8.6.1.4,
c8. 6.12. 2. 5,
8.6.10.1
2.41
Static control
2.42
Earthquake inspection and
2401,
8.4.2,
tests (seismic risk Zone 2
2400.1,
8.4.3.1,
or greater)
2408,
2409
8.4.9,
8.4.10
3
ELEVATOR - TOP OF CAR
3.1
Top-of-car stop switch
210.2(h),
1001.2(c)(1)
2.26.2.8,
8.11.2.1.3(a)
3.10.4(e)
3.2
Car top light and outlet
204.7,
2.14.7,
3.4.5
NFPA 70 or CSA
1001.2(c)(2)
8.11.2.1.3(b)
C22.1, as applica-
ble
3.3
Top-of-car operating device
204.1g,
210.1d,
1001.2(c)(3)
2.14.1.7,
2.26.1.4,
8.11.2.1.3(c)
3.10.3
3.4
Top-of-car clearance, refuge
1206.8,
8.6.4.11,
2.4.4
space, and standard railing
107,
1304
2.4,
2.10.2,
2.14.1.7,
8.2.4
168
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Checklist for Electric Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
3
ELEVATOR - TOP OF CAR (Cont'd)
3.5
Normal terminal stopping
devices
207.4,
209.2,
210.2,
1001.2(c)(7),
1002. 2e,
1003.2f,
1003. 3(k)
2.25.1,
2.25.2,
2.26.2,
8.11.2.1.3(g),
8.11.2.2.5,
8.10.2,2.2(z),
8.10.2. 3. 2(k)
3.9.1,
3.10.4
3.6
Final and emergency terminal
stopping devices
209.3,
1001.2(c)(8),
1002. 2e,
1003.3(k)
2.25.3,
8.11.2.1.3(h),
8.11.2.2.5,
8.10.2.3.2(k)
3.9.2
3.7
Car leveling and anticreep
devices
210. le,
1001.2(c)(10)
2.26.1.6,
8.11.2.1.3Q)
3.8
Top emergency exit
204. le,
1001.2(c)(12)
2.14.1.5,
8.11.2.1.3(1)
3.4.4
3.9
Floor and emergency
identification numbering
100.7,
211.9,
1001.2(c)(15)
2.29.2,
2.29.1,
8.11.2.1.3(0)
3.10
Hoistway construction
100,
1001.2(c)(16)
2.1,
8.11.2.1.3(p)
2.1
3.11
Hoistway smoke control
100.4,
1001.2(c)(17)
2.1.4,
8.11.2. 1.3(q)
3.12
Pipes, wiring, and ducts
102,
1001.2(c)(18)
2.8,
8.11.2.1.3(r)
2.1.4
3.13
Windows, projections,
recesses, and setbacks
100.5,
100.6,
110.10,
1001.2(c)(19)
2.1.5,
2.1.6,
2.11.10,
8.11.2.1.3(5)
2.1.2,
2.1.3
3.14
Hoistway clearances
107,
108,
1001.2(c)(20)
2.4,
2.5,
8.11.2.1.3(0
2.4
3.15
Multiple hoistways
100. Id,
1001.2(c)(21)
2.1.1.4,
8.11. 2.1. 3(u)
3.16
Traveling cables and junction
boxes
102.1,
1001.2(c)(22)
2.8.1,
8.11.2.1.3(v)
NFPA 70 or C5A
C22.1, as
applicable
3.17
Door and gate equipment
110,
111,
210. le,
1001.2(c)(23)
2.11,
2.12,
2.26.1.6,
8.11.2.1.3(w)
2.6,
2.7
A17.1 Inquiry 96-71
3.18
Car frame and stiles
203,
213,
1001.2(c)(24),
1200.4,
1202.4a
2.15,
8.8,
8.11.2.1.3(x),
8.6.2,
8.7.2.15.1
3.19
Guide rails fastening and
equipment
205.16,
1001.2(c)(25),
1206. Id
2.17.16,
8.11.2.1.3(y),
8.6.4.3
3.5.6
169
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be niade of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Checklist for Electric Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
3
ELEVATOR - TOP OF CAR (Cont'd)
3.20
Governor rope
206.5,
1001.2(c)(26),
1202.7,
1206.1c
2.18.5,
8.11.2.1. 3(z),
8.7.2.19,
8.6.4.2
3.6.2
3.21
Governor releasing carrier
205.15,
1001.2(c)(27)
2.17.15,
8.6.2.4,
8.11.2.1.3(aa)
3.5
3.22
Wire rope fastening and hitch
212,
2.20,
3.12.5,
plate
105.3c,
2.9.3.3,
3.12.8,
203.13,
2.15.13,
3.12.9
1001.2(c)(28),
8.11.2.1.3(bb),
1200.5,
8.6.3,
1206.3
8.6.4.10,
C8.6.12.4.1.1,
C8.6.12.4.3,
c8. 6.12.4.4,
c8. 6.12.4. 5
3.23
Suspension rope
212,
206.7,
1001.2(c)(29)(a),
1200.5,
1202.14,
1203.9,
1004.2(c)
2.20,
2.18.7,
8.11.2.1.3(cc)(l),
8.6.3,
8.7.2.21,
8.7.3.25,
8.11.3.1.3(y)
3.24
Top counterweight clearance
107.1h,
1001.2(c)(5)
2.4.9,
8.11.2.1.3(e)
3.25
Car, overhead, and deflector
sheaves
208
2.24
3.8.1
3.26
Broken rope, chain, or tape
209.2c(2),
2.25.2.3.2,
3.10.4(d)
switch
210.2(f),
1001.2(c)(9),
1002. 2i
2.26.2.6,
8.11.2.1.3(0,
8.11.2.2.9
3.27
Crosshead data plate and rope
207.3,
2.16.3,
3.12.2
data tags
212.2,
1001.2(c)(ll),
1202.14
2.20.2,
8.11.2.1. 3(k),
8.7.2.21
3.28
Counterweight and counter-
201,
2.3,
2.1.5,
weight buffer
202,
2.4.9,
2.4.3,
1001.2(c)(13)
2.21,
2.22,
8.11,2. 1.3(m),
8.11.2.1.5(c),
8.11.2.3.3,
c8.11.2.3.3(d)
3.1,
3.2,
4.9
3.29
Counterweight safeties
205,
2.17.12.4,
3.5.2,
206.5(e),
2.18.5.3,
3.6.2,
1001.2(b),
8.11.2.1. 2(y),
3.12.2
1001. 2(c) (14),
8.11.2.1.3(k),
1001.2(c),
8.11.2.1.3(z),
1003.2,
8.10.2.2.2(z),
1002.3(a),
8.11.2. 1.3(n),
1003.2,
8.11.2.3.1,
1002.3
8.10.2.2,
8.11.2.3
170
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Checklist for Electric Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
3
ELEVATOR - TOP OF CAR (Cont'd)
3.33
Compensating ropes and
chains
202.4,
1001.2(c)(30),
1003. 2g
2.21.4,
8.11.2.1.3(dd),
8.10.2. 2.3(dd),
8.10.2.2.5(h)
3.34
Earthquake inspection and
tests (seismic risk Zone 2
or greater)
2402,
2401,
2400,
2405,
2407,
2404,
2403
8.4.1,
8.4.2,
8.4.3,
8.4.5,
8.4.6,
8.4.7,
8.4.8
4
ELEVATOR - OUTSIDE HOISTWAY
4.1
Car platform guard
203.9,
1001.2(d)(1)
2.15.9,
8.11.2.1.4(a)
3.3,
3.2.2
4.2
Hoistway doors
110,
111.7,
210.2,
1001.2(d)(2)
2.11,
2.12.7,
2.26.2,
8.11.2.1.4(b)
3.10.4
4.3
Vision panels
110.7,
1001.2(d)(3)
2.11.7,
8.11.2.1.4(c)
2.6.3
4.4
Hoistway door locking devices
111,
1001.2(d)(4)
2.12,
8.11.2.1.4(d)
2.7.1
4.5
Access to hoistway
111.6,
111.7,
1001.2(d)(5)
2.12.6,
2.12.7,
8.11.2.1.4(e)
2.7.3
4.6
Power closing of hoistway
doors
112,
1001.2(d)(6)
2.13,
8.11.2.1.4(f)
4.7
Sequence operation
112.6,
112.3d,
1001.2(d)(7)
2.13.6,
2.13.3.4,
8.11.2.1.4(g)
4.8
Hoistway enclosure
100.1,
100.4,
100.5,
1001.2(d)(8)
2.1.1,
2.1.4,
2.1.5,
8.11.2.1.4(h)
2.1.1,
2.1.2
ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR
Part 1201
4.9
Elevator parking devices
1001.2(d)(9)
8.11.2.1.4(0
2.7.2
4.10
Emergency doors in blind
hoistways
110.1,
1001.2(d)(10)
2.11.1.1,
2.11.1.2,
8.1,
8.11.2.1.4(0
4.11
Separate counterweight
hoistway
103.1,
103.3,
110.1,
1001.2(d)(ll)
2.3.1,
2.3.3,
2.11.1.1,
2.11.1.2,
2.26.2.27,
8.11.2.1.4(k)
171
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Checklist for Electric Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
4
4.12
ELEVATOR - OUTSIDE HOISTWAY (Cont'd)
Standby power selection
switch
211.2,
211.8,
1001.2(d)(13),
1002.2g
2.27.2,
2.27.8,
8.11.2.1.4(1),
8.11.2,2.7
3.11.2
5
ELEVATOR - PIT
5.1
Pit access, lighting, stop
102,
2.8,
2.3.1,
NFPA 70 orCSA
switch, and condition
103.2,
2.3.2,
2.3.2,
C22.1,as
106.1,
2.26.2.7,
2.7.3
applicable
210.2(g),
8.11.2.1.5(a),
1001.2(e)(1),
8.6.4.7
1206.2a
5.2
Bottom clearance, runby, and
103.2,
2.3.2,
2.4.2,
minimum refuge space
107.1a,
107.1b,
201.4h,
1001.2(e)(2),
1202.14b,
1206.8
2.4.1,
2.4.2,
2.22.4.8,
8.11.2.1.5(b),
8.6.4.11
2.4.3
5.3
Final and emergency terminal
209.3,
2.25.3,
3.9.2
stopping devices
1001.2(e)(4),
1003.2e
8.11.2.1.5(d),
8.10.2.2.5(c),
C8.10.2.2.5(c)(6)
5.4
Normal terminal stopping
209,
2.25,
3.9.1
devices
1002. 2e
8.11.2.2.5
5.5
Traveling cables
102.2
2.8.2
NFPA 70 or CSA
C22.1, as applica-
ble
5.6
Governor-rope tension devices
206.7,
1001.2(e)(7),
1206.1a
2.18.7,
8.11.2.1.5(g),
8.6.1.6.2
5.7
Car frame and platform
203.8,
203.6,
207.2b(3),
1001.2(e)(9)
2.15.8,
2.15.6,
2.16.2.2,
8.11.2.1.5(0
3.3
5.8
Car and counterweight safeties
203,
2.15,
3.5
and guiding members
205.11,
1001. 2(e) (10),
1001.2b(2)(c),
1002.3a,
1206.1g,
1202.4a
2.17.11,
8.11.2.1.5Q),
8.11.2.1.2,
8.11.2.3.1,
8.6.4.5,
8.7.2.15.1
5.9
Buffers and emergency termi-
201,
2.22,
3.1,
nal speed limiting devices
109.1,
210. 2(w),
1002. 3f,
1003.2e,
1206. If,
1308.2
2.6,
2.26.2.22,
8.11.2.3.6,
8.10.2.2.5(c),
C8.10.2.2. 5(c)(6),
8.6.1.6.3,
c8. 6.12. 2. 6,
8.2.3,
8.3.1.3
3.10.4(m)
172
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Checklist for Electric Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17. 1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
5
ELEVATOR - PIT (Cont'd)
5.10
Compensating chains, ropes,
202.4,
2.21.4,
and sheaves
205.17,
210.2c,
1001.2(e)(8)
2.17.17,
2.26.2.3,
8.11.2.1.5(h)
5.16
Earthquake inspection and
2400,
8.4.3,
tests (seismic risk Zone 2 or
2407,
8.4.6,
greater)
2403
8.4.8
6
ELEVATOR - FIREFIGHTERS' !
SERVICE
6.1
Operation of elevators under
112.3d,
2.13.3.4,
A17.1D-1973 through
fire and other emergency
112.5,
2.13.5,
A17.1D-1980, Rule
conditions (A17.1D-1973
1001.2(d)(12),
8.11.2.1.4(1),
211.3
through A17.1D-1980)
1002. 2f,
1206.7
8.11.2.2.6,
8.6.10.1
6.2
Operation of elevators under
112.3d,
2.13.3.4,
A17. 1-1981 through
fire and other emergency
112.5,
2.13.5,
A17.1D-1983, Rule
conditions (A17. 1-1981
1001.2(d)(12),
8.11.2.1.4(1),
211.3
through A17.1D-1983)
1002. 2f,
1206.7
8.11.2.2.6,
8.6.10.1
6.3
Firefighters' service (A17.1-
112.3d,
2.13.3.4,
3.11.3
A17. 1-1984 through
1984 through A17.1a-1988
112.5,
2.13.5,
A17.1a-1988, Rules
and A17.3)
1001.2(d)(12),
8.11.2.1.4(1),
211.3 through
1002.2f,
8.11.2.2.6,
211.8
1206.7
8.6.10.1
6.4
Firefighters' service (A17.1b-
112.3d,
2.13.3.4,
1989 through A17.1d-2000)
112.5,
211.2-211.8,
1001.2(d)(12),
1002. 2f,
1206.7
2.13.5,
2.27.2-2.27.8,
8.11.2.1.4(1),
8.11.2.2.6
8.6.10.1
6.5
Acceptance checklist firefight-
ers' service (Al 7.1-2000
and B44-00): automatic
elevators
173
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Checklist for Hydraulic Elevators
A17.1-2000/
A17.1-1996
B44-00
A17.3
Item
Check
Section/Rule
Requirements
Section/Para.
Comments
1
ELEVATOR - INSIDE OF CAR
1.1
Door reopening device
112 {300.13},
1001.2(a)(1),
1004.2(a)(1)
2.13 {3.13},
8.11.2.1.1(a),
8.11.3.1.1(a)
2.8
1.2
Stop switches
306.4(b)(1),
3.26.4.2(a),
3.10.4(f) {4.7,4},
306.4(b)(6),
3.26.4.2(f),
3.10.4(u) {4.7.4}
1004.2(a)(2)
8.11.3.1.1(b)
1.3
Operating control devices
210.1a {306.1},
2.26.1.1 {3.26.1}
3.10.1 {4.7},
306.3,
3.26.3,
3.10.2 {4.7},
1004.2(a)(3)
8.11.3.1.1(c)
3.10.9 {4.7.6}
1.4
Sills and car floor
108.1 {300.9},
2.5.1 {3.5},
3.3.3 {4.2.2},
ANSI A117.1
HO.lOd {300.11},
2.11.10.3 {3.11},
3.3.4 {4.2.2}
110.11a,
2.11.11.1,
110.13a,
2.11,13.1,
203.16 {301.6},
2.15.16 {3.15},
210.12,
8.11.3.1.1(d)
1004.2(a)(4)
1,5
Car lighting and receptacles
301.7,
3.14,
3.4.5 {4.2.3},
1004.2(a)(5)
8.11.3.1.1(e)
3.4.6 {4.2.3}
1.6
Car emergency signal
211.1 {306.11},
1004.2(a)(6)
2.27.1 {3.27},
8.11.3.1.1(f)
3.11.1 {4.7.8}
1.7
Car door or gate
111.7(c) {300.12},
2.5.1.5.3 {3.5},
3.4.2 {4.2.3},
112.2a {300.13},
2.12.7.3 {3.12},
3.4.3 {4.2.3},
204.4-204.6 {301.7},
2.13.2.1 {3.13},
Appendix A
210.2(q) {306.4},
2.14.4-2.14.6
1004.2(a)(7)
{3.14},
2.26.2 (2.26.2.15),
{3.26.4},
8.11.3.1.1(g)
1.8
Door closing force
112.4(b),
301.7,
1004.2(a)(8)
2.13.4.2.3,
3.14,
2.13.4.2.4,
8.11.3.1.1(h)
2.8.1 {4.1}
1.9
Power closing of doors or
112.3 {300,13},
2.13,3 {3.13},
2.8.2 {4.1}
gates
1004.2(a)(9)
8.11.3.1.1(0
1.10
Power opening of doors or
111.5 {300.12},
2.12.5 {3.12},
gates
210.1e,
210.9(c),
306.3,
1004.2(a)(10)
2.26.1.6,
2.26.9 (2.26.9.3),
3.26.3,
8.11.3.1.1(0
1.11
Car vision panels and glass
204. 2e {301.7},
2.14.2.5,
3.4.2 {4.2.3},
car doors
204.5i {301.7},
1004.2(a)(ll)
2.14.5.8 {3.14},
8.11.3.1. l(k)
3.4.3 {4.2.3}
1.12
Car enclosure
204.1b {301.7},
2.14 {3.14},
3.4.1 {4.2.3},
204. lh, {301.7},
8.3.7,
3.7.5 {4.2.4}
1104,
2.29.1 {3.27},
204.2d {301.7},
8.11.3.1.1(1),
211.9 {306.11},
8.7.2.14,
1004.2(a)(12),
8.7.3.13
1202.5,
1203. 2e
174
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Checklist for Hydraulic Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
1
ELEVATOR - INSIDE OF CAR (Cont'd)
1.13
Emergency exit
204.1J {301.7},
1004.2(a)(13)
2.14.1.10,
3.14,
8.1.2,
8.6.10.2,
8.11.3.1.1(m)
3.4.4 {4.2.4}
1.14
Ventilation
204.1 (i),
204.2c {301.7},
204.3c {301.7},
1004.2(a)(14)
2.14.1.9.1(f),
2.14.2.3,
2.14.3.3 {3.14},
8.11.3.1. l(n)
NFPA 70 orCSA
C22.1, as
applicable
1.15
Signs and operating device
symbols
210.13 {306.12},
1004.2(a)(15)
2.26,12,
8.11.3.1.1(0)
1.16
Rated load, platform area, and
data plate
207 {301.10},
1004. 2 (a) (16)
2.16 {3.16},
8.11.3. l.l(p)
3.7 {4.2.4}
1.17
Standby power operation
211.2 {306.11},
1002.2g {1005.2c(6)},
1004.2(a)(17)
2.27.2 {3.27},
8.11.2.2.7
{8.11.3.2.3(0},
8.11.3.1. l(q)
3.11.2 {4.7.8}
1.18
Restricted opening of car or
hoistway doors
111.5 {300.12},
1004.2 (a) (18)
2.12.5 {3.12},
8.11.3.1.1(0
2.7.4 {4.1}
1.19
Car ride
301.1a,
301.6,
1004.2(a)(19),
1206.1a {1206.5a}
3.23.1,
3.15,
8.11.3.1.1(s),
8.6.1.6.2 {8.6.5}
1.20
Earthquake inspection and
tests (seismic Zone 2 or
greater)
2406
8.4
2
ELEVATOR - MACHINE ROOM
2.1
Access to machine space
300.1,
300.2,
1004.2(b)(1)
3.1,
3.7,
8.11.3.1.2(a)
2.2.2 {4.1}
NFPA 70 or CSA
C22.1, as
applicable
2.2
Headroom
101.4 {300.2},
1004.2(b)(2)
2.4.7 {3.7},
8.11.3.1.2(b)
2.3
Lighting and receptacles
101.5a {300.2},
101.5C {300.2},
1004.2(b)(3)
2.7.5.1 {3.7},
8.11.3.1.2(c)
2.2.3 {4.1}
NFPA 70 or CSA
C22.1, as
applicable
2.4
Machine space
101.1a {300.2},
105.2 {300.6},
105.4 {300.6},
1004.2(b)(4)
2.7.1.1 {3.7},
2.9.2,
2.9.4 {3.9},
8.11.3.1.2(d)
2.2.2 {4.1},
2.2.6 {4.1}
2.5
Housekeeping
1004.2(b)(5),
1206.1 {1206.5a},
1206.2b {1206.5a},
1206.9
8.11.3.1.2(e),
8.6.1.2,
8.6.4.8 {8.6.5},
8.6.10.3
2.6
Ventilation
101.5b {300.2},
102.4,
1004.2(b)(6)
2.7.5.2 {3.7},
2.8.4,
8.11.3.1.2(0
2.2.4 {4.1}
2.7
Fire extinguisher
1004.2(b)(7),
1206.2f {1206.5a}
8.11.3.1.2(g), or
c8. 11. 3. 1.2(g)
{8.6.5}
175
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Checklist for Hydraulic Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
2
ELEVATOR - MACHINE ROOM (Cont'd)
2.8
Pipes, wiring, and ducts
102.1 {300.3},
2.8.2,
2.2.5 {4.1}
ANSI/NFPA 13, A17.1
102.2 {300.3},
2.8.2 {3.8},
Inquiry 88-26
1004.2(b)(8)
8.11.3.1.2(h)
2.9
Guarding of exposed auxiliary
104.1 {300.5},
2.10.1 {3.10},
equipment
1004.2(b)(9)
8.11.3.1.2(f)
2.10
Numbering of elevators,
210.4,
2.26.4,
NFPA 70 or CSA
machines, controllers, and
211.9 {306.11},
2.29.1 {3.27},
C22.1, as
disconnect switches
306.6
3.26
applicable
2.11
Disconnecting means and
306.3a(5)(b),
3.26.3.1
3.10.5 {4.7.5}
NFPA 70 or CSA
control
306.4,
[3.26.3.1.4(b)],
C22.1, as
306.6,
3.26.4,
applicable
1004.2(b)(ll)
3.26,
8.11.3.1. 2(p)
2.12
Controller wiring, fuses,
102.1 {300.3},
2.8.1 {3.8},
NFPA 70 or CSA
grounding, etc.
306.5,
3.26.5,
C22.1, as
306.6,
3.26,
applicable
1004.2(b) (12),
8.11.3.1. 2(q),
1206.1f,
8.6.1.6.3,
1206.5a
C8.6.12.2.6,
8.6.1.6.1,
C8.6. 12.3.1.3,
8.6.5
2.13
Governor, overspeed switch,
205,
2.17,
4.9.7
and seal
206,
301.8,
1002.2(b),
1005.2c,
1005.4,
1202.7,
1206.1
2.18,
3.17.1,
8.11.2.2.2,
8.11.3.2.3,
8.11.3.4,
8.7.2.19,
8.6.1.2
2.14
Code data plate
309,
1200.6
8.9,
8.7.1.8
2.17
Drive machine brake
301.10
3.16
4.2.4
2.30
Hydraulic power unit
304,
3.24,
NFPA 70 or CSA
1004.2(b)(l3),
8.11.3.1. 2(m),
C22.1, as
1206.5
8.6.5
applicable
2.31
Relief valves
308,
303.1,
303.2,
303.4b,
1004.2(b)(13),
1005.2a,
1006.2b,
Definitions
3.28,
3.19.1,
3.19.2,
3.19.4.2,
8.11.3.1. 2(m),
8.11.3.2.1,
8.10.3. 2. 2(m),
1.3 (Definitions)
4,4.1
2.32
Control valve
303,
1004.2(b)(15)
3.19,
8.11.3.1.2(0)
4.4
176
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Checklist for Hydraulic Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
2
ELEVATOR - MACHINE ROOM (Cont'd)
2.33
Tanks
304,
1004.2(b)(16),
1005.3b,
1203.6,
1206.5b
3.24,
8.11.3.1. 2(p),
8.11.3.3.2,
8.7.3.29,
8.6.5.1,
8.6.5.2,
8.6.5.5,
8.6.5.6
4.5
2.34
Flexible hydraulic hose and fit-
ting assemblies
303.3C,
1004.2(b)(17),
1005. 2d
3.19.3.3,
8.11.3.1.2(q),
8.11.3.2.4
2.35
Supply line and shutoff valve
303
3.19
4.4.4
2.36
Hydraulic cylinders
302.3,
1004.2(b)(19),
1005.2b
3.18.3,
8.11.3.1.2(s),
8.11.3.2.2
2.37
Pressure switch
306.14,
1004.2(b)(20),
1005. 2e
3.26.8,
8.11.3.1.2ft),
8.11.3.2.5
2.38
Roped water hydraulic ele-
vators
{NR}
2.39
Low oil protection
306.15
3.26.9
2.40
Maintenance records
8.6.1.4,
C8.6.12.2.5,
8.6.10.1
2.41
Static control
2.42
Earthquake inspection and
tests (seismic risk Zone 2
or greater)
2401,
2400.1,
2410.1,
2410.7
8.4.2,
8.4.3.1,
8.4.11.1,
8.4.11.3,
8.4.11.6
3
ELEVATOR - TOP OF CAR
3.1
Top-of-car stop switch
306.4,
1004.2(c)(1)
3.26.1,
3.26.4,
8.11.3.1.3(a)
4.7.4(a)
3.2
Car top light and outlet
204.7 {301.7},
1004.2(c)(2)
2.14.7 {3.14},
8.11.3.1.3(b)
3.4.5 {4.2.3}
NFPA70 orCSA
C22.1, as applica-
ble
3.3
Top-of-car operating device
306.2,
1004.2(c)(3)
3.26.1,
3.26.2,
8.11.3.1.3(c)
3.10.3,
4.7.2
3.4
Top-of-car clearance, refuge
space, and standard
railing
300.8,
302.4,
1004.2(c)(4),
1006.2a,
1006.2c
3.4,
2.10.2,
2.14.1.7 {3.14},
3.18.4,
8.11.3.1.3(d),
8.10.3.2. 2(s),
8.10.3.2.3(d)
2.4.4 {4.1}
177
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Checklist for Hydraulic Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
3
ELEVATOR - TOP OF CAR (Cc
nt'd)
3.5
Normal terminal stopping
devices
305.1a,
1002. 2e (1005.2c),
1003.3(10,
1004.2(c)(5)
3.25.1.1,
8,11.2.2.5
(8.11.3.2.3),
8.10.2.3.2(k)(
8.11.3.1.3(e)
3.9.1 (4.6),
3.10.4
3.6
Final and emergency terminal
stopping devices
305.2,
1004.2(c)(6),
1005.2
3.25.2,
8.11.3.1.3(f)
A17.1-1955, Rule
320.2
3.7
Car leveling and anticreep
devices
306.3,
306.4,
1004.2(c)(7)
3.26.3,
3.26.4,
8.11.3.1.3(g)
4.7.3,
4.7.4
3.8
Top emergency exit
204.1e (301.7),
1004.2(c)(9)
2.14.1.5 (3.14),
8.11.3.1.3(0
3.4.4 (4.2.3)
3.9
Floor and emergency identifica-
tion numbering
100.7 (300.1),
211.9(306.11),
1004.2(c) (10)
2.29.2 (3.1),
2.29.1 (3.27),
8.11.3.1.3(j)
3.10
Hoistway construction
300.1,
1004.2(c) (11)
3.1,
8.11.3.1.3(k)
2.1 (4.1)
3.11
Hoistway smoke control
100.4 (300.1),
1004.2(c)(12)
2.1.4 (3.1),
8.11.3.1.3(1)
3.12
Pipes, wiring, and ducts
102 (300.3),
1004.2(c)(l3)
2.8 (3.8),
8. 11.3.1. 3(m)
2.1.4 (4.1)
3.13
Windows, projections,
recesses, and setbacks
100.5 (300.1),
100.6 (300.1),
110.10 (300.11),
1004.2(c)(14)
2.1.5,
2.1.6 (3.1),
2.11.10 (3.11),
8.11.3.1. 3(n)
2.1.2 (4.1),
2.1.3 (4.1)
3.14
Hoistway clearances
108 (300.9),
110 (300.11),
1004.2(0(15)
2.5 (3.5),
2.11 (3.11),
8.11.3.1.3(o)
2.4 (4.1)
3.15
Multiple hoistways
lOO.ld (300.1),
1004.2(0(16)
2.1.1.4 (3.1),
8.11.3.1.3 (p)
3.16
Traveling cables and junction
boxes
102.1 (300.3),
1004.2(0(17)
2.8.1 (3.8),
8.11.3.1.3(q)
NFPA70 orCSA
C22.1, as
applicable
3.17
Door and gate equipment
110 (300.11),
111 (300.12),
210.1e (306.3),
1004.2(0(18)
2.11 (3.11),
2.12 (3.12),
2.26.1.6(3.26.3),
8.11.3.1. 3(r)
2.6 (4.1),
2.7 (4.1)
A17.1 Inquiry 96-71
3.18
Car frame and stiles
213 (302.5),
301.6,
1004.2(0(19)
8.8 (3,18.5),
3.15,
8.11.3. 1.3(s)
3.19
Guide rails fastenings and
equipment
200 (301.1b),
308,
301.1,
301.6,
1004.2(0(20)
2.23 (3.23.2),
3.38,
3.23,
3.15.1.1.2,
8.11.3.1.3(0
4.9.8
178
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Checklist for Hydraulic Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
3
ELEVATOR - TOP OF CAR (Cc
mt*d)
3.20
Governor rope
206.5,
2.18.5,
3.6,
301.8,
3.17.1,
4.9.7
1001.2(c),
8.11.2. 1.3(z),
1004.2(c)(23),
8.11.3.1.3(w),
1202.7,
8.7.2.19,
1206.1c
8.6.4.2
3.21
Governor releasing carrier
205.15,
301.8,
1004.2(c)(22),
1005.4
2.17.15,
3.17.1,
8.11.3.1.3(v),
8.11.3.4
3.22
Wire rope fastening and hitch
212,
2.20,
4.9.10
plate
105.3c,
203.13,
302.1b,
1004.2(c)(24),
1200.5
2.9.3.3,
2.15.13,
3.18.1.2,
8.11.3.1.3(x),
8.6.3,
C8.6.12.4.1.1,
C8.6.12.4.3,
C8.6.12.4.4,
C8.6.12.4.5
3.23
Suspension rope
212,
2.20,
4.8,
1307,
8.2.7,
4.9.10
1001.2(c)(29),
8.11.2. 1.3(cc),
1004.2(c)(25),
8,11.3.1.3(y),
1200.4d,
8.6.2.5,
1202.14,
8.7.2.21,
1203.9
8.7.3.25
3.27
Crosshead data plate and rope
207.3,
3.16,
3.12.2
data tags
212.2,
1001.2(c)(ll),
1202.14
2.20.2,
8.11.2.1.3(k),
8.7.2.21
3.28
Counterweight and
300.8f,
3.3,
4.9.2,
counterweight buffer
301.4,
301.9,
1308
3.4.6,
3.22.3,
8.11.3.2.3(d),
c8.11.2.3.3(d)
4.9.6
3.29
Counterweight safeties
301.9,
300.10,
1006.2,
1005.2(c),
1005.4
3.17.2,
3.6,
8.10.3.2,
8.11.3.2.3,
8.11.3.4
3.30
Speed test
205.16,
300.8,
301,
1004.2(c)(8),
1006.2g,
Definitions
2.17.16,
3.4,
8.11.3.1.3(h),
8.10.3.2.3(cc),
1.3 (Definitions)
4.9
3.31
Slack rope device — roped-
302.1b,
3.18.1.2,
4.9.9
hydraulic elevators installed
306.4,
3.26.4,
under A17.1b-1989 and
1004.2(c)(26),
8.11.3.1.3(z),
later editions
1005.2f,
(NR 8.6.5.14.7)
8.6.5.14.7
179
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Checklist for Hydraulic Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
3
ELEVATOR - TOP OF CAR (Cont'd)
3.32
Traveling sheave — roped-
212,
2.20,
4.9.8
hydraulic elevators installed
208.2,
2.24.2,
under A17.1b-1989 and
208.3,
2.24.3,
later editions
208.5,
301.1b,
302.1b,
307,
1004.2(c) (27),
1203.9
2.24.5,
3.23.2,
3.18.1,2,
8.11.3.1.3(aa),
8.7.3.25
3.34
Earthquake inspection and
2402,
8.4.1,
tests (seismic risk Zone 2
2401,
8.4.2,
or greater)
2400.1(a),
2400.1(b),
2400.1(d),
2400.2,
2405,
2404,
2403
8.4.3.1.1,
8.4.3.1.2,
8.4.3.1.4,
8.4.3.2,
8.4.5,
8.4.7,
8.4.8
ELEVATOR - OUTSIDE HOISTWAY
4.1
Car platform guard
301.6,
1004.2(d)(1)
3.15,
8.11.3.1.4(a)
3.3-2 {4.2.2}
4.2
Hoistway doors
110 {300.11},
111.2b {300,12},
111.3b {300.12},
306.4,
1004.2(d)(2),
1006.2h
2.11 {3.11},
2.12.2.2 {3.12},
2.12.3.2 {3.12},
3.26.4,
8.11.3.1.4(b),
8.10.3.2.3(r)
4.7.4
4.3
Vision panels
110.7 {300.11},
1004.2(d)(3)
2.11.7 {3.11},
8.11.3.1.4(c)
2,6.3 {4.1}
4.4
4.5
Hoistway door locking devices
111 {300.12},
1004.2(d)(4)
2.12 {3.12},
8.11.3.1.4(d)
2.7.1 {4.1}
Access to hoistway
111.6 {300.12},
111.7 {300.12},
1004.2(d)(5)
2.12.6,
2.12.7 {3.12},
8.11.3.1.4(e)
2.7.3 {4.1}
4.6
Power closing of hoistway
doors
112.3-112.6 {300.13}:
1004.2(d)(6)
2.13.3-2.13.6
{3.13},
8.11.3.1.4(f)
2.8 {4.1}
4.7
Sequence operation
112.6 {300.13},
112.3d {300.13},
1004.2(d)(7)
2.13.6 {3.13},
2.13.3.4 {3.13},
8.11.3.1.4(g)
4.8
Hoistway enclosure
100.1 {300.1},
100.4 {300.1},
100.5 {300.1},
1004.2(d)(8)
2.1.1,
2.1.4,
2.1.5 {3.1},
8.11.3.1.4(h)
2.1.1 {4.1},
2.1.2 {4.1}
4.9
4.10
Elevator parking device
1004.2(d)(9)
8.11.3.1.4(0
2.7.2 {4.1}
Emergency doors in blind
hoistways
110.1,
1004.2
2.11.1.1,
2.11.1.2,
8.1
180
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Checklist for Hydraulic Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
4
ELEVATOR - OUTSIDE HOISTWAY (Cont'd)
4.12
Standby power selection
207.8 {301.10},
2.16.8 {3.16},
3.11.2 {4.7.8}
switch
211.2 {306.11},
211.8 {306.11},
1002. 2g,
1004.2(d)(ll),
1005.2c
2.27.2 {3.27},
2.27.8 {3.27},
8.11.2.2.7,
8.11.3.1.400,
8.11.3.2.3
5
ELEVATOR - PIT
5.1
Pit access, lighting, stop
102 {300.3},
2.8 {3.8},
2.3.1 {4.1},
NFPA 70 or CSA
switch, and condition
106.1 [300.7},
3.6,
2.3.2 {4.1},
C22.1, as
300.10,
3.26.4,
2.7.3 {4.1},
applicable
306.4,
8.11.3.1.5(a),
3.10.4
1004.2(e)(1),
8.6.4.7
1206.2a
5.2
Bottom clearance, runby, and
300.8,
3.4,
2.1.5
minimum refuge space
302.3c,
1004.2(e)(2),
1006.2e
3.18.3.3,
8.11.3.1.5(b),
8.10.3.2.5(c)
5.4
Normal terminal stopping
305.1,
3.25.1,
3.9.1 {4.6}
devices
1002. 2e {1005.2c},
1004.2(e)(5)
8.11.2.2.5
{8.11.3.2.3},
8.11.3.1.5(e)
5.5
Traveling cables
102.2 {300.3},
2.8.2 {3.8},
NFPA 70 or CSA
1004.2(e)(6)
8.11.3.1.5(0
C22.1, as
applicable
5.6
Governor rope tension device
206.7,
301.8,
1004.2(e)(ll),
1206.1a
2.18.7,
3.17.1,
8.11.3.1.5(k),
8.6.1.6.2
4.9.7
5.7
Car frame and platform
308,
301.6,
302.2c,
1004.2(e)(7)
3.28,
3.15,
3.18.2.3,
8.11.3.1.5(g)
3.3 {4.2.2}
5.8
Car and counterweight safeties
205,
2.17,
4.9.6,
and guiding members —
1306,
8.2.6,
4.9.8
including roped-hydraulic
301.8,
3.17.1,
elevators installed under
301.9,
3.17.2,
A17.1b-1989 and later
1004.2(e)(10),
8.11. 3.1. 5Q),
editions
1005.2c,
1005.4
8.11.3.2.3,
8.11.3.4
5.11
Plunger and cylinder
302,
3.18,
4.3.1,
1004.2(e)(3),
8.11.3.1.5(c),
4.3.2
1206.5b
8.6.5.1,
8.6.5.2,
8.6.5.5,
8.6.5.6
5.12
Car buffer
301.3,
306.4,
1004.2(e)(4),
1206.1e,
1308.2
3.22.1,
3.26.4,
8.11.3.1.5(d),
8.6.4,4,
8.2.3.2
4.2.1
181
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Checklist for Hydraulic Elevators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
ELEVATOR - PIT (Cont'd)
5.13
Guiding members
308,
301.1,
1004.2(e)(8),
1206.1d
3.28,
3.23,
8.11.3.1.5(h),
8.6.4.3
5.14
Supply piping
208,
1004.2(e)(9),
1006.2f
2.24,
8.11.3.1.5(0,
8.10.3.2. 2(r)
4.4.4
5.15
Overspeed valve
303.3c(l)(d),
2410.6,
(NR 3.19.4.7.2),
(NR 3.19.4.7.3),
[NR 3.19.4.7.5(a)],
(NR 3.19.4.7.6),
[NR 8.10.3.2.5(0],
(NR 8,11.3.4.4)
3.19.3.3,
8.4.11.2,
3.19.4.7.2,
3.19.4.7.3,
3.19.4.7.5(a),
3.19.4.7.6,
8.10.3.2.5(0,
8.11.3.4.4
5.16
Earthquake inspection and
tests (seismic risk Zone 2
or greater)
2400,
2410.6,
2410.5,
2410.2,
2410.3
8.4.3,
8.4.11.2,
8.4.11.3,
8.4.11.5,
8.4.11.7
6
ELEVATOR - FIREFIGHTERS' SERVICE
6.1
Operation of elevators under
112.3d {306.11},
2.13.3.4,
A17.1D-1973 through
fire and other emergency
112.5 {306.11},
2.13.5 {3.27},
A17.1D-1980, Rule
conditions (A17.1b-1973
1001.2(d)(12),
8.11.2.1.4(1),
211.3
through A17.1b-1980)
1002. 2f,
1004.2(d)(12),
1206.7
8.11.2.2.6,
8.6.10.1
6.2
Operation of elevators under
112.3d,
2.13.3.4,
A17.1-1981 through
fire and other emergency
112.5,
2.13.5,
A17.1D-1983, Rule
conditions (A17. 1-1981
1001.2(d)(12),
8.11.2.1.4(1),
211.3
through A17.1D-1983)
1002. 2f,
1206,7
8.11.2.2.6,
8.6.10.1
6.3
Firefighters' service (A17.1-
112.3d,
2.13.3.4,
3.11.3
A17.1-1984 through
1984 through A17.1a-1988
112.5,
2.13.5,
A17.1a-1988, Rules
and A17.3)
1001.2(d)(12),
1002. 2f,
1206.7
8.11.2.1.4(1),
8.11.2.2.6,
8.6.10.1
211.3-211.8
6.4
Firefighters* service (A17.1b-
112.3d,
2.13.3.4,
1989 through A17.1d-2000)
112.5,
211.2-211.8 {306.11},
1001.2(d)(12),
1002. 2f,
1206.7
2.13.5,
2.27.2-2.27.8
{3.27},
8.11.2.1.4(1),
8.11.2.2.6,
8.6.10.1
6.5
Acceptance checklist for fire-
fighters' service (A17. 1-2000
and B44-00): automatic
elevators
182
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Checklist for Escalators
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
7
ESCALATOR - EXTERNAL
7.1
General fire protection
800,
801,
1009.2a
6.1.1,
6.1.2,
8.10.4.1.1(a)
7.2
Geometry
802.1,
802.2,
802.3d,
1009.2b,
1009.2g,
1207.5,
Appendix D
6.1.3.1,
6.1.3.2,
6.1.3.3.4,
8.10.4.1.1(b),
8.10.4.1. l(n),
8.7.6.1.5
7.3
Handrails
802.2,
6.1.3.2,
5.1.5,
802.4,
6.1.3.4,
5.1.6
1009.2c,
8.11.4,2.13,
Appendix D
8.6.8.12,
8.10.4.1.1(c)
7.4
Entrance and egress ends
802.6,
6.1.3.6,
5.5.3,
802.12
8.6.8.15,
6.1.3.12
5.5.4
7.5
Lighting
806.2,
6.1.7.2,
2.2.3,
805.7,
6.1.6.7,
5.4
1009.2d
8.10.4.1.1(e)
7.6
Caution signs
805.9,
Fig. 805.9a
6.1.6.9,
Fig. 6.1.6.9.1
5.3.11
7.7
Combplate and comb step
802.6,
6.1.3.6,
5.1.9
impact device
805. 3n,
807.3,
1206.6,
(NR 8.6.9.2.3),
1008.2r,
1009.2e
6.1.6.3.13,
6.1.8.3,
8.6.8,
8.6.9.2.3,
8.11.4.2.13,
8.10.4.1.1(g)
7.8
Deck barricades and antislide
802. 3i,
6.1.3.3.10,
devices
1009.2f
6.1.3.3.11,
8.6.8.11,
8.10.4.1.1(h)
7.9
Steps and upthrust device
Definitions,
1.3,
5.1.7,
802.5,
6.1.3.5,
5.1.8
802.6e,
6.1.3.6.5,
802. 9d,
6.1.3.9.4,
805. 3i,
6.1.6.3.9,
1008.21,
8.11.4.2.9,
1105.1
8.6.8.6,
8.3.11.1,
Fig. 18
7.10
Operating and safety devices
805.2,
6.1.6.2.1,
5.3.1,
805.3a,
6.1.6.3.1,
5.3.2,
805.6,
c6.1.6.3.l(a),
5.3.10
(NR 8.6.10.5)
6.1.6.6,
8.6.10.2,
8.6.10.5
7.11
Skirt obstruction device
805.3f
6.1.6.3.6
5.3.7
7.12
Reserved
7.13
Egress restriction (rolling
shutter) device
805.3g
6.1.6.3.7
5.3.8
183
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Checklist for Escalators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-200O/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
7
ESCALATOR - EXTERNAL (Co
nt'd)
7.14
Speed
803.1,
805.3b,
1008.20,
1009.20
6.1.4.1,
6.1.6.3.2,
8.10.4.1.2(1)
7.15
Balustrades
802.3,
1009. 2g,
Appendix D
6.1.3.3,
6.1.3.14,
8.10.4.1.1(n)
5.1.1
7.16
Ceiling intersection guards
802. 3g,
Appendix D
6.1.3.3.9
5.1.3
7,17
Step/skirt clearances, panels,
and performance index
802.3e,
802.3f,
802.3k,
1008.2s,
1008.2t,
1206.6b,
1206.6c
6.1.3.3.5,
6.1.3.3.6,
8.6.8.4
7.18
Outdoor protection
807,
1008.2p,
1009.2i
6.1.8,
8.11.4.2.14,
8.10.4.1. l(q)
7.19
Maintenance records
8.6.1.4,
C8.6.12.2.5,
8.6.10.5
7.20
Earthquake inspection and
tests (seismic risk Zone 2
or greater)
8.5.1,
8.5.4
8
ESCALATOR - INTERNAL
8.1
Machinery space access, light-
806,
6.1.7,
5.5.5
ing, receptacle, and con-
801.1,
6.1.2.1,
dition
805.7,
1008.2a,
1009.2],
1206.6a
6.1.6.7,
6.1.3.14,
8.11.4.2.1,
8.10.4.1.2(a),
8.1,
8.6.1.6.3,
C8.6.12.2.6,
8.6.8.14,
8.6.8.15,
8.6.8.13
8.2
Machine space stop switches
210.2,
2.26.2,
and inspection control
805. 3e,
(NR 6.1.6.2.2),
1008.2b,
1009.2k
6.1.6.3.5,
6.1.6.2.2,
8.11.4.2.2,
8.10.4.1.2(b)
8.3
Controller and wiring
806,
807.2,
805.10b,
805.12,
1101,
1206.1,
1008.2C,
1009.21,
1009.2,
(NR 10.3.3)
6.1.7,
6.1.8.2,
6.1.6.10,
6.1.6.13,
8.3.3,
8.6.1.2.1,
8.11.4.2.3,
8.10.4.1.2(c),
10.3.3
184
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
D
ASMEA17.2-2010
Checklist for Escalators (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
8
ESCALATOR - INTERNAL (Coi
it'd)
8.4
Drive machine and brake
804,
1008.2d
6.1.5,
8.11.4.2.4
5.2
8.5
Speed governor
805.3b,
6.1.6.3.2,
5.3.3,
1008. 2e,
8.11.4.2.5,
5.3.5
1009.2m
8.10.4.1.2(e)
8.6
Broken drive chain and discon-
804.3b,
6.1.5.3.2,
5.3.5,
nected motor safety device
805.3d,
805.3J,
1008.2f
6.1.6.3.4,
6.1.6,3.10,
8.11.4.2.6
5.3.6
8.7
Reversal stop switch
805. 3h,
6.1.6.3.8,
5.3.5,
1008.2g
8.10.4.1.2(g),
8.11.4.2.7
5.3.9
8.8
Broken step chain device
805.3c,
6.1.6.3.3,
5.3.4,
1008.2h
8.11.4.2.8
5.3.5
8.9
Step upthrust device
805.3i,
1008.2!
6.1.6.3.9,
8.11.4.2.9
5.1.7
8.10
Missing step device
805.5,
1008.2J
6.1.6.5,
8.11.4.2.10
8.11
Step level device
805.3k,
1008.2k,
1009.2n
6.1.6.3.11,
8.11.4.2.11,
8.10.4.1. 2(k)
8.12
Steps, step chains, and
801.1,
6.1.2.1,
trusses
802.7,
802.8,
802.11,
806.3,
1008.21,
1009.20,
1206.6
6.1.3.5.8,
6.1.3.7,
6.1.3.8,
6.1.3.11,
6.1.3.1.4,
6.1.7.3,
8.11.4.2.12,
8.10.4.1.2(1),
8.6.8
8.13
Handrail systems and safety
802.4,
6.1.3.4,
devices
802.11,
805.4,
805.3m,
(NR 8.6.8.1),
1008.2m,
1008.2q,
1009.2c
6.1.3.11,
6.1.6.4,
6.1,6.3.12,
8.6.8.1,
8.11.4.2.13,
8.11.4.2.18,
8.10.4.1.1(c)
8.14
Code data plate
808,
908,
1200.6
8.9,
8.7.1.8
8.15
Response to smoke detectors
805.8
6.1.6.8
8.16
Step lateral displacement
805. 3p,
6.1.6.3.14,
device
1003.2b(20)
8.11.4.2.21,
8.10.4.1.2(r)
8.17
Inspection control
6.1.6.2.2
8.18
Earthquake inspection and
tests (seismic risk Zone 2
or greater)
8.5.2,
8.5.3
185
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Checklist for Moving Walks
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
9
MOVING WALK - EXTERNAL
9.1
General fire protection
900,
6.2.1,
9.1.1,
901,
6.2.2,
9.2.2
1009.2a
8.10.4.1.1(a)
9.2
Geometry
902.1,
6.2.3.1,
9.3.1,
902.2,
6.2.3.2,
9.3.2,
902.3d,
6.2.3.3.4,
9.3.3,
(NR 8.6.8.12),
8.6.8.12,
9.3.6
1009.2b,
8.10.4.1.1(b),
1009. 2g,
8.10.4.1.1(n),
1208.5,
8.7.6.2.5
Appendix D
9.3
Handrails
902.2,
902.4,
1008.2m,
1009.2c,
Appendix D
6.2.3.2,
6.2.3.4,
8.11.4.2.13,
8.10.4.1.1(c)
9.3.4
9.4
Entrance and egress ends
902.8,
907.3,
902.16
6.2.3.8,
C6.2.3.8.5,
6.2.8.3,
6.2.3.16,
8.6.8.15
9.4.3
9.5
Lighting
906.2,
1009.2d
6.2.7.2,
8.10.4.1.1(e)
9.7.1
9.6
Caution signs
905.8,
Fig. 805.9a
6.2.6.8,
Fig. 6.1.6.9.1
9.6.11
9.7
Combplate and comb step
902.8,
6.2.3.8,
9.4
impact device
905.3k,
907.3,
1206.6,
1008. 2r,
1009. 2e
6.2.6.3.11,
6.2.8.3,
8.6.8,
8.11.4.2.13
8.10.4.1.1(g)
9.8
Deck barricades
902. 3h,
1009. 2f
6.2.3.3.8,
8.10.4.1.1(h)
9.3.3.6
9.9
Treadways
902.5,
902.6,
902.9,
902.11,
1105.1
6.2.3.5,
6.2.3.6,
6.2.3.9,
6.2.3.11,
8.6.8.6,
8.3.11.1
9.3.5
9.10
Operating and safety devices
905.1,
6.2.6.1,
9.6.2,
905.2,
6.2.6.2.1,
9.6.3,
905.3a,
6.2.6.3.1,
9.6.9
905.6,
C6.2.6.3.1(a),
(NR 8.6.10.5)
6.2.6.6,
8.6.10.2,
8.6.10.5
9.11
Reserved
9.12
Reserved
9.13
Egress restriction (roiling
shutter) device
905.3f
6.2.6.3.6
9.6.7
186
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Checklist for Moving Walks (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
9
MOVING WALK - EXTERNAL (Cont'd)
9.14
Speed
903.1,
905.3b,
1008.20,
1009.20
6.2.4,
6.2.6.3.2,
8.10.4.1.2(1)
9.15
Balustrades
902.3,
1009.2g,
Appendix D
6.2.3.3,
6.2.3.17,
8.10.4. l(n)
9.3.3.1,
9.3.3.2
9.16
Ceiling intersection guards
902.3g,
Appendix D
6.2.3.3.7
9.3.3.5
9.17
Skirt panels
902. 3e,
902.3f
6.2.3.3.5,
6.2.3.3.6
9.3.3.3,
9.3.3.4
9.18
Outdoor protection
907,
1008.2p,
1009.2i
6.2.8,
8.11.4.2.14,
8.10.4.1.1(q)
9.19
Maintenance records
8.6.1.4,
C8.6.12.2.5,
8.6.10.5
9.20
Earthquake inspection and
tests (seismic risk Zone 2
or greater)
8.5.1,
8.5.4
10
MOVING WALK - INTERNAL
10.1
Machinery space access,
lighting, receptacle,
and condition
906,
901.1,
907.2,
1008.2a,
1009.2]
6.2.7,
6.2.2.1,
6.2.8.2,
8.1,
8.6.1.6.3,
C8.6.12.2.6,
8.6.14,
8.6.8.15,
8.11.4.2.1,
8.10.4.1.2(a)
9.7.2
10.2
Stop switch and inspection
control
905.3e,
(NR 6.2.6.2.2),
1008.2b,
1009.2k
6.2.6.3.5,
6.2.6.2.2,
8.11.4.2.2,
8.10.4.1.2(b)
10.3
Controller and wiring
906,
907.2,
6.2.7,
6.2.8.2,
NFPA 70 orCSA
C22.1, as
905.31,
(NR 6.2.6.12),
1206.1,
6.2.6.9,
6.2.6.12,
8.6.1.2.1,
applicable
1008.2c,
1009.21
8.11.4.2.3,
8.10.4.1.2(c)
10.4
Drive machine and brake
904,
1008.2d
6.2.5,
8.11.4.2.4
9.5.1
10.5
Speed governor
905.3b,
1008.2e,
1009.21
6.2.6.3.2,
8.11.4.2.5,
8.10.4.1.2(c)
9.6.4
10.6
Broken drive chain and discon-
904.3b,
6.2.5.3.2,
9.6.6,
nected motor safety device
905.3d,
905.3h,
1008.2f
6.2.6.3.4,
6.2.6.3.8,
8.11.4.2.6
9.6.10
187
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Checklist for Moving Walks (Cont'd)
Item
Check
A17.1-1996
Section/Rule
A17.1-2000/
B44-00
Requirements
A17.3
Section/Para.
Comments
10
MOVING WALK - INTERNAL (Cont'd)
10.7
Reversal stop switch
905.3g,
1008.2g
6.2,6.3.7,
8.11,4.2.7
9.6.8
10.8
Broken treadway device
905.3c,
1008. 2h
6.2.6.3.3,
8.11.4.2.8
10.9
Reserved
10.10
Missing pallet device
905.5,
1008.2]
6.2.6.5,
8.11.4.2.10
10.11
Pallet level device
905.3i,
1008.2k,
1009. 2n
6.2.6.3.9,
8.11.4.2.11,
8.10.4.1. 2(k)
10.12
Pallets, pallet chains, and
901.1,
6.2.2.1,
trusses
902.9,
902.13,
1008.21,
1009. 2o,
1206.6
6.2.3.9,
6.2.3.13,
6.2.3.17,
8.11.4.2.12,
8.10.4.1.2(1),
8.6.8
10.13
Handrail systems and safety
902.4,
6.2.3.4,
devices
902.13,
905.1,
905.4,
905.3J,
(NR 8.6.9.1),
1008.2m,
1008. 2q,
1009.2c
6.2.3.13,
6.2.6.1,
6.2.6.4,
6.2.6.3.10,
8.6.9.1,
8.11.4.2.13,
8.11.4.2.18,
8.10.4.1.1(c)
10.14
Code data plate
808,
908,
1200.6
8.9,
8.7.1.8
10.15
Response to smoke detectors
905.7
6.2.6.7
10.16
Inspection control
6.2.6.2.2
10.17
Earthquake inspection and
tests (seismic risk Zone 2
or greater)
8.5.2,
8.5.3
188
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX B
ACCEPTANCE CHECKLIST
(10)
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters' Service (A17.1-2000 and B44-00): Automatic Elevators
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA - not applicable.
ELEVATOR ID No.
ADDRESS:
INSPECTED BY: _
SIGNATURE:
BUILDING.
DATE:.
INSPECTOR I.D. No..
Item
Check
A17.1-2000
and B44-2000
Pass
Fail
NA
6.5.1
Emergency Signaling Devices
2.27.1
6,5.1.1
"ALARM" must sound and illuminate when pressed.
If rise is over 30 m (100 ft), second device is required.
2.27.1.1.1,
2.27.1.1.1(d)(2)
6.5.1.2
In-car emergency stop button (if present) must sound alarm.
2.27.1.1.1
6.5.1.3
If rise is more than 18 m (60 ft), check for two-way communication between cab and
point outside hoistway.
2.27.1.1.2
6.5.1.4
Ensure that audible alarms and communications are functional with loss of normal
power.
2.27.1.1.3
6.5.1.5
Check for means to communicate with machine room when required by requirement
2.26.1.5.10(c) of A17.1.
2.27.1.3
6.5.2
Phase 1 Key Switch and Instructions
2.27.3.1,
2.27.7,
2.27.8
6.5.2.1
Operating Instructions
2.27.7.1
6.5.2.2
Group 3 Security Keys
2.27.8
6.5.2.3
Labeled "FIRE RECALL" marked "RESET," "OFF," and "ON" in that order.
2.27.3.1.1(b),
2.27.3.1.1(a)
6.5.2.4
Provide at designated level for group.
2.27.3.1.1(a)
6.5.2.5
Located in the lobby, visible and readily accessible.
2.27.3.1.1(c)
6.5.2.6
The key cannot be removed in the "RESET" position. But it can be removed in the
other positions.
2.27.3.1.3
6.5.2.7
Second switch, if present, must be at central alarm and control facility labeled "FIRE
RECALL" only be two-position switch marked "OFF" and "ON" in that order.
2.27.3.1.2
6.5.3
Phase II In-Car Switch and Instruction
2.27.8,
2.27.3.3
6.5.3.1
Ensure that there is a key for each Phase 1, each Phase II, and each standby power
selection switch in the building.
2.27.8
6.5.3.2
The same key is used for Phase 1 and Phase 11 and standby power for all elevators in
the building.
2.27.8
6.5.3.3
Keys are available only to authorized emergency and firefighting personnel.
2.27.8
6.5.3.4
The key can only be removed in the "OFF" and "HOLD" positions.
2.27.3.3
6.5.3.5
The keys shall be Group 3 Security (see A17.1, requirement 8.1).
2.27.8
6.5.3.6
Labeled "FIRE OPERATION," marked "OFF," "HOLD," and "ON" in that order.
2.27.3.3
189
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters' Service (Al 7.1-2000 and B44-00): Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
Item
Check
A17.1-2000
and B44-2000
Pass
Fail
NA
6.5.4
Monthly Test
8.6.10.1
6.5.4.1
Monthly test log is completed.
6.5.5
Phase 1 Operation While Running
Place several floor calls in the car. While going up, have the person at the desig-
nated level place the Phase 1 switch in the "ON" position. Where a duplicate switch
is provided, verify that Phase 1 is initiated by placing the switch to the "ON" posi-
tion. Determine the following:
2.27.3
6.5.5(a)
The car stops and reverses without opening the doors.
2.27.3.1.6(b)
6.5.5(b)
The in-car stop switch or emergency stop switch is inoperative.
2.27.3.1.6(c)
6.5.5(c)
Call register lights and directional lanterns are extinguished and inoperative.
2.27.3.1.6(f)
6.5.5(d)
Position indicators where provided are inoperative, except in car, designated level,
and central control station.
2.27.3.1.6(f)
6.5.5(e)
The in-car door open button is rendered inoperative as soon as car moves away from
the landing.
2.27.3.1.6(0
6.5.5(0
Car call buttons and corridor call buttons are inoperative.
2.27.3.1.6(f)
6.5.5(g)
The car returns to the designated level and parks with power-operated doors open. If
there is more than one entrance at the designated landing, only the doors serving
the lobby with the fire recall switch open.
2.27.3.1.6(a)
6.5.5(h)
The visual and audible signals operate and stay on until car is at the designated
level.
2.27.3.1.6(h)
6.5.6
Phase 1 Operation With Doors Open
Place the Phase 1 switch to the "OFF" position and run the car to any floor. With
the doors open, have the Phase 1 switch turned to the "ON" position and check the
following:
2.27.3.1.6
6.5.6(a)
Door reopening devices sensitive to smoke or flame are inoperative immediately.
2.27.3.1.6(e)
6.5.6(b)
If door reopening devices are rendered inoperative, the closing speed is reduced so
that the kinetic energy is reduced to 2a/2 ft-lb (3.5 J).
2.27.3.1.6(e)
6.5.6(c)
The emergency stop switch or in-car stop switch is rendered inoperative as soon as
the car moves away from the landing.
2.27.3.1.6(c)
6.5.6(d)
The in-car door open button is rendered inoperative as soon as the car moves away
from the landing.
2.27.3.1.6(0
6.5.7
Emergency Stop Switch and/or In-Car Stop Switch and Doors Closing
Place the Phase 1 switch to the "OFF" position and run the car to any floor. Activate
the emergency stop switch or the in-car stop switch. With the doors open, have the
Phase 1 switch turned to the "ON" position. Return the emergency stop switch, or
in-car stop switch to the "RUN" position.
2.27.3.1.6
6.5.7.1
Verify that the automatic power-operated horizontal sliding doors close promptly, that
other types of doors can be closed and once closed the car moves to the desig-
nated level.
2.27.3.1.6(d)
6.5.8
Stop Switches and Door Buttons
While on Phase 1 verify that
2.27.3.1.6(c),
2.27.3.1.6(g)
6.5.8(a)
Stop switches other than those inside the car remain operative.
2.27.3.1.6(c)
6.5.8(b)
For vertical sliding door, the corridor door open and door close buttons remain opera-
tive.
2.27.3.1.6(g)
190
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters' Service (Al 7.1-2000 and B44-00): Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fall = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
Item
Check
A17.1-2000
and B44-2000
Pass
Fail
NA
6.5.9
Fire Alarm Initiating Device and Operation
2.27.3
6.5.9.1
Verify that there is a fire alarm initiating device in each elevator lobby, the elevator
machine room, and sprinklered hoistway. In jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC, verify
that there is a fire alarm initiating device in each elevator lobby, at the designated
level if not sprinklered throughout and in the machine room if sprinklered.
2.27.3.2.1,
2.27.3.2.2
6.5.9.2
With the car(s) on normal, have the input for main return activated and verify that the
elevator commences Phase 1 Operation and all cars return to the designated level.
2.27.3.2.3
6.5.9.3
To reset operation initiated from fire alarm system, the fire alarm signal must be
reset, then the Phase 1 switch must be cycled to "RESET" momentarily then to
"OFF."
2.27.3.1.6(k)
6.5.9.4
With the car(s) on normal, have the input for alternate level return activated and ver-
ify that the elevator commences Phase 1 Operation and all cars return to the alter-
nate level.
2.27.3.2.4
6.5.9.5
Car(s) should only respond to the first fire alarm input.
2.27.3.2.5
6.5.9.6
Activate the machine room fire alarm initiating device input and verify Phase 1 and all
cars return to the designated level.
2.27.3.2.3(b)
6.5.9.7
Activate the designated level machine room fire alarm initiating device and verify
Phase 1 and all cars return to the alternate floor.
2.27.3.2.3(b)
6.5.9.8
With the car(s) on normal, have the input for machine room return activated and ver-
ify the visual signal in the car illuminates intermittently.
2.27.2.4
6.5.9.9
In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC, where the fire alarm initiating device is
required in the hoistway, activate the input and verify all cars return to the desig-
nated landing, except that fire alarm initiating devices installed at or below the low-
est landing of recall shall cause the cars to return to the upper recall level.
2.27.3.2.3(c)
6.5.10
Fire Alarm Initiating Device and Phase 1 Switch
6.5.10.1
Activate the alternate landing return input and observe that the elevator returns to
the alternate landing.
2.27.3.2.3(b)
6.5.10.2
If a two-position key switch is provided, place it in the "ON" position and verify that
the elevator remains at the alternate landing.
2.27.3.1.2
6.5.10.3
Turn both the Phase 1 switch and the additional Phase 1 switch (when provided) to
the "ON" position and verify that the car returns to the designated level.
2.27.3.1.6(0
6.5.11
Phase II Key Switch and Sign
With Phase 1 activated and the car at the designated or alternate landing, place the
Phase II key switch in the "ON" position. Operate the car and check the following:
2.27.3.3.1
6.5.11(a)
The elevator can be operated only from the car buttons and will not respond to corri-
dor calls.
2.27.3.3.1(a)
6.5.11(b)
All corridor call buttons, door open and close buttons, and directional lanterns are
inoperative. All landing position indicators, except at the designated landing and
central alarm and control facility, are inoperative. Car position indicators are opera-
tive.
2.27.3.3.1(b)
6.5.11(c)
Power-operated doors can only be opened by continuous pressure on the door open
button and if released before the doors are in the normal "OPEN" position, the
door will close without delay.
2.27.3.3.1(d)
6.5.11(d)
Open power-operated doors can be closed only by continuous pressure means. If the
means is released before the door is fully closed, horizontal sliding doors will reopen
and vertical sliding doors will stop, or stop and reopen.
2.27.3.3.1(e)
6.5.11(e)
If two entrances can be opened and closed at the same landing, separate door open
and close buttons are provided for each entrance.
2.27.3.3.1(d)
6.5.11(f)
All door reopening devices are inoperative (except the door open button). Full-speed
closing is permitted.
2.27.3.3.1(g)
191
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
\ No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters' Service (Al 7.1-2000 and B44-00): Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
Item
Check
A17.1-2000
and B44-2000
Pass
Fail
NA
6.5.11(g)
"CALL CANCEL" button is labeled and when activated, will cancel all calls and cause
the car to stop at or before the next available landing.
2.27.3.3.1(h)
6.5.11(h)
Floor selection buttons are provided and functional for all landings without restric-
tions.
2.27.3.3.1(0
6.5.11(0
Moving car will stop at the next landing with a car call registered and remaining car
calls canceled.
2.27.3.3.1Q)
6.5.12
Phase II Switch in "HOLD" Position
2.27.3.3.2
6.5.12.1
Place the Phase II switch in the "HOLD" position and remove key. Verify that the car
remains at the landing and the door close button is inoperative.
2.27.3.3.2
6.5.12,2
Verify that the car call buttons are inoperative.
2.27.3.3.2
6.5.13
Phase II Switch in "OFF" Position and Doors Closing: Power-Operated Horizontally
and Vertically Sliding Doors
With the elevator away from the designated level, Phase 1 in effect, place the Phase
II switch in the "OFF" position and verify that:
2.27.3.3
6.5.13(a)
horizontally sliding doors close automatically and continuous pressure on the door
close button will close vertically sliding doors
2.27.3.3.3
6.5.13(b)
car reverts to a Phase 1 type return on completion of door closing and reverts to
Phase I when the doors open at the designated landing
2.27.3.3.3(a)
6.5.13(c)
Door reopening device inoperative and full-speed closing permitted.
2.27.3.3.3(a)
6.5.13(d)
Door open button is operative.
2.27.3.3.3(a)
6.5.13(e)
If Phase II switch turned to "ON" or "HOLD" before door is closed, it will reopen.
2.27.3.3.3(a)
6.5.13(0
With car stopped and doors closed, or in motion and Phase II switch is turned to
"OFF" position, car returns to designated level in conformance with 2.27.3.1.6(a)
through (m), but remains on Phase II.
2.27.3.3.4
6.5.14
Removal From Phase II
Verify that the elevator can be removed from Phase II only when:
2.27.3.3
6.5.14(a)
Phase II switch is in "OFF" position at designated level and doors open
2.27.3.3.5
6.5.14(b)
Phase II switch is in "OFP' position and Phase I is in effect
2.27.3.3.4
6.5.15
Power Disconnects Open
2.27.3.4
6.5.15.1
With the elevator on Phase 1, have the mainline power interrupted and restored to ver-
ify that the elevator will remain on Phase 1.
2.27.3.4
6.5.15.2
With the elevator on Phase II, have the mainline power interrupted and restored to
verify that the elevator will remain on Phase II.
2.27.3.4
6.5.15.3
The car is allowed to move to a position in the hoistway to reestablish position once
movement is attempted.
2.27.3.4
6.5.16
Top-of-Car Operating Device
While operating from top of car, have the Phase 1 key switch placed in the "ON"
position and verify that:
2.27.6
6.5.16(a)
an audible signal sounds
6.5.16(b)
the elevator remains under control of the top-of-car operating device
6.5.16(c)
the elevator remains under the control of the hoistway access switch
6.5.17
Automatic Elevators With Attendant Operation
With elevator on attendant operation, stop at a floor and have the Phase 1 switch
placed in the "ON" position. Verify that:
2.27.5.2
6.5.17(a)
the audible and visual signal operates and that a parked elevator will automatically
go on Phase 1 after a time delay between 10 sec and 30 sec.
2.27.5.2(a)
6.5.17(b)
a moving car on attendant operation will commence Phase 1 operation without delay.
2.27.5.2(b)
192
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
A5AAE A17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters' Service (Al 7.1-2000 and B44-00): Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not appli
cable.
Item
Check
A17. 1-2000
and B44-2000
Pass
Fail
NA
6.5.17(c)
if car is on hospital emergency service, it will remain on that operation until removed
by the operator and at that point revert to Phase 1 operation. The audible and
visual signals in the car shall be activated immediately and remain activated until
the car is returned to the designated landing. With the car on firefighter emergency
operation, the elevator cannot be placed on hospital service.
2.27.5.3
6.5.18
Elevators on Phase 1 and Phase II Prevention of Operation and Disabling Not Allowed
With elevator on normal operation, verify the following:
2.27.3.1.6.1(1),
2.27.3.1.6.1(m),
2.27.3.3.6
6.5.18(a)
Activate means other than those specified in this Code to remove elevators from nor-
mal operation, and verify that Phase 1 emergency recall operation is not prevented.
2.27.3.1.6(1)
6.5.18(b)
Activate input for devices that measure loads and verify that the elevator is not pre-
vented from operating at or below the capacity that is required.
2.27.3.1.6(m)
6.5.18(c)
Verify that an accidental ground or short circuit in equipment on landing side will not
disable Phase II operation.
2.27.3.3.6
193
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters* Service (A17.1-2002 and B44-02);
Automatic Elevators
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
ELEVATOR ID No.
ADDRESS:
INSPECTED BY: _
SIGNATURE:
BUILDING.
DATE:.
INSPECTOR I.D. No. .
Item
Check
A17.1-2002 and
B44-02
Pass
Fail
NA
Acceptance Test Checklist
NOTE: The acceptance checklist is more detailed than the periodic inspection
checklist will be. It is expected that the periodic inspection will be to confirm
the operation has been maintained in working order.
The purpose and intention of the checklist is to provide a focus for inspectors
when completing acceptance testing of elevators equipped with Firefighters'
Emergency Operation.
Emergency Signaling Devices
2.27.1
1
Help button in car station panel or adjacent to it.
2.27.1.1.3(b)
2
Help button must have tactile (raised) phone symbol on or adjacent to it. Identifica-
tion of the button with the word help is optional.
2.26.12.4
3
The Help button is no higher than 48 in. (1 220 mm) from floor.
2.27.1.1.3 (a)
4
Help button or visual indication on the same panel illuminates when communica-
tion is established and extinguishes when communication is terminated.
2.27.1.1.3 (c)
5
On freight elevators, audible signal must sound when emergency stop is pressed
(2.27.1.2). If travel is over 100 ft (30 m), one audible device on each car
individually and one at designated landing.
2.27.1.2(d)(l)(2)
6
If travel is more than 60 ft (18 m), check for two-way communication between the
cars and a point readily accesible to authorized and emergency personnel.
2.27.1.1.4(a)(b)
8
If site is not staffed 24 hr, call is automatically directed within 30 sec to a location
staffed by authorized personnel.
Automated answering systems are not acceptable.
2.27.1.1.2 /
2.27.1.1.3(h)
9
Authorized personnel who answer call can identify location and elevator number.
2.27.1.1.3(d)
10
Call can only be terminated by authorized personnel outside the elevator.
2.27.1.1.3(f)
Keys and Key Switches
[2.27.3 / 2.27.8]
1
Ensure there is a key for each Phase 1, Phase 11, and standby power selection
switch in the building.
2.27.8
2
The same key is used for Phase 1, Phase II, and standby power for all elevators in
the building.
2.27.8
3
Keys are available only to authorized emergency and firefighting personnel.
2.27.8
4
The keys shall be Group 3 security (see 8.1).
2.27.8
5
The standby power selection switch shall be in view of all elevator entrances (see
2.27.2.4.3 for alternate option).
2.27.2.4.3
6
Verify all fire recall switches have visual indicator.
2.27.3.1.5
Phase 1 Key Switch And Instructions
[2.27.3.1 /
2.27.7 / 2.27.8]
1
Operating instructions with or adjacent to recall switch, only wording identified in
2.27.7.1 is acceptable.
2.27.7.1
2
Labelled "FIRE RECALL," marked "RESET," "OFF," and "ON" in that order.
2.27.3.1.1(b)
3
Provided at designated level for group.
2.27.3.1.1(a)
194
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters' Service (A17.1-2002 and B44-02):
Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
Item
Check
A17.1-2002 and
B44-02
Pass
Fail
NA
4
Located in the lobby, visible, and readily accessible.
2.27.3.1.1(c)
5
The key cannot be removed in the "RESET" position, but can be removed in the
other positions.
2.27.3.1.3
6
Second switch, if present, must be at building fire control station labeled "FIRE
RECALL," only be two-position switch marked "OFF" and "ON" in that order.
2.27.3.1.2
7
A visual Indicator is provided at the fire recall switches.
8
In jurisdictions enforcing nbcc: min. (2 in.) 50 mm fire hat on "FIREFIGHTER'S ELE-
VATOR" on or adjacent to entrance frame at designated landing.
2.27.7.4
Phase 1 Operation While Running
Place several floor calls in the car. While going up, have the person at the desig-
nated level place the Phase I switch in the "ON" position. Where a duplicate
switch is provided, verify that Phase 1 is initiated by placing the switch to the
"ON" position.
Determine the following:
2.27.3
1
The car stops and reverses without opening the doors.
2.27.3.1.6(b)
2
The in-car stop switch or emergency stop switch is inoperative.
2.27.3.1.6(c)
3
Call register lights and directional lanterns are extinguished and inoperative.
2.27.3.1.6(f)
4
Position indicators, where provided, are inoperative except in car, designated level,
and building fire control station.
2.27.3.1.6(f)
5
The in-car door open button is rendered inoperative as soon as car moves away
from the landing.
2.27.3.1.6(0
6
Car call buttons are inoperative.
2.27.3.1.6(f)
7
The car returns to the designated level and parks with power operated doors open.
2.27.3.1.6(a)
8
The visual and audible signals operate and stay on until car is at the designated
level.
2.27.3.1.6(h)
Phase 1 Operation With Doors Open
Place the Phase 1 switch to the "OFF" position and run the car to any floor. With
the doors open, have the Phase i switch turned to the "ON" position and check
the following:
2.27.3.1.6
1
Door reopening devices sensitive to smoke or flame are inoperative immediately.
2.27.3.1.6(e)
2
If door reopening devices are rendered inoperative, the closing speed is reduced
so that the kinetic energy, is reduced to 7x/2 ft-lb (3.5 j).
(To verify closing time, refer to data plate required by 2.13.4.2.4.)
2.27.3.1.6(e)
3
The emergency stop switch or in-car stop switch is rendered inoperative as soon
as the car moves away from the landing.
2.27.3.1.6(c)
A
The in-car door open button is rendered inoperative as soon as the car moves
away from the landing.
2.27.3.1.6(0
Emergency Stop Switch and/or In Car Stop Switch And Doors Closing
Place the Phase 1 switch to the "OFF" position and run the car to any floor. Acti-
vate the emergency stop switch or the in-car stop switch. With the doors open,
have the Phase 1 switch turned to the "ON" position. Return the emergency stop
switch, or in-car stop switch to the run position.
2.27.3.1.6
1
Verify that the doors close promptly and the car moves to the designated level
only after the emergency stop switch or in-car stop switch have been returned to
the run position.
2.27.3.1.6(d)
Stop Switches And Door Buttons
While on Phase I, verify the following:
2.27.3.1.6(c) /
2.27.3.1.6(g)
195
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters* Service (Al 7.1-2002 and B44-02):
Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
Item
Check
A17.1-2002 and
B44-02
Pass
Fail
NA
1
That stop switches other than those inside the car remain operative.
2.27.3.1.6(c)
2
For vertical sliding door, the corridor door open and door close buttons remain
operative.
2.27.3.1.6(g)
Fire Alarm Initiating Device and Operation
[2.27.3]
1
Verify that there is a fire alarm initiating device in each elevator lobby, the elevator
machine room and sprinklered hoistway.
Jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC: verify that there is a fire alarm initiating device in
each elevator lobby at the designated level if not sprinklered throughout and in
the machine room if, sprinklered.
2.27.3.2.1 /
2.27.3.2.2
2
With the car(s) on normal, have the input for main return activated and verify that
the elevator commences Phase 1 operation and al! cars return to the designated
level.
2.27.3.2.3(a)
3
To reset operation initiated from fire alarm system, the fire alarm signal must be
reset, then the Phase 1 switch must be cycled to "RESET" momentarily, then to
"OFF."
2.27.3. 1.6(k)
4
With the car(s) on normal, have the input for alternate level return activated, and
verify that the elevator commences Phase 1 operation and all cars return to the
alternate level.
2.27.3.2.4
5
Car(s) should only respond to the first fire alarm input.
2.27.3.2.5
6
Activate the machine room fire alarm initiating device input and verify Phase 1 and
all cars return to the designated level or alternate, as appropriate — unless the
machine room is at the designated level and if so, cars go to alternate level.
2.27.3.2.3(b)
7
With the car(s) on normal, have the input for machine room return activated and
verify the visual signal in the car illuminates intermittently.
2.27,2.4
8
In jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC where the faid is required in the hoistway,
activate the input and verify all cars return to the designated landing, except
that faids installed at or below the lowest landing of recall shall cause the cars
to return to the upper recall level.
2.27.3.2.3(c)
Alternate Recall (If Applicable)
With the car at the alternate level, on Phase 1 emergency recall operation and the
doors open.
2.27.3.2.4
1
If a two-position key switch is provided, place it in the "ON" position and verify
that the elevator remains at the alternate landing.
2.27.3.1.2
2
Turn both the Phase 1 switch and the additional Phase 1 switch (when provided) to
the "ON" position and verify that the car returns to the designated level.
2.27.3.1.6 (j)
Monthly Test (for jurisdictions not enforcing the NBCC)
8.6.10.1
Monthly test log is completed.
Phase 11 Key Switch And Instructions
2.27.8/2.27.3.3
196
■<M>d J
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters* Service (Al 7.1 -2002 and B44-02):
Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
Item
Check
A17.1-2002 and
B44-02
Pass
Fail
NA
1
FIREFIGHTERS' OPERATION
£X —
To operate car Insert fire key and turn to "ON'*
Press desired floor button
To cancel Press "CALL CANCEL" button
floor selection
To dose power- Press and hold "DOOR CLOSE" button
operated door
To open power- Press and hold "DOOR OPEN" button
operated door
To hold car With doors open, turn key to "HOLD"
at floor
To automatically send With doors open, turn key to "OFF"
car to recall floor
2
Labeled "FIRE OPERATION," marked "OFF," "HOLD," and "ON" in that order.
2.27.3.3
3
The key can only be removed in the "OFP' and "HOLD" positions.
2.27.3.3
Phase II Operation
With Phase 1 activated and the car at the designated or alternate landing, place
the Phase 11 key switch in the "ON" position. Operate the car and check the
following:
2.27.3.3.1
1
The elevator can be operated only from the car buttons and will not respond to
corridor calls.
2.27.3.3.1(a)
2
All corridor call buttons, door open and close buttons, and directional lanterns are
inoperative.
Car position indicators are operative, landing position indicators inoperative except
at designated landing and fire control station.
2.27.3.3.1(b), (g)
3
Open doors can be closed only by continuous pressure means. If the means is
released before the door is fully closed, horizontal sliding doors will reopen and
vertical sliding doors will stop, or stop and re-open.
2.27.3.3.1(e)
4
The door can only be opened by continuous pressure on the door open button and
if released before the doors are in the normal open position, the door will close
without delay.
2.27.3.3.1(d)
5
If two entrances can be opened and closed at the same landing, separate door
open and close buttons are provided for each entrance.
2.27.3.3.1(d)
6
All door reopening devices are inoperative — (except the DOB):
full speed closing is permitted.
2.27.3.3.1(g)
7
Call cancel button is labeled and when activated, will cancel all calls and cause
the car to stop at or before the next available landing.
2.27.3.3.1(h)
8
Floor selection buttons are provided and functional for all landings without
restrictions.
2.27.3.3.1(0
197
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters* Service (A17.1-2002 and B44-02):
Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
Item
Check
A17. 1-2002 and
B44-02
Pass
Fail
NA
9
Moving car will stop at the next landing with a car call registered and remaining
car calls canceled.
2.27.3.3.1(j)
Phase II Switch In "HOLD" Position
2.27.3.3.2
1
With the doors fully open, place the Phase It switch in the "HOLD" position and
remove key. Verify that the car remains at the landing and the door close button
is inoperative.
2.27.3.3.2
2
Verify that the car call buttons are inoperative.
2.27.3.3.2
Phase II Switch In "OFP* Position And Doors Closing
Horizontal Sliding Doors
With the elevator away from the designated level, Phase 1 in effect, place the
Phase II switch in the "OFF" position and verify following:
2.27.3.3
1
Doors close automatically.
2.27.3.3.3(a)
2
Car reverts to a Phase 1 type return on completion of door closing and reverts to
Phase 1 when the doors open at the designated landing.
2.27.3.3.4
3
Door reopening device inoperative and full speed closing permitted.
2.27.3.3.3(a)
4
Door open button operative.
2.27.3.3.3(a)
5
If Phase II switch turned to "ON" or "HOLD" before door is closed, it will reopen.
2.27.3.3.3(a)
6
With car stopped and doors closed, or in motion and Phase II Switch is turned to
"OFF" position, car returns to designated level in conformance with 2.27.3.1.6(a)
through (m), but remains on Phase II.
2.27.3.3.4
Removal From Phase II
Verify that the elevator can be removed from Phase II only when
2.27.3.3
1
Phase II switch in "OFF" position at designated level and doors open.
2.27.3.3.5
2
Phase II switch in "OFF" position and phase 1 in effect.
2.27.3.3.4
Power Disconnects Open
2.27.3.4
1
With the elevator on Phase 1, have the mainline power interrupted and restored to
verify that the elevator will remain on Phase 1.
2.27.3.4
2
With the elevator on Phase II, have the mainline power interrupted and restored to
verify that the elevator will remain on Phase II.
2.27.3.4
3
The car is allowed to move to a position in the hoistway to re-establish position.
2.27.3.4
Inspection and Hoistway Access Operation
While operating from top of car, have the Phase 1 key switch placed in the "ON"
position and verify the following:
2.27.6
1
An audible signal sounds.
2
The elevator remains under control of the car top, in-car, and machine room inspec-
tion operating device.
3
That the elevator remains under the control of the hoistway access switch.
Automatic Elevators With Attendant Operation
With elevator on attendant operation, stop at a floor and have the Phase 1 switch
placed in the on position. Verify the following:
2,27.5.2
1
The audible and visual signal operates and that a parked elevator will automati-
cally go on Phase 1 after a time delay between 10 sec and 30 sec.
2.27.5.2(a)
2
A moving car on attendant operation will commence Phase 1 operation without
delay.
2.27.5.2(b)
198
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters' Service (A17.1-2002 and B44-02):
Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
Item
Check
A17.1-2002 and
B44-02
Pass
Fail
NA
3
If car is on hospital emergency service, it will remain on that operation until
removed by the operator and at that point, revert to Phase 1 operation. The audi-
ble and visual signals in the car shall be activated immediately and remain acti-
vated until the car is returned to the designated landing.
2.27.5.3
Elevators on Phases 1 and II Prevention of Operation and Disabling Not Allowed
With elevator on normal operation, verify the following:
2.27.3.1.6.1(1)
and (m)/
2.27.3.3.6
1
Activate, means other than those specified in this code, to remove elevators from
normal operation (card key access, etc.), and verify that Phase 1 emergency
recall operation is not prevented and all floors served by the elevator are
accessable during Phase II operation.
2.27.3.1.6. (1)
2
Activate input for devices that measure loads and verify that the elevator is not
prevented from operating at or below the capacity that is required.
2.27.3.1.6 (m)
3
Verify that an accidental ground or short circuit in equipment on landing side will
not disable Phase II operation.
2.27.3.3.6
Hydraulic Elevators
3.27.1
1
Where the car(s) is responding to low oil protection, plunger follower guide protec-
tion or auxiliary power lowering and Phase 1 activated, verify the car descends to
the designated recall level. If the car is incapable of reaching the recall level,
then it descends to an available landing, opens doors, and recloses within 15
sec. And the door open button remains operative.
3.27.1
2
While on phase 1 recall operation, verify that when low oil protection, plunger fol-
lower guide protection, or auxiliary power lowering is activated with the car
above the recall level, the car will return to the recall level and where the car is
below the recall level, it descends to an available landing, opens doors, and
recloses within 15 sec and the door open button remains operative.
3.27.2
3
With the car(s) on Phase 11 operation, verify that when low oil protection, plunger
follower guide protection or auxiliary power lowering is activated, travelling
car(s) stops, cancels all calls, and the visual signal in the car illuminates inter-
mittently and the car can only answer calls to landings below its location.
3.27.4
199
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters' Service (Al 7. 1-2004 and B44-04):
Automatic Elevators
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
ELEVATOR ID No.
ADDRESS:
INSPECTED BY: _
SIGNATURE:
BUILDING.
DATE:.
INSPECTOR I.D. No._
Item
Check
A17.1-20O4 and
B44-04
Pass
Fail
NA
Acceptance Test Checklist
NOTE: The acceptance checklist is more detailed than the "periodic inspection"
checklist will be. It is expected that the periodic inspection will be to confirm
the operation has been maintained in working order.
The purpose and intention of the checklist is to provide a focus for inspectors
when completing acceptance testing of elevators equipped with Firefighters'
Emergency Operation.
Emergency Signaling Devices
[2.27.1]
1
Help button in car station panel or adjacent to it.
2.27.1.1.3(b)
2
Help button must have tactile (raised) phone symbol on or adjacent to it. Identifica-
tion of the button with the word help is optional.
2.26.12.4
3
The help button is no higher than 48 in. (1 220 mm) from floor.
2.27.1.1.3 (a)
4
Help button or visual indication on the same panel illuminates when communica-
tion is established and extinguishes when communication is terminated.
2.27.1.1.3 (c)
5
If site is not staffed 24 hr, call is automatically directed within 30 sec to a location
staffed by authorized personnel.
Automated answering systems are not acceptable.
2.27.1.1.2 /
2.27.1.1.3(h)
6
Authorized personnel who answer call can identify location and elevator number.
2.27.1.1.3(d)
7
Call can only be terminated by authorized personnel outside the elevator.
2. 27.1.1.3. (f)
8
Ensure audible alarms (where provided) and communications are functional with
loss of normal power.
2.27.1.1.5
9
On freight elevators, audible signal must sound when emergency stop is pressed
(2.27.1.2). If rise travel is over 100 ft (30 m), one audible device on each car
individually and one at designated landing.
2.27,1.2(d)(l)(2)
10
Where travel is 60 ft (18 m) or more, two-way communication means from within
the building to each individual car.
2.27.1.1.4
11
Where travel is 60 ft (18 m) or more, this communication means overrides any
other communication to outside of building.
2.27.1.1.4(a)
12
Where travel is 60 ft (18 m) or more, communication can only be disconnected
from outside the car within the building.
2.27.1.1.4(b)
13
Where travel is 60 ft (18 m) or more, visual indicator illuminates when communica-
tion is established and extinguishes when call is terminated.
2.27.1.1.4(c)
14
Where travel is 60 ft (18 m) or more, permanently posted and protected operating
instructions are at communication station outside the car (minimum letter height
of .125 in. (3 mm).
2.27.1.1.4(d)
Keys and Key Switches
2.27.8
1
Ensure there is a key for each Phase 1, Phase II, and standby power selection
switch in the building in view of all elevator entrances (see 2.27.2.4.3 for alter-
nate option).
2.27.8
2
The same key is used for Phase 1 and Phase II (firefighters' operation panel in car
if it does not open automatically) and standby power for all elevators in the
building.
2.27.8
200
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters* Service (Al 7.1 -2004 and B44-04):
Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
Item
Check
A17.1-2004 and
B44-04
Pass
Fail
NA
3
Keys are available only to authorized emergency and firefighting personnel.
2.27.8
4
The keys shall be Group 3 security (see section 8.1).
2.27.8
5
Verify all fire recall switches have visual indicator.
2.27.3.1.5
Phase 1 Key Switch and Instructions
[2.27.3.1 /
2.27.7 / 2.27.8]
1
Operating instructions with or adjacent to recall switch, only wording identified in
2.27.7.1 is acceptable.
2
Labelled "FIRE RECALL," marked "RESET," "OFF," and "ON" in that order.
2.27.3.1.1(b)
3
Provided at designated level for group.
2.27.3.1.1(a)
4 2tbir_X
5
Located in the lobby, visible, and readily accessible.
The key cannot be removed in the "RESET" position, but can be removed in the
other positions.
2.27.3.1.1(c)
2.27.3.1.3
6
Second switch, if present, must be at the building fire control station, labeled
"FIRE RECALL" only be two-position switch marked "OFF," and "ON" in that order.
2.27.3.1.2
7
In jurisdictions enforcing NBCC: min. 2 in. (50 mm) fire hat on "FIREFIGHTER'S ELE-
VATOR" on or adjacent to entrance frame at designated landing.
2.27.7.4
Phase 1 Operation While Running
Place several floor calls in the car. While going up, have the person at the desig-
nated level place the Phase 1 switch in the "ON" position. Where an additional
switch is provided, verify that Phase 1 is initiated by placing the switch to the
"ON" position.
Determine the following:
2.27.3
1
The car stops and reverses without opening the doors.
2.27.3.1.6(b)
2
The in-car stop switch or emergency stop switch is inoperative.
2.27.3.1.6(c)
3
Call register lights and directional lanterns are extinguished and inoperative.
2.27.3.1.6(0
4
Position indicators, where provided, are inoperative except in car, designated level,
and building fire control station.
2.27.3.1.6(0
5
The in-car door open button is rendered inoperative as soon as car moves away
from the landing.
2.27.3.1.6(0
6
Car call buttons are inoperative.
2.27.3.1.6(0
7
The car returns to the designated level and parks with power operated doors open.
2.27.3.1.6(a)
8
The visual and audible signals operate. Audible signal stays on for at least 5 sec
after doors close and visual signal stays on until car is returned to automatic
operation.
2.27.3.1.6(h)
9
In-car FEO panel cover opens automatically when at designated level (if automatic
unlocking is provided).
2.27.3.3.7
Phase 1 Operation With Doors Open
Place the Phase 1 switch to the "OFF" position and run the car to any floor. With
the doors open, have the Phase 1 switch turned to the "ON" position and check
the following:
2.27.3.1.6
1
Door reopening devices sensitive to smoke or flame are inoperative immediately.
2.27.3.1.6(e)
2
If door reopening devices are rendered inoperative, the closing speed is reduced
so that the kinetic energy is reduced to l}/2 ft-lb (3.5 J).
(To verify closing time, refer to data plate required by 2.13.4.2,4.)
2.27.3.1.6(e)
3
The emergency stop switch or in-car stop switch is rendered inoperative as soon
as the car moves away from the landing.
2.27.3.1.6(c)
201
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters' Service (Al 7.1-2004 and B44-04):
Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
Item
Check
A17.1-2004 and
B44-04
Pass
Fail
NA
4
The in-car door open button is rendered inoperative as soon as the car moves
away from the landing.
2.27.3.1.6(0
Emergency Stop Switch and/or In-Car Stop Switch And Doors
Closing
Place the Phase 1 switch to the "OFF" position and run the car to any floor. Acti-
vate the emergency stop switch or the in-car stop switch. With the doors open,
have the Phase 1 switch turned to the "ON" position. Return the emergency stop
switch or in-car stop switch to the "RUN" position.
2.27.3.1.6(d)
1
Verify that the doors close promptly and the car moves to the designated level.
2.27.3.1.6(d)
Stop Switches and Door Buttons
While on Phase 1, verify the following:
2.27.3.1.6(c) /
2.27.3.3.3.1(m) /
2.27.3.1.6(g)
1
That stop switches other than those inside the car, as well as the stop switch in
the firefighters' operation panel remain operative.
2.27.3.1.6(c)
2.27.3.3.1(m)
2
For vertical sliding door, the corridor door open and door close buttons remain
operative.
2.27.3.1.6(g)
Fire Alarm Initiating Device and Operation
[2.27.3]
1
Verify that there is a fire alarm initiating device in each elevator lobby, the elevator
machine room, and sprinklered hoistway.
Jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC: verify that there is a fire alarm initiating device in
each elevator lobby, at the designated level if not sprinklered throughout, and in
the machine room if sprinklered.
2.27.3.2.1 /
2.27.3.2.2
2
With the car(s) on normal, have the input for designated level recall activated, and
verify that the elevator commences Phase i operation and all cars return to the
designated level.
2.27.3.2,3
3
To reset operation initiated from fire alarm system, the fire alarm signal must be
reset, then the Phase 1 switch must be cycled to "RESET" momentarily, then to
"OFF".
2.27.3. 1.6(k)
4
With the car(s) on normal, have the input for alternate level recall activated and
verify that the elevator commences Phase 1 operation and all cars return to the
alternate level.
2.27.3.2.4
5
Car(s) should only respond to the first fire alarm input.
2.27.3.2.5
6
Activate the machine room fire alarm initiating device input and verify Phase 1 and
all cars return to the designated level — unless the machine room is at the desig-
nated level and, if so, cars go to alternate level.
2.27.3.2.3(b)
7
With the car(s) on normal, have the input for machine room or hoistway return acti-
vated, and verify that both the visual signals in the car illuminate intermittently.
2.27.2.4
8
In jurisdictions not enforcing the nbcc where the FAID is required in the hoistway,
activate the input and verify all cars return to the designated landing, except
that FAIDs installed at or below the lowest landing of recall shall cause the cars
to return to the upper recall level.
2.27.3.2.3(c)
Alternate Recall Level (If Applicable)
With the car at the alternate level, on Phase 1 emergency recall operation and the
doors open.
1
If a two-position key switch is provided, place it in the "ON" position and verify
that the elevator remains at the alternate landing.
2.27.3.1.2
202
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASMEA17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters' Service (A17.1-2004 and B44-04):
Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
Item
Check
A17.1-2004 and
B44-04
Pass
Fail
NA
2
Turn both the Phase 1 switch and the additional Phase 1 switch (when provided) to
the "ON" position and verify that the car returns to the designated level.
2.27.3.1.6(0
Phase II In-Car Switch and Instruction
2.27.8 / 2.27.3.3
1
Check that instructions are posted adjacent to switch or operating panel as below.
FIREFIGHTERS' OPERATION
\ j \ When flashing, exit elevator
o- — ^
To operate car Insert fire key and turn to "ON'*
Press desired floor button
To cancel Press "CALL CANCEL" button
floor selection
To close power- Press and hold "DOOR CLOSE" button
operated door
To open power- Press and hold «DOOK OPEN" button
operated door
To hold car With doors open, turn key to "HOLD"
at floor
To automatically send With doors open, turn key to "OFF"
car to recall floor
203
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. rL^ .
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ^
ASMEA17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters' Service (A17.1-2004 and B44-04):
Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
Item
Check
A17.1-2004 and
B44-04
Pass
Fait
NA
FEO panel
(a) The panel is located at the top of the operating station with buttons and
switches not more than 71 in. (1 800 mm) above the floor.
(b) Panel cover is marked firefighter's operation in red letters at least 0.4 in.
(10 mm) high.
(c) Panel key (where panel doesn't unlock automatically) is same as Phases I
and II keys.
(d) Panel cannot be closed with the key in the Phase II operation switch.
(e) Panel is self-locking.
(f) The following switches and buttons are provided and laid out as below:
Additional
visual signal
Call
cancel
button
Door
Stop
switch
open
button
Door
open
button
(rear!
when
required
The key can only be removed in the "OFF" and "HOLD" positions.
2.27.33
Labeled "FIRE OPERATION," marked "OFF," "HOLD," and "ON" in that order.
2.27.3.3
Additional visual signal provide behind the panel.
2.27.3.3.8
Monthly Test (For Jurisdictions Not Enforcing The NBCC)
8.6.10.1
Monthly test log is completed.
Phase II Operation
With Phase I activated and the car at the designated or alternate landing, place
the Phase II key switch in the "ON" position. Operate the car and check the
following:
2.27.3.3.1
The elevator can be operated only from the car buttons and will not respond to cor-
ridor calls.
2.27.3.3.1(a)
All corridor call buttons, door open and close buttons, and directional lanterns are
inoperative.
Car position indicators are operative, landing position indicators inoperative at des-
ignated landing and fire control station.
2.27.3.3.1(b), (g)
204
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters' Service (A17.1-2004 and B44-04):
Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
Item
Check
A17.1-2004 and
B44-04
Pass
Fail
NA
3
Open doors can be closed only by continuous pressure means. If the means is
released before the door is fully closed, horizontal sliding doors will reopen and
vertical sliding doors will stop, or stop and re-open.
2.27.3.3.1(e)
4
The door can only be opened by continuous pressure on the door open button and
if released before the doors are in the normal open position, the door will close
without delay.
2.27.3.3.1(d)
5
If two entrances can be opened and closed at the same landing, separate door
open and close buttons are provided for each entrance.
2.27.3.3.1(d)
6
Atl door reopening devices are inoperative — (except the DOB):
Full speed closing is permitted.
2.27.3.3.1(g)
7
Call cancel button is labeled and when activated, will cancel all calls and cause
the car to stop at or before the next available landing.
2.27.3.3.1(h)
8
Floor selection buttons are provided and functional for all landings without restric-
tions.
2.27.3.3.1(0
9
Moving car will stop at the next landing with a car call registered and remaining
car calls canceled.
2.27.3.3.1(0
10
Operation of the stop switch in the firefighters' operation panel cancels all calls
and stops the car. The car does not move except for leveling operation, until a
car call is registered.
Phase II Switch in "HOLD" Position
2.27.3.3.2
1
Place the phase II switch in the "HOLD" position and remove key. Verify that the
car remains at the landing and the door close button is inoperative.
2.27.3.3.2
2
Verify that the car call buttons are inoperative.
2.27.3.3.2
Phase II Switch In "OFF" Position and Doors Closing
Horizontal Sliding Doors
With the elevator away from the designated level, Phase 1 in effect, place the
Phase II switch in the "OFF" position and verify the following:
2.27.3.3
1
Doors close automatically.
2.27.3.3.3(a)
2
Car reverts to a Phase 1 type return on completion of door closing and reverts to
Phase 1 when the doors open at the designated landing.
2.27.3.3.4
3
Door reopening device inoperative and full speed closing permitted.
2.27.3.3.3(a)
4
Door open button operative.
2.27.3.3.3(a)
5
If Phase II switch turned to "ON" or "HOLD" before door is closed, it will reopen.
2.27.3.3.3(a)
6
With car stopped and doors closed, or in motion and Phase II switch is turned to
"OFF" position, car returns to designated level in conformance with 2.27.3.1.6(a)
through (m), but remains on Phase II.
2.27.3.3.4
Removal From Phase II
Verify that the elevator can be removed from Phase II only when
2.27.3.3
1
Phase II switch in "OFF" position at designated level and doors open.
2.27.3.3.5
205
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. &
v No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. vS
ASME A17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters' Service (Al 7.1-2004 and B44-04):
Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
Item
Check
A17.1-2004 and
B44-04
Pass
Fail
NA
2
Phase II switch in "OFF" position and Phase 1 in effect.
2.27.3.3.4
Power Disconnects Open
2.27.3.4
1
With the elevator on Phase 1, have the mainline power interrupted and restored to
verify that the elevator will remain on Phase 1.
2.27.3.4
2
With the elevator on Phase 11, have the mainline power interrupted and restored to
verify that the elevator will remain on Phase II.
2.27.3.4
3
The car is allowed to move to a position in the hoistway to re-establish position.
2.27.3.4
Inspection and Hoistway Access Operation
While operating from top of car, have the Phase I key switch placed in the "ON"
position and verify the following:
2.27.6
1
An audible signal sounds.
2
The elevator remains under control of car top, in-car and machine room inspection
operating device.
3
That the elevator remains under the control of the hoistway access switch.
Automatic Elevators With Attendant Operation
With elevator on attendant operation, stop at a floor and have the Phase 1 switch
placed in the "ON" position. Verify the following:
2.27.5.2
1
The audible and visual signal operates and that a parked elevator will automati-
cally go on Phase 1 after a time delay between 10 sec and 30 sec.
2.27.5.2
2
A moving car on attendant operation will commence Phase 1 operation without
delay.
2.27.5.2(b)
3
If car is on hospital emergency service, it will remain on that operation until
removed by the operator and at that point revert to Phase 1 operation. The audi-
ble and visual signals in the car shall be activated immediately and remain acti-
vated until the car is returned to the designated landing.
2.27.5.3
Elevators on Phases 1 and II Prevention of Operation and Disabling Not Allowed
With elevator on normal operation, verify the following:
2.27.3.1.6.1(1),
2.27.3.1. 6.1(m),
2.27.3.3.6
1
Activate means other than those specified in this code to remove elevators from
normal operation (card key access, etc.), and verify that Phase 1 emergency
recall operation is not prevented and all floors served by the elevator are acces-
sible during Phase II operation.
2.27.3.1.6(1)
2
Activate input for devices that measure loads and verify that the elevator is not
prevented from operating at or below the capacity that is required.
2.27.3.1.6 (m)
3
Verify that an accidental ground or short circuit in equipment on landing side will
not disable Phase II operation.
2.27.3.3.6
Hydraulic Elevators
206
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
Acceptance Checklist for Firefighters* Service (Al 7.1 -2004 and B44-04):
Automatic Elevators (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Pass = meets requirement; Fail = does not meet requirement; NA = not applicable.
Item
Check
A17.1-2004 and
B44-04
Pass
Fail
NA
1
Where the car(s) is responding to low oil protection, plunger follower guide protec-
tion, or auxiliary power towering and Phase 1 activated, verify the car descends
to the designated level. If the car is incapable of reaching the recall level, then
it descends to an available landing, opens doors, and recloses within 15 sec
and the door open button remains operative.
3.27.1
2
While on Phase 1 recall operation, verify that when tow oil protection, plunger fol-
lower guide protection, or auxiliary power lowering is activated with the car
above the recall level, the car will return to the recall level and where the car is
below the recall level, it descends to an available landing, opens doors, and
recloses within 15 sec and the door open button remains operative.
3.27.2
3
With the car(s) on Phase 11 operation, verify that when low oil protection, plunger
follower guide protection, or auxiliary power lowering is activated, travelling
car(s) stops, cancels all calls, and the visual signal in the car illuminates inter-
mittently and the car can only answer to landings below its location.
3.27.4
207
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX C
GUIDELINES FOR B44.1/A17.5-2004
C-l GENERAL
This document is intended to present a list of examples
of elevator and escalator electrical equipment that
require listing, approval or certification. Primarily, this
list gives examples of what equipment is subject to
B44.1/A17.5 certification. As a secondary function, this
list also gives examples of what equipment may be
listed/certified and labeled /marked to another accept-
able standard, and what equipment is not within the
scope with respect to B44.1/A17.5.
When determining which electrical equipment and
devices must be labeled /marked for compliance with
B44.1/A17.5, keep in mind the following guidelines:
(a) This list is to serve as a guideline and is not com-
plete, as it may not include devices that are new technol-
ogy or those that have not been envisioned.
(b) All electrical equipment and devices must be
listed /certified to at least one safety standard. For exam-
ple, if a limit switch is marked /labeled as complying
with another standard, then it does not have to (but
may) be labeled/marked as complying with
B44.1/A17.5.
(c) Devices that are rated for connection to extra-low
voltage Class 2 supply circuits are not within the scope
of B44.1/A1 7.5. Note that exclusion is dependant on the
power supply being both extra-low voltage (not more
than 30V rms or 42.4V peak) and Class 2 (as defined by
the applicable electrical code). One method of verifying
this exclusion is to check the certification documenta-
tion. Another method is to verify that the transformer
or power supply is marked as being a Class 2 device.
Note that if the transformer or power supply is located
inside the device enclosure (e.g., the COP), then it would
not qualify under the exception.
(d) An individual component or device is not required
to be labeled /marked if it was certified as part of an
assembly that is labeled /marked. Taken to its extreme,
this could mean that all the various control electrical
devices could be included under one certification for
the entire control system. In this case, the certification
documentation is the best method for determining
which devices must be labeled /marked.
(e) The marking/ labeling only signifies that the
device complies with B44.1/A17.5. The A17.1/B44 Code
may have additional requirements that the device has
to meet (e.g., switches covered by 2.26.2 of A17.1/B44
are required to have contacts that are positively opened
mechanically and whose opening is not "solely depen-
dent on springs"), which are not covered by the
marking/ labeling.
(f) Devices that are not totally enclosed (e.g., inter-
locks) are not required to be listed for compliance with
B44.1/A17.5.
(g) A device can be labeled /marked by different certi-
fying organizations. It is the responsibility of the AHJ
to determine the acceptability of any certifying organiza-
tion (s).
NOTE: Controllers, i.e., motion/motor/operation, are defined in
A17.1/B44, Section 1.3, as follows:
(a) controller, motion: an operative unit comprising a device or
group of devices for actuating the moving member.
(b) controller, motor: the operative units of a motion control sys-
tem comprising the starter devices and power conversion equip-
ment required to drive an electric motor.
(c) controller, operation: an operative unit comprising a device or
group of devices for actuating the motion control.
C-2 GUIDELINES FOR ELECTRICAL DEVICES
REQUIRING LABELING/MARKING
(a) Motor Controllers and Motion Controllers
(1) Starter/Control Panel for Door Motor or Machine
Motor. This equipment may contain SCRs, IGBTs, transis-
tors, diodes, transformers, contactors, resistors, capaci-
tors, fuses, wiring, bus bars, printed circuit boards, etc.
These components are certified to the requirements of
pertinent standards or are specifically evaluated for the
intended use and are not required to be labeled /marked
as long as the assembly is certified and labeled /marked.
(b) Operation Controllers
(1) control systems (i.e., car controller) (May con-
tain motion controllers and /or motor controllers.)
(2) supervisory and management systems (i.e.,
group controller, dispatcher)
(c) Operating Devices
(1) car operating panel (COP)
(2) hall button /firefighter's service panel /box
(3) top-of-car inspection station
(4) hoistway access switch assembly (including
enclosure)
(d) Other Electrical Equipment
NOTE: All equipment in this list must be certified to B44.1 / A17.5
if not listed /certified and labeled /marked to another product
safety standard.
(1) hoistway limit switches
(2) pit stop switches
208
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME A17.2-2010
(3) buffer switches
(4) brakes
(5) seismic switches
(6) electrical protective devices (as defined in 2.26.2
of the A17.1/B44 Code)
(7) encoders
(8) position reference subsystems (tape reader, etc.)
(9) position switches
(10) hall lantern /position indicator panel/box
(11) firefighter's operation switches (Phase I and
Phase II)
(12) standby power selection switches
(e) Devices and Subsystems Not Within the Scope of
B44.1/A17.5
NOTE: This equipment and /or devices are not within the scope
of B44.1/A17.5 and are required to be listed/certified and
labeled/marked to another product safety standard.
(1) motors
(2) motor-generator sets
(3) valves (CSA C22.2 No. 139 and TIL D18A if
rated for use in hydraulic elevator controllers)
(4) disconnects (CSA C22.2 No. 4 for Canada and
UL 98 for the US)
(5) all devices in Class 2 supply circuits. Note that
Class 2 circuits have requirements in addition to the low
voltage rating (30V rms or 42.4V peak) and require the
product to be so listed /certified and labeled /marked.
(6) receptacles (CSA C22.2 No. 42 for Canada and
UL 498 for the US)
(7) traveling cables and junction boxes
(8) auxiliary lighting (CSA C22.2 No. 141)
NOTE: Additional A17.1/B44 requirements apply for elevator
car emergency lighting)
(9) gate switches1
(10) hoistway or car door interlocks1
(11) combination hoistway door lock and contacts1
1 Door gate switches and interlocks: These require testing, certifi-
cation, and marking as defined in A17.1a-2002/B44-02 require-
ments 2.12.4, 2.11.14.1(b) (jurisdictions enforcing the NBCC), and
8.3.3, or Clause 11.5 of CAN/CSA B44-94 (Canadian jurisdic-
tions only).
209
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
210
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ISBN 978-0-7918-3312-4
9 7807911*833124
A15210
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11